# Rotomal — full site text > Rotomal designs, builds and runs AI-powered automations and integrations for growing companies: workflow bots, AI assistants, and document and reporting pipelines. # Automation and AI for the work your team still does by hand Rotomal is an AI automation studio for growing companies. We design, build and run the automations that replace manual work: workflow bots, AI assistants, integrations and MCP connectors, and document and reporting pipelines. Every project starts as a fixed-scope pilot with a price agreed up front, runs in your own accounts, and is handed over with full documentation. Book a free consultation: hello@rotomal.com ## Services We take a manual, repetitive process and turn it into something that runs quietly in the background. - **Workflow automation.** Connect the tools you already use so approvals, handoffs and follow-ups happen on their own — no copy-paste between tabs. - **AI assistants & agents.** Assistants that draft, classify, answer and route, trained on your own content and rules — with a human in the loop where it matters. - **Integrations, APIs & MCP.** Reliable connections between your CRM, billing, support and internal systems, and MCP connectors that let Claude or ChatGPT read them safely. - **Document & invoice automation.** Generate, validate and file documents and invoices automatically — consistent, compliant and hands-off. - **Data & reporting pipelines.** Pull data from everywhere into clean dashboards and scheduled reports your team can actually trust. - **Internal tools.** Small, sharp internal apps that replace fragile spreadsheets and the manual steps nobody wants to own. ## From manual to automatic, in four steps 1. **Discover.** A short call to map the manual work that costs you the most time and money. 2. **Design.** We scope a fixed, concrete pilot with clear success criteria and a price — no open-ended retainers. 3. **Build.** We build on your stack. Your data stays in your accounts and under your control throughout. 4. **Operate.** We run and maintain it, measure the time saved, and expand to the next workflow when you're ready. ## Tools we run Small, single-purpose products, each built around one job people still do by hand. Requesting a service is free and needs no card. ### Developer tools - [Launch Lock](https://rotomal.com/ai-app-security-audit/): A one-time security check for apps built with Lovable, Bolt, v0, Replit or Cursor, before real users and payments arrive. (From $29 one-time) - [Form Relay](https://rotomal.com/form-endpoint/): Form backend for AI-built and static sites: leads to WhatsApp, Slack, Sheets or a CRM. (From $5 per month) - [Rightleaf](https://rotomal.com/rtl-pdf/): HTML-to-PDF API that gets Hebrew and Arabic right, with verifiable certificates. (From $19 per month) ### E-commerce and SaaS add-ons - [Payout Ledger](https://rotomal.com/payout-sync/): Marketplace payouts, fees and VAT posted into lexoffice, sevDesk and DATEV, bank-exact. (From €19 per month) - [Ledger Snapshot](https://rotomal.com/xero-backup/): Daily backups of Xero organisations with change history and restore, for accountants. (From $9 per month) - [Invoice Tailor](https://rotomal.com/xero-invoice-designer/): Design Xero invoices, quotes and statements visually, with the fields Xero left out. (From $9 per month) ### Finance and back office - [Expected Docs](https://rotomal.com/tax-intake/): Last year's return becomes this year's document checklist; you chase only what's missing. (From $99 per season) - [Trust Reconciler](https://rotomal.com/trust-reconcile/): Three-way trust account reconciliation from the QuickBooks or Xero books you keep today. (From $39 per month) - [Payee Ledger](https://rotomal.com/vendor-1099/): W-9s collected early, vendor totals watched against $2,000, 1099s ready for IRIS. (From $99 per season) ### Compliance deadlines - [Letting Ledger](https://rotomal.com/landlord-mtd/): Turns letting-agent statements into Making Tax Digital quarterly updates, split by owner. (From £6 per month) - [Plain Filings](https://rotomal.com/micro-filing/): Bank CSV in, micro-company accounts and CT600 out, for tiny and dormant UK companies. (From £29 per company per year) ### E-invoicing - [Peppol Outbox](https://rotomal.com/peppol-plugin/): Send the invoices your WooCommerce or Shopify store already makes over the Peppol network. (From €0 per month) - [Invoice Bridge](https://rotomal.com/stripe-einvoice/): Compliant German and Polish e-invoices generated from your Stripe Billing invoices. (From €19 per month) ### Family organization - [Camp Alarm](https://rotomal.com/camp-registration-alerts/): Alerts the moment summer camp and activity registration opens, and when a waitlisted spot frees up, so you're first in line. (From $9 per season) - [Backpack Brief](https://rotomal.com/school-digest/): Every school email, app message and newsletter turned into one short weekly brief and dates on your family calendar. (From $3 per month) ### Family safety - [Just-in-Case Binder](https://rotomal.com/family-tech-binder/): One guided call sets up a parent's digital legacy contacts and a family binder of accounts, bills and doctors, without collecting passwords. (From $29 one-time) - [Scam Second Opinion](https://rotomal.com/scam-check/): Forward a suspicious text, email or call note and get a plain-English verdict in minutes, with the family told if it's risky. (From $0 per month) ### AI integrations - [MCP Bridge](https://rotomal.com/mcp-connector/): Your spreadsheet, database or internal tool connected to Claude and ChatGPT as a private MCP connector, set up once. (From $99 one-time) ### Billing and tax compliance - [Allocation Link](https://rotomal.com/allocation-connector/): Israeli allocation numbers on the invoices you issue from Odoo, Stripe, HubSpot or Xero. (From $29 per month) ### Brand protection - [Mark Lookout](https://rotomal.com/trademark-watch/): Alerts when a new trademark filing or marketplace listing looks confusingly like yours. (From $12 per mark per month) ### Church media - [Sermon Pack](https://rotomal.com/sermon-clips/): Sermon clips, captions and devotionals for Spanish, Portuguese and Korean churches. (From $19 per month) ### Community tools - [Member Radar](https://rotomal.com/skool-tools/): Churn alerts, win-back messages and a member CRM for paid Skool communities. (From $29 per month) ### Compliance and monitoring - [Page Evidence](https://rotomal.com/page-evidence/): Scheduled, hashed, timestamped captures of web pages, with AI summaries of what changed. (From $29 per month) ### Conformité facturation - [Facture Prête](https://rotomal.com/facture-electronique/): Votre entreprise prête pour la facture électronique en 48 h : plateforme agréée choisie, inscrite, testée. (From 19 € paiement unique) ### Driving school software - [Lesson Lane](https://rotomal.com/driving-school-scheduler/): Booking, pickup routing, hour logs and certificates for small driving schools, flat price. (From $39 per month) ### E-commerce compliance - [Storefront Rules](https://rotomal.com/eu-storefront-pack/): EU withdrawal button, legal-guarantee notice and green-claims scan for non-Shopify shops. (From €5 per month) ### E-commerce tools - [Price Witness](https://rotomal.com/map-monitor/): Competitor and reseller price tracking in Shopify, with timestamped screenshot proof. (From $29 per month) ### E-Rechnung und Steuern - [E-Rechnung Startklar](https://rotomal.com/e-rechnung-2027/): E-Rechnungen empfangen und ab 2027 ausstellen: Betroffenheit geprüft, Vorlage umgestellt, getestet. Einmalpreis ab 29 €. (From 29 € einmalig) ### Email security - [Reject Ready](https://rotomal.com/dmarc-enforce/): Fixed-price DMARC enforcement for MSPs: domains to p=reject in 60 days, then monitored. (From $450 one-time per domain) ### Faktury i KSeF - [Gotowi na KSeF](https://rotomal.com/ksef-certyfikat/): Certyfikat KSeF, uprawnienia dla księgowej i działające faktury przed 1 stycznia 2027 r., w jeden dzień. (From 79 zł jednorazowo) ### Family finances - [Bill Sweep](https://rotomal.com/subscription-cleanup/): We find every forgotten subscription and recurring charge on a parent's statements, and help cancel the ones nobody uses. (From $19 one-time) ### Field service tools - [Estimate Chaser](https://rotomal.com/estimate-chaser/): Chases open estimates and signs change orders for contractors on Jobber or Housecall Pro. (From $29 per month) ### File conversion and migration - [Pub Rescue](https://rotomal.com/pub-rescue/): Bulk-convert old Microsoft Publisher (.pub) files to PDF and editable Word, now that Publisher is retired. (From $9 one-time) ### Freight and logistics - [Carrier Lens](https://rotomal.com/carrier-check/): FMCSA red flags on carriers and brokers, shown on your load board and in your inbox. (From $39 per month) ### Healthcare practice administration - [License Ledger](https://rotomal.com/license-tracker/): One dashboard for clinicians' state licenses, compact privileges, renewals and CE credits. (From $9 per month) ### Healthcare practice tools - [Practice Plans](https://rotomal.com/practice-plans/): In-house membership plans for dental, vet and med-spa practices, at a flat monthly fee. (From $49 per month) ### IT and Microsoft 365 - [SMTP Switch](https://rotomal.com/smtp-switch/): Move scanners, copiers and old apps off Microsoft 365 Basic SMTP AUTH before it is switched off. (From $99 one-time) ### Lead generation for trades - [Permit Weekly](https://rotomal.com/permit-leads/): Weekly new-permit leads for your trade and metro, with addresses and contractor of record. (From $49 per month) ### Legal practice tools - [Bates Bench](https://rotomal.com/litigation-pdf/): Bates numbering, exhibit stamps, audited redaction and binders for small law firms. (From $12 per user per month) ### Marketing tools - [Plain QR](https://rotomal.com/plain-qr/): Editable QR codes for menus and print, from $2 a month, with no setup and no jargon. (From $2 per month, billed $24 yearly) ### Rental business software - [Bounce Desk](https://rotomal.com/party-rental-booking/): Booking, delivery-zone pricing, waivers and crew routing for small party-rental companies. (From $29 per month) ### Retail analytics - [Shelf Signal](https://rotomal.com/shelf-signal/): See what shoppers looked for in your stores and couldn't buy, from a tag on the shelf. (From $49 per month) ### Roofing tools - [Roof Tally](https://rotomal.com/roof-report/): Good-enough roof reports and retail estimates from aerial data, from $5 per report. (From $8 per report) ### Tax compliance - [Verifactu Kit](https://rotomal.com/verifactu-ready/): Verifactu-compliant invoices and receipts for Spanish online shops and Stripe billing. (From €9 per month) ### Trucking compliance - [Driver Binder](https://rotomal.com/fleet-driver-files/): DQ files, Clearinghouse tracking and expiry alerts for trucking fleets of 2–25 trucks. (From $49 per month) ### Vending and amusement route tools - [Meter Snap](https://rotomal.com/vending-route/): Snap the meter; get commission statements, routes and prize inventory for 1–30 machines. (From $9 per month) ### Ηλεκτρονική τιμολόγηση - [Τιμολόγια σε Τάξη](https://rotomal.com/ilektroniki-timologisi/): Η επιχείρησή σας έτοιμη για την υποχρεωτική ηλεκτρονική τιμολόγηση πριν τελειώσει η μεταβατική περίοδος, σε 48 ώρες. (From 29 € εφάπαξ) ### כלים לחשבות ומיסוי - [בקרת הקצאה](https://rotomal.com/allocation-check/): בדיקה מרוכזת של מספרי הקצאה בחשבוניות ספקים, למשרדי הנהלת חשבונות ורואי חשבון. (From ₪290 לחודש) ### נגישות ואתרים - [יומן נגישות](https://rotomal.com/accessibility-il/): סריקות מתוזמנות לפי ת״י 5568 ו-WCAG, דוחות עם חותמת זמן ותיק מענה למכתב התראה. (From ₪99 לחודש לאתר) ### ציות ורגולציה - [קלסר פרטיות](https://rotomal.com/privacy-kit-il/): אשף בעברית שמפיק את מסמכי החובה לפי תיקון 13 לחוק הגנת הפרטיות, במחיר קבוע ולפי תחום. (From ₪1,490 לשנה) ## A studio, not a software vendor - **Senior and hands-on.** You work directly with the people building your automation — not an account-management layer. - **Pragmatic about AI.** We use AI where it earns its place and plain, dependable automation everywhere else. - **You own it.** Everything runs in your own accounts and systems. Full handover, documentation, and no lock-in. ## FAQ ### What does Rotomal do? Rotomal is an AI automation studio. We build and run automations for repetitive work: workflow bots, AI assistants, integrations and MCP connectors, document and invoice automation, and reporting pipelines. We also run a set of small single-purpose products, each with its own page, pricing and FAQ on this site. ### How much does an automation project cost? Every project starts as a fixed-scope pilot. After a short discovery call we send a written scope with clear success criteria and a fixed price before any work starts. There are no open-ended retainers. Prices for our products are listed on each product page. ### Where does my data live? In your own accounts and systems. We build on your stack, hand over documentation, and nothing locks you in. The privacy policy explains how this website handles the details you type into a form. ### Is requesting a product free? Yes. Requesting a product takes no card. We confirm your request by email within one business day, and if you go ahead we email you a secure payment link from a payment provider. No card details are collected on this site. ### Can AI assistants read your product catalog? Yes. The catalog is open to AI agents through a read-only MCP server at https://rotomal.com/mcp, a JSON API described in https://rotomal.com/openapi.json, and a plain-text summary in https://rotomal.com/llms.txt. Every page also has a Markdown version. ### What is your refund policy? Monthly plans can be cancelled at any time and run to the end of the paid period. One-time services are paid after we confirm the scope by email, and are refunded in full if we cannot deliver what was agreed. ## Tell us what you keep doing by hand Send us one process that eats your week. We'll tell you honestly whether automation is worth it — and if it is, exactly what a first pilot would cost. Or email hello@rotomal.com --- Rotomal · https://rotomal.com/ · hello@rotomal.com # יומן נגישות: סריקות מתוזמנות לפי ת״י 5568 ו-WCAG, דוחות עם חותמת זמן ותיק מענה למכתב התראה. > יומן נגישות סורק את האתר לפי ת״י 5568 והנחיות WCAG במועדים קבועים, שומר כל דוח עם חותמת זמן, מעדכן את הצהרת הנגישות ופותח כרטיסי תיקון למפתח. כשמגיע מכתב התראה, יש תיק מסודר שמראה מה נבדק, מה תוקן ומתי – במקום ווידג'ט שמסתיר את הבעיה. - Page: https://rotomal.com/accessibility-il/ - Category: נגישות ואתרים - Language: he - Billing: subscription - From: ₪99 לחודש לאתר - Request (free, no card): https://rotomal.com/accessibility-il/request/ - סריקה שבועית או יומית של כל עמודי האתר, עם השוואה לסריקה הקודמת – מה נוסף, מה תוקן, מה נשאר פתוח - כל דוח נשמר כ-PDF בעברית עם חותמת זמן וגיבוב (hash) של התוכן, ואי אפשר לשנותו בדיעבד - תיק מענה למכתב התראה: ציר זמן של הסריקות והתיקונים, הצהרת הנגישות בגרסתה באותו תאריך, ורשימת הממצאים הפתוחים ## תביעות נגישות הן עניין שבשגרה, וווידג'ט זול לא מספק את מה שהגנה צריכה תקנות הנגישות מחייבות אתרים של עסקים שנותנים שירות לציבור לעמוד בת״י 5568, המבוסס על הנחיות WCAG ברמה AA. בפועל, רוב העסקים הקטנים התקינו תוסף נגישות (ווידג'ט) ושכחו מהנושא – עד שמגיע מכתב התראה או כתב תביעה. התביעות מגיעות בזרם קבוע. בפסק דין מחוזי מ-2024 בית המשפט התייחס לתובעים סדרתיים שמגישים מאות תביעות נגישות בשנה. כשזה קורה, השאלה אינה ״יש לכם ווידג'ט?״ אלא ״מה עשיתם, מתי, ואיך אתם מוכיחים זאת?״. ווידג'ט ב-₪299 לשנה לא מייצר תיעוד כזה, ולעיתים גם לא מתקן את הבעיות שבקוד. סוכנות שמנהלת עשרות אתרים צריכה דרך לראות את כולם במסך אחד, לדעת מה נפתח אחרי כל עדכון תוכן, ולהגיש ללקוח דוח שהוא יכול להעביר לעורך הדין שלו. זה המוצר. - בפסק דין מחוזי מ-2024 נדונה תופעת התובעים הסדרתיים שמגישים מאות תביעות נגישות בשנה. (source: https://arnontl.com/he/news/תביעות-ייצוגיות-נגישות-אתרים/) - תמחור הווידג'טים מעגן את השוק נמוך: Enable מוצע ב-₪299 לשנה. (source: https://enable.co.il/) ## איך זה עובד 1. **מוסיפים אתר.** מזינים כתובת, בוחרים תדירות סריקה (שבועית או יומית) ומאמתים בעלות על הדומיין. הסורק ממפה את כל העמודים הציבוריים, כולל עמודי מוצר, ומריץ סריקה ראשונה בתוך שעה. 2. **סריקה ודוח.** הבדיקות האוטומטיות רצות על כל עמוד – טקסט חלופי, ניגודיות, תוויות טפסים, מבנה כותרות, ניווט מקלדת ועוד – וממופות לסעיפי ת״י 5568 ו-WCAG. הדוח יוצא בעברית, עם חותמת זמן, ונשמר ביומן. 3. **תיקון ומעקב.** כל ממצא הופך לכרטיס תיקון עם מיקום בקוד, צילום מסך והסבר. אפשר להקצות למפתח או לסוכנות, לייצא ל-Jira או Trello, או לטפל במערכת. הסריקה הבאה מסמנת מה נסגר. 4. **הצהרה ותיק מענה.** הצהרת הנגישות באתר מתעדכנת מהנתונים: מה נבדק, מה ידוע כפתוח ומה לוח הזמנים לתיקון. אם מגיע מכתב התראה, מורידים תיק מענה אחד עם כל ההיסטוריה. ## Features - **סריקות מתוזמנות של כל האתר.** זחלן ממפה את כל העמודים הציבוריים ובודק כל אחד מהם. שבועי בתוכנית הבסיסית, יומי בתוכניות הגבוהות; אפשר גם להריץ ידנית אחרי עדכון באתר. - **מיפוי לת״י 5568 ול-WCAG.** כל ממצא מסומן לפי קריטריון ההצלחה ורמת החומרה, בעברית, עם הסבר למה זה משנה למשתמש ואיך לתקן. - **דוחות עם חותמת זמן.** כל סריקה נשמרת כ-PDF בעברית וכ-JSON, עם חותמת זמן וגיבוב תוכן. היומן מראה את המגמה לאורך חודשים ושנים. - **הצהרת נגישות שמתעדכנת מהנתונים.** עמוד הצהרה בעברית שמוטמע באתר ומעודכן מהסריקה האחרונה. כולל שדות לפרטי רכז הנגישות, דרכי פנייה ותאריך הבדיקה האחרונה. - **תיק מענה למכתב התראה.** קובץ אחד עם ציר הזמן של כל הסריקות והתיקונים, גרסת ההצהרה הרלוונטית לתאריך המכתב וסטטוס הממצאים. מוכן למסירה לעורך הדין שלכם. - **כרטיסי תיקון למפתחים.** ממצאים הופכים לכרטיסים עם מיקום הרכיב, קטע הקוד, צילום מסך והנחיית תיקון. ייצוא ל-Jira, Trello או CSV. - **לוח ניהול לסוכנויות.** כל אתרי הלקוחות במסך אחד: ציון, ממצאים פתוחים, סריקה אחרונה. דוחות תחת מותג הסוכנות ומשתמש ללקוח לקריאה בלבד. - **התראות על רגרסיה.** אם עדכון תוכן או תוסף פתח ממצאים חדשים, מתקבלת התראה במייל או בוואטסאפ עם ההבדל מהסריקה הקודמת. ## Who it's for - **חנויות אונליין.** עמודי מוצר שמתעדכנים כל יום, תמונות בלי טקסט חלופי וטפסי תשלום. מקבלים סריקה יומית של עמודי המוצר, התראה על רגרסיה ודוח להנהלה. - **עסקים קטנים ובינוניים עם אתר שירות.** אתר תדמית או קביעת תורים שנבנה לפני שנים. מקבלים תמונת מצב ברורה, הצהרת נגישות מעודכנת ותיק מסודר במקרה של מכתב. - **סוכנויות דיגיטל ובוני אתרים.** מנהלים עשרות אתרים בוורדפרס, Wix או Shopify. מקבלים לוח מרוכז, דוחות תחת המותג שלהם ודרך להציע ללקוחות שירות נגישות מתועד כחלק מהריטיינר. ## Works with וורדפרס, Wix, Shopify ואתרים מותאמים (סריקה חיצונית, ללא התקנה), Jira, Trello, CSV ו-JSON, PDF בעברית, דוא״ל ווואטסאפ (התראות), קטע הטמעה להצהרת נגישות, axe-core (מנוע הבדיקות) ## Pricing המחיר לאתר (דומיין אחד), חודשי, ללא התחייבות. תמחור לקוחות מייסדים – נעול ל-12 חודשים. כל התוכניות כוללות סריקה של כל העמודים הציבוריים, דוחות עם חותמת זמן והצהרת נגישות מתעדכנת. המחירים לפני מע״מ. | Plan | Price | Includes | | --- | --- | --- | | אתר | ₪99 לחודש לאתר | סריקה שבועית של עד 300 עמודים; דוח PDF בעברית עם חותמת זמן; הצהרת נגישות מתעדכנת; כרטיסי תיקון עם ייצוא CSV; התראות רגרסיה במייל; היסטוריה של 24 חודשים | | עסק | ₪249 לחודש לאתר | סריקה יומית של עד 3,000 עמודים; כל מה שבתוכנית אתר; תיק מענה למכתב התראה; ייצוא ל-Jira ו-Trello; התראות בוואטסאפ; סריקה ידנית ללא הגבלה אחרי עדכונים; היסטוריה ללא הגבלת זמן | | סוכנות | ₪990 לחודש, עד 10 אתרים | עד 10 אתרים ברמת תוכנית עסק; לוח ניהול מרוכז; דוחות והצהרות תחת מותג הסוכנות; משתמש קריאה לכל לקוח; הדרכה לצוות הסוכנות; אתר נוסף: ₪89 לחודש | ## Compared with the alternatives - **תוסף נגישות (ווידג'ט).** Enable ב-₪299 לשנה, tabnav מ-₪60 לחודש, Accessible ב-₪79 לחודש, וספקים גלובליים כמו accessiBe, UserWay ו-EqualWeb. התוסף מוסיף שכבת התאמות למשתמש, אך אינו מתקן את הקוד ואינו מתעד בדיקות. אפשר להשתמש בו לצד יומן נגישות; הוא אינו תחליף לתיעוד. - **בדיקת נגישות ידנית של יועץ.** בדיקה אנושית מוסמכת היא הדרך היחידה לכסות את כל הסטנדרט, והיא נדרשת לאתרים מורכבים. היא עולה אלפי שקלים לבדיקה ומתארת רגע אחד בזמן. יומן נגישות משלים אותה בניטור שוטף בין בדיקות. - **לא לעשות כלום ולהגיב כשמגיע מכתב.** זו הגישה הנפוצה. העלות שלה היא טיפול משפטי במכתב בלי שום ראיה שעשיתם משהו קודם, ולחץ לתקן את כל האתר בשבועיים. הניטור השוטף עולה פחות מטיפול במכתב אחד כזה. ## Security and data - דוחות וצילומי מסך נשמרים בשרתים שבהפעלתנו, מוצפנים בתעבורה ובמנוחה. הסורק ניגש רק לעמודים ציבוריים ואינו מתחבר לחשבונות. - חותמת הזמן והגיבוב של כל דוח נוצרים ברגע הסריקה; אין אפשרות לערוך דוח בדיעבד, גם לא לנו. - הגישה לחשבון מוגבלת למשתמשים שהגדרתם; סוכנות רואה רק את אתרי לקוחותיה. - היסטוריית הדוחות נשמרת לפי התוכנית; עם סיום המנוי מקבלים ייצוא מלא, והנתונים נמחקים תוך 90 יום או מיידית לפי בקשה. ## השבוע הראשון מוסיפים אתר, מקבלים דוח ראשון בתוך שעה, ובסוף השבוע יש תיק ראשוני והצהרה מעודכנת. - יום 1: הקמת חשבון על ידינו, הוספת האתר הראשון ואימות דומיין. סריקה ראשונה ודוח בסיס. - ימים 2–3: שיחה של 30 דקות על הדוח: מה דורש תיקון בקוד, מה דורש בדיקה אנושית, ועבור מה ליצור כרטיסים. - ימים 4–6: המפתח או הסוכנות מתחילים לסגור כרטיסים; הסריקה הבאה מראה את ההתקדמות. - יום 7: הטמעת הצהרת הנגישות המתעדכנת והורדת תיק המענה הראשון – נקודת ההתחלה של התיעוד שלכם. ## FAQ ### האם סריקה אוטומטית מכסה את כל ת״י 5568? לא. בדיקות אוטומטיות מזהות חלק מהדרישות – טקסט חלופי חסר, ניגודיות, תוויות טפסים, מבנה כותרות, בעיות מקלדת מסוימות ועוד. דרישות שתלויות בשיקול דעת אנושי, כמו משמעות הטקסט החלופי או סדר הקריאה ההגיוני, דורשות בדיקה ידנית. הדוח שלנו אומר במפורש מה נבדק אוטומטית ומה דורש בדיקה אנושית, ולא מציג ״ציון 100״ כאילו האתר נגיש לחלוטין. ### האם זה מגן עליי מתביעה? אין כלי שמונע הגשת תביעה. מה שהתיעוד נותן הוא ראיות: שבדקתם באופן קבוע, שתיקנתם ממצאים, ושההצהרה באתר הייתה מעודכנת. יומן נגישות הוא תוכנה ותיעוד, לא ייעוץ משפטי; במקרה של מכתב התראה או תביעה יש לפנות לעורך דין, והתיק שלנו נבנה כדי לעזור לו. ### האם צריך להתקין משהו באתר? לא לצורך הסריקה – היא רצה מבחוץ כמו גולש. להצהרת הנגישות המתעדכנת מטמיעים קטע קוד קטן או מקשרים לעמוד שאנחנו מארחים. אין צורך בתוסף או בשינוי בקוד האתר. ### כבר יש לי ווידג'ט נגישות. למה גם זה? הווידג'ט נותן למשתמש כלים להתאמת התצוגה; הוא לא מתקן בעיות בקוד ולא מתעד. אפשר להשאיר אותו. יומן נגישות מוסיף את מה שחסר: בדיקה חוזרת, תיקון בקוד ותיק ראיות. ### מה קורה אחרי שמתגלים ממצאים – אתם מתקנים? אנחנו פותחים כרטיסי תיקון עם הנחיות מדויקות; את התיקון עושה המפתח או הסוכנות שלכם. אם אין לכם מפתח, נוכל להפנות לסוכנויות שעובדות איתנו; זה לא כלול במנוי. ### האם המערכת מתאימה לאתרי Wix ו-Shopify? כן, הסריקה חיצונית ואינה תלויה בפלטפורמה. חלק מהממצאים בפלטפורמות סגורות ניתנים לתיקון רק דרך הגדרות התבנית, והכרטיס מציין זאת במפורש. ### האם המוצר פועל כבר? כן, ללקוחות מייסדים. אתר חדש נסרק לראשונה בתוך שעה מהוספתו, וחשבון חדש מוקם על ידינו בתוך שני ימי עסקים. תמחור הלקוחות המייסדים נעול ל-12 חודשים. --- Rotomal · https://rotomal.com/accessibility-il/ · hello@rotomal.com # Launch Lock: A one-time security check for apps built with Lovable, Bolt, v0, Replit or Cursor, before real users and payments arrive. > AI builders ship working apps fast, and they often ship the database wide open: tables without Row Level Security, secret keys in the browser bundle, storage buckets anyone can list. Launch Lock checks your live app the way an attacker would, using only what a visitor can see, then gives you a ranked list of fixes written as SQL and prompts you can paste straight back into your builder. - Page: https://rotomal.com/ai-app-security-audit/ - Category: Developer tools - Language: en - Billing: one-time payment - From: $29 one-time - Request (free, no card): https://rotomal.com/ai-app-security-audit/request/ - Every table tested for anonymous read and write with your public key, plus storage buckets, edge functions and auth settings. - Fixes come as ready-to-run Row Level Security policies and builder prompts, ranked by what an attacker could actually reach. - One price per app, paid once. We re-test after you apply the fixes, at no extra charge. ## AI builders write the app; nobody checks who else can read the database Apps built with Lovable, Bolt, v0 and similar tools usually talk to Supabase or Firebase directly from the browser. That is safe only if the database rules are right: Row Level Security on every table, policies that limit each user to their own rows, and no secret keys shipped to the client. The builder produces a working app either way, so a missing policy looks exactly like a finished feature. This is not hypothetical. A researcher who scanned 1,645 apps from Lovable's public showcase found 170 of them, about one in ten, with tables that anyone could read or write using only the public key. The finding was recorded as CVE-2025-48757 with a critical score, and the lesson applies to every AI builder: the platform generates the code, and the owner is responsible for the data. Professional penetration tests are priced for funded companies, and freelance audits vary widely in scope. Launch Lock is a fixed-scope check for the specific mistakes AI-built apps make, at a price that fits a side project about to take its first payment, with fixes you can apply without hiring a developer. - CVE-2025-48757 records insufficient Row Level Security in Lovable-generated apps that let unauthenticated users read or write arbitrary tables; it is rated critical (CVSS 9.3) and disputed by Lovable. (source: https://cvemon.intruder.io/cves/CVE-2025-48757) - Scanning 1,645 apps from Lovable's showcase, a researcher found 170 apps and 303 endpoints readable or writable with only the public anon key. (source: https://www.superblocks.com/blog/lovable-vulnerabilities) - One agency lists a fixed one-time security audit for Lovable apps at $1,000, taking about 5 business days. (source: https://www.rapidevelopers.com/lovable-security-audit) ## How it works 1. **Tell us about the app.** Send the live URL, the builder and backend you used, and two test accounts. You confirm in writing that you own the app; we never test anything without that. 2. **We test it from the outside.** Using only what a browser receives, we try anonymous and cross-user reads and writes on every table, list storage buckets, call edge functions, and check auth, password and email settings. Write tests use throwaway rows we delete. 3. **You get ranked fixes.** A report within 2 business days: each finding with what an attacker could see, a severity, and the fix as SQL policies, rule changes or a prompt for your builder. 4. **We re-test.** Apply the fixes, tell us, and we run the same checks again and confirm each finding is closed. The final report is yours to show customers or investors. ## Features - **Row Level Security check.** Every Supabase table tested for anonymous and cross-user select, insert, update and delete, including tables the app does not use any more. Firebase apps get the same test against Firestore and Storage rules. - **Secrets in the bundle.** The JavaScript your users download is scanned for service-role keys, payment and AI provider keys, webhook secrets and admin endpoints that should never leave the server. - **Storage and file exposure.** Public buckets listed, signed-URL lifetimes checked, and uploaded files tested for access by other users, which is where invoices and ID photos usually leak. - **Auth and account settings.** Email confirmation, password rules, magic-link and OAuth redirect settings, rate limits on sign-up and login, and whether a user can change their own role. - **Edge functions and APIs.** Server functions called without a session or with another user's token, missing input checks on functions that write data, and CORS that allows any site. - **Fixes you can paste.** Ready-to-run RLS policies, Firebase rule snippets and plain-language prompts for Lovable, Bolt or Cursor, ordered by risk so the first hour of work closes the worst gaps. - **Re-test and certificate.** A second run after you fix things, and a dated summary stating what was tested and that no open critical findings remained. ## Who it's for - **Founders about to launch or take payments.** The app works and users are coming. Check that one user cannot read another user's data before it becomes a support ticket or a breach notice. - **Freelancers and agencies shipping client apps.** Add an independent check to every handover, so the client gets a report and you are not the one explaining a leak six months later. - **Non-technical teams with internal tools.** HR, operations or sales tools built in an afternoon that now hold customer or employee data, and nobody has reviewed who can see it. - **Anyone selling to bigger customers.** A buyer's security questionnaire asks how data is protected. A dated audit with closed findings is a much easier answer. ## Works with Supabase (Postgres RLS, Storage, Edge Functions, Auth), Firebase (Firestore and Storage rules, Auth), Lovable, Bolt, v0, Replit and Cursor projects, Next.js, React and Vite front ends, Stripe and Lemon Squeezy integrations, GitHub repository review on the Audit + Fix plan ## Pricing One-time price per app, paid once after we confirm the scope. No subscription. A re-test after your fixes is included in every plan. Founding customer pricing applies to early-access orders. | Plan | Price | Includes | | --- | --- | --- | | Quick check | $29 one-time | Anonymous read and write test on every table; Secrets scan of the browser bundle; Public storage bucket check; Ranked findings with copy-paste fixes; One re-test | | Full audit | $129 one-time | Everything in Quick check; Cross-user tests with your two test accounts; Edge functions, API and CORS checks; Auth, role and rate-limit review; Firebase rules if you use Firebase; Re-test and dated summary report | | Audit + fixes | $349 one-time | Everything in Full audit; We write and apply the RLS policies and rules; Pull requests on your GitHub repository; Key rotation guidance for anything exposed; Second re-test after deployment; 30-minute review call | ## Compared with the alternatives - **Your builder's own security scan.** Builders are adding automated checks; Lovable now offers built-in penetration tests. Run them. An independent check tests the live app across tables and functions the builder's scan may not cover, and gives you a report from someone other than the vendor. - **Freelance audits on Fiverr, Upwork or Contra.** Prices run from about $50 to several thousand dollars, and scope varies from a quick code skim to a full test. Good options exist; compare exactly what is tested before you pay. - **Security firms and penetration testers.** The right choice for regulated products or funded companies that need a formal pentest, typically priced in the thousands. More than most early AI-built apps need on day one. - **Checking it yourself.** Free: Supabase shows which tables have RLS disabled, and its security advisor flags common problems. Worth doing first. The harder part is testing what another logged-in user can reach, which is where Launch Lock spends most of its time. ## Security and data - We test only apps whose owners have authorized it in writing, within the agreed scope and time window. - Test accounts and any credentials you share are stored encrypted and deleted when the job closes. - Findings are shared only with the contacts you name; we never publish or disclose them to anyone else. - Copies of data we could read during testing are not kept: the report shows table and column names and row counts, never your users' records. - All job notes are deleted 30 days after delivery unless you ask us to keep them for your records. ## From request to a closed report We confirm scope and authorization within one business day and deliver findings within 2 business days after that. - Day 1: Request the service, send the URL and builder details, and sign the one-page authorization. - Day 2: Testing runs; any critical finding is reported to you the same day. - Day 3: Ranked report with fixes delivered; you or we apply them. - Day 4–7: Re-test, confirmation of closed findings and the dated summary report. ## FAQ ### Is my Lovable or Bolt app secure by default? Not necessarily. The builder generates working code, but whether each table has Row Level Security and correct policies depends on how the app was prompted and changed over time. CVE-2025-48757 showed about one in ten scanned showcase apps exposed data through missing RLS. ### Do you need access to our code or database? Not for the Quick check or Full audit: we test the live app with only what a browser receives, plus two test accounts you create. The Audit + fixes plan uses read access to your GitHub repository and a time-limited database role you can revoke. ### Will testing damage our data? No. Read tests do not change anything. Write tests insert clearly labelled throwaway rows and delete them, and we never run destructive or high-volume tests against production. We can test a staging copy if you prefer. ### Is this legal? Do you test other people's apps? We only test apps whose owner has asked us to, in writing, and only within the scope agreed. We do not scan apps we have not been hired to check. ### What happens if you find a key that was exposed? We tell you the same day, without waiting for the report, and explain how to rotate it in the provider's dashboard. Treat any exposed secret as compromised even after it is removed from the code. ### Is this a full penetration test or a compliance certification? No. It is a fixed-scope check of the issues AI-built apps most often have: database access rules, exposed secrets, storage, auth and server functions. It does not certify compliance with SOC 2, ISO 27001, HIPAA or GDPR. ### How quickly do we get results? Within 2 business days of receiving the URL and test accounts, and the same day for any critical finding. The re-test is usually done within one business day of your request. --- Rotomal · https://rotomal.com/ai-app-security-audit/ · hello@rotomal.com # בקרת הקצאה: בדיקה מרוכזת של מספרי הקצאה בחשבוניות ספקים, למשרדי הנהלת חשבונות ורואי חשבון. > בקרת הקצאה מקבלת חשבוניות ספקים בוואטסאפ או במייל, קוראת את הפרטים מהמסמך בעברית ובודקת כל מספר הקצאה מול נתוני האימות של רשות המסים. במקום לבדוק חשבונית אחר חשבונית באתר הממשלתי, המשרד מקבל טבלה אחת לכל לקוח ודוח חודשי של מע״מ בסיכון. - Page: https://rotomal.com/allocation-check/ - Category: כלים לחשבות ומיסוי - Language: he - Billing: subscription - From: ₪290 לחודש - Request (free, no card): https://rotomal.com/allocation-check/request/ - קליטת חשבוניות בוואטסאפ, במייל או בהעלאה ידנית – PDF, תמונה או סריקה, בכל תוכנת הנהלת חשבונות - כל תוצאת בדיקה נשמרת עם חותמת זמן, שיטת הבדיקה ותשובת המקור, כך שיש תיעוד לכל חשבונית - טיוטת בקשה אוטומטית בעברית לכל ספק שלא צירף מספר הקצאה, מוכנה לשליחה מהמשרד ## מאז יוני 2026, חשבונית של ₪5,000 בלי מספר הקצאה היא בעיה של מע״מ רף החובה למספר הקצאה ירד בהדרגה: ₪25,000 במאי 2024, ₪20,000 בינואר 2025, ₪10,000 בינואר 2026 ו-₪5,000 מ-1 ביוני 2026. המשמעות למשרד הנהלת חשבונות פשוטה: כמות החשבוניות שצריך לבדוק קפצה, בעוד שהכלי הרשמי של רשות המסים בודק חשבונית אחת בכל פעם, אחרי התחברות מזוהה. כשמספר ההקצאה חסר או שגוי, הלקוח – הקונה – מאבד את זכות קיזוז מע״מ התשומות על אותה חשבונית. בדוגמה שפורסמה, העלות המצטברת לעסק אחד הגיעה לכ-₪27,200 בשנה. המשרד הוא מי שמגלה את הבעיה, בדרך כלל בזמן הכנת הדיווח התקופתי, כשכבר קשה להשיג את הספק ולבקש חשבונית מתוקנת. בקרת הקצאה נבנתה בדיוק לנקודה הזו: לרכז את כל החשבוניות שהלקוחות שולחים, לבדוק אותן במרוכז ולסמן מה חסר – בזמן שעדיין אפשר לפנות לספק. התוצאה היא פחות שעות של בדיקה ידנית, ודוח ברור שאפשר להעביר ללקוח. - רף החובה למספר הקצאה ירד ל-₪10,000 בינואר 2026 ול-₪5,000 ב-1 ביוני 2026; ללא מספר תקין הקונה מאבד את קיזוז מע״מ התשומות, ובדוגמה אחת העלות מוערכת בכ-₪27,200 בשנה. (source: https://bakertilly.co.il/blog-invoices-2026.html) - לוח הזמנים המלא של הורדת הרף: ₪25,000 (מאי 2024), ₪20,000 (ינואר 2025), ₪10,000 (ינואר 2026), ₪5,000 (יוני 2026). (source: https://grow.business/israel-invoice/) - הבדיקה הרשמית מתבצעת חשבונית אחת בכל פעם, לאחר זיהוי. (source: https://www.greeninvoice.co.il/magazine/israel-invoice/) - שירות האימות של רשות המסים, ״אימות פרטי חשבונית הספק על סמך מספר הקצאה״, בודק חשבונית אחת בכל פעם לאחר התחברות. (source: https://www.gov.il/he/service/verify-vendor-invoice-information) ## איך זה עובד 1. **מגדירים לקוחות ותיבות קליטה.** המשרד פותח תיק לכל לקוח ומקבל מספר וואטסאפ וכתובת מייל ייעודיים לתיק. הלקוח (או המשרד) מעביר אליהם חשבוניות ספקים כרגיל. ההקמה נמשכת כ-20 דקות למשרד, ואנחנו עושים אותה יחד איתכם בשיחה. 2. **המערכת קוראת את החשבונית.** מודל ראייה ממוחשבת קורא את החשבונית בעברית: שם הספק, מספר עוסק, מספר חשבונית, תאריך, סכום ומספר הקצאה. שדה שלא נקרא בביטחון מסומן לבדיקה ידנית, לא מנוחש. הקריאה נמשכת שניות לכל מסמך. 3. **בדיקה מרוכזת מול רשות המסים.** כל חשבונית מעל הרף נבדקת מול נתוני האימות של רשות המסים. התוצאה – תקין, לא נמצא, אי-התאמה בפרטים או לא ניתן לבדוק – נשמרת עם חותמת זמן, שיטת הבדיקה ותשובת המקור. 4. **דוח ובקשות לספקים.** בסוף כל חודש, או לפי דרישה, יוצא דוח ״מע״מ בסיכון״ לכל לקוח, יחד עם טיוטות בקשה לספקים שלא צירפו מספר. הייצוא לחשבשבת, ריווחית או פריוריטי נעשה בלחיצה אחת. ## Features - **קליטה בוואטסאפ ובמייל.** לכל תיק לקוח תיבה ייעודית. תמונות, PDF וסריקות מתקבלים ומתויקים אוטומטית לתיק הנכון; קובץ לא קריא מוחזר לשולח עם בקשה לצילום חוזר. - **קריאת חשבוניות בעברית.** זיהוי שדות מתוך חשבוניות עבריות, כולל חשבוניות ידניות וסריקות באיכות ירודה. לכל שדה רמת ביטחון, ושדות עם ביטחון נמוך עולים לתור בדיקה ידנית במקום להיכנס לדוח. - **בדיקה מרוכזת של מספרי הקצאה.** בדיקה של מאות חשבוניות בריצה אחת, במקום חשבונית אחר חשבונית. התוצאות מוצגות בטבלה עם סינון לפי לקוח, ספק, חודש וסטטוס, וניתנות לייצוא. - **דוח ״מע״מ בסיכון״ לכל לקוח.** סיכום חודשי של סכום מע״מ התשומות שתלוי בחשבוניות ללא מספר תקין, מפורט לפי ספק. הדוח יוצא כ-PDF בעברית וכקובץ Excel, מוכן לשליחה ללקוח. - **טיוטות בקשה לספקים.** לכל חשבונית חסרה נוצרת הודעה בעברית לספק, עם פרטי החשבונית ובקשה למספר הקצאה או לחשבונית מתוקנת. שולחים מהוואטסאפ או מהמייל של המשרד, לא מאיתנו. - **ייצוא לחשבשבת, ריווחית ופריוריטי.** קובץ ייצוא בפורמט המתאים לכל תוכנה, הכולל את מספר ההקצאה שאומת. קיים גם ייצוא CSV כללי לכל תוכנה אחרת. - **תיעוד מלא לכל בדיקה.** לכל חשבונית נשמרים המסמך המקורי, הערכים שנקראו, זמן הבדיקה, שיטת הבדיקה ותשובת המקור. התיעוד זמין להורדה ומשמש כתיעוד לנאותות הבדיקה. - **סריקת רבעון אחורה.** בהקמה אפשר להעלות את חשבוניות הרבעון האחרון ולקבל תמונת מצב של מה שכבר דווח ללא מספר תקין – ולהחליט יחד עם הלקוח מה לעשות. ## Who it's for - **משרדי הנהלת חשבונות.** מנהלים עשרות תיקי לקוחות ומקבלים חשבוניות בכל צורה אפשרית. מקבלים תור בדיקה אחד לכל המשרד, דוח לכל לקוח ואפשרות לגלגל את העלות לתיק. - **משרדי רואי חשבון קטנים ובינוניים.** אחראים על הדיווחים התקופתיים ועל הייעוץ ללקוח. מקבלים תיעוד מסודר של כל בדיקה ודוח שאפשר לצרף לפגישת הסיכום עם הלקוח. - **חשבות ואנשי כספים בעסקים.** מקבלים חשבוניות מעשרות ספקים ורוצים לדעת לפני הדיווח מה חסר. עובדים עם תיק אחד או כמה חברות קשורות, בלי תלות במשרד החיצוני. - **עסקים עם היקף ספקים גדול.** קבלנים, יבואנים ורשתות קטנות שמקבלים עשרות חשבוניות בחודש בסכומים של ₪5,000 ומעלה. מקבלים התרעה על חשבונית ללא מספר לפני התשלום לספק. ## Works with WhatsApp (קליטת חשבוניות), דוא״ל (תיבת קליטה ייעודית לכל תיק), חשבשבת (ייצוא), ריווחית (ייצוא), פריוריטי (ייצוא), Excel ו-CSV, PDF, JPG ו-PNG (קלט), שירות האימות של רשות המסים ## Pricing המחירים למשרד, לפי מספר תיקי לקוח כלולים, חודשי וללא התחייבות שנתית. תמחור לקוחות מייסדים – נעול ל-12 חודשים מרגע ההקמה. כל התוכניות כוללות קליטה בוואטסאפ ובמייל, בדיקה מרוכזת ללא הגבלת חשבוניות, תיעוד מלא וייצוא. המחירים לפני מע״מ. | Plan | Price | Includes | | --- | --- | --- | | משרד קטן | ₪290 לחודש | עד 15 תיקי לקוח כלולים; תיק נוסף: ₪20 לחודש; קליטה בוואטסאפ ובמייל; בדיקה מרוכזת ללא הגבלת חשבוניות; דוח ״מע״מ בסיכון״ חודשי לכל לקוח; ייצוא לחשבשבת, ריווחית, פריוריטי ו-CSV | | משרד | ₪490 לחודש | עד 40 תיקי לקוח כלולים; תיק נוסף: ₪15 לחודש; כל מה שבתוכנית משרד קטן; טיוטות בקשה אוטומטיות לספקים; סריקת רבעון אחורה בהקמה; שני משתמשים למשרד ויומן פעולות; תמיכה בוואטסאפ בשעות העבודה | | משרד גדול | ₪790 לחודש | עד 100 תיקי לקוח כלולים; תיק נוסף: ₪15 לחודש; משתמשים ללא הגבלה והרשאות לפי תיק; דוח מרוכז לכל המשרד; ייצוא אוטומטי מתוזמן; הקמה מלווה והעברת תיקים מהמערכת הקיימת | ## Compared with the alternatives - **בדיקה ידנית באתר רשות המסים.** חינם, רשמי ומדויק, אבל חשבונית אחת בכל פעם, אחרי התחברות מזוהה. מתאים לעסק עם חשבוניות בודדות בחודש, לא למשרד עם עשרות תיקים ומאות חשבוניות. - **חשבשבת ותוכנות הנהלת חשבונות.** חשבשבת הוסיפה כפתור ״משיכת מספר הקצאה״ לחשבוניות שנקלטות בה. זה פתרון טוב כשכל הלקוחות עובדים באותה תוכנה. בקרת הקצאה נועדה למשרד שמקבל חשבוניות לפני הקליטה, מלקוחות שעובדים בתוכנות שונות. - **FinBot ו-Morning.** FinBot משווקת בדיקות אוטומטיות של מספרי הקצאה לרואי חשבון, ו-Morning (חשבונית ירוקה) מטפלת במספרי הקצאה בצד המוציא של החשבונית. אנחנו מתמקדים בצד הקולט: חשבוניות שמגיעות ללקוח ממאות ספקים שונים, בכל פורמט. ## Security and data - המסמכים והנתונים נשמרים בשרתים שבהפעלתנו, מוצפנים במנוחה (AES-256) ובתעבורה (TLS 1.2 ומעלה). - הגישה לתיקי לקוח מוגבלת למשתמשי המשרד שהוגדרו; גישה של הצוות שלנו לצורכי תמיכה נרשמת ביומן ומתבצעת רק באישור המשרד. - קריאת החשבוניות נעשית באמצעות מודלי בינה מלאכותית בתנאים עסקיים שאינם מאפשרים שימוש בנתונים לאימון המודלים. - מסמכים נשמרים כל עוד החשבון פעיל ו-90 יום לאחר סיומו, אלא אם ביקשתם אחרת; מחיקה מלאה של תיק או של כל החשבון מתבצעת תוך 14 יום מבקשה בכתב. - הודעות הוואטסאפ מתקבלות דרך ממשק עסקי רשמי; מספר הטלפון של השולח משמש רק לשיוך לתיק ולהשבת בקשה לצילום חוזר. ## השבוע הראשון ההקמה נעשית איתנו בשיחה אחת. בתוך שני ימי עסקים המשרד מקבל תיבות קליטה פעילות, ובסוף השבוע הראשון – דוח ראשון לכל תיק. - יום 1: שיחת הקמה של 30 דקות – הגדרת תיקי הלקוח, פורמט הייצוא ומספרי הוואטסאפ והמייל לכל תיק. - ימים 2–3: החשבון פעיל. מעלים את חשבוניות הרבעון האחרון לסריקה אחורה ובודקים יחד את איכות הקריאה. - ימים 4–5: הלקוחות הראשונים מתחילים לשלוח חשבוניות לתיבות; המשרד עובר על תור הבדיקה הידנית פעם ביום. - יום 7: דוח ״מע״מ בסיכון״ ראשון לכל תיק, ייצוא ראשון לתוכנת הנהלת החשבונות, ושיחת משוב קצרה על מה שצריך לשנות. ## FAQ ### האם זה מחליף את שיקול הדעת של רואה החשבון או מנהל החשבונות? לא. בקרת הקצאה היא תוכנה לריכוז, קריאה ובדיקה של חשבוניות. ההחלטה אם לקזז מע״מ, איך לטפל בחשבונית חסרה ומה לדווח נשארת אצל איש המקצוע. המערכת מסמנת ומתעדת – היא לא מייעצת. ### האם זה תחליף לייעוץ מס? לא. השירות הוא תוכנה לניהול רשומות ולבדיקה, לא ייעוץ מס או ייעוץ משפטי. לכל שאלה על קיזוז, דיווח או התנהלות מול ספק יש להתייעץ עם רואה החשבון או יועץ המס של העסק, ובמקרה הצורך עם רשות המסים. ### מה קורה אם המערכת מציגה מספר כתקין והוא בעצם לא? כל תוצאה נשמרת עם תשובת המקור וחותמת הזמן, כך שאפשר לראות בדיוק מה נבדק ומתי. סטטוס ״לא ניתן לבדוק״ או ״אי-התאמה״ מופיע בנפרד ואינו מתמזג עם ״תקין״. עם זאת, האחריות על הדיווח נשארת אצל העסק ואצל מי שמייצג אותו, ותנאי השירות מגבילים את אחריותנו לעלות השירות. אנחנו ממליצים לבדוק שוב ידנית מקרים חריגים בסכומים גבוהים. ### איך הבדיקה מתבצעת מול רשות המסים? הבדיקה נעשית מול נתוני האימות של רשות המסים, בכפוף לתנאי השימוש שלה בממשקים לתוכנות צד שלישי. בכל דוח מצוין באיזו שיטה נבדקה כל חשבונית. אם רשות המסים תשנה את התנאים, נעדכן את הלקוחות מראש ונשמור על התיעוד הקיים. ### חשבשבת, Morning ו-FinBot כבר מציעות משהו דומה. למה להוסיף כלי? נכון, והן פתרונות טובים כשכל התהליך נמצא בתוכנה אחת. היתרון שלנו הוא במשרד שמקבל חשבוניות מלקוחות רבים, בתוכנות שונות, לפני הקליטה – בוואטסאפ, במייל ובצילום. אם המשרד שלכם עובד כולו בתוכנה אחת שכבר בודקת מספרי הקצאה, ייתכן שאינכם צריכים אותנו, ונגיד זאת בשיחת ההקמה. ### מה עם חשבוניות ידניות או צילומים לא ברורים? המערכת מנסה לקרוא אותן ומציינת רמת ביטחון לכל שדה. חשבונית שלא נקראה בביטחון עולה לתור בדיקה ידנית ולא נכנסת לדוח כ״תקינה״ עד שמישהו במשרד אישר את הערכים. אפשר גם להחזיר לשולח בקשה לצילום חוזר בלחיצה. ### האם המוצר פועל כבר? כן, ללקוחות מייסדים. חשבונות חדשים מוקמים על ידינו בתוך שני ימי עסקים ממועד הבקשה, בשיחת הקמה קצרה. בתקופת הגישה המוקדמת המחיר נעול ל-12 חודשים, ואנחנו משחררים עדכונים לפי משוב המשרדים הפעילים. ### מה קורה כשהרף ישתנה שוב, או אם תחול חובה על כל חשבונית? הרף הוא הגדרה במערכת ולא קוד קבוע; שינוי ברף מוחל על כל התיקים ביום הכניסה לתוקף. אם תחול חובת מספר הקצאה על כל חשבונית, המערכת פשוט תבדוק את כולן – אין תוספת מחיר לפי מספר חשבוניות. --- Rotomal · https://rotomal.com/allocation-check/ · hello@rotomal.com # Allocation Link: Israeli allocation numbers on the invoices you issue from Odoo, Stripe, HubSpot or Xero. > Allocation Link sits between your billing system and a registered Israeli invoicing provider. When an invoice to an Israeli business crosses the allocation-number threshold, it requests the number, issues a Hebrew tax invoice through the provider's API, and writes the number and document link back to the original record. - Page: https://rotomal.com/allocation-connector/ - Category: Billing and tax compliance - Language: en - Billing: subscription - From: $29 per month - Request (free, no card): https://rotomal.com/allocation-connector/request/ - Odoo module, Stripe App and REST API; HubSpot and Xero connect through OAuth and webhooks - Threshold logic is a setting, not code: ₪5,000 since 1 June 2026, updated by us on the day a rule changes - Hebrew right-to-left invoice PDF carrying the allocation number, with your English original kept alongside ## Your billing system has no idea what an allocation number is Under Israel's invoicing reform, a tax invoice between two Israeli businesses above a threshold must carry an allocation number (מספר הקצאה) obtained from the Tax Authority at issue time. Without it, your customer cannot deduct the VAT. The threshold reached ₪5,000 in June 2026, so it now covers most ordinary B2B invoices. If you bill from Odoo, Stripe, HubSpot or Xero, nothing in those systems requests the number. Odoo's fiscal-localization documentation has no Israel page, and its app store returns only shipping, currency and holiday apps for Israel. The usual workaround is to re-key each invoice into an Israeli invoicing product by hand. Allocation Link keeps your source of truth where it is: it watches for invoices that need a number, issues the Israeli document through a registered provider, and writes the result back to the system you already reconcile. - Odoo's fiscal localization documentation lists no Israel localization. (source: https://www.odoo.com/documentation/19.0/applications/finance/fiscal_localizations.html) - Searching Odoo's app store for Israel returns shipping, currency and holiday apps, but nothing for tax invoices or allocation numbers. (source: https://apps.odoo.com/apps/modules/browse?search=israel) - The allocation-number threshold stepped down to ₪5,000 from June 2026; above it, the buyer needs a valid number on the invoice to deduct VAT. (source: https://bakertilly.co.il/blog-invoices-2026.html) ## How it works 1. **Connect your billing system.** Install the Odoo module, add the Stripe App, or authorize HubSpot or Xero with OAuth. You map which customers are Israeli businesses (by VAT ID field or tag) and which document types trigger an Israeli invoice. About an hour, with us on a call. 2. **Connect a registered provider.** You open an account with a Tax Authority-registered Israeli invoicing provider, or use one you already have, and paste its API key. The provider is the registered software that talks to the Tax Authority; Allocation Link orchestrates. 3. **Invoices flow automatically.** When an invoice is finalized for an Israeli business above the threshold, we request the allocation number, issue the Hebrew tax invoice through the provider, and attach the PDF and number to the original invoice within seconds. Failures are queued, retried and flagged. 4. **Reconcile and report.** Credit notes, cancellations and partial payments are mirrored to the Israeli side. A monthly CSV and PDF export lists every Israeli document with its allocation number for your Israeli accountant. ## Features - **Odoo module (17, 18, 19).** Standard addon for Community and Enterprise: allocation-number and Israeli-document fields on account.move, a trigger on posting, and a smart button to the Hebrew PDF. Runs on Odoo.sh and on-premise; Odoo Online users connect through the API instead. - **Stripe App and webhooks.** Listens for finalized Stripe invoices with an Israeli business customer, issues the Israeli document and stores the number in invoice metadata. Stripe stays your payment and dunning system. - **HubSpot and Xero connectors.** OAuth connection; invoices created in HubSpot Commerce Hub or Xero for tagged Israeli customers are mirrored. Numbers and PDF links are written back to a custom property or note. - **Threshold and rule engine.** Current threshold, B2B detection by VAT ID, exemptions and currency conversion at the Bank of Israel representative rate are settings you can review. Rule changes are applied by us on the effective date and announced in advance. - **Hebrew right-to-left templates.** Invoice, credit note and receipt templates in Hebrew with correct RTL layout, embedded Hebrew fonts and the mandatory fields, plus your logo. The English original stays attached. - **Retry queue and alerts.** If the provider or the Tax Authority is unavailable, the request is queued and retried; you get an email or Slack alert when something needs a human, and nothing is silently skipped. - **REST API.** For custom billing: POST an invoice payload, receive the allocation number, Hebrew PDF and document ID. Webhooks on completion and on failure. - **Ask your AI assistant.** Connect Allocation Link to Claude, ChatGPT or another assistant through MCP and ask in plain language, for example "which invoices are still missing an allocation number?". Read-only by default; revoke access any time. ## Who it's for - **Foreign SaaS and services companies with Israeli B2B customers.** You bill from Stripe or HubSpot and Israeli customers' accountants keep asking for a proper invoice with a number. You get compliant Israeli documents without changing your billing stack. - **Israeli companies running Odoo.** Odoo has no Israeli localization, so you have been exporting to a local invoicing product by hand. You get a module that issues Israeli documents from account.move and keeps everything reconciled in Odoo. - **Odoo partners and implementers.** You implement Odoo for Israeli clients and need a maintained answer to the allocation-number question. You get a module you can deploy, a partner price, and someone to call when the rules change. ## Works with Odoo 17 / 18 / 19 (module), Stripe (App and webhooks), HubSpot Commerce Hub (OAuth), Xero (OAuth), Registered Israeli invoicing providers (API), Israel Tax Authority allocation numbers (via the provider), Slack and email alerts, REST API and webhooks, CSV and PDF exports, MCP connector for Claude, ChatGPT and other AI assistants ## Pricing Monthly plans in USD, cancel any time; the Odoo module is also sold as a one-time license. Founding-customer pricing is locked for 12 months. All plans include Hebrew RTL templates, the rule engine, the retry queue and the monthly export. The registered provider's own subscription is paid separately. | Plan | Price | Includes | | --- | --- | --- | | Connect | $29 per month | One connector (Stripe, HubSpot, Xero or API); Up to 50 Israeli documents a month; Hebrew RTL invoice and credit-note templates; Allocation-number write-back to the source record; Email alerts; Monthly accountant export | | Business | $79 per month | Up to three connectors, including Odoo; Up to 500 Israeli documents a month; Everything in Connect; Slack alerts and retry dashboard; Custom template with your branding; Sandbox environment for testing; Priority support with a named contact | | Odoo Module License | $600 one-time per Odoo database | Self-hosted Odoo module, source included; Unlimited documents on your own instance; 12 months of updates and rule changes; Partner deployment guide; Maintenance after year one: $19 per month; Discounted additional databases for partners | ## Compared with the alternatives - **Re-keying invoices into an Israeli invoicing product.** Morning (Green Invoice) and similar Israeli products issue compliant documents, and Morning's API ships with its ₪74–89 a month plan. Doing it by hand means two records per invoice; using their API directly means building and maintaining the integration yourself. Allocation Link is that integration, maintained. - **Building it in-house.** A developer can build a one-off script against a provider's API in a week or two. The cost is in maintenance: threshold changes, provider API changes, credit notes and foreign-currency edge cases. Our monthly price is less than a few hours of that developer's time. - **Switching to an Israeli-first accounting system.** Hashavshevet, Priority and Rivhit handle allocation numbers natively. If your whole company can move, that is a complete answer. If your billing lives in Stripe or Odoo for good reasons, the connector keeps it there. ## Security and data - Invoice data is processed on servers we operate, encrypted in transit (TLS 1.2+) and at rest (AES-256). We store the fields needed to issue and reconcile documents, not your full customer database. - Provider API keys and OAuth tokens are stored encrypted and scoped to the minimum permissions each platform allows; you can revoke them from the platform at any time. - Access to your account is limited to users you invite; our support access is logged and requires your approval per session. - Issued documents and logs are retained for seven years by default, in line with Israeli bookkeeping norms, or deleted within 14 days of a written request once exported. ## Your first week We onboard new accounts within 2 business days, and nothing goes to a real customer before test documents pass in the sandbox. - Day 1: Kickoff call (45 minutes): which platforms you bill from, which field identifies Israeli business customers, and which provider account you will use. - Day 2: Account live. Connector installed or authorized, provider key added, three test invoices issued in the sandbox and reviewed with you. - Day 3–5: Go live on real invoices. We watch the queue with you and adjust the mapping if an edge case appears. - Day 7: Review call: first real documents, alerts received, and the monthly export format checked with your accountant. ## FAQ ### Is Allocation Link registered with the Israel Tax Authority? No, and in our design it does not need to be: documents are issued by a registered Israeli invoicing provider through its API, under your account with that provider. The provider's software is what is registered and requests the allocation number. Israeli software-registration rules for tax documents are specific, so confirm this setup with your Israeli accountant before going live; we will share the technical details for that conversation. ### Is this tax or legal advice? No. Allocation Link is software that automates document issuance and record-keeping. Questions about VAT treatment, which customers count as Israeli dealers, or how to report should go to your accountant or to the Tax Authority. ### What happens if the Tax Authority or the provider is down? The request is queued and retried automatically, and you are alerted if it is not resolved within the window you set. The original invoice is marked pending, not failed; nothing goes to the customer without a number. ### Does it handle credit notes, refunds and foreign currency? Yes. Credit notes and cancellations in the source system create the matching Israeli document. Invoices in USD or EUR are converted at the Bank of Israel representative rate for the threshold check and shown with both amounts on the Hebrew PDF. ### Will my customers see a different invoice? They receive the Hebrew tax invoice with the allocation number, which is what their bookkeeper needs; your original invoice stays in your system and can be sent alongside. ### How big is this market, honestly? Small and specific. Companies billing Israeli businesses from Odoo, Stripe, HubSpot or Xero number in the thousands, not millions. We are building for that niche with a solo team, which is why plans are priced to be sustainable without volume. ### Is the product live? Yes, for founding customers. We set up new accounts within 2 business days, including a call to map your customer fields and a test run in the sandbox. Founding-customer pricing is locked for 12 months. ### Does it work with Claude or ChatGPT? Yes. Allocation Link includes an MCP connector, so Claude, ChatGPT and other MCP-compatible assistants can answer questions like "which invoices are still missing an allocation number?" from your data. It is read-only by default and you can revoke access at any time. --- Rotomal · https://rotomal.com/allocation-connector/ · hello@rotomal.com # Camp Alarm: Alerts the moment summer camp and activity registration opens, and when a waitlisted spot frees up, so you're first in line. > The good camps fill in minutes, and the opening date is usually announced quietly on a page you check once a month. Camp Alarm watches the camps, swim lessons and activities you pick, texts you the moment a registration date is announced and again when it opens, and keeps watching sold-out sessions for cancellations. You get a checklist of what each form asks for, so you're ready before the clock starts. - Page: https://rotomal.com/camp-registration-alerts/ - Category: Family organization - Language: en - Billing: subscription - From: $9 per season - Request (free, no card): https://rotomal.com/camp-registration-alerts/request/ - Each camp page checked several times an hour; a text the moment registration dates appear, the day before, and the minute it opens. - Waitlist watching: sold-out weeks re-checked and an alert when a spot or a new session appears. - A per-camp checklist of what the form needs, like medical forms, account login and deposit, prepared before opening day. ## Registration is a race, and the starting gun is easy to miss Popular day camps, YMCA programs, city recreation camps and swim lessons now sell out within an hour of opening, some in minutes. Parents set alarms, block their calendars and still lose out because the opening date moved, the account wasn't set up or a medical form was missing. Each camp announces dates its own way: a line on the website, a newsletter some parents never got, a social media post. Keeping track of five or six programs across two children means checking pages every week for months. Camp Alarm does the checking. You list the camps, it watches them and tells you exactly when to act, and what to have ready. - In Traverse City, Michigan, the Grand Traverse Bay YMCA sold out 10 weeks of summer camp programming in roughly ninety seconds in 2025. (source: https://traverseticker.com/news/welcome-to-the-chaos-of-summer-camp-registration-season) - A Charlottesville, Virginia newsletter reported that a YMCA summer camp sold out in 8 minutes. (source: https://www.charlottesvilledtm.com/p/ymca-camp-sell-out-housing-out-of) - The City of Brea, California says most weeks of its summer day camp sell out within the first hour of registration opening. (source: https://cityofbrea.gov/895/Summer-Day-Camp) ## How it works 1. **Pick your camps.** Paste the links of the camps, classes and activities you want, or name them and we find the pages. Add which weeks and which child. 2. **We watch the pages.** Each page is checked several times an hour for new dates, opened registration, sold-out notices and new sessions. 3. **You get the alarm.** A text when dates are announced, a reminder the evening before, and an alert the minute registration opens, with the direct link. 4. **Ready before the clock starts.** A checklist per camp: create the account, upload the medical form, have the deposit ready. After opening, sold-out weeks are watched for spots. ## Features - **Registration-date detection.** Watches for dates and phrases like 'registration opens' on each camp's page and newsletter archive, and sends the date as soon as it appears. - **Opening-minute alert.** A text and email at the exact opening time with the direct registration link, plus a reminder 12 hours before. - **Waitlist and cancellation watch.** Sold-out weeks re-checked through the spring; an alert when a spot opens or a new session is added. - **Prep checklist.** What each camp's form asks for: account, child details, medical and immunization forms, deposit and sibling discounts, prepared in advance. - **Family calendar.** Opening times and camp weeks added to Google, Apple or Outlook calendars shared between parents. - **Two-parent alerts.** Both parents get the alarm, so whoever is free first can register. - **Season summary.** Which camps opened when, which sold out fastest and when to expect next year's dates. - **Ask your AI assistant.** Connect Camp Alarm to Claude, ChatGPT or another assistant through MCP and ask in plain language, for example "which camps on my list haven't announced dates yet?". Read-only by default; revoke access any time. ## Who it's for - **Working parents planning summer childcare.** Ten weeks to cover, several camps to combine, and no time to check websites every week from January. - **Families chasing competitive programs.** Swim lessons, coding camps and city programs that fill in minutes and reopen only through cancellations. - **Parents with several children.** Different ages, different camps, different opening days, all on one list. ## Works with Any camp or activity website, City and county recreation portals, YMCA and community-center pages, SMS and email alerts, Google Calendar, Apple Calendar and Outlook, MCP connector for Claude, ChatGPT and other AI assistants ## Pricing Prices per season (winter-to-summer registration, or one school-year activity season). No auto-renewal: you choose to sign up again next year. Founding customer pricing applies to early-access orders. | Plan | Price | Includes | | --- | --- | --- | | One child | $9 per season | Up to 5 camps or activities; Date, reminder and opening alerts; Prep checklist per camp; Text and email alerts; Calendar entries | | Family | $19 per season | Up to 15 camps or activities; All children; Waitlist and cancellation watch; Alerts to both parents; Shared family calendar; Season summary | | Parent group | $49 per season | Up to 40 camps or activities; Up to 10 families; Shared watch list; Alerts to every family; Group season summary | ## Compared with the alternatives - **Checking the pages yourself.** Free, if you remember to look every week for several months across every camp. Most families miss at least one date. - **Camp newsletters and social media.** Worth joining. They announce dates on their own schedule, often after members or past campers heard first, and messages are easy to miss. - **General website-change monitors.** Tools that watch a page for any change work, but they alert on every banner tweak and don't know what 'registration opens' means or what the form needs. ## Security and data - We only store the camp links, your children's first names and ages, and how to reach you. - We never log in to camp accounts or handle payments. - Your watch list and contact details are encrypted and deleted at the end of the season unless you sign up again. - Alerts go only to the adults you add. ## Getting set up Send your camp list and we start watching within 2 business days. - Day 1: Request the service and paste the camp links. - Day 2: Watch list confirmed, with any known opening dates and the prep checklist. - Until opening: Date announcements and reminders as they appear. - Opening day: The minute-of alert, then waitlist watching through the season. ## FAQ ### Do you register my child for me? No. Registration needs your account, payment and consent, so you do it. We make sure you know exactly when and have everything ready. ### Which camps can you watch? Any camp or activity with a public web page, including city recreation portals, YMCAs, private day camps and lesson programs. If a page needs a login to see dates, we watch the public pages and newsletter instead. ### How quickly will I hear when it opens? Pages are checked several times an hour, and at the announced opening time we alert you at that minute with the direct link. ### Does it work for activities other than summer camp? Yes: swim lessons, after-school clubs, sports leagues and holiday camps all work the same way. One season covers one registration cycle. ### Will it renew automatically? No. Each season is paid once. We email you before next year's cycle and you decide whether to sign up again. ### Is this allowed by camp websites? We only read public pages, at a gentle rate, the way a parent refreshing the page would. We never submit forms or hold places. ### Does it work with Claude or ChatGPT? Yes. Camp Alarm includes an MCP connector, so Claude, ChatGPT and other MCP-compatible assistants can answer questions like "which camps on my list haven't announced dates yet?" from your data. It is read-only by default and you can revoke access at any time. --- Rotomal · https://rotomal.com/camp-registration-alerts/ · hello@rotomal.com # Carrier Lens: FMCSA red flags on carriers and brokers, shown on your load board and in your inbox. > Carrier Lens checks every MC number you look at against FMCSA authority, insurance and census data and overlays a red, yellow or green flag on load boards and in Gmail or Outlook. About half the price of the leading tool, with alerts when a carrier's contacts or insurance change after onboarding. - Page: https://rotomal.com/carrier-check/ - Category: Freight and logistics - Language: en - Billing: subscription - From: $39 per month - Request (free, no card): https://rotomal.com/carrier-check/request/ - Flags authority under 90 days old, pending insurance cancellations, out-of-service orders and recent changes to the registered phone, email or address - Browser overlay for DAT One, Truckstop and webmail; no new tab, no copy-pasting MC numbers - Shipper-side check that a broker holds active authority and the $75,000 BMC-84 or BMC-85 bond on file ## Freight fraud grew faster than a small brokerage can hand-check carriers Double brokering, stolen MC identities and cargo theft all start the same way: a carrier that looks fine for the thirty seconds a dispatcher spends on a load board. The warning signs are public in FMCSA's authority, insurance and census records, but checking them by hand for every carrier on every load is work nobody in a three-person brokerage has time for. The fraud has moved with the system: when FMCSA changed its registration platform, lookalike sites appeared and FMCSA issued a warning. A carrier whose phone number changed yesterday and whose insurer has filed a cancellation is not necessarily a fraudster, but you want to know before the rate confirmation goes out. The established vetting tools are priced per seat for mid-size brokerages, which puts a small shop's second dispatcher outside the budget. Carrier Lens is one price for the team, inside the tools you already have open. - Trade press reported fraudulent freight activity up 27% in 2024, with further surges in fraud schemes reported during 2026. (source: https://news.google.com/rss/search?q=freight+fraud+double+brokering+2025&hl=en-US&gl=US&ceid=US:en) - In September 2026 FMCSA warned carriers and brokers about fake websites imitating its registration system. (source: https://news.google.com/rss/search?q=freight+fraud+double+brokering+2025&hl=en-US&gl=US&ceid=US:en) - Carrier Assure's Premium plan is priced at $149 per month for a single seat. (source: https://www.carrierassure.com/pricing) ## How it works 1. **Request service.** Tell us your MC number, the load boards you use and how many people vet carriers. We confirm by email and set up your account within 2 business days. 2. **Install the overlay.** Add the Carrier Lens extension to Chrome or Edge. It recognises MC and USDOT numbers on DAT One, Truckstop, Gmail and Outlook on the web, and shows a flag beside each. 3. **Click a flag for the detail.** A side panel lists each signal: authority date and status, insurance on file and any pending cancellation, out-of-service orders, inspection counts, and whether the contact details in front of you match FMCSA's record. 4. **Keep watching onboarded carriers.** Add the carriers you work with to your watch list. Carrier Lens emails you when their insurance, authority status, phone, email or address changes. ## Features - **Authority and status check.** Common and contract authority status, grant date, and any revocation or out-of-service order, from FMCSA licensing data refreshed daily. Authority under 90 days old is flagged yellow. - **Insurance on file and cancellations.** Shows the insurer, the coverage levels on file and any pending cancellation filed with FMCSA, so you see a lapse coming rather than after the fact. - **Contact mismatch detection.** Compares the email domain, phone number and address in the message or load-board profile with FMCSA's registered contacts and flags differences. Phone numbers shared across many MC numbers are highlighted. - **Change alerts on your watch list.** Daily checks on carriers you have onboarded; you get an email when registered contacts, insurance or authority status change, with the before and after values. - **Browser overlay.** A Chrome and Edge extension for DAT One, Truckstop, Gmail and Outlook on the web. It reads only the page you are on and sends only MC and USDOT numbers to our servers. - **Broker check for shippers and dispatchers.** Enter a broker's MC number and see active broker authority and the BMC-84 bond or BMC-85 trust on file with FMCSA, with the surety's name. - **Vetting log.** Every check is recorded with the time, the user and the flags shown, exportable as CSV, for when a claim or a customer asks what you knew and when. - **Ask your AI assistant.** Connect Carrier Lens to Claude, ChatGPT or another assistant through MCP and ask in plain language, for example "has any carrier we used this month been flagged?". Read-only by default; revoke access any time. ## Who it's for - **Brokerages with 1–10 staff.** You cannot afford a $149 seat per dispatcher, or one double-brokered load. Carrier Lens gives every seat the same checks at a team price. - **Newly licensed brokers.** You are building a carrier base from scratch, and fraudsters target new authorities. Start with vetting built in instead of adding it after the first loss. - **Dispatch services.** You book loads for owner-operators and need to vet the brokers you work with. The broker check shows authority and bond status in seconds. - **Shippers tendering directly.** You hand freight to brokers and carriers without a transportation department. Check bond and authority before the rate confirmation goes out. ## Works with DAT One (browser overlay), Truckstop (browser overlay), Gmail and Outlook on the web (browser overlay), FMCSA Licensing & Insurance records (authority and insurance filings), FMCSA SAFER and census data (USDOT snapshot, inspections, out-of-service orders), Email change alerts, CSV export of the vetting log and watch list, MCP connector for Claude, ChatGPT and other AI assistants ## Pricing Billed monthly, cancel any time. Founding customer pricing stays fixed while you remain subscribed. All plans include the overlay, authority and insurance checks, the broker check, the vetting log and daily data refresh. We onboard new accounts within 2 business days. | Plan | Price | Includes | | --- | --- | --- | | Solo | $39 per month | 1 user; Unlimited carrier checks; Browser overlay for load boards and webmail; Watch list of up to 50 carriers with change alerts; Broker bond and authority check; Vetting log export | | Team | $79 per month | Up to 4 users; Everything in Solo; Watch list of up to 300 carriers; Shared team watch list and notes on carriers; Contact mismatch detection on phone numbers and email domains; Email support within one business day | | Office | $149 per month | Up to 10 users; Everything in Team; Watch list of up to 1,500 carriers; Owner dashboard: who checked what, and overrides of red flags; CSV import of your existing carrier base; Onboarding call for your team | ## Compared with the alternatives - **Checking SAFER, L&I and the carrier's website by hand.** Free and thorough if you do it every time. In practice it takes several minutes per carrier across three or four sites, so it gets skipped on busy days, which is when fraud happens. - **Carrier Assure.** An established carrier-scoring tool whose Premium plan is $149 per month for one seat. Its scoring is broader than ours; a four-person office would pay roughly four times what Carrier Lens charges. - **Highway and MyCarrierPortal.** Identity and onboarding platforms for mid-size and large brokerages, sold through sales teams and integrated with TMS systems. Strong if you onboard hundreds of carriers a month; heavy for a small office. - **The load board's built-in carrier info.** DAT and Truckstop show basic authority and insurance information inside their boards. Useful, but it does not follow the carrier into your email or alert you when something changes later. ## Security and data - Account data, watch lists and vetting logs are stored on servers in the United States, encrypted at rest and in transit. - The extension transmits only MC and USDOT numbers and, where enabled, adjacent phone numbers and email domains; never message text or attachments. - Each user has an individual login; the account owner can remove a seat instantly, and owner actions and red-flag overrides are logged. - On request we delete an account and all its data within 30 days, and automatically 60 days after cancellation. ## Your first week Install, check, watch. Most teams vet carriers on day one and load their existing carrier base within the week. - Day 1: Request service; we create your account and seats within 2 business days. - Day 2: Install the extension in Chrome or Edge, open your load board and see flags beside MC numbers. - Day 3–4: Import or add the carriers you already work with to the watch list; change alerts start the next morning. - Day 7: Review the week's vetting log with your team and agree a rule for yellow flags. ## FAQ ### If Carrier Lens shows green and the carrier turns out to be a fraudster, who is responsible? You remain responsible for the decision to tender a load. Carrier Lens reports signals from public FMCSA data and from the page in front of you; it cannot detect every stolen identity or a carrier that turns bad later. It is software, not insurance or legal advice; use it alongside your own judgment and your carrier agreement. ### Where does the data come from? FMCSA's public licensing and insurance records, the SAFER snapshot and census data, refreshed daily. We have no private insurer data or proprietary network scores; what we add is matching, change detection and the overlay. ### Does the extension read my email? The extension scans the page you have open for MC and USDOT numbers and, on the Team and Office plans, for phone numbers and email domains next to them. Only those identifiers are sent to our servers; message bodies and attachments never leave your browser. ### FMCSA's new registration system adds identity checks. Won't that end fraud? It should reduce fake new registrations, which is good for everyone. It does not retroactively verify the existing carrier base, catch a legitimate carrier's stolen credentials, or tell you that insurance was cancelled yesterday. ### Which load boards are supported? DAT One and Truckstop on the web at launch, plus Gmail and Outlook on the web. Any other page works too: paste an MC number into the extension's search box. Other boards are added as founding customers ask. ### Can I vet a broker rather than a carrier? Yes. The broker check shows active broker authority, the bond or trust type (BMC-84 or BMC-85) and the surety on file. It is designed for dispatchers and shippers deciding whether to work with a broker. ### What if I cancel? Export your watch list, notes and vetting log as CSV from your account at any time. Access ends with the billing period and data is deleted 60 days later. ### Does it work with Claude or ChatGPT? Yes. Carrier Lens includes an MCP connector, so Claude, ChatGPT and other MCP-compatible assistants can answer questions like "has any carrier we used this month been flagged?" from your data. It is read-only by default and you can revoke access at any time. --- Rotomal · https://rotomal.com/carrier-check/ · hello@rotomal.com # Reject Ready: Fixed-price DMARC enforcement for MSPs: domains to p=reject in 60 days, then monitored. > Reject Ready is a project, not a dashboard. We inventory every legitimate sender behind a domain, fix SPF and DKIM for each one, step the DMARC policy up to reject, and then watch the domain for new or broken senders every month. If a domain isn't at p=reject after 60 days, you don't pay the project fee for it. - Page: https://rotomal.com/dmarc-enforce/ - Category: Email security - Language: en - Billing: subscription - From: $450 one-time per domain - Request (free, no card): https://rotomal.com/dmarc-enforce/request/ - Parses DMARC aggregate reports from day one and produces a named sender inventory (Microsoft 365, Google Workspace, Mailchimp, the printer in the back office) with a fix for each. - Flattens SPF to stay under the 10-lookup limit and keeps it flat as vendors change their IP ranges. - Moves policy from none to quarantine to reject in stages, with a weekly report of what would have been blocked at the next stage. ## Most domains still aren't enforced, and the receivers have stopped being patient DMARC has been around for over a decade, yet nearly half of company domains have no record and only a small fraction have reached p=reject, the only setting that actually stops spoofing. Publishing a record is easy; finding every system that sends mail as the domain and authenticating each one before you enforce, without breaking something, is the work. Since 2024 the big mailbox providers have required authentication from bulk senders, and since May 2025 Microsoft rejects non-compliant bulk mail outright. For a small business that means invoices and newsletters disappearing. For an MSP it means a ticket, then a scramble, for every client, one at a time. The market is full of DMARC dashboards that show you the reports. Reports aren't the problem. Reject Ready sells the finished outcome: the domain at p=reject, documented, with monitoring so it stays that way. - In a 2026 study of 67,336 company domains, 45.1% had no DMARC record and only 16.3% were at p=reject. (source: https://ciphercue.com/blog/dmarc-enforcement-gap-rua-fragmentation-2026) - Microsoft has rejected bulk mail that fails SPF, DKIM and DMARC requirements since 5 May 2025. (source: https://dmarcian.com/microsoft-enforces-spf-dkim-dmarc/) ## How it works 1. **Scan and scope.** Send us the domains. We run a free public scan (DNS is public) and return a one-page status per domain: current SPF, DKIM and DMARC, obvious problems, and a fixed project price. 2. **Collect reports, build the inventory (weeks 1–2).** We publish a p=none record pointing aggregate reports to us, parse them, and produce a sender inventory. You or the client confirm which sources are legitimate; everything unknown is treated as suspect. 3. **Authenticate every sender (weeks 2–6).** For each legitimate source we supply or apply the exact DNS changes: DKIM selectors for every SaaS, SPF includes with flattening, and an authenticated relay (Microsoft 365 connector or dedicated relay) for devices and apps that can't sign. We verify each one in the reports before moving on. 4. **Enforce and monitor (weeks 6–8 and after).** Policy moves to quarantine, then reject, with a check at each stage. After reject, monthly monitoring flags new senders and SPF drift, and you get a white-label report per client. ## Features - **Aggregate report parsing and sender inventory.** RUA reports are collected and parsed into a list of sending sources with volume, pass/fail per mechanism and a plain-English name where we can identify the vendor. - **SPF flattening and lookup monitoring.** Nested includes are flattened to IPs under the 10-DNS-lookup limit and refreshed automatically when vendors change ranges. You get an alert before the record would break. - **DKIM for every SaaS sender.** Step-by-step instructions, or hands-on setup where you grant access, for Microsoft 365, Google Workspace, Mailchimp, HubSpot, SendGrid, Zendesk and dozens of other common senders. - **Relay for devices and legacy apps.** Printers, scanners, alarm panels and line-of-business apps that can't do DKIM are routed through an authenticated relay under the client's domain, so enforcement doesn't silence them. - **Staged policy ramp with impact preview.** Each stage (none, quarantine at a percentage, full quarantine, reject) is preceded by a report of what the next stage would block. - **Monthly monitoring and alerts.** After enforcement: new unauthenticated sources, failing DKIM selectors, SPF drift and record changes are flagged within 24 hours, with a monthly report. - **White-label MSP reporting.** Reports and the client portal carry your logo and name. Clients see their domains; you see all of them. - **Hebrew and English support.** Documentation, portal and support are available in English and Hebrew, for MSPs serving Israeli SMBs. ## Who it's for - **MSPs with 20–500 client domains.** You know the clients need DMARC and you don't have the hours to do the inventory and chase vendors for each one. You get a fixed price per domain, a project you can resell, and reports with your name on them. - **Microsoft 365 partners.** Your clients are on M365 with a tangle of third-party senders. We handle the connectors, DKIM selectors and relay setup around your tenancy. - **Small businesses whose mail is being rejected.** Invoices are bouncing or landing in junk. You get the fix done for a single domain, then monitoring for a few dollars a month. ## Works with Microsoft 365 / Exchange Online (connectors, DKIM), Google Workspace, DMARC aggregate reports (RFC 7489 RUA), Cloudflare, GoDaddy, Route 53 and other DNS providers (records supplied, or applied via API where available), Mailchimp, HubSpot, SendGrid, Zendesk, Salesforce and other SaaS senders, SPF, DKIM and DMARC; MTA-STS and BIMI readiness checks, Authenticated SMTP relay for devices, PDF and CSV reports; webhook alerts, MCP connector for Claude, ChatGPT and other AI assistants ## Pricing Project fees are one-time per domain and include everything needed to reach p=reject within 60 days; monthly monitoring is optional afterwards and billed per domain. Founding customer pricing: the rates below are held for 12 months for MSPs who sign during early access. If a domain is not at p=reject within 60 days because of our work, the project fee for that domain is waived (conditions in the FAQ). | Plan | Price | Includes | | --- | --- | --- | | Single domain | $450 one-time per domain | 60-day project to p=reject; Sender inventory and fixes; SPF flattening; DKIM setup for up to 10 senders; 3 months of monitoring included; Then $4 per domain per month; Email support | | MSP bundle | $300 one-time per domain, 5+ domains | Everything in Single domain; Minimum 5 domains per order; Relay setup for non-signing devices; White-label reports and portal; Monitoring at $3 per domain per month; Priority support, same business day; Hebrew or English | | MSP partner | $2 per domain per month, 50+ domains | Monitoring for all enrolled domains; Projects at $250 per domain; Free public scan of your full client list; API and webhook alerts into your PSA; Quarterly review call; Co-branded sales material; Dedicated contact | ## Compared with the alternatives - **DMARC dashboards (EasyDMARC, Suped, DMARCwise and others).** Report-parsing dashboards from about €1 to $7 per domain per month, or around $44.99 a month for a bundle. Good tools, but they leave the inventory, vendor chasing and DNS work to you. We use the same reports and do the work. - **MSP white-label DMARC platforms.** Platforms priced around $0.33–5 per domain per month give you a multi-tenant dashboard to do the job yourself. If you have the engineer hours, that is cheaper; if you don't, the project is what gets domains enforced. - **Doing it in-house.** Everything here is public DNS and documented standards. The cost is attention: a typical domain needs 10–30 vendor interactions over several weeks. - **Leaving it at p=none.** A monitoring-only record satisfies some bulk-sender checklists but stops no spoofing. If the domain is used for invoices, it is the setting attackers hope for. ## Security and data - Aggregate (RUA) reports contain sending IPs and pass/fail counts, not message contents; we don't request forensic (RUF) reports unless you ask. - Report data and inventories are stored encrypted at rest; access is limited to the engineers assigned to your account and logged. - Any delegated access to DNS or Microsoft 365 is through roles you grant and can revoke; we never ask for passwords. - Data is retained while monitoring is active plus 90 days, exportable as CSV, and deleted on written request. ## Your first week We onboard new accounts within 2 business days. By day 7 you have a sender inventory for every domain in the batch. - Day 1: Send us the domain list; receive the free scan and a fixed quote per domain. - Day 2–3: p=none records with our reporting address go live; reports start arriving within 24–48 hours. - Day 7: First sender inventory delivered; we walk through it with you and agree which sources are legitimate. - Weeks 2–8: Fixes, staged ramp and enforcement, with a status report each Friday. ## FAQ ### What exactly does the 60-day guarantee cover? If we can't get a domain to p=reject within 60 days of starting because of our work, you don't pay the project fee for that domain and we keep working. It assumes the DNS changes we request are applied within 5 business days and the client confirms its legitimate senders. ### Will enforcement break our clients' email? Not if the inventory is complete, which is the point of the staged ramp. Each stage comes with a preview of what the next one would block. Unknown senders that turn out to be legitimate are caught at quarantine, not reject. ### Do you need access to our DNS and Microsoft 365? No. We can supply the exact records and instructions and verify through the reports; many MSPs prefer to apply changes themselves. If you'd rather we do it, we work with delegated access that you can revoke at any time. ### What about vendors that don't support DKIM? They are either moved behind the authenticated relay or sent from a subdomain with its own policy. Each case is documented in the inventory with the chosen approach. ### Is monitoring required after the project? No. The domain stays at p=reject without us. We recommend monitoring because new SaaS tools get added and vendors change IPs; most MSPs fold the few dollars into their client's plan. ### Do you handle BIMI or MTA-STS? We check readiness and advise. Setting up a Verified Mark Certificate for BIMI involves a third-party cost and a registered trademark, so it is quoted separately if wanted. ### Does it work with Claude or ChatGPT? Yes. Reject Ready includes an MCP connector, so Claude, ChatGPT and other MCP-compatible assistants can answer questions like "which client domains are still not at p=reject?" from your data. It is read-only by default and you can revoke access at any time. --- Rotomal · https://rotomal.com/dmarc-enforce/ · hello@rotomal.com # Lesson Lane: Booking, pickup routing, hour logs and certificates for small driving schools, flat price. > Lesson Lane lets students book behind-the-wheel lessons online, routes each instructor's day by pickup address, logs the hours your state requires and prints completion certificates from your templates. You set it up yourself in an afternoon and pay one flat monthly price for the whole school, with no per-user fee and no setup fee. - Page: https://rotomal.com/driving-school-scheduler/ - Category: Driving school software - Language: en - Billing: subscription - From: $39 per month - Request (free, no card): https://rotomal.com/driving-school-scheduler/request/ - Booking slots come from each instructor's availability, the student's pickup point and realistic drive time, so a 2:00 drop-off in one suburb never creates a 2:00 pickup across town. - Hour logs record behind-the-wheel and observation time per student with instructor sign-off, exportable as PDF or CSV in your state's field layout. - Self-serve setup: import students from a spreadsheet, add instructors and cars, publish your booking page. No sales call required. ## Industry scheduling software starts near $250 a month, which prices out the school with two cars A small driving school is a scheduling business with cars. Every lesson has a student, an instructor, a vehicle, a pickup address and a drop-off, and most students are teenagers whose parents are juggling the calendar. Owners run it on a paper book, a shared Google Calendar and a lot of texting, and the costly mistakes are the same everywhere: an instructor idle because the next pickup was 25 minutes away, a student whose hours were never logged, a certificate issued late because the records were in the car. The established software for this industry is built for schools with a fleet. It assumes a minimum number of users, charges per instructor and adds a setup fee, so a one- or two-instructor school pays around $250 a month before scheduling a single lesson. Cheaper tutoring schedulers are priced right but know nothing about pickups, cars, state hour requirements or certificates. Lesson Lane is for the school with one to five instructors that wants the industry features without the fleet price. - DriveScout's published pricing requires a minimum of 5 users at $50 per user per month, plus a $250 setup fee. (source: https://www.drivescout.com/pricing) - General lesson-business tools such as TutorBird are priced at $16.95 per month plus $4.95 for each additional tutor. (source: https://www.tutorbird.com/pricing/) ## How it works 1. **Set up the school yourself.** Add instructors, vehicles, lesson types and prices, your service area and your state's hour requirements. Import students from a spreadsheet. Most schools finish in an afternoon. 2. **Students and parents book online.** They choose a lesson type, enter the pickup address, and see only slots that fit the instructor's availability and travel time. They pay by card or draw from a prepaid package. 3. **Instructors run their day from the app.** A phone view shows the day's lessons in order with pickup addresses, map links, student notes and the skills to cover. Start and end times are logged with a tap. 4. **Hours and certificates follow.** Each completed lesson adds to the student's hour log; when requirements are met, the school issues a numbered certificate from its template, stored as a PDF. ## Features - **Pickup-aware scheduling.** Available slots are computed from instructor availability, the student's pickup point and estimated drive time from the previous lesson. Buffers, maximum travel radius and home-base returns are configurable. - **Online booking and packages.** A booking page for single lessons, packages such as six hours behind the wheel, and classroom sessions, with card payment through Stripe. Parents can book for a student. - **State hour logs.** Behind-the-wheel, observation and classroom hours per student with date, instructor, vehicle and skills covered. Instructor sign-off on each entry; export as PDF or CSV matched to the fields your state asks for. - **Certificates from your templates.** Upload your certificate layout or use our generic one; the system fills student, school, hours and dates, assigns a sequential number and stores the PDF. Every issuance is logged for audits. - **Instructor mobile app.** A web app that works on any phone: today's route, student notes, a skill checklist, start and stop timing, and mileage per vehicle. - **Reminders and no-show rules.** Text and email reminders 24 hours and 2 hours before each lesson, with your cancellation window and fee policy enforced automatically. - **Vehicle tracking.** Assign cars to lessons, log mileage, and set reminders for maintenance and inspection dates. - **Parent and student portal.** Upcoming lessons, hours completed, remaining package balance and certificates, with no app to install. ## Who it's for - **Owner-instructor schools.** You teach most lessons yourself and schedule between them. Students book online, your day is routed, and the hour log is done when the lesson ends. - **Schools with 2–5 instructors.** You coordinate several cars and calendars. Lesson Lane prevents overlaps and far-flung pickups and gives you one view of hours and certificates across instructors. - **Schools adding teen programs.** Teen behind-the-wheel programs come with state hour requirements and parents who want visibility. The portal and hour logs handle both. - **Small CDL and truck schools.** Range and road time logged with instructor sign-off and vehicle records; the same scheduler with longer lesson blocks and yard pickups. ## Works with Stripe payments, Google Maps for routing and drive-time estimates, iCal feeds per instructor for Google Calendar and Outlook, Email and SMS reminders, CSV import of students; CSV and PDF export of logs and certificates, Hosted booking page or embed on your website, QuickBooks-ready CSV export, MCP connector for Claude, ChatGPT and other AI assistants ## Pricing One flat price per school per month, no per-instructor fees, no setup fee, cancel any time. Card processing fees are charged by Stripe at its rates. Founding customer pricing is locked for 24 months for accounts opened in early access. All plans include online booking, pickup routing, hour logs, certificates and the instructor app. | Plan | Price | Includes | | --- | --- | --- | | Solo | $39 per month | 1 instructor, unlimited students; Online booking page; Pickup-aware scheduling; Hour logs and certificates; Email reminders; Instructor app; Email support | | School | $69 per month | Up to 5 instructors, unlimited students; Everything in Solo; SMS reminders and no-show rules; Packages and prepaid balances; Parent and student portal; Vehicle tracking and maintenance reminders; State log export layouts | | Fleet | $99 per month | Up to 10 instructors (more on request); Everything in School; Multiple locations and service areas; Classroom session scheduling; Custom certificate templates per program; Audit export bundle of all logs, certificates and issuance records; Phone support | ## Compared with the alternatives - **DriveScout and other driving-school suites.** Built for the industry and more complete than we are today, but DriveScout's published pricing starts with a 5-user minimum at $50 per user plus a $250 setup fee. With a fleet and a need for everything, consider them; with two cars, that math does not work. - **TutorBird and general lesson schedulers.** Priced for small operators, at $16.95 per month plus $4.95 per extra tutor, and good at scheduling and payments, but they do not handle pickups, vehicles, state hour logs or certificates. - **Google Calendar, a paper logbook and texting.** Free and familiar. It does not prevent far-apart pickups, does not produce hour records you can hand to a state inspector, and the logbook lives in the car. ## Security and data - Student and school data is stored on servers in the United States, encrypted in transit and at rest. - Payment card data is handled by Stripe; we never store card numbers. - Instructors see only their own schedule and the students assigned to them; owners control roles and can revoke access immediately. - On cancellation you can export all logs and certificates; we keep an archive for 12 months in case an audit requires it, then delete it, or delete sooner on request. ## Your first week Self-serve setup takes an afternoon; we review your account within 2 business days and build any state-specific layout you need. - Day 1: Add instructors, cars, lesson types and prices; import students; publish your booking page. - Day 2–3: We review your setup, configure your state's hour fields and certificate template, and switch on text reminders. - Day 4–5: First lessons are booked online; instructors run their day from the app and log hours. - Day 7: Check-in on routing buffers, cancellation rules and anything parents asked about. ## FAQ ### Does it produce my state's required forms? Lesson Lane ships with hour logs and a completion certificate template, and exports records as PDF and CSV with the fields most states ask for. Forms differ by state, and some states require their own form or electronic submission. Tell us your state during onboarding; we build state-specific layouts on request for founding customers. You remain responsible for confirming requirements with your state licensing agency. ### Is the hour log an official record? It is a record-keeping tool. Many states accept printed or electronic logs with instructor sign-off; others require their own forms. Lesson Lane is software, not legal or regulatory advice. Verify what your state requires and keep whatever official documents it mandates. ### How does pickup routing work? When a student books, the system looks at the instructor's previous and next lesson locations and uses map drive-time estimates to show only slots the instructor can actually reach. You set buffers, a maximum travel radius and whether the instructor returns to base. ### Can I really set it up without a call? Yes. Setup is self-serve with a checklist and short videos, and most schools finish in an afternoon. We also onboard new accounts within 2 business days and will walk through it with you by email or a 30-minute call if you prefer. ### Are there per-instructor fees or a setup fee? No. Plans are flat per school and include a set number of instructors (1, 5 or 10). Students, parents and bookings are unlimited on every plan. ### What about cheaper tools I might find? There may be some. Compare on pickup-aware scheduling, state hour logs, certificates and the instructor app, and on whether the price stays flat as you add instructors. If something else fits better, no contract holds you here. ### Can parents book and pay for a teen? Yes. A parent account can hold several students, book lessons, buy packages and view hours and certificates. ### How quickly can we go live? You can publish your booking page the day you sign up. We onboard new accounts within 2 business days, importing your students and checking your state's log layout with you. --- Rotomal · https://rotomal.com/driving-school-scheduler/ · hello@rotomal.com # E-Rechnung Startklar: Receive e-invoices and issue them from 2027 in Germany: obligation checked, invoice template converted, tested. From €29. > Since 2025 every business in Germany must be able to receive e-invoices. From 1 January 2027 businesses with more than €800,000 turnover in the previous year must issue their domestic B2B invoices as e-invoices, everyone else from 2028. E-Rechnung Startklar checks whether and when you are affected, sets up receiving, converts your invoice template to XRechnung or ZUGFeRD and tests both. Paid once, no subscription. - Page: https://rotomal.com/en/e-rechnung-2027/ - Category: E-invoicing compliance (Germany) - Language: en - Billing: one-time payment - From: €29 one-time - Request (free, no card): https://rotomal.com/en/e-rechnung-2027/request/ - A clear answer on when the issuing obligation applies to you, based on last year's turnover and your customers. - Your current invoicing software converted, or a free tool set up when that is enough; we do not sell software. - Every test invoice checked with a validator and sent to real recipients before the obligation starts. ## A PDF by email will soon not count as an invoice, and the switch keeps slipping Since 1 January 2025 every business in Germany must be able to receive and process e-invoices in XRechnung or ZUGFeRD format. From 1 January 2027 businesses with total turnover above €800,000 in the previous year must also issue their domestic B2B invoices as e-invoices; for smaller businesses the issuing obligation starts on 1 January 2028. A plain PDF is then no longer a valid invoice. Many small businesses put the switch off because it is unclear what exactly to do: is the current program enough, is a new one needed, how does an XRechnung get from the inbox into the books, and how do you even read one? Discovering in the first week of January that customers reject your invoices means waiting for your money. E-Rechnung Startklar does the setup in two business days for a fixed price. We are not a software vendor and take no commission: we use what you already have and recommend free tools where they are enough. We work in English or German, which helps foreign companies with a German entity. - According to the German Finance Ministry's guidance, businesses with more than €800,000 prior-year turnover must issue e-invoices from 1 January 2027, smaller businesses from 1 January 2028. (source: https://newsletter.pwc.de/umsatzsteuer/nl0029-2024-10-29/bmf-e-rechnung) - The obligation to be able to receive e-invoices has applied to all businesses since 1 January 2025, with no transition period. (source: https://kostenlose-erechnung.de/ratgeber/e-rechnungspflicht-2027-versandpflicht/) - Exempt from the obligation are, among others, small-amount invoices up to €250 and travel tickets. (source: https://kostenlose-erechnung.de/ratgeber/e-rechnungspflicht-2027-versandpflicht/) ## How it works 1. **Short questionnaire.** Legal form, last year's turnover, invoicing software, who does your bookkeeping, how many invoices you issue and receive per month, and whether you have public-sector customers. Five minutes. 2. **Check and plan.** Within one business day: when the issuing obligation applies to you, whether your software can produce e-invoices, and which steps are needed. You approve the plan. 3. **Setup over screen share.** Receiving inbox and an XRechnung viewer, forwarding to your bookkeeper or tax adviser, invoice template converted to ZUGFeRD or XRechnung. You stay logged in; we guide. 4. **Test and handover.** Test invoices validated and sent to three of your customers, a test e-invoice received and filed, plus a one-page summary for your records. ## Features - **Obligation check.** Whether and when the issuing obligation applies to you, based on prior-year turnover, with notes on exemptions such as small-amount invoices and consumer sales. In writing, for your files. - **Receiving set up.** A fixed address for incoming e-invoices, a viewer that makes XRechnung files readable, and automatic forwarding to your bookkeeper or tax adviser. - **Invoice template converted.** Your current software switched to ZUGFeRD or XRechnung with every mandatory field in the right place. If it cannot do it, we set up a free or low-cost tool. - **Every template validated.** Each test invoice checked with a recognised validator. Errors are fixed before a real invoice goes out. - **Customer file prepared.** Invoice email addresses and, for public-sector customers, Leitweg-IDs added to your customer records so invoices reach the right recipient (Ready for 2027 plan). - **Compliant archiving.** Setup and guidance so incoming and outgoing e-invoices are kept unaltered in their original format under German bookkeeping rules (GoBD), not only as printed PDFs. - **One-page summary.** What was set up, where invoices arrive, who receives them and what applies from when. For you, your team and your tax adviser. ## Who it's for - **Foreign companies with a German entity.** A German GmbH or branch run from abroad, where German-language guidance and tax-adviser queues slow everything down. We work in English. - **Trades and small limited companies.** Invoices from Word, Excel or an older program, many business customers, and no patience for format debates. - **Agencies, consultants and freelancers.** Customers already asking for e-invoices, and the question of whether the obligation starts in 2027 or 2028. - **Tax advisers and bookkeeping services.** Several clients switched at once on the Tax office plan, with an overview of who is ready. ## Works with XRechnung (UBL and CII), ZUGFeRD version 2 and later (Factur-X compatible), Common German invoicing and accounting software, Free tools for creating and viewing e-invoices, DATEV handover to your tax adviser, Leitweg-ID for public-sector customers, Validators for checking invoices ## Pricing One-time prices per business, paid once after we confirm by email. No subscription and no commission on software: if a recommended program is paid, you pay its provider directly. Prices exclude VAT. Founding customer pricing applies to early-access orders. | Plan | Price | Includes | | --- | --- | --- | | Check & receive | €29 one-time | Written obligation check; Receiving address and viewer; Forwarding to your bookkeeper; Test e-invoice received; Summary | | Ready for 2027 | €79 one-time | Everything in Check & receive; Invoice template in ZUGFeRD or XRechnung; Every template validated; Test invoices sent to 3 of your customers; Customer file with invoice addresses and Leitweg-IDs (up to 100); Compliant archiving set up | | Tax office | €249 one-time | Up to 5 clients (€45 per extra client); Everything in Ready for 2027 for each client; Appointments booked directly with clients; Readiness overview; Priority slots before year end | ## Compared with the alternatives - **Switching on your own.** Free: there are guides, free creation and viewing tools and validation portals, mostly in German. Allow several hours for research, setup and testing; E-Rechnung Startklar shortens it to one appointment. - **New invoicing software.** Many programs now produce e-invoices out of the box. If yours does, we tell you straight away. Switching only makes sense when the current program cannot do it. - **Your tax adviser.** The right choice if your adviser offers the setup and has time before year end. Many are fully booked right now; we also work on behalf of tax advisers. ## Security and data - We store no passwords: logins are done by you over screen share or with temporary access you delete afterwards. - Invoices run only through your own software and mailboxes; after the setup we have no access. - Questionnaire details are stored encrypted and deleted 90 days after completion, or sooner on request. - Only the people working on your order can access it, and every access is logged. ## From request to ready We confirm your request within one business day; most businesses are ready after one appointment. - Day 1: You fill in the 5-minute questionnaire; we confirm the price by email. - Day 2: Obligation check and plan; you approve. - Day 2–3: Setup over screen share, validation and test sends. - Day 3: Summary for your records and your tax adviser. ## FAQ ### When do I have to issue e-invoices? From 1 January 2027 if your total turnover in the previous year was above €800,000, otherwise from 1 January 2028. You have had to be able to receive e-invoices since 1 January 2025. The obligation covers domestic invoices between businesses. ### I am a small business under the German small-business VAT scheme. Does this apply? Small businesses must still be able to receive e-invoices. Exemptions apply to issuing for businesses under the small-business scheme; if in doubt, have your tax adviser confirm your case. We set up receiving either way. ### Is a PDF no longer enough? A plain PDF is not an e-invoice. Structured formats such as XRechnung or ZUGFeRD are required; with ZUGFeRD the structured invoice is embedded in a PDF that people can still read. ### Do I need to buy new software? Usually not. Many programs already produce e-invoices, and free tools exist for low volumes. We only recommend a switch when there is no other way, and we take no commission. ### Do you need my login details? No. We work over screen share while you are logged in, or with temporary access you delete afterwards. ### How long does it take? You get the check and plan within one business day; the setup is usually one 60 to 90 minute appointment within two business days. ### Is this tax advice? No. E-Rechnung Startklar is a technical setup service. Tax questions about your business belong with your tax adviser. --- Rotomal · https://rotomal.com/en/e-rechnung-2027/ · hello@rotomal.com # E-Rechnung Startklar: E-Rechnungen empfangen und ab 2027 ausstellen: Betroffenheit geprüft, Vorlage umgestellt, getestet. Einmalpreis ab 29 €. > Seit 2025 muss jedes Unternehmen in Deutschland E-Rechnungen empfangen können. Ab dem 1. Januar 2027 müssen Unternehmen mit mehr als 800.000 € Vorjahresumsatz ihre B2B-Rechnungen als E-Rechnung ausstellen, alle anderen ab 2028. E-Rechnung Startklar prüft, ob und ab wann Sie betroffen sind, richtet den Empfang ein, stellt Ihre Rechnungsvorlage auf XRechnung oder ZUGFeRD um und testet beides. Einmal bezahlt, kein Abo. - Page: https://rotomal.com/e-rechnung-2027/ - Category: E-Rechnung und Steuern - Language: de - Billing: one-time payment - From: 29 € einmalig - Request (free, no card): https://rotomal.com/e-rechnung-2027/request/ - Klare Antwort, ab wann die Ausstellungspflicht für Sie gilt, anhand Ihres Vorjahresumsatzes und Ihrer Kundenstruktur. - Ihr bisheriges Rechnungsprogramm umgestellt oder ein kostenloses Werkzeug eingerichtet, wenn das reicht; wir verkaufen keine Software. - Jede Testrechnung mit einem Prüfwerkzeug validiert und an echte Empfänger geschickt, bevor die Pflicht greift. ## Ein PDF per E-Mail ist bald keine Rechnung mehr, und die Umstellung bleibt liegen Seit dem 1. Januar 2025 müssen alle Unternehmen in Deutschland E-Rechnungen im Format XRechnung oder ZUGFeRD empfangen und verarbeiten können. Ab dem 1. Januar 2027 müssen Unternehmen mit einem Gesamtumsatz von mehr als 800.000 € im Vorjahr ihre inländischen B2B-Rechnungen auch als E-Rechnung ausstellen; für kleinere Unternehmen gilt die Ausstellungspflicht ab dem 1. Januar 2028. Ein PDF ist dann keine zulässige Rechnung mehr. Viele kleine Betriebe schieben die Umstellung, weil unklar ist, was genau zu tun ist: Reicht das bisherige Programm? Braucht man ein neues? Wie kommt eine XRechnung aus dem Postfach in die Buchhaltung, und wie liest man sie überhaupt? Wer in der ersten Januarwoche feststellt, dass Kunden die Rechnung zurückweisen, wartet auf sein Geld. E-Rechnung Startklar erledigt die Einrichtung in zwei Werktagen zum Festpreis. Wir sind kein Softwareanbieter und bekommen keine Provision: Wir nutzen, was Sie schon haben, und empfehlen kostenlose Werkzeuge, wo sie ausreichen. - Laut BMF-Schreiben müssen Unternehmen mit mehr als 800.000 € Vorjahresumsatz ab dem 1. Januar 2027 E-Rechnungen ausstellen, kleinere Unternehmen ab dem 1. Januar 2028. (source: https://newsletter.pwc.de/umsatzsteuer/nl0029-2024-10-29/bmf-e-rechnung) - Die Pflicht, E-Rechnungen empfangen zu können, gilt seit dem 1. Januar 2025 für alle Unternehmen, ohne Übergangsfrist. (source: https://kostenlose-erechnung.de/ratgeber/e-rechnungspflicht-2027-versandpflicht/) - Ausgenommen von der Pflicht sind unter anderem Kleinbetragsrechnungen bis 250 € und Fahrausweise. (source: https://kostenlose-erechnung.de/ratgeber/e-rechnungspflicht-2027-versandpflicht/) ## So funktioniert es 1. **Kurzer Fragebogen.** Rechtsform, Vorjahresumsatz, Rechnungsprogramm, wer die Buchhaltung macht, wie viele Rechnungen Sie monatlich schreiben und empfangen, ob öffentliche Auftraggeber dabei sind. Fünf Minuten. 2. **Prüfung und Plan.** Innerhalb eines Werktags: ab wann die Ausstellungspflicht für Sie gilt, ob Ihr Programm E-Rechnungen kann und welche Schritte nötig sind. Sie geben den Plan frei. 3. **Einrichtung per Bildschirmfreigabe.** Empfangspostfach und Anzeige von XRechnungen, Weiterleitung an Buchhaltung oder Steuerbüro, Rechnungsvorlage auf ZUGFeRD oder XRechnung umgestellt. Sie bleiben angemeldet, wir führen. 4. **Test und Übergabe.** Testrechnungen validiert und an drei Ihrer Kunden geschickt, eine Test-E-Rechnung empfangen und abgelegt, dazu eine Seite Zusammenfassung für Ihre Unterlagen. ## Features - **Betroffenheits-Check.** Ob und ab wann die Ausstellungspflicht für Sie gilt, anhand des Vorjahresumsatzes, mit Hinweis auf Ausnahmen wie Kleinbetragsrechnungen und B2C-Umsätze. Schriftlich, zum Abheften. - **Empfang eingerichtet.** Eine feste Adresse für eingehende E-Rechnungen, ein Anzeigewerkzeug, mit dem XRechnungen lesbar werden, und die automatische Weiterleitung an Buchhaltung oder Steuerbüro. - **Rechnungsvorlage umgestellt.** Ihr bisheriges Programm auf ZUGFeRD oder XRechnung umgestellt, mit allen Pflichtangaben in den richtigen Feldern. Reicht Ihr Programm nicht, richten wir ein kostenloses oder günstiges Werkzeug ein. - **Validierung jeder Vorlage.** Jede Testrechnung mit einem anerkannten Prüfwerkzeug geprüft. Fehler werden behoben, bevor eine echte Rechnung rausgeht. - **Kundenstamm vorbereitet.** E-Mail-Adressen für Rechnungen und, bei öffentlichen Auftraggebern, Leitweg-IDs in Ihrem Kundenstamm ergänzt, damit die Rechnung beim richtigen Empfänger landet (Paket Startklar 2027). - **Ablage nach GoBD.** Hinweise und Einrichtung, damit eingehende und ausgehende E-Rechnungen im Originalformat unveränderbar aufbewahrt werden, nicht nur als ausgedrucktes PDF. - **Zusammenfassung auf einer Seite.** Was eingerichtet wurde, wo Rechnungen ankommen, wer sie bekommt und was ab wann gilt. Für Sie, Ihr Team und Ihr Steuerbüro. ## Who it's for - **Handwerksbetriebe und kleine GmbHs.** Rechnungen aus Word, Excel oder einem älteren Programm, viele Geschäftskunden und kein Nerv, sich durch Formatdiskussionen zu lesen. - **Agenturen, Berater und Freiberufler.** Kunden, die schon nach E-Rechnungen fragen, und die Frage, ob die Pflicht 2027 oder 2028 greift. - **Firmen mit öffentlichen Auftraggebern.** Behörden verlangen schon heute XRechnung mit Leitweg-ID. Ein korrekt eingerichteter Ablauf spart Rückläufer. - **Steuerbüros und Buchhaltungsdienste.** Mehrere Mandanten auf einmal umstellen, im Paket Steuerbüro, mit Übersicht, wer startklar ist. ## Works with XRechnung (UBL und CII), ZUGFeRD ab Version 2 (Factur-X kompatibel), Gängige Rechnungs- und Buchhaltungsprogramme, Kostenlose Werkzeuge zum Erstellen und Anzeigen von E-Rechnungen, DATEV-Weitergabe an das Steuerbüro, Leitweg-ID für öffentliche Auftraggeber, Prüfwerkzeuge zur Validierung ## Pricing Einmalpreise pro Unternehmen, einmal bezahlt nach Bestätigung per E-Mail. Kein Abo und keine Provision auf Software: Ist ein empfohlenes Programm kostenpflichtig, zahlen Sie es direkt beim Anbieter. Preise zzgl. USt. Gründerkunden-Preis für Bestellungen im frühen Zugang. | Plan | Price | Includes | | --- | --- | --- | | Check & Empfang | 29 € einmalig | Betroffenheits-Check schriftlich; Empfangsadresse und Anzeigewerkzeug; Weiterleitung an Buchhaltung; Test-E-Rechnung empfangen; Zusammenfassung | | Startklar 2027 | 79 € einmalig | Alles aus Check & Empfang; Rechnungsvorlage auf ZUGFeRD oder XRechnung; Validierung jeder Vorlage; Testversand an 3 Ihrer Kunden; Kundenstamm mit Rechnungsadressen und Leitweg-IDs (bis 100); Ablage nach GoBD eingerichtet | | Steuerbüro | 249 € einmalig | Bis 5 Mandanten (45 € je weiterem); Alles aus Startklar 2027 je Mandant; Termine direkt mit den Mandanten; Übersicht zum Umstellungsstand; Bevorzugte Termine vor Jahresende | ## Compared with the alternatives - **Selbst umstellen.** Kostenlos: Es gibt Leitfäden, kostenlose Erstellungs- und Anzeigewerkzeuge und Prüfportale. Rechnen Sie mit einigen Stunden für Recherche, Einrichtung und Tests; E-Rechnung Startklar verkürzt das auf einen Termin. - **Neues Rechnungsprogramm.** Viele Programme können E-Rechnungen inzwischen ab Werk. Wenn Ihres das kann, sagen wir es Ihnen sofort. Ein Wechsel lohnt nur, wenn das bisherige Programm es nicht schafft. - **Steuerbüro.** Die richtige Wahl, wenn Ihr Büro die Einrichtung anbietet und vor Jahresende Zeit hat. Viele Kanzleien sind gerade ausgelastet; wir arbeiten auch im Auftrag des Steuerbüros. ## Security and data - Wir speichern keine Passwörter: Anmeldungen erfolgen durch Sie per Bildschirmfreigabe oder über einen befristeten Zugang, den Sie anschließend löschen. - Rechnungen laufen ausschließlich über Ihre eigenen Programme und Postfächer; nach der Einrichtung haben wir keinen Zugriff mehr. - Angaben aus dem Fragebogen werden verschlüsselt gespeichert und 90 Tage nach Abschluss gelöscht, auf Wunsch früher. - Zugriff haben nur die Personen, die Ihren Auftrag bearbeiten; jeder Zugriff wird protokolliert. ## Von der Anfrage bis startklar Wir bestätigen Ihre Anfrage innerhalb eines Werktags; die meisten Betriebe sind nach einem Termin startklar. - Tag 1: Sie füllen den 5-Minuten-Fragebogen aus; wir bestätigen den Preis per E-Mail. - Tag 2: Betroffenheits-Check und Plan; Sie geben frei. - Tag 2–3: Einrichtung per Bildschirmfreigabe, Validierung und Testversand. - Tag 3: Zusammenfassung für Ihre Unterlagen und Ihr Steuerbüro. ## FAQ ### Ab wann muss ich E-Rechnungen ausstellen? Bei mehr als 800.000 € Gesamtumsatz im Vorjahr ab dem 1. Januar 2027, sonst ab dem 1. Januar 2028. Empfangen können müssen Sie E-Rechnungen schon seit dem 1. Januar 2025. Die Pflicht betrifft inländische Rechnungen zwischen Unternehmen. ### Ich bin Kleinunternehmer. Betrifft mich das? Empfangen müssen auch Kleinunternehmer E-Rechnungen können. Für das Ausstellen gelten für Kleinunternehmer Ausnahmen; lassen Sie die Einordnung Ihres Falls im Zweifel von Ihrem Steuerbüro bestätigen. Den Empfang richten wir in jedem Fall ein. ### Reicht ein PDF nicht mehr? Ein reines PDF ist keine E-Rechnung. Zulässig sind strukturierte Formate wie XRechnung oder ZUGFeRD; bei ZUGFeRD steckt die strukturierte Rechnung in einem PDF, das weiterhin für Menschen lesbar ist. ### Muss ich neue Software kaufen? Meist nicht. Viele Programme können E-Rechnungen bereits, und für wenige Rechnungen gibt es kostenlose Werkzeuge. Wir empfehlen nur dann einen Wechsel, wenn es nicht anders geht, und erhalten keine Provision. ### Brauchen Sie meine Zugangsdaten? Nein. Wir arbeiten per Bildschirmfreigabe, während Sie angemeldet sind, oder mit einem befristeten Zugang, den Sie danach löschen. ### Wie lange dauert es? Prüfung und Plan erhalten Sie innerhalb eines Werktags, die Einrichtung ist meist ein Termin von 60 bis 90 Minuten innerhalb von zwei Werktagen. ### Ist das Steuerberatung? Nein. E-Rechnung Startklar ist eine technische Einrichtungsleistung. Für steuerliche Fragen Ihres Unternehmens ist Ihr Steuerbüro zuständig. --- Rotomal · https://rotomal.com/e-rechnung-2027/ · hello@rotomal.com # Estimate Chaser: Chases open estimates and signs change orders for contractors on Jobber or Housecall Pro. > Estimate Chaser watches your open estimates in Jobber or Housecall Pro and follows up by text and email on a schedule written for your trade, until the customer answers. Mid-job, it captures a signed change order with photos so extra work gets paid for, and syncs it all back to your platform. - Page: https://rotomal.com/estimate-chaser/ - Category: Field service tools - Language: en - Billing: subscription - From: $29 per month - Request (free, no card): https://rotomal.com/estimate-chaser/request/ - Follow-ups stop the moment a customer replies, approves or declines, so nobody is chased after saying yes. - Change orders carry photos, line items and an on-screen signature, and post back to the job as an approved amount. - One dashboard number: dollars from estimates approved after at least one automated follow-up went out. ## Quotes nobody followed up on are the cheapest revenue you are not collecting Most home-service businesses send an estimate, wait, and move on to the next job. The customer meant to reply, got busy, and the quote sits open for weeks. The owner is on a roof or under a sink, so follow-up happens when someone remembers, which is rarely. Change orders have the same shape. The homeowner asks for an extra outlet or a second coat while the crew is on site. The crew says yes, does the work, and the extra never reaches the invoice, or it does and the customer disputes it because nothing was signed. Jobber and Housecall Pro already hold the data to fix both problems: every estimate has a status and a timestamp, every job has a customer with a phone number. What is missing is a process that runs without the owner's attention and reports what it recovered. - Owners on r/Construction ask how others keep track of estimates that still need a follow-up; the answers are mostly spreadsheets and memory. (source: https://www.reddit.com/r/Construction/comments/1w622iv/) - Jobber users on r/Contractor ask how to handle change orders that come up in the middle of a job. (source: https://www.reddit.com/r/Contractor/comments/1v6p5ln/) - Jobber reports more than 100,000 businesses on its platform and lets outside developers list apps in its marketplace. (source: https://developer.getjobber.com/docs/) ## How it works 1. **Connect your platform.** Install Estimate Chaser from the Jobber or Housecall Pro app marketplace and authorize access to estimates, jobs and customers. About five minutes; we never ask for your platform password. 2. **Pick a sequence for your trade.** Choose a template for plumbing, HVAC, electrical, roofing, painting, landscaping or general remodeling, or write your own. Each is 3–5 touches by text and email over 2–3 weeks, in wording you would actually send. 3. **Follow-ups run on their own.** Every estimate still open past the delay you set enters the sequence. Replies, approvals and declines stop it within a minute; replies land in your inbox and in the platform's customer notes. 4. **Capture change orders on site.** From the job, a tech opens the change-order form on their phone, adds photos and line items, and the customer signs on screen. The approved amount posts back to the job before the crew leaves. ## Features - **Trade-tuned sequences.** Seven starter sequences written for specific trades, each 3–5 touches over 14–21 days by SMS and email. Edit any step, change the timing, or add a final 'closing the file' message. - **Reply detection and stop rules.** A customer reply, an approval or decline in your platform, or a manual stop ends the sequence within about a minute. Exclude customers by tag. - **Signed change orders with photos.** Techs build a change order from the job on their phone: photos, description, line items and tax. The customer signs on the device or through a text link, and a PDF is attached to the job. - **Two-way sync.** Estimate status, customer contacts and job records come from your platform; approved change orders and follow-up notes go back. Nothing is entered twice. - **Dollars-won-back dashboard.** The value of estimates approved after at least one automated follow-up, plus signed change-order totals, by week and month. Estimates approved before any follow-up are not counted. - **Quiet hours and sending limits.** Texts go out only within hours you set in the customer's local time, never on holidays you mark, and never more than one message per customer per day. - **Registered business texting.** Messages come from a dedicated local number registered under US 10DLC rules, with STOP handling built in. - **Ask your AI assistant.** Connect Estimate Chaser to Claude, ChatGPT or another assistant through MCP and ask in plain language, for example "which estimates over $5,000 are still open?". Read-only by default; revoke access any time. ## Who it's for - **Owner-operators in the trades.** You quote during the day and invoice at night. Estimate Chaser follows up while you work, and the Monday digest tells you the two or three customers worth a personal call. - **Remodelers and painters with crews.** Scope changes happen on site. Crew leads capture the change order with photos and a signature so the extra work is agreed before it is done, not argued about after. - **Office managers running Jobber or Housecall Pro.** You already live in the platform. Follow-ups, replies and change orders appear in the records you check anyway, and the dashboard shows what the process recovered. ## Works with Jobber (app marketplace), Housecall Pro (app marketplace), SMS from a 10DLC-registered local number, Email from your business name and reply-to address, E-signature on the tech's phone or via a text link, PDF export of signed change orders, CSV export of follow-up activity, Zapier webhook for other CRMs, MCP connector for Claude, ChatGPT and other AI assistants ## Pricing Billed monthly, cancel any time, no contract. Founding customer pricing is locked for 24 months for accounts opened during early access. Every plan includes both platforms, all sequences, change orders, the dashboard and a texting number. Texts beyond the monthly allowance are billed at cost. | Plan | Price | Includes | | --- | --- | --- | | Starter | $29 per month | 1 user; Up to 40 estimates entering sequences per month; 300 text messages per month included; All trade sequence templates; Change orders with photos and e-signature; Dollars-won-back dashboard | | Growth | $49 per month | Up to 5 users; Up to 150 estimates per month; 1,000 text messages per month included; Custom sequences with your own timing and wording; Monday owner digest; Quiet hours by customer time zone; CSV export | | Scale | $89 per month | Unlimited users; Up to 500 estimates per month; 3,000 text messages per month included; Separate sequences per service line; Zapier webhook for other CRMs; Priority support by email and phone | ## Compared with the alternatives - **Doing it by hand.** A spreadsheet or your platform's pending-estimates view works if someone checks it daily and sends the texts. Most owners do not, which is why open quotes pile up. Free, but it depends on a habit. - **Your platform's built-in reminders.** Jobber and Housecall Pro may include a basic quote reminder on some plans; check what yours offers. A single generic message is not a trade-specific sequence, signed change orders with photos, or a recovered-dollars figure. If a basic reminder is enough for you, you may not need us. - **Instant-quote and sales add-ons.** Tools such as Responsibid are priced at $179–229 per month and focus on producing the quote. Estimate Chaser starts at $29 and focuses on what happens after the quote is sent. ## Security and data - Data is stored on servers in the United States, encrypted in transit (TLS) and at rest. - We request only the permissions needed: read estimates, jobs and customers; write notes and line items. We never see your platform password. - Customer phone numbers and emails are used only to send the follow-ups you configured; we do not sell or share contact data. - Message logs and signed PDFs are kept while your account is active and for 90 days after cancellation, then deleted. Email us to delete sooner. - Only you, the users you add, and our support staff when you ask for help can access your account. ## Your first week We set up new accounts within 2 business days and stay in touch through the first week. - Day 1: Install from the marketplace, connect your account and pick a trade sequence. We submit your 10DLC registration. - Day 2–3: Your account is live; email follow-ups start on estimates open past your chosen delay. We review your sequence wording with you. - Day 4–5: Texting number typically approved; SMS touches join the sequence. Techs receive their change-order link. - Day 7: You get the first Monday digest, and the dashboard shows the first recovered dollars if any estimates closed. ## FAQ ### Does it work with both Jobber and Housecall Pro? Yes. Install it from either marketplace and connect one account per subscription. If you run both, tell us during onboarding and we will connect the second at no extra charge. ### Will it keep texting a customer who already said no? No. A reply of any kind, a decline or approval in your platform, or a manual stop ends the sequence within about a minute. Customers can also reply STOP, which blocks all further messages to that number. ### What is 10DLC and why does it matter? US carriers require businesses that text customers to register their brand and use case under the 10DLC program. We register a dedicated local number for you during onboarding; carriers usually approve within a few business days, and email follow-ups run in the meantime. ### What if Jobber or Housecall Pro adds this natively? They might. Our bet is on going deeper than a generic reminder: sequences written per trade, signed change orders with photos, and an honest recovered-dollars number. If a built-in feature does what you need, cancel any time; there is no contract. ### Is a change order signed on a phone legally binding? Electronic signatures are widely accepted for agreements like this in the US, but Estimate Chaser is software, not legal advice. Keep your own contract terms in the change-order template, and confirm with your lawyer when a job involves a lien, a permit or a dispute. ### How is 'dollars won back' calculated? It is the total value of estimates approved after at least one automated follow-up was sent, plus the total of signed change orders. It leaves out estimates approved before any follow-up, so the number understates rather than flatters. ### How long does setup take? Connecting your platform takes about five minutes. We onboard new accounts within 2 business days, including 10DLC registration and a review of your first sequence with you. ### Does it work with Claude or ChatGPT? Yes. Estimate Chaser includes an MCP connector, so Claude, ChatGPT and other MCP-compatible assistants can answer questions like "which estimates over $5,000 are still open?" from your data. It is read-only by default and you can revoke access at any time. --- Rotomal · https://rotomal.com/estimate-chaser/ · hello@rotomal.com # Storefront Rules: EU withdrawal button, legal-guarantee notice and green-claims scan for non-Shopify shops. > Storefront Rules adds the three things the EU's 2026 consumer-law changes require of an online shop: a working withdrawal button, the harmonised legal-guarantee notice, and a check of your catalogue for environmental claims that are now banned. Shopify shops have apps for this; the other platforms are thin, and that is where we focus. - Page: https://rotomal.com/eu-storefront-pack/ - Category: E-commerce compliance - Language: en - Billing: subscription - From: €5 per month - Request (free, no card): https://rotomal.com/eu-storefront-pack/request/ - Installs a 'Withdraw from contract' button and form that logs each request with a timestamp and sends the customer the acknowledgement the rule requires. - Shows the EU legal-guarantee notice on product pages, in the cart and at checkout, in every language your store runs. - Scans product titles and descriptions for generic green claims ('eco-friendly', 'climate neutral', 'sustainable') and lists each hit with the page to fix. ## Two EU consumer rules went live in 2026, and most non-Shopify shops haven't moved Since 19 June 2026, an online shop selling to EU consumers must offer a withdrawal button: a clearly labelled function on the site that lets a customer cancel within the withdrawal period, with a confirmation sent back to them. Since 27 September 2026, shops must display a standard notice about the legal guarantee of conformity, and generic environmental claims without recognised evidence are banned as unfair commercial practices. These rules apply regardless of platform. Shopify merchants have a crowded app marketplace to pick from. Merchants on Shopware, PrestaShop, Magento, Wix and BigCommerce mostly have to ask their agency for custom work, or paste a notice into a static page and hope that counts. Enforcement is national, through consumer authorities and competitor complaints. Storefront Rules does the three jobs properly, at a price that makes sense for a small shop, and keeps a log you can show if anyone asks. - An online 'withdraw from contract' button has been mandatory for distance contracts with EU consumers since 19 June 2026. (source: https://www.gtlaw.com/en/insights/2026/5/eu-consumer-law-new-withdrawal-button-requirements-for-online-contracts) - From 27 September 2026, shops must display the EU harmonised legal-guarantee notice, and generic environmental claims without recognised proof are prohibited. (source: https://products.cooley.com/2026/03/16/empowering-consumers-for-the-green-transition-directive-check-your-sustainability-claims-and-warranty-information-for-compliance-with-new-eu-regime) - A Shopify community thread shows merchants on standard plans struggling to display the legal-guarantee notice at checkout. (source: https://community.shopify.com/t/eu-legal-guarantee-notice-checkout-support-for-non-plus-plans/679112) ## How it works 1. **Install the module for your platform.** Shopware 6 (Store), PrestaShop (Addons), Magento 2 / Adobe Commerce (Composer package), Wix (embedded widget and page) or BigCommerce (script and page). 15–30 minutes; our team installs on request. 2. **Configure notices and texts.** Pick the languages your store runs. The legal-guarantee notice uses the official EU wording per language; the withdrawal button and form texts are pre-written and editable. Choose where the notice appears: product page, cart, checkout, footer. 3. **Run the green-claims scan.** The scanner reads your product titles, descriptions and category pages and flags phrases that fall under the generic environmental claims ban, with a suggested rewrite. You decide what to change; nothing is edited automatically. 4. **Keep the log.** Withdrawal requests, acknowledgements and notice settings are logged with timestamps. Export as CSV or PDF for your records or your lawyer. ## Features - **Withdrawal button and form.** A button labelled 'Withdraw from contract here' (localised) available from any page, leading to a form that collects name, order reference, contact details and date. The customer gets an acknowledgement by email; you get the request in your inbox and in the log. - **Legal-guarantee notice placement.** The harmonised notice in the EU languages your shop uses, shown on product pages, cart and checkout, plus a dedicated page. Where a platform's checkout doesn't allow content blocks, we show it on the step before. - **Green-claims scanner.** Scans your catalogue for generic environmental claims ('eco', 'green', 'climate neutral' without specifics) and sustainability labels not based on a certification scheme. Each hit shows the product, the phrase and why it may be a problem. Runs weekly or on demand. - **Commercial-guarantee wording.** If you offer your own warranty beyond the legal one, the notice must distinguish it. The module helps you state your commercial guarantee next to the legal notice without confusing the two. - **Multi-language and multi-storefront.** One installation covers all languages and sales channels of your store. Shopware sales channels and PrestaShop multistore are supported. - **Request log and export.** Each withdrawal request, with timestamp, order reference and acknowledgement status, is kept for your retention period and exportable. No request is lost in a mailbox. - **Order lookup.** Where the platform exposes orders, the form validates the order reference and shows the order date so you can see whether the request falls within the withdrawal period. The decision stays yours. - **Ask your AI assistant.** Connect Storefront Rules to Claude, ChatGPT or another assistant through MCP and ask in plain language, for example "which product pages still fail the green-claims scan?". Read-only by default; revoke access any time. ## Who it's for - **Small EU merchants on Shopware, PrestaShop or Magento.** You run a shop with one or two people, your agency quoted custom work for the button and notice, and you want a module that handles it for a few euros a month. - **Agencies maintaining many non-Shopify stores.** You need one module you can install across client stores, with a per-store log and a scanner report you can hand to the client. - **Wix and BigCommerce stores selling into the EU.** Your platform's app market has little for EU consumer law; you get a widget plus a page that covers the button and notice. - **Brands with sustainability messaging.** Your catalogue is full of 'eco' and 'green'. The scanner shows exactly which phrases are at risk under the new rules so you can rewrite before someone else points it out. ## Works with Shopware 6 (Community Store), PrestaShop 1.7 and 8 (Addons), Magento 2 / Adobe Commerce (Composer), Wix (embedded widget and page), BigCommerce (script manager and page), Email delivery of acknowledgements via your store's mail or ours, CSV and PDF exports, MCP connector for Claude, ChatGPT and other AI assistants ## Pricing Prices in euros per store, billed monthly, VAT added where applicable. Founding customer pricing is locked for 12 months for stores onboarded during early access. All plans include the withdrawal button, the legal-guarantee notice, the request log and updates when the official texts change. | Plan | Price | Includes | | --- | --- | --- | | Basic | €5 per month | 1 store, all languages; Withdrawal button and form; Legal-guarantee notice; Request log and CSV export; Monthly green-claims scan, up to 500 products; Email support | | Plus | €12 per month | 1 store, all languages and sales channels; Everything in Basic; Weekly green-claims scan, up to 5,000 products, with rewrite suggestions; Commercial-guarantee wording helper; Order lookup in the withdrawal form; Monthly PDF compliance report; Priority email support | | Agency | €39 per month | Up to 10 stores (more at €4 per store); Everything in Plus; Per-store logs and reports; White-label report PDF; Installation by our team on each store; Shared agency dashboard; Chat support | ## Compared with the alternatives - **Shopify apps.** If you are on Shopify, there are many withdrawal-button and guarantee-notice apps; use one of them. Storefront Rules exists for the platforms those apps don't cover. - **Custom work by your agency.** A developer can add a button, a form and a notice to any platform. Expect a few hundred to a few thousand euros per store, and nobody watching for text or rule changes afterwards. - **A static page and a footer link.** Cheap and common, but the withdrawal rule requires a function that confirms receipt, and the guarantee notice has to be visible where the customer decides to buy. A page nobody finds is a weak defence. ## Security and data - Withdrawal requests (name, contact details, order reference) are stored encrypted at rest on servers in the EU and used for nothing beyond the service. - Catalogue text for the scanner is read through your platform's API; only the flagged phrases are stored, with their product references. - Requests are retained for the period you set (default 3 years), exportable at any time, and deleted on written request. - A GDPR data processing agreement is included; we act as processor for the customer data in withdrawal requests. ## Your first week We onboard new stores within 2 business days. Most stores have the button and notice live and the first scan report in hand within the first week. - Day 1: Install the module (or let us), pick languages and placements, and send a test withdrawal request end to end. - Day 2–3: Run the first green-claims scan; review the top hits together and agree on rewrites. - Day 5: Hand the text checklist to whoever maintains your terms; enable the monthly report. - Day 7: Review the request log and confirm your team knows where withdrawal requests arrive. ## FAQ ### Is this legal advice? No. Storefront Rules is software that installs the required functions and flags risky phrases. Whether your shop is compliant overall, and how the rules apply to your products, is a question for your lawyer or consumer authority. ### Does the green-claims scanner guarantee I'm compliant? No. It finds phrases that match patterns the directive targets and explains why. It can miss claims and it can flag phrases that are fine in context. Treat it as a checklist, not a verdict. ### My platform isn't listed. Can you support it? We build platform modules in order of demand. Tell us your platform when you request service; if enough founding customers ask, it moves up the list. We don't take payment for platforms that aren't ready. ### Where does the button need to appear? The rule requires it to be clearly labelled and easily accessible throughout the withdrawal period, which in practice means reachable from any page, not only inside the account area. Our default puts it in the footer and in the order-confirmation email; you can add placements. ### Can the customer still withdraw by email or letter? Yes. The button is an additional channel the law requires you to offer; it does not replace the others. Requests from other channels can be logged manually so your record is complete. ### Do I need to change my terms and conditions? Possibly: your withdrawal policy should mention the button, and your guarantee statements should match the notice. We give you a checklist of text changes to pass to whoever maintains your legal texts; we don't rewrite them. ### What happens if the official notice text changes? We update the module and notify you with the differences. You decide when to deploy, except on managed installs where we deploy for you after telling you. ### Does it work with Claude or ChatGPT? Yes. Storefront Rules includes an MCP connector, so Claude, ChatGPT and other MCP-compatible assistants can answer questions like "which product pages still fail the green-claims scan?" from your data. It is read-only by default and you can revoke access at any time. --- Rotomal · https://rotomal.com/eu-storefront-pack/ · hello@rotomal.com # Facture Prête: Your French business ready for mandatory e-invoicing in 48 hours: approved platform chosen, registered, tested. > Since 1 September 2026, every VAT-registered business in France must be able to receive e-invoices through an approved platform (plateforme agréée), and small and micro businesses must issue them from 1 September 2027. Facture Prête compares the platforms for your situation, where a free plan is often enough, registers you, checks your SIREN in the central directory, updates your invoice template with the new mandatory fields and tests reception. One payment, no subscription with us. - Page: https://rotomal.com/en/facture-electronique/ - Category: Invoicing compliance (France) - Language: en - Billing: one-time payment - From: €19 one-time - Request (free, no card): https://rotomal.com/en/facture-electronique/request/ - An approved platform chosen for your activity and volume, preferring free plans whenever they are enough. - Your SIREN checked in the central directory and a test invoice received end to end, so you know it really works. - Your invoice template updated with the new mandatory fields, ready for issuing in 2027. ## The reform is in force, and choosing a platform eats hours Since 1 September 2026, a PDF sent by email is no longer enough for invoices between French businesses: they must travel through a platform approved by the tax administration, and your business must be reachable in the central directory to receive them. The receiving obligation covers every VAT-registered business, including micro-entrepreneurs under the VAT franchise. Issuing follows on 1 September 2027 for small and micro businesses. There are now dozens of approved platforms, with capped free plans, offers tied to a bank or an accounting tool, and terms that keep changing. For a freelancer, comparing them, registering, checking that the SIREN points to the right platform and updating invoices easily takes a day, and often keeps getting postponed. Facture Prête does that work for you in 48 hours. We are not an approved platform and take no commission: we choose the right platform with you, often free for receiving, handle the registration and settings, and check that everything works. - All VAT-registered businesses in France must be able to receive e-invoices since 1 September 2026; small, micro and mid-size businesses must issue them from 1 September 2027. (source: https://www.cegid.com/fr/facture-electronique-obligatoire/calendrier-facture-electronique/) - The reform adds mandatory fields to B2B invoices: the customer's SIREN, the category of the transaction, the VAT-on-debits option and the delivery address when it differs. (source: https://www.keobiz.fr/le-mag/mentions-obligatoires-facture-electronique/) - France's 2026 Finance Act sets a fine of €50 per non-compliant e-invoice and €500 per missing e-reporting transmission, within annual caps. (source: https://www.banqup.com/fr-be/resources/blog/france-approves-finance-act-2026-confirms-e-invoicing-and-e-reporting-rules) ## How it works 1. **A 5-minute questionnaire.** Your legal status, current invoicing or accounting software, bank, how many invoices you receive and issue per month, and whether you also sell to consumers or abroad. 2. **We choose the platform.** Within one business day, a written recommendation: the approved platform that fits, the exact plan, what it costs (often nothing for receiving) and why. You approve it. 3. **Registration and settings.** We guide the registration over screen share or do it with your consent, check your SIREN in the central directory, the receiving address and forwarding to your accountant. 4. **Test and handover.** A test invoice received end to end, your invoice template updated, and a one-page summary: your platform login, what changes in 2027 and what you no longer need to do. ## Features - **Comparison for your case.** Approved platforms compared on your real situation: volumes, software you already use, bank, e-reporting needs. We prefer free plans when they are enough and say so when they are not. - **Registration and directory check.** Account opened on the chosen platform and your SIREN confirmed as attached to it in the central directory; otherwise your suppliers' invoices never reach you. - **Tested reception.** A test e-invoice sent to your business and received on the platform, then forwarded automatically to your accountant or accounting software if you want. - **Compliant invoice template.** Your template updated with the customer SIREN, the transaction category (goods, services or both), the VAT-on-debits option where relevant and the delivery address, in your software or on the platform. - **Customer file completed.** The SIREN numbers of your business customers found from their name or SIRET and added to your customer file, so your 2027 invoices are routed correctly (Ready for 2027 plan). - **E-reporting explained.** If you sell to consumers or abroad, we explain what the platform will report to the administration from 2027 and check your plan includes it. - **Written summary.** One clear page: platform, login, receiving address, what your accountant does, and the three dates to remember. Keep it for any question or audit. ## Who it's for - **Micro-entrepreneurs and freelancers in France.** You receive invoices from business suppliers and will issue your own from 2027. You want a simple, ideally free setup without spending a day on it. - **Tradespeople, shops and small companies.** Supplier invoices every week, a till or invoicing tool already in place, and no time to compare dozens of platforms. - **Foreign founders with a French entity.** A French SAS, SARL or micro-enterprise run from abroad, where the reform's French-only documentation is the main obstacle. We work in English. - **Accountants and entrepreneur networks.** Several clients or members to bring into compliance the same way, tracked per SIREN, on the Firm plan. ## Works with Approved platforms registered with the French tax administration (DGFiP), Central directory of the public invoicing portal, Common French invoicing and accounting software, Online banks offering e-invoicing, Factur-X, UBL and CII formats, Automatic forwarding to your accountant, PDF and CSV export of received invoices ## Pricing One-time prices per business (SIREN), paid once after we confirm by email. No subscription with us and no commission on the platform you choose: if its plan is paid, you pay the platform directly at its public price. Founding customer pricing applies to early-access orders. | Plan | Price | Includes | | --- | --- | --- | | Receive | €19 one-time | Approved platform recommendation; Guided registration; SIREN checked in the directory; Test invoice received; Written summary | | Ready for 2027 | €49 one-time | Everything in Receive; Invoice template with the new mandatory fields; Business customers' SIREN added (up to 200); Automatic forwarding to your accountant; E-reporting explained; One email question at a time until September 2027 | | Firm | €149 one-time | Up to 5 SIREN (€29 per extra SIREN); Everything in Ready for 2027; Tracking sheet per SIREN; Summaries under your name for your clients; Priority handling | ## Compared with the alternatives - **Doing it yourself.** Free: the tax administration publishes the official list of approved platforms and several offer free receiving. Allow a few hours to compare, register, check the directory and update your invoices, in French. - **Your bank or current software.** Many online banks and invoicing tools now include an e-invoicing plan. Often the right choice, and we will tell you if it is yours; registration, the directory entry and the invoice template still need checking. - **Your accountant.** The right person if the firm already offers the setup. Many bill it by the hour or keep it for full-service clients; Facture Prête is a fixed price and can also work for the firm. ## Security and data - We keep no passwords: logins are done by you over screen share, or with temporary access you delete afterwards. - Your invoices travel only through the approved platform you chose; we have no access once the setup is finished. - Your case details (SIREN, software, customer file) are stored encrypted and deleted 90 days after delivery, or sooner on request. - Only the people handling your case can access it, and every access is logged. ## From request to compliant We confirm your request within one business day, and most businesses are compliant within 48 hours. - Day 1: You fill in the 5-minute questionnaire; we confirm the price by email. - Day 2: Written platform recommendation; you approve it. - Day 2–3: Registration, directory check and test invoice received. - Day 3: Invoice template updated and written summary delivered. ## FAQ ### I am a micro-entrepreneur under the VAT franchise. Does this apply to me? Yes. Since 1 September 2026 you must be able to receive e-invoices, and from 1 September 2027 you must issue e-invoices to business customers. The VAT franchise does not exempt you from the reform. ### Do I have to pay for an approved platform? Not necessarily. Several platforms offer free receiving, often with a volume cap. We recommend a free plan when it covers your needs, and we take no commission on your choice. ### Are you an approved platform? No. Facture Prête is an independent setup service: we help you choose an approved platform, register and check everything. Your invoices travel through the platform you chose, never through us. ### What about invoices to consumers or customers abroad? They are not e-invoiced but covered by e-reporting: from 2027 the platform sends certain data to the administration. We check your plan covers it and explain what will be reported. ### Do you need my passwords? No. We work over screen share while you log in, or with an access you create for us and remove afterwards. We never ask for banking or tax-account credentials. ### How long does it take? The recommendation arrives within one business day and most setups are finished within 48 hours, test included. Expect about 30 minutes of your own time in total. ### Is this tax advice? No. Facture Prête is a technical setup service. For a tax question specific to your situation, your accountant or your local business tax office has the final word. --- Rotomal · https://rotomal.com/en/facture-electronique/ · hello@rotomal.com # Facture Prête: Votre entreprise prête pour la facture électronique en 48 h : plateforme agréée choisie, inscrite, testée. > Depuis le 1er septembre 2026, toute entreprise assujettie à la TVA doit pouvoir recevoir ses factures électroniques via une plateforme agréée, et les PME, TPE et micro-entreprises devront les émettre à partir du 1er septembre 2027. Facture Prête compare les plateformes pour votre cas, souvent une offre gratuite suffit, vous inscrit, vérifie votre SIREN dans l'annuaire, met votre modèle de facture aux nouvelles mentions et teste la réception. Un seul paiement, pas d'abonnement chez nous. - Page: https://rotomal.com/facture-electronique/ - Category: Conformité facturation - Language: fr - Billing: one-time payment - From: 19 € paiement unique - Request (free, no card): https://rotomal.com/facture-electronique/request/ - Une plateforme agréée choisie selon votre activité et votre volume, en privilégiant les offres gratuites quand elles suffisent. - Votre SIREN vérifié dans l'annuaire central et une facture de test reçue de bout en bout, pour savoir que tout fonctionne vraiment. - Votre modèle de facture mis à jour avec les nouvelles mentions obligatoires, prêt pour l'émission de 2027. ## La réforme est en vigueur, et le choix d'une plateforme fait perdre des heures Depuis le 1er septembre 2026, un PDF envoyé par e-mail ne suffit plus pour les factures entre entreprises françaises : elles doivent circuler par une plateforme agréée par l'administration fiscale, et votre entreprise doit être joignable dans l'annuaire central pour les recevoir. L'obligation de réception vaut pour toutes les entreprises assujetties, y compris les micro-entrepreneurs en franchise de TVA. L'émission suit le 1er septembre 2027 pour les PME, TPE et micro-entreprises. Le marché compte désormais des dizaines de plateformes agréées, avec des offres gratuites plafonnées, des offres liées à une banque ou à un logiciel de comptabilité, et des conditions qui changent. Pour un indépendant, comparer, s'inscrire, vérifier que son SIREN pointe vers la bonne plateforme et adapter ses factures représente facilement une journée de travail, souvent repoussée. Facture Prête fait ce travail pour vous en 48 heures. Nous ne sommes pas une plateforme agréée et nous ne prenons aucune commission : nous choisissons avec vous la plateforme adaptée, souvent gratuite pour la réception, nous faisons l'inscription et les réglages, puis nous vérifions que tout fonctionne. - Toutes les entreprises assujetties à la TVA doivent pouvoir recevoir des factures électroniques depuis le 1er septembre 2026 ; les PME, TPE et micro-entreprises devront les émettre à partir du 1er septembre 2027. (source: https://www.cegid.com/fr/facture-electronique-obligatoire/calendrier-facture-electronique/) - La réforme ajoute de nouvelles mentions obligatoires sur les factures entre entreprises : SIREN du client, catégorie de l'opération, option pour la TVA sur les débits et adresse de livraison si elle diffère. (source: https://www.keobiz.fr/le-mag/mentions-obligatoires-facture-electronique/) - La loi de finances 2026 prévoit une amende de 50 € par facture électronique non conforme et de 500 € par transmission de e-reporting manquante, dans la limite de plafonds annuels. (source: https://www.banqup.com/fr-be/resources/blog/france-approves-finance-act-2026-confirms-e-invoicing-and-e-reporting-rules) ## Comment ça marche 1. **Un questionnaire de 5 minutes.** Votre statut, votre logiciel de facturation ou de comptabilité actuel, votre banque, le nombre de factures reçues et émises par mois, et si vous vendez aussi à des particuliers ou à l'étranger. 2. **Nous choisissons la plateforme.** Sous un jour ouvré, une recommandation écrite : la plateforme agréée adaptée à votre cas, l'offre exacte, ce qu'elle coûte (souvent rien pour la réception) et pourquoi. Vous validez. 3. **Inscription et réglages.** Nous vous guidons pour l'inscription en partage d'écran ou nous la faisons avec votre accord, nous vérifions votre SIREN dans l'annuaire, l'adresse de réception et le transfert à votre comptable. 4. **Test et livraison.** Une facture de test reçue de bout en bout, votre modèle de facture mis à jour, et un récapitulatif d'une page : vos identifiants de plateforme, ce qui change en 2027 et ce que vous n'avez plus à faire. ## Features - **Comparatif personnalisé.** Les plateformes agréées comparées sur votre cas réel : volumes, logiciel déjà utilisé, banque, besoin d'e-reporting. Nous privilégions les offres gratuites quand elles suffisent et le disons quand ce n'est pas le cas. - **Inscription et annuaire.** Ouverture du compte sur la plateforme choisie et vérification que votre SIREN est bien rattaché à cette plateforme dans l'annuaire central, sans quoi les factures de vos fournisseurs ne vous parviennent pas. - **Réception testée.** Une facture électronique de test envoyée à votre entreprise et reçue sur la plateforme, puis transmise automatiquement à votre comptable ou à votre logiciel de comptabilité si vous le souhaitez. - **Modèle de facture conforme.** Votre modèle mis à jour avec le SIREN du client, la catégorie d'opération (biens, services ou mixte), l'option TVA sur les débits le cas échéant et l'adresse de livraison, dans votre logiciel ou sur la plateforme. - **Fichier clients complété.** Les SIREN de vos clients professionnels retrouvés à partir de leur nom ou de leur SIRET et ajoutés à votre fichier clients, pour que vos factures 2027 soient bien acheminées (formule Prêt pour 2027). - **Point sur l'e-reporting.** Si vous vendez à des particuliers ou à l'étranger, nous expliquons ce que la plateforme transmettra à l'administration à partir de 2027 et vérifions que l'option est prévue dans votre offre. - **Récapitulatif écrit.** Une page claire : plateforme, identifiants, adresse de réception, ce que fait votre comptable, et les trois dates à retenir. À conserver en cas de contrôle ou de question. ## Who it's for - **Micro-entrepreneurs et indépendants.** Vous recevez des factures de fournisseurs professionnels et vous émettrez les vôtres en 2027. Vous voulez une solution simple, gratuite si possible, sans y consacrer une journée. - **Artisans, commerçants et TPE.** Des factures fournisseurs chaque semaine, un logiciel de caisse ou de facturation déjà en place, et pas le temps de comparer des dizaines de plateformes. - **Professions libérales et sociétés de conseil.** Des clients professionnels qui vous demandent déjà votre plateforme de réception, et des factures à adapter aux nouvelles mentions. - **Cabinets comptables et associations d'entrepreneurs.** Plusieurs clients ou adhérents à mettre en conformité de la même façon, avec un suivi par SIREN, sur la formule Cabinet. ## Works with Plateformes agréées immatriculées par la DGFiP, Annuaire central du Portail public de facturation, Logiciels de facturation et de comptabilité courants, Banques en ligne proposant la facturation électronique, Formats Factur-X, UBL et CII, Transfert automatique vers votre expert-comptable, Export PDF et CSV de vos factures reçues ## Pricing Prix uniques par entreprise (SIREN), payés une seule fois après confirmation par e-mail. Aucun abonnement chez nous et aucune commission sur la plateforme choisie : si son offre est payante, vous la payez directement à la plateforme, au tarif public. Tarif clients fondateurs pour les commandes en accès anticipé. | Plan | Price | Includes | | --- | --- | --- | | Réception | 19 € paiement unique | Recommandation de plateforme agréée; Inscription guidée; SIREN vérifié dans l'annuaire; Facture de test reçue; Récapitulatif écrit | | Prêt pour 2027 | 49 € paiement unique | Tout le contenu de Réception; Modèle de facture aux nouvelles mentions; SIREN de vos clients professionnels ajoutés (jusqu'à 200); Transfert automatique à votre comptable; Point sur l'e-reporting; Une question par e-mail jusqu'en septembre 2027 | | Cabinet | 149 € paiement unique | Jusqu'à 5 SIREN (29 € par SIREN supplémentaire); Tout le contenu de Prêt pour 2027; Tableau de suivi par SIREN; Récapitulatifs à votre nom pour vos clients; Traitement prioritaire | ## Compared with the alternatives - **Le faire soi-même.** Gratuit : la liste officielle des plateformes agréées est publiée par l'administration et plusieurs proposent la réception sans frais. Comptez quelques heures pour comparer, s'inscrire, vérifier l'annuaire et adapter vos factures. - **Votre banque ou votre logiciel actuel.** Beaucoup de banques en ligne et de logiciels de facturation incluent désormais une offre de facture électronique. C'est souvent le bon choix, et nous vous le dirons si c'est votre cas ; il reste à vérifier l'inscription, l'annuaire et le modèle de facture. - **Votre expert-comptable.** La bonne personne si votre cabinet propose déjà la mise en place. Beaucoup facturent ce travail en heures ou le réservent aux clients sous lettre de mission complète ; Facture Prête est un forfait fixe qui peut aussi travailler pour le cabinet. ## Security and data - Nous ne conservons aucun mot de passe : les connexions se font par vous, en partage d'écran, ou par un accès temporaire que vous supprimez ensuite. - Vos factures transitent uniquement par la plateforme agréée que vous avez choisie ; nous n'y avons pas accès une fois la mise en place terminée. - Les informations de votre dossier (SIREN, logiciel, fichier clients) sont stockées chiffrées et supprimées 90 jours après la livraison, ou plus tôt sur demande. - Seules les personnes qui traitent votre dossier y ont accès, et chaque accès est tracé. ## De la demande à la conformité Nous confirmons votre demande sous un jour ouvré, et la plupart des entreprises sont en règle sous 48 heures. - Jour 1 : vous remplissez le questionnaire de 5 minutes ; nous confirmons le tarif par e-mail. - Jour 2 : recommandation écrite de plateforme ; vous validez. - Jour 2 à 3 : inscription, vérification de l'annuaire et facture de test reçue. - Jour 3 : modèle de facture mis à jour et récapitulatif écrit livré. ## FAQ ### Je suis micro-entrepreneur en franchise de TVA, suis-je concerné ? Oui. Depuis le 1er septembre 2026, vous devez pouvoir recevoir des factures électroniques, et vous devrez émettre les vôtres vers vos clients professionnels à partir du 1er septembre 2027. La franchise de TVA ne dispense pas de la réforme. ### Dois-je payer une plateforme agréée ? Pas forcément. Plusieurs plateformes proposent la réception gratuitement, souvent avec un plafond de volume. Nous recommandons une offre gratuite quand elle couvre vos besoins, et nous ne touchons aucune commission sur votre choix. ### Êtes-vous une plateforme agréée ? Non. Facture Prête est un service indépendant de mise en place : nous vous aidons à choisir une plateforme agréée, à vous inscrire et à tout vérifier. Vos factures transitent par la plateforme que vous avez choisie, jamais par nous. ### Que se passe-t-il pour mes factures aux particuliers ou à l'étranger ? Elles ne passent pas par la facture électronique mais par l'e-reporting : la plateforme transmet certaines données à l'administration à partir de 2027. Nous vérifions que votre offre le prévoit et vous expliquons ce qui sera transmis. ### Avez-vous besoin de mes mots de passe ? Non. Nous travaillons en partage d'écran pendant que vous vous connectez, ou avec un accès que vous créez pour nous et supprimez ensuite. Nous ne demandons jamais vos identifiants bancaires ou fiscaux. ### Combien de temps cela prend-il ? La recommandation arrive sous un jour ouvré et la plupart des mises en place sont terminées sous 48 heures, test de réception compris. De votre côté, comptez environ 30 minutes au total. ### Est-ce du conseil fiscal ? Non. Facture Prête est un service de mise en place technique. Pour une question fiscale propre à votre situation, l'avis de votre expert-comptable ou de votre service des impôts des entreprises fait foi. --- Rotomal · https://rotomal.com/facture-electronique/ · hello@rotomal.com # Just-in-Case Binder: One guided call sets up a parent's digital legacy contacts and a family binder of accounts, bills and doctors, without collecting passwords. > Without setup, families often cannot get into a parent's phone, photos or email even with a death certificate, and nobody knows which bills are on autopay or who the doctors are. Just-in-Case Binder is one friendly video call with your parent: we turn on Apple Legacy Contact and Google Inactive Account Manager with them, and fill in a family binder of accounts, bills, insurance, doctors and documents. We never ask for or store a password. - Page: https://rotomal.com/family-tech-binder/ - Category: Family safety - Language: en - Billing: one-time payment - From: $29 one-time - Request (free, no card): https://rotomal.com/family-tech-binder/request/ - Apple Legacy Contact, Google Inactive Account Manager and Facebook legacy contact turned on together, with the family members your parent chooses. - A printable binder and a shared digital copy listing accounts, autopays, insurance, doctors, medications and where important papers are kept. - Passwords stay with your parent: we help set up a password manager's emergency access instead of writing passwords down. ## A will doesn't open a phone, and nobody knows where the insurance papers are When a parent falls ill or dies, families discover how much of life now sits behind a passcode: photos, messages, email with every bill, the doctor's portal. Apple and Google both offer ways to pass access to a trusted person, but neither is switched on by default, and without them the family may be locked out for good. The paper side is just as hard: which bank accounts exist, which bills come off which card, who the pharmacist is, where the house deeds are. Adult children piece it together during the worst week of their lives. It takes about an hour to prepare, with a parent who is well and in a good mood. Just-in-Case Binder makes that hour happen, guided by someone patient who isn't family, which is often what makes the conversation easier. - Neither Apple's Legacy Contact nor Google's Inactive Account Manager is enabled by default; without setup, family members may be unable to access the accounts even with a death certificate. (source: https://cybershack.com.au/consumer-advice/digital-legacy-guide/) - Google's policy is to delete an account after 2 years of inactivity unless Inactive Account Manager has been set up to share or keep data. (source: https://maketecheasier.com/setup-digital-legacy/) ## How it works 1. **Book a call that suits your parent.** A 60-minute video or phone call at a time that works for them, with you joining if you like. We send a short checklist of what to have nearby. 2. **Legacy access switched on.** Together with your parent, on their own phone and computer: Apple Legacy Contact, Google Inactive Account Manager and Facebook legacy contact, with the people they choose. 3. **The binder filled in.** We ask the questions and write it down: accounts, autopays, insurance, pension, doctors, medications, keys, and where the will and deeds are kept. Never passwords. 4. **Copies to the family.** A printable binder for your parent's drawer and a shared digital copy for the people they chose, plus a reminder to update it every year. ## Features - **Apple Legacy Contact.** Set up on your parent's iPhone with the people they choose, who receive the access key they would need to request the data after death. - **Google Inactive Account Manager.** Inactivity period, trusted contacts and which data each person receives, chosen with your parent and set in their Google account. - **Social media legacy settings.** Facebook legacy contact or memorialization preferences, and what your parent wants done with other accounts. - **Password manager emergency access.** If your parent uses a password manager, we help turn on its emergency-access feature; if not, we help them choose a simple one. We never see the passwords. - **The family binder.** Bank and pension accounts, autopays and which card they use, insurance policies, utilities, doctors, pharmacy, medications, advisers and where originals are kept. - **Printable and shared copies.** A large-print printed binder and a shared document for the family, with an 'in an emergency, start here' first page. - **Yearly refresh reminder.** A reminder each year to review the binder and legacy contacts, with a short call included on the Family plan. ## Who it's for - **Adult children of aging parents.** You want this in place, but the conversation is awkward and your parent prefers not to do it with you looking over their shoulder. - **Older adults planning ahead.** You want to make things easier for your family without handing over your passwords or your privacy. - **Couples and families after a health scare.** A diagnosis or a fall makes it urgent; one call puts the essentials in order quickly. ## Works with Apple Legacy Contact (iPhone, iPad, Mac), Google Inactive Account Manager, Facebook legacy contact, Emergency access in common password managers, Printable binder (PDF), Shared family document (Google Docs or Word) ## Pricing One-time prices, paid once after we confirm the call time. No subscription. We never collect passwords, codes or account logins. | Plan | Price | Includes | | --- | --- | --- | | Binder | $29 one-time | 60-minute guided call; Apple and Google legacy access set up; Family binder filled in; Printable and shared copies; Yearly reminder | | Family | $59 one-time | Two guided calls (one per parent, or together); Everything in Binder for each parent; Social media legacy settings; Password manager emergency access; Refresh call after 12 months | | Full set-up | $99 one-time | Up to 3 calls in the same week; Everything in Family; Help with patient-portal and pharmacy access for a nominated family member; Contact list for advisers, landlord and neighbors; Priority scheduling within 2 business days | ## Compared with the alternatives - **Doing it with your parent yourself.** Free, and the right choice if it's easy between you. Apple and Google both publish the steps. Many families find it's the conversation, not the settings, that gets postponed. - **Estate-planning lawyers.** Essential for wills, powers of attorney and anything legal, and some include a digital-assets clause. They usually don't sit with your parent to change phone settings. - **Fill-in-the-blank planners.** Books and templates for family information are cheap and useful. They don't switch on the legacy settings, and many stay half-filled in a drawer. ## Security and data - No passwords, codes or logins are collected, written in the binder or stored by us. - Settings are changed by your parent on their own devices, with us guiding by video or phone. - Working notes are encrypted and deleted 30 days after the binder is delivered. - The binder is shared only with the people your parent names. ## From request to binder We confirm a call time within one business day and deliver the binder within 2 business days of the call. - Day 1: Request the service and suggest a few call times that suit your parent. - Day 2: Short checklist sent so the right papers are nearby. - Call day: 60 minutes to switch on legacy access and fill in the binder. - Day after: Printable binder and shared copy sent to the people your parent chose. ## FAQ ### Do you see or store any passwords? No. Your parent types anything sensitive on their own device. The binder lists accounts and where things are, never passwords or codes. For passwords we set up a password manager's emergency access. ### Does my parent need to be good with technology? No. We go at their pace and do the explaining. If they use an iPhone or a Google account, we set up the legacy features on the call; if not, we focus on the binder. ### Is this a replacement for a will or power of attorney? No. Those are legal documents for a lawyer or notary. The binder records where they are kept and who to contact, which makes them easier to use. ### Can I join the call? Yes, if your parent wants you there. Some parents prefer to do it alone and share the binder afterwards; both work. ### Who gets a copy of the binder? Only the people your parent chooses. We delete our working notes 30 days after delivery and keep nothing else. ### What if my parent uses Android and Gmail? That's covered: Google Inactive Account Manager works for Gmail, Google Photos and Drive regardless of the phone. Apple Legacy Contact is only for Apple accounts. --- Rotomal · https://rotomal.com/family-tech-binder/ · hello@rotomal.com # Driver Binder: DQ files, Clearinghouse tracking and expiry alerts for trucking fleets of 2–25 trucks. > Driver Binder keeps a complete qualification file per driver, tracks Clearinghouse queries and English-proficiency screening records, and warns you before a medical card, CDL or annual review lapses. Published pricing, a driver app in Spanish, Punjabi and Russian, and a one-click audit binder. - Page: https://rotomal.com/fleet-driver-files/ - Category: Trucking compliance - Language: en - Billing: subscription - From: $49 per month - Request (free, no card): https://rotomal.com/fleet-driver-files/request/ - Per-driver checklist built on the 49 CFR Part 391 file requirements, with a red, yellow or green status for every item - Alerts 60, 30 and 7 days before medical certificates, CDLs, MVR reviews and annual Clearinghouse queries fall due - Driver onboarding app in English, Spanish, Punjabi and Russian; drivers photograph documents from their phone ## Roadside enforcement is up, and small fleets still track files in spreadsheets A two-truck carrier has the same driver qualification file obligations as a 500-truck fleet: application, motor vehicle record, road test, medical examiner's certificate, annual review, and a Clearinghouse query before hire and yearly after. Most small fleets keep these in a filing cabinet or a spreadsheet, and discover a lapse when an inspector or an insurance underwriter asks. Enforcement has tightened. English-proficiency checks returned to the roadside out-of-service criteria in 2025, and the Department of Transportation has publicly counted the drivers removed. One driver placed out of service strands a load; file gaps found in a new-entrant safety audit can cost a carrier its authority in its first year. Established compliance vendors sell through demos and annual contracts, with pricing hidden until you talk to sales. Driver Binder is the opposite: a published price, a request form, and an account set up within 2 business days. - News coverage from October 2025 reported more than 7,000 truckers sidelined for English-proficiency violations; by May 2026 the DOT was citing 20,000 drivers removed. (source: https://news.google.com/rss/search?q=English+proficiency+out-of-service+drivers+FMCSA+2026&hl=en-US&gl=US&ceid=US:en) - Foley's small-fleet compliance tier (DQ files, testing, Clearinghouse) is sold behind a demo request rather than a published price. (source: https://www.foley.io/pricing) - Small carriers already pay roughly $25–130 per month for trucking back-office software such as TruckingOffice. (source: https://www.truckingoffice.com/pricing) ## How it works 1. **Request service.** Fill in the request form with your USDOT number and driver count. We confirm by email and set up your account within 2 business days. 2. **Add your drivers.** Import a spreadsheet or add drivers one by one. Each driver gets a checklist of required file items and a link to the onboarding app in their language. 3. **Upload what you have.** Drivers photograph their CDL, medical card and application from their phone; you upload MVRs, road-test certificates and Clearinghouse query receipts. Missing items stay red until they are in. 4. **Let the alerts run.** Driver Binder emails and texts you ahead of each expiry, and prints an audit binder PDF whenever an inspector, insurer or auditor asks. ## Features - **Driver qualification file checklist.** A checklist per driver mapped to the items FMCSA expects in a DQ file, with upload, expiry date and status per item. Yellow 60 days before expiry, red when overdue. - **Expiry alerts by email and SMS.** Reminders at 60, 30 and 7 days for medical examiner's certificates, CDL expiry, the annual MVR review and the annual Clearinghouse query, sent to you and optionally to the driver. - **Clearinghouse query tracking.** Record the date, type and result of each pre-employment and annual query and store the receipt. You run the queries in the FMCSA Clearinghouse as you do today; Driver Binder keeps the proof and the schedule. - **English-proficiency screening record.** Log the date, who conducted the screening, the method used and any notes, so each driver's file shows the assessment happened. The method is yours to define; we do not grade drivers. - **Multilingual driver onboarding app.** Drivers complete the application, upload documents and sign consents from a phone, in English, Spanish, Punjabi or Russian. Documents land directly in the right file item. - **New-entrant audit binder.** One click produces a PDF binder per driver or for the whole fleet: cover index, every document and the alert history. Built for the new-entrant safety audit and insurance renewals. - **Accountant and insurance-agent access.** Give your trucking accountant or insurance agent read-only access to compliance status without exposing documents, or a full seat if they manage files for you. - **Ask your AI assistant.** Connect Driver Binder to Claude, ChatGPT or another assistant through MCP and ask in plain language, for example "which drivers' medical cards expire this quarter?". Read-only by default; revoke access any time. ## Who it's for - **Newly authorized carriers.** Your new-entrant safety audit is coming in your first year. Driver Binder gives you the file structure from day one, so the audit is a printout rather than a scramble. - **Fleets of 5–25 trucks with an office manager.** One person handles dispatch, billing and compliance. The checklist and alerts replace the spreadsheet and the wall calendar. - **Hotshot and owner-operator carriers with a few drivers.** You drive and manage. Drivers send documents from the road through the phone app; you approve them in minutes. - **Trucking accountants and insurance agents.** You advise dozens of small carriers. Set up Driver Binder for clients, see every client's status from one login, and ask us about referral pricing. ## Works with FMCSA Drug & Alcohol Clearinghouse (query receipts and schedule), FMCSA SAFER and USDOT number lookup, Email and SMS reminders, PDF audit binder export, CSV and Excel import of driver rosters, Any drug-and-alcohol consortium or third-party administrator (upload their enrollment and test documents), Smartphone camera upload from iOS and Android browsers, no app-store install, MCP connector for Claude, ChatGPT and other AI assistants ## Pricing Billed monthly, cancel any time. Founding customer pricing is locked for 24 months. All plans include the four-language driver app, SMS and email alerts, the audit binder PDF and unlimited document storage for active drivers. We onboard new accounts within 2 business days. | Plan | Price | Includes | | --- | --- | --- | | Starter | $49 per month | Up to 5 active drivers; DQ file checklist and document vault; Email and SMS expiry alerts; Clearinghouse query tracking; Driver app in English, Spanish, Punjabi and Russian; Audit binder PDF | | Fleet | $99 per month | Up to 12 active drivers; Everything in Starter; English-proficiency screening records; Read-only seats for your accountant or insurance agent; Roster import from CSV or Excel; Email support within one business day | | Fleet 25 | $199 per month | Up to 25 active drivers, then $8 per driver; Everything in Fleet; Multiple terminals or locations under one account; Custom checklist items for your own policies; Quarterly compliance status report by email; Onboarding call for your office staff | ## Compared with the alternatives - **Spreadsheets and a filing cabinet.** Free, and workable for two drivers. It fails when a medical card quietly expires, or when an auditor asks for a complete file and the documents are in three places. - **Foley.** A full compliance provider that also runs drug testing and background checks. Its small-fleet tier is sold through a demo with pricing on request; it suits carriers that want one vendor for everything. - **J.J. Keller and Tenstreet.** Built for larger carriers and recruiting departments, with implementation projects and contracts to match. More than a 10-truck fleet needs or wants to pay for. - **TruckingOffice and other dispatch software.** Dispatch, invoicing and IFTA tools at roughly $25–130 per month. Good at what they do, but not built around driver qualification files or Clearinghouse schedules. ## Security and data - Driver documents are stored in private cloud object storage in the United States, encrypted at rest; nothing is served from a public URL. - All traffic uses TLS; driver app links are single-use and expire after 7 days. - Access is role-based (owner, office, read-only advisor) and every view or download of a document is logged. - Inactive driver files are retained for the FMCSA retention period unless you delete them sooner; deletion requests are completed within 30 days, and we never sell or share driver data. ## Your first week We set up the account, you add drivers, and the first alerts are configured before the week is out. - Day 1: Request service; we confirm your USDOT number and create your account within 2 business days. - Day 2–3: Import your roster, send onboarding links to drivers, upload the documents you already hold. - Day 4–5: Review the red items per driver, record Clearinghouse query dates, set alert recipients. - Day 7: Print your first fleet audit binder and see what an auditor would see. ## FAQ ### Is Driver Binder a compliance service or a consultant? It is record-keeping software: the structure, the reminders and the audit printout. It does not replace a safety consultant or FMCSA guidance. Driver Binder is software, not legal or regulatory advice; confirm the requirements for your operation with FMCSA, your state agency or a qualified safety consultant. ### Does Driver Binder run Clearinghouse queries for me? No. Queries must be run by you, or by your designated consortium or third-party administrator, in the FMCSA Clearinghouse. Driver Binder tracks when each pre-employment and annual query is due and stores the receipt so the file shows it was done. ### Does the English-proficiency record satisfy FMCSA? FMCSA does not certify screening tools, and we do not claim ours is one. Driver Binder stores a dated record of the screening you perform, the method and who did it. How you assess drivers is your decision, ideally with your safety consultant's input. ### Which languages does the driver app support? English, Spanish, Punjabi and Russian at launch; your own screens and the audit binder are in English. Other languages are added when founding customers ask for them. ### What happens when a driver leaves? Mark the driver inactive. The file stays stored and exportable for the FMCSA retention period and is not billed; billing counts active drivers only. ### Can I export my data if I cancel? Yes. Every document and the full alert history export as PDF and CSV from your account. After cancellation we keep the data for 90 days so you can download it, then delete it. ### Why pick a new product over an established vendor? You can see the price and start without a sales call, and you deal directly with the small team building it. If you need drug-testing administration or background checks bundled in, a larger provider is the better fit. ### How is the price counted? By active drivers at the start of each billing month. Owner-operators who also drive count as drivers. Trucks, trailers and office staff are not counted. --- Rotomal · https://rotomal.com/fleet-driver-files/ · hello@rotomal.com # Form Relay: Form backend for AI-built and static sites: leads to WhatsApp, Slack, Sheets or a CRM. > Form Relay is the backend for forms on sites that don't have one: Lovable, Bolt, v0, Framer, Webflow exports and plain static hosting. Copy a snippet written to be pasted into your builder's prompt, and submissions arrive filtered for spam and routed to WhatsApp, Slack, email, Google Sheets or your CRM. - Page: https://rotomal.com/form-endpoint/ - Category: Developer tools - Language: en - Billing: subscription - From: $5 per month - Request (free, no card): https://rotomal.com/form-endpoint/request/ - Snippets are written as prompt text ('add a contact form that posts to this endpoint with these fields') so the builder wires it correctly on the first try, with a plain HTML version too. - Each submission is scored by an AI spam classifier plus a honeypot and rate limits; spam is held in a review folder, not deleted. - Routing is per form: a WhatsApp message to a verified number, a Slack channel, email with Reply-To set to the sender, a row in Google Sheets, a HubSpot contact, or a webhook. ## AI builders ship good-looking sites with forms that go nowhere Lovable, Bolt, v0 and similar tools generate a complete-looking website in minutes, including a contact form. Then the submit button does nothing, or the builder suggests setting up a database and serverless functions to receive the message. That is a lot of plumbing for 'send me the message'. The same gap exists on Framer sites below the plan that includes forms, on Webflow exports, and on every static site on Netlify, Vercel or GitHub Pages. Form backends are an established category because of it: the leading ones have thousands of paying subscribers. Most were designed for developers editing HTML, send to email only by default, and treat spam as your problem. Form Relay is designed for the way sites are built now: a snippet you give to the AI, spam filtering that uses the message content rather than a captcha your visitors hate, and routing to where small teams actually read messages, which is WhatsApp as often as Slack. - Web3Forms, a form backend run as a small business, reports about $40,854 in monthly recurring revenue from roughly 2,960 active subscriptions, hosted on Hetzner with billing via Paddle. (source: https://trustmrr.com/startup/web3forms) - Lead validation is a sizeable adjacent market: 1Lookup reports about $245,639 in monthly recurring revenue. (source: https://trustmrr.com/startup/1lookup) ## How it works 1. **Create a form and copy the snippet.** Name the form, choose fields, and pick your builder. You get a prompt-ready snippet ('Add a contact form that POSTs to this URL with fields name, email, message; on success show a thank-you message') or plain HTML and JavaScript. Two minutes. 2. **Paste it into your builder or site.** Paste the prompt into Lovable, Bolt or v0, or the HTML into Framer, Webflow or your static site. The builder generates the form against our endpoint; your domain is allow-listed so nobody else can post to it. 3. **Choose where messages go.** Turn on one or more destinations: WhatsApp (to a number you verify), Slack, email, Google Sheets, HubSpot or a webhook. Set an auto-reply to the sender if you want one. 4. **Submissions arrive, spam doesn't.** Each message passes a honeypot check, rate limits and an AI classifier. Clean messages are delivered within seconds; suspicious ones are held in a review folder you can glance at weekly. ## Features - **Prompt-ready snippets.** Every form has a copyable prompt tuned for Lovable, Bolt, v0 and Cursor, plus plain HTML and a fetch() example. The snippet includes field names, success and error handling and the honeypot field. - **AI spam filtering.** Content-based classification of each submission combined with a honeypot field, per-IP and per-form rate limits and optional disposable-email blocking. No captcha required; you can add one if you prefer. - **WhatsApp delivery.** Submissions arrive as a WhatsApp message on a number you verify, sent through the WhatsApp Business Platform. Popular with small businesses in Israel, Latin America and anywhere WhatsApp is the inbox. - **Slack, email, Sheets, HubSpot, webhooks.** Send each form to any combination. Email uses our authenticated domains with Reply-To set to the visitor, so you can reply from your inbox; Sheets appends a row per submission; HubSpot creates or updates a contact. - **File uploads.** Accept attachments up to 10 MB per submission (Pro and Agency), stored encrypted and linked from the notification. - **Lead validation (add-on).** Optionally check the submitter's email deliverability and phone number format before routing, so your WhatsApp alerts are for real leads. Billed per check. - **Agency workspaces.** Group forms by client, invite clients to see only their own submissions, and export per client. Notifications can carry your branding. - **Ask your AI assistant.** Connect Form Relay to Claude, ChatGPT or another assistant through MCP and ask in plain language, for example "show me this week's leads from the pricing page". Read-only by default; revoke access any time. ## Who it's for - **Freelancers building sites with Lovable, Bolt or v0.** You deliver sites quickly and the form is the last thing blocking handover. You get a working endpoint in minutes and a destination the client actually reads. - **Agencies managing dozens of client sites.** You need one place to manage every client's forms, with spam handled and per-client access. The Agency plan is built for that. - **Founders with a landing page.** Your site is static and you want enquiries in Slack or WhatsApp without standing up a backend. Starter covers it. - **Small businesses in WhatsApp-first markets.** Your customers expect a reply on WhatsApp within minutes. Submissions land there directly, with the visitor's details formatted so you can reply at once. ## Works with Lovable, Bolt, v0 and Cursor (prompt snippets), Framer and Webflow (HTML embed), Netlify, Vercel, GitHub Pages and any static host, WhatsApp Business Platform, Slack, Google Sheets, HubSpot CRM, Email from our authenticated domains, or your own domain on Pro, Webhooks (Zapier, Make, n8n or your own endpoint), MCP connector for Claude, ChatGPT and other AI assistants ## Pricing Prices in US dollars, billed monthly, cancel any time. Founding customer pricing is locked for 12 months for accounts opened during early access. All plans include spam filtering, snippets, email and Slack delivery, and a 30-day free trial with 50 submissions. | Plan | Price | Includes | | --- | --- | --- | | Starter | $5 per month | 1 site, up to 3 forms; 500 submissions per month; AI spam filtering; Email, Slack and Google Sheets delivery; Auto-reply to visitors; 90-day submission retention; Email support | | Pro | $19 per month | 10 sites, unlimited forms; 5,000 submissions per month; WhatsApp delivery; HubSpot and webhooks; File uploads up to 10 MB; Send from your own email domain; 1-year retention, priority support | | Agency | $49 per month | 50 sites, unlimited forms; 25,000 submissions per month; Everything in Pro; Client workspaces with restricted logins; Your branding on notifications; Per-client exports; Chat support and onboarding call | ## Compared with the alternatives - **Web3Forms, Formspree, Formcarry and other form backends.** Established services with generous free tiers (Web3Forms in particular) and email delivery. If your site is hand-coded HTML and email is your inbox, they are good and cheap. Form Relay differs in prompt snippets, AI spam filtering and WhatsApp routing. - **Your builder's native forms.** Framer and Webflow include forms on some plans, with their own limits and destinations. If you're on such a plan and email is enough, use them. Lovable, Bolt and v0 don't include a hosted form backend; they generate code that needs one. - **Supabase or a serverless function.** The route the builders suggest. Fully flexible, and you own the data, but you'll write and maintain the function, spam handling and notifications yourself. ## Security and data - Submissions and uploads are stored encrypted at rest; you choose EU or US storage at signup. All endpoints are HTTPS only. - Domain allow-listing prevents other sites from posting to your endpoint; API keys are hashed and revocable. - Message text used for spam scoring is processed by an AI classifier under a data processing agreement and not used to train models. - Retention follows your plan (90 days to 1 year, configurable shorter); deletion per submission is immediate, and account deletion removes all data within 30 days. ## Your first week We onboard new accounts within 2 business days, though most forms are live within ten minutes of signup. The first week is about routing and spam tuning. - Day 1: Create your first form, paste the snippet into your builder, and send a test submission to email or Slack. - Day 2–3: Verify your WhatsApp number or connect Google Sheets and HubSpot; set the auto-reply. - Day 5: Check the spam review folder together and adjust thresholds if any real messages were held. - Day 7: Add remaining sites or client workspaces; export your first week's submissions. ## FAQ ### Will the snippet really work with my builder? The prompt snippets are tested against current Lovable, Bolt and v0 output. Builders change; if a generated form doesn't submit, send us the generated code and we'll fix the snippet or your form within a business day. The plain HTML version works anywhere. ### How does the WhatsApp delivery work? We send notifications from our verified WhatsApp Business number to numbers you verify with a one-time code, using pre-approved message templates. The visitor's details are in the message; you reply to the visitor by email or phone, not inside that thread. ### What happens to spam? Submissions scored as spam are held in a review folder for 30 days, not deleted, and never delivered to WhatsApp or Slack. You can release false positives with one click, which also tunes your form's filter. ### Can visitors reply to my emails? Yes. Notification emails set Reply-To to the visitor's address, so replying from your inbox goes to them. On Pro you can send from your own domain after adding our DNS records. ### Is my submission data safe and GDPR-compliant? Submissions are encrypted at rest, retained for your plan's period, and deletable per submission or per form. A data processing agreement is available, and you can choose EU-only storage at signup. Spam scoring sends the message text to an AI classifier under our DPA. ### What if an AI builder adds a native form backend? Some will. We're month-to-month, and switching away costs nothing. Our bet is that spam filtering, WhatsApp routing and agency management stay worth $5–49 a month even then. ### Do you have a free plan? A 30-day trial with 50 submissions, no card required. After that, Starter is $5 a month; a low paid tier lets us afford spam filtering and reliable delivery. ### Does it work with Claude or ChatGPT? Yes. Form Relay includes an MCP connector, so Claude, ChatGPT and other MCP-compatible assistants can answer questions like "show me this week's leads from the pricing page" from your data. It is read-only by default and you can revoke access at any time. --- Rotomal · https://rotomal.com/form-endpoint/ · hello@rotomal.com # Τιμολόγια σε Τάξη: Your business ready for Greece's mandatory e-invoicing before the transition period ends, in 48 hours. > From 1 October 2026, mandatory e-invoicing in Greece covers all remaining businesses, with a transition period until 31 December 2026. Τιμολόγια σε Τάξη helps you choose between AADE's free timologio app and a certified provider, file the declaration in myAADE correctly, set up your invoice series and issue a test invoice. One payment, no subscription. We work in Greek or English. - Page: https://rotomal.com/en/ilektroniki-timologisi/ - Category: E-invoicing compliance (Greece) - Language: en - Billing: one-time payment - From: €29 one-time - Request (free, no card): https://rotomal.com/en/ilektroniki-timologisi/request/ - A clear recommendation: AADE's free app or a provider, based on your volume and the software you already use. - The myAADE declaration filed with you, step by step over screen share; your credentials stay with you. - A test invoice issued and transmitted to myDATA before the transition period ends. ## The transition period ends on 31 December, and the guidance is scattered and in Greek After large businesses went first, mandatory e-invoicing in Greece extended on 1 October 2026 to all remaining businesses, for B2B transactions in Greece and with non-EU countries. The transition period ends on 31 December 2026; after that, an invoice not issued the accepted way is treated as not issued at all. The options exist: AADE's free apps timologio and myDATAapp, or a certified e-invoicing provider. The hard part is choosing well for your case, filing the myAADE declaration on time and being sure your first real invoice goes through without errors, especially if you don't read Greek tax guidance comfortably. Τιμολόγια σε Τάξη does this with you in one video call. We are not a provider and take no commission: if the free timologio is enough for you, we say so. - All remaining businesses join mandatory e-invoicing in Greece from 1 October 2026, with a transition period until 31 December 2026. (source: https://kpmg.com/us/en/taxnewsflash/news/2026/02/greece-implementation-mandatory-e-invoicing-postponed.html) - Failing to issue an e-invoice counts as not issuing an invoice; for VAT-able transactions the fine equals 50% of the VAT due. (source: https://www.fiscal-requirements.com/news/5193-greece-delayed-mandatory-b2b-e-invoicing-and-introduced-transition-period) - Using AADE's timologio requires a declaration in myAADE within 10 days of starting to use it, even for businesses that used it before. (source: https://www.taxheaven.gr/news/72796/to-sxolio-ths-deyteras-hlektronikh-timologhsh) ## How it works 1. **Short questionnaire.** Legal form, invoices issued per month, current software and your accountant's details. Five minutes. 2. **Recommendation within one business day.** In writing: timologio, myDATAapp or a provider, with the cost and the reason. If your software already works with a provider, we say so immediately. 3. **Setup video call.** You log in with your own credentials and we guide you: myAADE declaration, business details, invoice series, customers. About 45 minutes, in Greek or English. 4. **Test and summary.** A test invoice issued and checked in myDATA, plus a one-page summary for you and your accountant. ## Features - **The right way to issue.** AADE's free timologio and myDATAapp compared with certified providers for your volume, software and needs. No commissions from anyone. - **myAADE declaration.** The declaration of your issuing method filed with you, on time, and checked that it registered correctly. - **Document types and series.** Invoice types, series and numbering set up correctly for your transactions, so the first real invoice is not rejected. - **Customer list with VAT numbers.** Your business customers entered with VAT numbers and details for quick invoicing (Full setup plan). - **Test invoice.** Issued and transmission to myDATA checked before the transition period ends, so you know it works. - **Accountant included.** Your accountant gets access or copies as they prefer, plus a summary of what was set up. - **One-page summary.** What you chose, where you issue, what to do if the app is unavailable, and the dates that matter. ## Who it's for - **Foreign companies with a Greek VAT number.** A Greek branch or company run from abroad, where Greek-only guidance is the main obstacle. We work in English. - **Freelancers.** A few invoices a month, often from timologio or by hand. You want to be compliant without new costs. - **Small businesses and shops.** Invoicing software or an ERP that needs a provider connection, and no time for research. - **Accounting firms.** Dozens of clients to set up before 31 December. We take the calls with your clients. ## Works with AADE timologio, myDATAapp, myAADE (declarations), myDATA (transmission and checks), Certified Greek e-invoicing providers, Common Greek invoicing software and ERPs, PDF export for your accountant ## Pricing One-time prices per VAT number, paid once after we confirm by email. No subscription and no commission from providers: if you choose a paid provider, you pay them directly. Prices exclude VAT. Founding customer pricing applies to early-access orders. | Plan | Price | Includes | | --- | --- | --- | | Declare & start | €29 one-time | Issuing method recommendation; myAADE declaration filed with you; Basic timologio setup; Test invoice; One-page summary | | Full setup | €59 one-time | Everything in Declare & start; Your software connected to a provider, or full timologio setup; Invoice series and document types; Customer list with VAT numbers (up to 100); Access for your accountant; Email questions until 31 March 2027 | | Accounting firm | €149 one-time | Up to 5 VAT numbers (€25 per extra); Everything in Full setup for each client; Calls directly with your clients; Client readiness sheet; Priority before 31 December | ## Compared with the alternatives - **On your own, with AADE's guidance.** Free: AADE provides timologio, myDATAapp and guides, in Greek. It takes a few hours and attention to deadlines; we do it in one call. - **Your software's provider.** Many programs already work with a provider and guide you through it. If that's your case, we tell you immediately; the declaration, series and test still remain. - **Your accountant.** The right person if they have time before year end. Many firms are overloaded; we can also work on the firm's behalf. ## Security and data - We never ask for or store Taxisnet or provider credentials; you always log in yourself. - Questionnaire details are stored encrypted and deleted 90 days after delivery, or sooner on request. - Your invoices go only through AADE's app or your provider; we have no access after the setup. - Only the people handling your order can access it, and every access is logged. ## From request to ready We confirm your request within one business day, and most businesses are ready after one video call. - Day 1: You fill in the 5-minute questionnaire; we confirm the price by email. - Day 2: Written recommendation of the issuing method; you approve it. - Day 2–3: Video call: myAADE declaration, document series, customers. - Day 3: Test invoice in myDATA and a one-page summary. ## FAQ ### Does this apply to me as a freelancer with few invoices? Yes, if you invoice businesses in Greece or in non-EU countries. From 1 October 2026 the obligation covers all remaining businesses, with a transition period to 31 December 2026. ### Do I have to pay a provider? Not necessarily. AADE offers timologio and myDATAapp for free, and they are enough for many small businesses. We only recommend a provider when you really need one. ### Do you need my Taxisnet credentials? No. You log in yourself and we guide you over screen share. We never ask for or store credentials. ### What happens after 31 December? After the transition period, an invoice not issued the accepted way counts as not issued, with fines that for VAT-able transactions reach 50% of the VAT. That's why we test before then. ### Are you an e-invoicing provider? No. We are an independent setup service. Your invoices are issued through AADE's app or the provider you choose, never through us. ### How long does it take? The recommendation arrives within one business day and the setup is one video call of about 45 minutes, usually within 2 business days. ### Is this tax advice? No. It is a technical setup service. For tax questions about your business, your accountant has the final word. --- Rotomal · https://rotomal.com/en/ilektroniki-timologisi/ · hello@rotomal.com # Τιμολόγια σε Τάξη: Η επιχείρησή σας έτοιμη για την υποχρεωτική ηλεκτρονική τιμολόγηση πριν τελειώσει η μεταβατική περίοδος, σε 48 ώρες. > Από την 1η Οκτωβρίου 2026 η ηλεκτρονική τιμολόγηση είναι υποχρεωτική για όλες τις υπόλοιπες επιχειρήσεις, με μεταβατική περίοδο έως τις 31 Δεκεμβρίου 2026. Το Τιμολόγια σε Τάξη σας βοηθά να διαλέξετε ανάμεσα στο δωρεάν timologio της ΑΑΔΕ και σε πάροχο, να κάνετε σωστά τη δήλωση στο myAADE, να στήσετε τα παραστατικά σας και να εκδώσετε ένα δοκιμαστικό τιμολόγιο. Μία πληρωμή, χωρίς συνδρομή. - Page: https://rotomal.com/ilektroniki-timologisi/ - Category: Ηλεκτρονική τιμολόγηση - Language: el - Billing: one-time payment - From: 29 € εφάπαξ - Request (free, no card): https://rotomal.com/ilektroniki-timologisi/request/ - Σαφής πρόταση: δωρεάν εφαρμογή της ΑΑΔΕ ή πάροχος, ανάλογα με τον όγκο και το πρόγραμμα που ήδη χρησιμοποιείτε. - Η δήλωση τρόπου έκδοσης στο myAADE γίνεται μαζί σας, βήμα βήμα, μέσω κοινής χρήσης οθόνης· οι κωδικοί σας μένουν σε εσάς. - Δοκιμαστικό τιμολόγιο εκδίδεται και διαβιβάζεται στο myDATA πριν από τη λήξη της μεταβατικής περιόδου. ## Η μεταβατική περίοδος τελειώνει στις 31 Δεκεμβρίου και οι οδηγίες είναι σκόρπιες Μετά τις μεγάλες επιχειρήσεις, η υποχρεωτική ηλεκτρονική τιμολόγηση επεκτάθηκε την 1η Οκτωβρίου 2026 σε όλες τις υπόλοιπες επιχειρήσεις, για τις συναλλαγές μεταξύ επιχειρήσεων (B2B) στην Ελλάδα και με τρίτες χώρες. Η μεταβατική περίοδος λήγει στις 31 Δεκεμβρίου 2026· μετά από αυτήν, ένα τιμολόγιο που δεν εκδόθηκε με τον σωστό τρόπο αντιμετωπίζεται σαν να μην εκδόθηκε. Οι επιλογές υπάρχουν: οι δωρεάν εφαρμογές της ΑΑΔΕ timologio και myDATAapp, ή ένας πιστοποιημένος πάροχος. Η δυσκολία είναι να διαλέξετε σωστά για τη δική σας περίπτωση, να υποβάλετε εμπρόθεσμα τη δήλωση στο myAADE και να βεβαιωθείτε ότι το πρώτο πραγματικό τιμολόγιο θα περάσει χωρίς λάθη. Το Τιμολόγια σε Τάξη κάνει αυτή τη δουλειά μαζί σας σε μία βιντεοκλήση. Δεν είμαστε πάροχος και δεν παίρνουμε προμήθεια: αν το δωρεάν timologio σας αρκεί, θα σας το πούμε. - Όλες οι υπόλοιπες επιχειρήσεις εντάσσονται στην υποχρεωτική ηλεκτρονική τιμολόγηση από την 1η Οκτωβρίου 2026, με μεταβατική περίοδο έως τις 31 Δεκεμβρίου 2026. (source: https://kpmg.com/us/en/taxnewsflash/news/2026/02/greece-implementation-mandatory-e-invoicing-postponed.html) - Η μη έκδοση ηλεκτρονικού τιμολογίου λογίζεται ως μη έκδοση στοιχείου· για πράξεις με ΦΠΑ το πρόστιμο ισούται με το 50% του φόρου του στοιχείου. (source: https://www.fiscal-requirements.com/news/5193-greece-delayed-mandatory-b2b-e-invoicing-and-introduced-transition-period) - Για το timologio της ΑΑΔΕ απαιτείται δήλωση στο myAADE εντός 10 ημερών από την έναρξη χρήσης, ακόμη και από όσους το χρησιμοποιούσαν ήδη. (source: https://www.taxheaven.gr/news/72796/to-sxolio-ths-deyteras-hlektronikh-timologhsh) ## Πώς λειτουργεί 1. **Σύντομο ερωτηματολόγιο.** Μορφή επιχείρησης, πόσα τιμολόγια εκδίδετε τον μήνα, ποιο πρόγραμμα χρησιμοποιείτε, ποιος είναι ο λογιστής σας. Πέντε λεπτά. 2. **Πρόταση μέσα σε μία εργάσιμη.** Γραπτή πρόταση: timologio, myDATAapp ή πάροχος, με το κόστος και τον λόγο. Αν το πρόγραμμά σας συνεργάζεται ήδη με πάροχο, το λέμε αμέσως. 3. **Βιντεοκλήση ρύθμισης.** Συνδέεστε εσείς με τους κωδικούς σας και εμείς σας καθοδηγούμε: δήλωση στο myAADE, στοιχεία επιχείρησης, σειρές παραστατικών, πελάτες. Περίπου 45 λεπτά. 4. **Δοκιμή και σύνοψη.** Ένα δοκιμαστικό τιμολόγιο εκδίδεται και ελέγχεται στο myDATA, και λαμβάνετε μια σελίδα σύνοψης για εσάς και τον λογιστή σας. ## Features - **Σωστή επιλογή τρόπου έκδοσης.** Σύγκριση του δωρεάν timologio και του myDATAapp με τους παρόχους, με βάση τον όγκο, το πρόγραμμα και τις ανάγκες σας. Χωρίς προμήθειες από κανέναν. - **Δήλωση στο myAADE.** Η δήλωση τρόπου έκδοσης γίνεται μαζί σας και εμπρόθεσμα, με έλεγχο ότι καταχωρίστηκε σωστά. - **Παραστατικά και σειρές.** Τύποι παραστατικών, σειρές και αρίθμηση στημένα σωστά για τις συναλλαγές σας, ώστε το πρώτο πραγματικό τιμολόγιο να περάσει χωρίς απόρριψη. - **Πελατολόγιο με ΑΦΜ.** Οι επαγγελματίες πελάτες σας καταχωρίζονται με ΑΦΜ και στοιχεία, για γρήγορη έκδοση χωρίς πληκτρολόγηση κάθε φορά (πακέτο Πλήρης ρύθμιση). - **Δοκιμαστικό τιμολόγιο.** Έκδοση και έλεγχος διαβίβασης στο myDATA πριν από το τέλος της μεταβατικής περιόδου, ώστε να ξέρετε ότι όλα δουλεύουν. - **Συνεργασία με τον λογιστή.** Ο λογιστής σας παίρνει πρόσβαση ή αντίγραφα όπως προτιμά, και μια σύνοψη του τι στήθηκε. - **Σελίδα σύνοψης.** Τι επιλέξατε, πού εκδίδετε, τι κάνετε αν η εφαρμογή δεν είναι διαθέσιμη, και οι ημερομηνίες που μετράνε. ## Who it's for - **Ελεύθεροι επαγγελματίες.** Λίγα τιμολόγια τον μήνα, συχνά από το timologio ή με το χέρι. Θέλετε να είστε εντάξει χωρίς νέο κόστος. - **Μικρές επιχειρήσεις και καταστήματα.** Ένα πρόγραμμα τιμολόγησης ή ERP που πρέπει να συνδεθεί με πάροχο, και καθόλου χρόνος για έρευνα. - **Λογιστικά γραφεία.** Δεκάδες πελάτες να ρυθμιστούν πριν από τις 31 Δεκεμβρίου. Αναλαμβάνουμε τις κλήσεις με τους πελάτες σας. - **Ξένες εταιρείες με ελληνικό ΑΦΜ.** Υποκατάστημα ή εταιρεία στην Ελλάδα που διοικείται από το εξωτερικό. Δουλεύουμε και στα αγγλικά. ## Works with timologio της ΑΑΔΕ, myDATAapp, myAADE (δηλώσεις), myDATA (διαβίβαση και έλεγχος), Πιστοποιημένοι πάροχοι ηλεκτρονικής τιμολόγησης, Συνήθη ελληνικά προγράμματα τιμολόγησης και ERP, Εξαγωγή PDF για τον λογιστή ## Pricing Εφάπαξ τιμές ανά ΑΦΜ, πληρωμή μία φορά μετά την επιβεβαίωση με email. Χωρίς συνδρομή και χωρίς προμήθεια από παρόχους: αν επιλέξετε πάροχο επί πληρωμή, τον πληρώνετε απευθείας. Οι τιμές δεν περιλαμβάνουν ΦΠΑ. Τιμή πρώτων πελατών για παραγγελίες πρώιμης πρόσβασης. | Plan | Price | Includes | | --- | --- | --- | | Δήλωση & Έναρξη | 29 € εφάπαξ | Πρόταση τρόπου έκδοσης; Δήλωση στο myAADE μαζί σας; Βασική ρύθμιση timologio; Δοκιμαστικό τιμολόγιο; Σελίδα σύνοψης | | Πλήρης ρύθμιση | 59 € εφάπαξ | Όλα από το Δήλωση & Έναρξη; Σύνδεση του προγράμματός σας με πάροχο ή πλήρες στήσιμο timologio; Σειρές και τύποι παραστατικών; Πελατολόγιο με ΑΦΜ (έως 100 πελάτες); Πρόσβαση για τον λογιστή; Ερωτήσεις με email έως 31 Μαρτίου 2027 | | Λογιστικό γραφείο | 149 € εφάπαξ | Έως 5 ΑΦΜ (25 € για κάθε επιπλέον); Όλα από την Πλήρη ρύθμιση για κάθε πελάτη; Κλήσεις απευθείας με τους πελάτες σας; Πίνακας ετοιμότητας πελατών; Προτεραιότητα πριν από τις 31 Δεκεμβρίου | ## Compared with the alternatives - **Μόνοι σας, με τις οδηγίες της ΑΑΔΕ.** Δωρεάν: η ΑΑΔΕ διαθέτει το timologio, το myDATAapp και οδηγούς. Χρειάζονται μερικές ώρες και προσοχή στις προθεσμίες· εμείς το κάνουμε σε μία κλήση. - **Ο πάροχος του προγράμματός σας.** Πολλά προγράμματα συνεργάζονται ήδη με πάροχο και σας καθοδηγούν. Αν ισχύει για εσάς, θα σας το πούμε αμέσως· μένουν η δήλωση, οι σειρές και η δοκιμή. - **Ο λογιστής σας.** Ο σωστός άνθρωπος αν έχει χρόνο πριν από το τέλος του έτους. Πολλά γραφεία είναι φορτωμένα· μπορούμε να δουλέψουμε και για λογαριασμό του γραφείου. ## Security and data - Δεν ζητάμε ούτε αποθηκεύουμε κωδικούς Taxisnet ή παρόχων· συνδέεστε πάντα εσείς. - Τα στοιχεία του ερωτηματολογίου αποθηκεύονται κρυπτογραφημένα και διαγράφονται 90 ημέρες μετά την παράδοση, ή νωρίτερα αν το ζητήσετε. - Τα τιμολόγιά σας περνούν μόνο από την εφαρμογή της ΑΑΔΕ ή τον πάροχό σας· μετά τη ρύθμιση δεν έχουμε πρόσβαση. - Πρόσβαση στην παραγγελία έχουν μόνο όσοι τη χειρίζονται και κάθε πρόσβαση καταγράφεται. ## Από το αίτημα στην ετοιμότητα Επιβεβαιώνουμε το αίτημα μέσα σε μία εργάσιμη και οι περισσότερες επιχειρήσεις είναι έτοιμες μετά από μία βιντεοκλήση. - Ημέρα 1: Συμπληρώνετε το ερωτηματολόγιο 5 λεπτών· επιβεβαιώνουμε την τιμή με email. - Ημέρα 2: Γραπτή πρόταση τρόπου έκδοσης· την εγκρίνετε. - Ημέρα 2–3: Βιντεοκλήση: δήλωση στο myAADE, παραστατικά, πελάτες. - Ημέρα 3: Δοκιμαστικό τιμολόγιο στο myDATA και σελίδα σύνοψης. ## FAQ ### Με αφορά αν είμαι ελεύθερος επαγγελματίας με λίγα τιμολόγια; Ναι, αν εκδίδετε τιμολόγια σε επιχειρήσεις στην Ελλάδα ή σε τρίτες χώρες. Από 1/10/2026 η υποχρέωση καλύπτει όλες τις υπόλοιπες επιχειρήσεις, με μεταβατική περίοδο έως 31/12/2026. ### Πρέπει να πληρώσω πάροχο; Όχι απαραίτητα. Η ΑΑΔΕ διαθέτει δωρεάν τις εφαρμογές timologio και myDATAapp, που αρκούν για πολλές μικρές επιχειρήσεις. Προτείνουμε πάροχο μόνο όταν το χρειάζεστε πραγματικά. ### Χρειάζεστε τους κωδικούς μου στο Taxisnet; Όχι. Συνδέεστε εσείς και εμείς σας καθοδηγούμε μέσω κοινής χρήσης οθόνης. Δεν ζητάμε ούτε αποθηκεύουμε κωδικούς. ### Τι γίνεται μετά τις 31 Δεκεμβρίου; Μετά τη λήξη της μεταβατικής περιόδου, ένα τιμολόγιο που δεν εκδόθηκε με αποδεκτό τρόπο λογίζεται ως μη εκδοθέν, με πρόστιμα που για πράξεις με ΦΠΑ φτάνουν το 50% του φόρου. Γι' αυτό η δοκιμή γίνεται πριν. ### Είστε πάροχος ηλεκτρονικής τιμολόγησης; Όχι. Είμαστε ανεξάρτητη υπηρεσία ρύθμισης. Τα τιμολόγιά σας εκδίδονται από την εφαρμογή της ΑΑΔΕ ή τον πάροχο που επιλέγετε, ποτέ από εμάς. ### Πόσο χρόνο παίρνει; Η πρόταση έρχεται μέσα σε μία εργάσιμη και η ρύθμιση είναι μία βιντεοκλήση περίπου 45 λεπτών, συνήθως μέσα σε 2 εργάσιμες. ### Είναι φορολογική συμβουλή; Όχι. Είναι τεχνική υπηρεσία ρύθμισης. Για φορολογικά ζητήματα της επιχείρησής σας, αρμόδιος είναι ο λογιστής σας. --- Rotomal · https://rotomal.com/ilektroniki-timologisi/ · hello@rotomal.com # Gotowi na KSeF: KSeF certificate, accountant permissions and working e-invoices for your Polish business before 1 January 2027, in one day. > On 1 January 2027 Poland's penalty-free KSeF period ends, KSeF tokens stop working and the exemption for the smallest businesses disappears. Gotowi na KSeF takes you through all of it in one day: a KSeF certificate, permissions for your accountant, your current or a free invoicing tool connected, purchase invoices collected automatically and a test invoice issued in the KSeF test environment. Pay once, no subscription. - Page: https://rotomal.com/en/ksef-certyfikat/ - Category: E-invoicing compliance (Poland) - Language: en - Billing: one-time payment - From: 79 zł one-time - Request (free, no card): https://rotomal.com/en/ksef-certyfikat/request/ - A KSeF certificate instead of a token, before tokens are switched off, and clear instructions for offline and emergency mode. - Permissions for your accountant or accounting firm set correctly, so purchase invoices reach them without you. - A test invoice issued and received before the deadline, in the software you already use or the Ministry of Finance's free tools. ## Three changes at once on 1 January 2027, and the instructions are scattered Since 1 February 2026 every business in Poland must receive invoices through KSeF, the national e-invoicing system, and since 1 April 2026 the obligation to issue them covers the rest of the market. The smallest businesses, with sales up to 10,000 zł gross a month, may still invoice outside the system until the end of 2026, and 2026 as a whole is penalty-free. All of that ends on 1 January 2027. Logins change on the same day. KSeF tokens, which many invoicing programs and accounting firms rely on, are withdrawn and only KSeF certificates remain. Anyone who has not switched will see a login error in January, and from 2027 issuing an invoice outside KSeF can bring administrative penalties. None of the steps is hard, but they are spread across the certificate and permissions module, the taxpayer app, your software's settings and your accountant's access, and almost all the guidance is in Polish. Gotowi na KSeF goes through them with you in one video call and checks it works before things get tense. - The penalty-free KSeF period ends on 1 January 2027; administrative penalties apply from that date and the smallest businesses lose the option to invoice outside the system. (source: https://trans.info/pl/fiskus-daje-czas-przedsiebiorcom-ksef-z-okresem-przejsciowym-bez-kar-449679) - Since 1 February 2026 both KSeF certificates and tokens can be used; from 1 January 2027 only KSeF certificates remain. (source: https://ksef.podatki.gov.pl/informacje-ogolne-ksef-20/certyfikaty-ksef/) - Since 1 February 2026 every business must receive invoices through KSeF, regardless of size. (source: https://jpk.info.pl/faktury/e-faktura-ustrukturyzowana-ksef/harmonogram/) ## How it works 1. **A short questionnaire.** Legal form, invoicing software, who does your bookkeeping, how many invoices you issue and receive per month, and whether you already use a KSeF token. Five minutes. 2. **A plan for one call.** Within one business day you get the list of steps for your business and a call slot. If your software handles certificates on its own, we tell you straight away. 3. **Video call with screen share.** You log in with your trusted profile or signature; we guide each step: KSeF certificate, accountant permissions, invoicing software connected. About 45 minutes, in English or Polish. 4. **Test and summary.** A test invoice issued and received, purchase-invoice download checked, and a one-page summary: what was set up, where the certificate is and what to do when KSeF is down. ## Features - **KSeF certificate instead of a token.** Certificate requested in the official app, stored safely on your side and connected to your invoicing software. The old token revoked so there are not two ways in. - **Permissions for your accountant.** Your accounting firm gets exactly the access it needs: reading purchase invoices and, if you want, issuing. Without sharing your login. - **Invoicing software connected.** Your current program connected to KSeF with the certificate or, if you only issue a few invoices a month, the Ministry of Finance's free tools set up with your details and template. - **Purchase invoices without you.** Supplier invoices downloaded automatically into your accounting software or passed to your accounting firm, checked on a real invoice. - **Tested before the deadline.** An invoice issued in the KSeF test environment and received by the other side before penalties start. You know it works before it matters. - **Plan for outages.** Short instructions for offline and emergency mode: when you may invoice outside the system, how to mark the invoice with a code and when to send it to KSeF. - **One-page summary.** What was set up, who has which permissions, when the certificate expires and whom to ask. Keep it for an audit or a change of accountant. ## Who it's for - **Foreign-owned companies with a Polish NIP.** A Polish company or branch run from abroad, where KSeF guidance in Polish is the main obstacle. We work in English. - **Sole traders and micro businesses.** A handful of invoices a month, sales under 10,000 zł and invoices outside KSeF until now. From January that ends. - **Small companies with invoicing software.** Software that logs in with a token that stops working in 2027. You need to switch to a certificate without stopping invoicing. - **Accounting firms.** Dozens of clients to switch before year end. We take the client calls and hand back a readiness list. ## Works with KSeF 2.0, Poland's national e-invoicing system, KSeF taxpayer app and certificate and permissions module, Ministry of Finance free invoicing tools, Common Polish invoicing and accounting programs integrated with the KSeF API, Trusted profile and qualified signature (you log in yourself), KSeF test environment, PDF and JPK export for your accounting firm ## Pricing One-time prices per business (NIP), paid once after we confirm by email. No subscription and no commission on invoicing software: if your chosen program is paid, you pay its provider directly. Prices include VAT. Founding customer pricing applies to early-access orders. | Plan | Price | Includes | | --- | --- | --- | | Certificate | 79 zł one-time | KSeF certificate issued and connected; Old token revoked; Permissions for one accountant; Emergency mode instructions; Written summary | | Ready for 2027 | 149 zł one-time | Everything in Certificate; Invoicing software connected or free tool set up; Automatic purchase-invoice download; Test invoice issued and received; Up to 3 people with permissions; Email questions answered until end of March 2027 | | Accounting firm | 449 zł one-time | Up to 10 clients (39 zł per extra client); Everything in Ready for 2027 for each client; We talk to your clients directly; Client readiness list; Priority slots before the end of December | ## Compared with the alternatives - **On your own, with the Ministry's instructions.** Free: the Ministry of Finance provides the KSeF taxpayer app, free invoicing tools and instructions, all in Polish. A few hours and patience; Gotowi na KSeF shortens it to one call. - **Your invoicing software provider.** Many programs walk you through the certificate switch themselves. If yours does, we will say so straight away. Accountant permissions, purchase invoices and the test still remain. - **Your accounting firm.** A good choice if your firm has time before year end. Many have a queue right now; we can work for the firm, with its clients, on the Accounting firm plan. ## Security and data - We never store passwords, trusted-profile logins or your KSeF certificate: the certificate stays with you and you always log in yourself. - Any access for us, if needed at all, is temporary and removed when the work is done, which we confirm in writing. - Questionnaire data (NIP, software, invoice volumes) is stored encrypted and deleted 90 days after delivery, or sooner on request. - Only the people handling your order can access it, and every access is logged. ## From order to ready We confirm your order within one business day, and most businesses are ready after one video call. - Day 1: You fill in the 5-minute questionnaire; we confirm the price by email. - Day 2: You get the step plan and we book the video call. - Day 2–3: Video call: certificate, permissions, software connected. - Day 3: Test invoice and written summary. ## FAQ ### My sales are under 10,000 zł a month. Do I need to do anything? Yes, before 1 January 2027. Until the end of 2026 you may invoice outside KSeF, but that exemption ends in January, and you have had to receive invoices through KSeF since 1 February 2026. ### What happens to my KSeF token? Tokens work alongside certificates until the end of 2026. From 1 January 2027 only KSeF certificates remain, so software that logs in with a token will stop connecting. ### Do you log in as me or use my trusted profile? No. You always log in yourself, and we guide you through each step on a video call with screen share. We do not store your passwords or your certificate. ### Do I have to buy invoicing software? No. For a small number of invoices the Ministry of Finance's free tools are enough. If you already have a program, we connect it to KSeF. We take no commission from any provider. ### What penalties apply from 2027? From 1 January 2027, administrative penalties can be imposed for KSeF breaches such as issuing an invoice outside the system. Check the exact amounts in the regulations or with your accountant. ### How long does it take? You get the plan within one business day, and the setup itself is one video call of about 45 minutes, usually within 2 business days of ordering. ### Is this tax advice? No. Gotowi na KSeF is a technical setup service. For tax questions about your business, your accountant or tax adviser has the final word. --- Rotomal · https://rotomal.com/en/ksef-certyfikat/ · hello@rotomal.com # Gotowi na KSeF: Certyfikat KSeF, uprawnienia dla księgowej i działające faktury przed 1 stycznia 2027 r., w jeden dzień. > Od 1 stycznia 2027 r. kończy się okres bez kar, przestają działać tokeny KSeF i znika zwolnienie dla najmniejszych firm. Gotowi na KSeF przeprowadzi Cię przez wszystko w jeden dzień: certyfikat KSeF, uprawnienia dla księgowej, wybór darmowego lub obecnego programu do faktur, automatyczne pobieranie faktur zakupowych i testowa faktura wystawiona w środowisku testowym. Płacisz raz, bez abonamentu. - Page: https://rotomal.com/ksef-certyfikat/ - Category: Faktury i KSeF - Language: pl - Billing: one-time payment - From: 79 zł jednorazowo - Request (free, no card): https://rotomal.com/ksef-certyfikat/request/ - Certyfikat KSeF zamiast tokenu, zanim tokeny zostaną wyłączone, i jasna instrukcja, co zrobić w trybie offline lub awaryjnym. - Uprawnienia dla księgowej lub biura rachunkowego nadane poprawnie, żeby faktury zakupowe trafiały do niej bez Twojego udziału. - Testowa faktura wystawiona i odebrana przed terminem, w programie, którego już używasz, albo w bezpłatnym narzędziu Ministerstwa. ## Trzy zmiany naraz 1 stycznia 2027 r., a instrukcje są rozproszone Od 1 lutego 2026 r. każda firma musi odbierać faktury z KSeF, a od 1 kwietnia 2026 r. obowiązek wystawiania objął pozostałych przedsiębiorców. Najmniejsze firmy, ze sprzedażą do 10 tys. zł brutto miesięcznie, mogą jeszcze do końca 2026 r. wystawiać faktury poza systemem, a cały rok 2026 jest okresem bez kar. Wszystko to kończy się 1 stycznia 2027 r. W tym samym dniu zmienia się sposób logowania. Tokeny KSeF, z których korzysta wiele programów do faktur i biur rachunkowych, zostaną wycofane i zostaną tylko certyfikaty KSeF. Kto nie przejdzie na certyfikat, w styczniu zobaczy błąd logowania w programie do faktur, a od 2027 r. za brak faktury w KSeF grożą administracyjne kary pieniężne. Same kroki nie są trudne, ale są rozproszone: Moduł Certyfikatów i Uprawnień, Aplikacja Podatnika, ustawienia programu, uprawnienia dla księgowej. Gotowi na KSeF przechodzi je z Tobą w jednej wideorozmowie i sprawdza, że wszystko działa, zanim zrobi się nerwowo. - Okres bez kar w KSeF kończy się 1 stycznia 2027 r.; od tego dnia obowiązują administracyjne kary pieniężne, a najmniejsze firmy tracą możliwość wystawiania faktur poza systemem. (source: https://trans.info/pl/fiskus-daje-czas-przedsiebiorcom-ksef-z-okresem-przejsciowym-bez-kar-449679) - Od 1 lutego 2026 r. można używać zarówno certyfikatów KSeF, jak i tokenów; docelowo od 1 stycznia 2027 r. zostaną wyłącznie certyfikaty KSeF. (source: https://ksef.podatki.gov.pl/informacje-ogolne-ksef-20/certyfikaty-ksef/) - Od 1 lutego 2026 r. wszyscy przedsiębiorcy muszą odbierać faktury z KSeF, niezależnie od wielkości firmy. (source: https://jpk.info.pl/faktury/e-faktura-ustrukturyzowana-ksef/harmonogram/) ## Jak to działa 1. **Krótka ankieta.** Forma działalności, program do faktur, kto prowadzi księgowość, ile faktur miesięcznie wystawiasz i odbierasz, czy używasz już tokenu KSeF. Zajmuje 5 minut. 2. **Plan na jedną rozmowę.** W ciągu jednego dnia roboczego dostajesz listę kroków dla Twojej firmy i termin wideorozmowy. Jeśli Twój program sam obsługuje certyfikaty, mówimy to wprost. 3. **Wideorozmowa z udostępnieniem ekranu.** Ty logujesz się Profilem Zaufanym lub podpisem, my prowadzimy krok po kroku: certyfikat KSeF, uprawnienia dla księgowej, połączenie programu do faktur. Około 45 minut. 4. **Test i podsumowanie.** Testowa faktura wystawiona i odebrana, pobieranie faktur zakupowych sprawdzone, a na koniec jednostronicowe podsumowanie: co ustawiono, gdzie jest certyfikat i co zrobić, gdy KSeF nie działa. ## Features - **Certyfikat KSeF zamiast tokenu.** Wniosek o certyfikat złożony w oficjalnej aplikacji, certyfikat zapisany bezpiecznie u Ciebie i podłączony do programu do faktur. Stary token unieważniony, żeby nie było dwóch dróg logowania. - **Uprawnienia dla księgowej.** Biuro rachunkowe lub księgowa dostaje dokładnie te uprawnienia, których potrzebuje: odczyt faktur zakupowych, a jeśli chcesz, także wystawianie. Bez przekazywania Twoich danych logowania. - **Program do faktur połączony.** Twój obecny program połączony z KSeF certyfikatem, albo, jeśli wystawiasz kilka faktur w miesiącu, bezpłatne narzędzia Ministerstwa skonfigurowane z Twoimi danymi i szablonem. - **Faktury zakupowe bez Twojego udziału.** Automatyczne pobieranie faktur od dostawców do programu księgowego lub przekazywanie ich biuru rachunkowemu, sprawdzone na prawdziwej fakturze. - **Test przed terminem.** Faktura wystawiona w środowisku testowym KSeF i odebrana przez drugą stronę, zanim zaczną obowiązywać kary. Wiesz, że działa, zanim będzie to miało znaczenie. - **Plan na awarię.** Krótka instrukcja trybu offline i awaryjnego: kiedy wolno wystawić fakturę poza systemem, jak oznaczyć ją kodem i w jakim terminie przesłać do KSeF. - **Jednostronicowe podsumowanie.** Co ustawiono, kto ma jakie uprawnienia, do kiedy jest ważny certyfikat i kogo zapytać. Do zachowania na wypadek kontroli lub zmiany księgowej. ## Who it's for - **Jednoosobowe działalności i mikrofirmy.** Kilka lub kilkanaście faktur miesięcznie, sprzedaż poniżej 10 tys. zł i dotąd faktury poza KSeF. Od stycznia to się kończy. - **Małe firmy z programem do faktur.** Program działa na tokenie, który od 2027 r. przestanie działać. Trzeba przejść na certyfikat i nie zatrzymać fakturowania. - **Biura rachunkowe.** Kilkudziesięciu klientów do przestawienia przed końcem roku. Przejmujemy rozmowy z klientami i oddajemy zestawienie, kto jest gotowy. - **Firmy zagraniczne z polskim NIP.** Spółka lub oddział w Polsce prowadzony z zagranicy. Pracujemy też po angielsku. ## Works with Krajowy System e-Faktur (KSeF 2.0), Aplikacja Podatnika KSeF i Moduł Certyfikatów i Uprawnień, Bezpłatne narzędzia Ministerstwa Finansów do faktur, Popularne programy do faktur i księgowości zintegrowane z API KSeF, Profil Zaufany i podpis kwalifikowany (logujesz się Ty), Środowisko testowe KSeF, Eksport faktur do PDF i JPK dla biura rachunkowego ## Pricing Ceny jednorazowe za firmę (NIP), płatne raz po potwierdzeniu e-mailem. Bez abonamentu i bez prowizji od programu do faktur: jeśli wybrany program jest płatny, płacisz bezpośrednio jego dostawcy. Ceny brutto. Cena dla pierwszych klientów przy zamówieniach we wczesnym dostępie. | Plan | Price | Includes | | --- | --- | --- | | Certyfikat | 79 zł jednorazowo | Certyfikat KSeF wystawiony i podłączony; Unieważnienie starego tokenu; Uprawnienia dla jednej księgowej; Instrukcja trybu awaryjnego; Podsumowanie na piśmie | | Gotowi na 2027 | 149 zł jednorazowo | Wszystko z pakietu Certyfikat; Program do faktur połączony z KSeF lub darmowe narzędzie skonfigurowane; Automatyczne pobieranie faktur zakupowych; Testowa faktura wystawiona i odebrana; Do 3 osób z uprawnieniami; Odpowiedzi na pytania e-mailem do końca marca 2027 r. | | Biuro rachunkowe | 449 zł jednorazowo | Do 10 klientów (39 zł za każdego kolejnego); Wszystko z pakietu Gotowi na 2027 dla każdego klienta; Rozmowy prowadzone bezpośrednio z klientami; Zestawienie gotowości klientów; Priorytetowe terminy przed końcem grudnia | ## Compared with the alternatives - **Samodzielnie, z instrukcjami Ministerstwa.** Bezpłatnie: Ministerstwo Finansów udostępnia Aplikację Podatnika KSeF, darmowe narzędzia do faktur i instrukcje. Wystarczy kilka godzin i cierpliwość; Gotowi na KSeF skraca to do jednej rozmowy. - **Dostawca programu do faktur.** Wiele programów prowadzi przez przejście na certyfikat samodzielnie. Jeśli Twój tak robi, powiemy Ci to od razu. Pozostają uprawnienia dla księgowej, faktury zakupowe i test. - **Biuro rachunkowe.** Dobry wybór, jeśli Twoje biuro ma czas przed końcem roku. Wiele biur ma teraz kolejkę; my możemy pracować dla biura, z jego klientami, w pakiecie Biuro rachunkowe. ## Security and data - Nie przechowujemy haseł, Profilu Zaufanego ani certyfikatu KSeF: certyfikat zostaje u Ciebie, a logujesz się zawsze sam. - Uprawnienia dla nas, jeśli w ogóle są potrzebne, są tymczasowe i odbierane po zakończeniu pracy, co potwierdzamy na piśmie. - Dane z ankiety (NIP, program, liczba faktur) przechowujemy zaszyfrowane i usuwamy 90 dni po realizacji lub wcześniej na prośbę. - Do zamówienia mają dostęp tylko osoby, które je realizują, a każdy dostęp jest rejestrowany. ## Od zamówienia do gotowości Potwierdzamy zamówienie w ciągu jednego dnia roboczego, a większość firm jest gotowa po jednej wideorozmowie. - Dzień 1: wypełniasz 5-minutową ankietę, potwierdzamy cenę e-mailem. - Dzień 2: dostajesz plan kroków i umawiamy wideorozmowę. - Dzień 2–3: wideorozmowa: certyfikat, uprawnienia, połączenie programu. - Dzień 3: testowa faktura i podsumowanie na piśmie. ## FAQ ### Mam sprzedaż poniżej 10 tys. zł miesięcznie. Czy muszę coś robić? Tak, przed 1 stycznia 2027 r. Do końca 2026 r. możesz wystawiać faktury poza KSeF, ale od stycznia to zwolnienie się kończy, a odbierać faktury z KSeF musisz już od 1 lutego 2026 r. ### Co się stanie z moim tokenem KSeF? Tokeny działają równolegle z certyfikatami do końca 2026 r. Od 1 stycznia 2027 r. zostają wyłącznie certyfikaty KSeF, więc program, który loguje się tokenem, przestanie łączyć się z systemem. ### Czy podajecie się za mnie albo logujecie moim Profilem Zaufanym? Nie. Logujesz się zawsze Ty, a my prowadzimy Cię przez kolejne kroki podczas wideorozmowy z udostępnieniem ekranu. Nie przechowujemy Twoich haseł ani certyfikatu. ### Czy muszę kupić program do faktur? Nie. Przy niewielkiej liczbie faktur wystarczą bezpłatne narzędzia Ministerstwa Finansów. Jeśli masz już program, łączymy go z KSeF. Nie pobieramy prowizji od żadnego dostawcy. ### Jakie kary grożą od 2027 r.? Od 1 stycznia 2027 r. za naruszenia związane z KSeF, np. wystawienie faktury poza systemem, mogą być nakładane administracyjne kary pieniężne. Szczegóły wysokości kar warto sprawdzić w przepisach lub z księgową. ### Ile to trwa? Plan dostajesz w ciągu jednego dnia roboczego, a sama konfiguracja to jedna wideorozmowa trwająca około 45 minut, zwykle w ciągu 2 dni roboczych od zamówienia. ### Czy to doradztwo podatkowe? Nie. Gotowi na KSeF to usługa techniczna konfiguracji. W sprawach podatkowych dotyczących Twojej firmy decyduje Twoja księgowa lub doradca podatkowy. --- Rotomal · https://rotomal.com/ksef-certyfikat/ · hello@rotomal.com # Letting Ledger: Turns letting-agent statements into Making Tax Digital quarterly updates, split by owner. > Letting Ledger reads the PDF statements your letting agent already sends, splits rent, fees and repairs by property and by owner, and builds each owner's Making Tax Digital quarterly update. One job, for landlords and their accountants, instead of a full accounting system to learn. - Page: https://rotomal.com/landlord-mtd/ - Category: Compliance deadlines - Language: en - Billing: subscription - From: £6 per month - Request (free, no card): https://rotomal.com/landlord-mtd/request/ - Reads statements from any UK letting agent; unrecognised lines go to a review queue instead of being guessed - Splits income and expenses between joint owners by the percentages you set, per property - Shows every quarterly figure with the statement lines behind it before anything is submitted ## Quarterly reporting arrived, and the tools assume you do your own bookkeeping From April 2026, landlords and sole traders with qualifying income over £50,000 must keep digital records and send HMRC a quarterly update, with lower thresholds following in 2027 and 2028. Most of the people affected own two or three properties, a letting agent collects the rent, and once a month a PDF statement arrives showing rent, the agent's fee, a repair and the balance paid out. General accounting software can handle this, but it is built for invoicing and bank feeds, costs £7–15 a month, and still expects you to type the statement in line by line. Joint ownership makes it worse: a couple owning a flat 50/50 needs two sets of records and two quarterly updates, each showing half of every figure. Late or missing updates attract HMRC penalty points, and figures that don't match the agent's statements create problems at the final declaration. Doing it by hand costs four evenings a year re-typing documents you already have. - 780,000 people were mandated into Making Tax Digital for Income Tax from 6 April 2026, but only about 219,000 (28%) had signed up by that month. A further 970,000 join in April 2027 and 975,000 in April 2028. (source: https://www.theregister.com/2026/04/10/mtd_hmrc/) - The first wave covers about 864,000 sole traders and landlords; the income threshold falls to £30,000 in April 2027 and £20,000 in April 2028. (source: https://www.bytestart.co.uk/news-insights/864000-sole-traders-and-landlords-face-new-mtd-reporting-rules-from-april-2026/) - Sole traders discussing the change say full accounting packages are too heavy for what is, for them, a quarterly return. (source: https://news.ycombinator.com/item?id=47171042) ## How it works 1. **Forward or upload statements.** Forward your agent's monthly statement email to your Letting Ledger address, or upload the PDFs. We set up the parser for your agent's layout during onboarding, usually within 2 business days. 2. **Set properties and owners.** Add each property, its owners and their share. Self-managed properties can be added with a CSV or typed in. This takes about ten minutes once. 3. **Review the quarter.** Before each deadline you get a summary per owner: income, expense categories, and the statement lines behind each number. Anything the parser was unsure about is listed for you to confirm. 4. **Send to HMRC.** Once you (or your accountant) approve, the update is sent to HMRC and the receipt is stored with the quarter. See the FAQ on HMRC recognition status for exactly how submission works today. ## Features - **Statement reading.** Extracts rent received, management fees, repairs, deductions and the payout from letting-agent PDF statements. Each extracted line keeps a link to the page it came from, and low-confidence lines are held for review rather than filed. - **Joint-owner split.** Set each owner's share per property (50/50 by default, or the shares you have declared to HMRC). Every income and expense line is split automatically and each owner gets their own quarterly figures. - **Quarterly update builder.** Groups figures into HMRC's UK property income and expense categories and keeps cumulative totals for the tax year, so corrections to an earlier quarter flow through to the next update. - **Deadline calendar.** Shows the four quarterly deadlines (7 August, 7 November, 7 February and 7 May for standard quarters) and emails you 14 days and 3 days before each one if a quarter is incomplete. - **Accountant workspace.** An accountant can see all of their landlord clients, the status of each quarter, and review or submit on a client's behalf using their HMRC agent authorisation. - **Digital records, kept.** Every transaction is stored as a digital record with its source document attached, which is what the MTD rules require. Records stay available for as long as your account is open. - **Year-end export.** Download the full year per owner as CSV and PDF for the final declaration, or hand it to your accountant. - **Ask your AI assistant.** Connect Letting Ledger to Claude, ChatGPT or another assistant through MCP and ask in plain language, for example "what's my quarterly update total so far?". Read-only by default; revoke access any time. ## Who it's for - **Landlords with an agent, over £50,000.** You are already mandated. You get quarterly figures from documents you already receive, without learning accounting software. - **Couples and other joint owners.** One set of statements, two taxpayers. The split is handled once, and each owner's update is built separately. - **Accountants with landlord clients.** Instead of chasing statements and re-keying them, you review a prepared quarter per client and submit from one screen. ## Works with PDF statements from any UK letting agent, Email forwarding of statement emails, CSV import for self-managed properties, HMRC Making Tax Digital for Income Tax APIs (recognition in progress, see FAQ), HMRC agent authorisation for accountants, CSV and PDF export, MCP connector for Claude, ChatGPT and other AI assistants ## Pricing Billed monthly, cancel any time. Founding customer pricing is fixed for 24 months. All plans include statement reading, the review queue, deadline reminders and exports. Prices include VAT. | Plan | Price | Includes | | --- | --- | --- | | Solo | £6 per month | 1 taxpayer; Up to 5 properties; Any letting agent's statements; Quarterly review and deadline reminders; CSV and PDF export; Email support | | Joint owners | £10 per month | 2 taxpayers; Up to 10 properties; Per-property ownership shares; Separate quarterly figures per owner; Accountant invite with read access; Everything in Solo | | Practice | £49 per month | Up to 10 taxpayers included, then £4 per taxpayer; Multi-client dashboard with quarter status; Submit with your agent authorisation; Client review links; Priority support during deadline weeks | ## Compared with the alternatives - **Xero, QuickBooks, FreeAgent or Sage.** Full accounting packages at roughly £7–15 a month. They are recognised for MTD and good if you also run a business, but they expect you to key transactions or match a bank feed, and they do not read agent statements or split a property between owners. - **Bridging spreadsheets.** Spreadsheet-based bridging tools sell for about £30–50 a year. You keep records in a spreadsheet and the tool sends the totals. Cheaper than us if you are happy maintaining the spreadsheet and doing the owner split yourself. - **Your accountant does everything.** The simplest option, but you still have to get statements to them every quarter and pay for the keying. Many accountants would rather review a prepared quarter, which is what the Practice plan is for. ## Security and data - Data is stored in a UK or EU data-centre region, encrypted at rest and in transit (TLS 1.2 or higher). - Only you and people you invite, such as your accountant, can see your records. Support access is granted by you per session and logged. - Statements and records are kept while your account is open. HMRC expects you to keep records for at least five years after the 31 January filing deadline, so export before deleting. - You can export everything at any time and request full deletion; we complete deletion within 30 days and confirm by email. - HMRC connections use OAuth 2.0 tokens that you can revoke from your HMRC account at any time; we never see your Government Gateway password. ## Your first week We onboard new accounts within 2 business days. You send us three recent statements, we configure the parser for your agent, and you check the results before the first quarter is built. - Day 1: Request service, tell us your letting agent and how many properties and owners you have. - Day 2–3: Your account is live. Forward three recent statements; we set up the parser and you check the extracted lines against the PDFs. - Day 4–5: Add properties and ownership shares, invite your accountant if you have one, and import any self-managed income. - Day 7: Your current quarter is populated and the deadline calendar is set. From here, forward each new statement as it arrives. ## FAQ ### Is Letting Ledger HMRC-recognised? Not yet. We are working through HMRC's recognition process for Making Tax Digital for Income Tax: sandbox testing, the fraud-prevention header requirements and production approval. Until that completes, the product reads statements, keeps your digital records and prepares the quarterly figures, and you or your accountant submit them through recognised software. We will email every customer the day submission goes live, and if recognition is not granted you can cancel and take your data with you. ### Do I need this if my rental income is under £50,000? Not until your threshold applies: £30,000 from April 2027 and £20,000 from April 2028. You can join voluntarily earlier. Check your own position on gov.uk or with your accountant, because the threshold is based on total qualifying income, not just rent. ### How is income split between joint owners? By default each owner gets an equal share, which is how HMRC treats most jointly owned property between spouses unless a different split has been declared. If you have declared different shares, enter them per property. Whether a split is correct for you is a question for your accountant. ### What if a statement is read incorrectly? Uncertain lines are held for you to confirm, and every figure traces back to its page. Nothing is submitted until you approve the quarter. You remain responsible for the figures you send, as with any software. ### Is this tax advice? No. Letting Ledger is record-keeping and filing software. It does not tell you which expenses are allowable or how to structure ownership. Confirm anything you are unsure about with your accountant or HMRC. ### What about properties I manage myself, or expenses the agent doesn't see? Add them by CSV or by hand, with the receipt attached. Mortgage interest and other items paid outside the agent are entered the same way and are included in the owner split. ### What happens at the end of the tax year? You get the full year per owner as CSV and PDF. The final declaration is made through recognised software or by your accountant, using these totals plus your other income. ### Does it work with Claude or ChatGPT? Yes. Letting Ledger includes an MCP connector, so Claude, ChatGPT and other MCP-compatible assistants can answer questions like "what's my quarterly update total so far?" from your data. It is read-only by default and you can revoke access at any time. --- Rotomal · https://rotomal.com/landlord-mtd/ · hello@rotomal.com # License Ledger: One dashboard for clinicians' state licenses, compact privileges, renewals and CE credits. > License Ledger tracks every clinician's home license, compact privileges, renewal dates, CE requirements and payer re-attestations in one place, with reminders that escalate as a deadline approaches. It holds no patient data and sells no courses, so it stays independent of CE vendors. - Page: https://rotomal.com/license-tracker/ - Category: Healthcare practice administration - Language: en - Billing: subscription - From: $9 per month - Request (free, no card): https://rotomal.com/license-tracker/request/ - Covers the Nurse Licensure Compact, PSYPACT, the Counseling Compact, the PT Compact and the PA Compact alongside ordinary state licenses - Reminders at 90, 60, 30 and 7 days to the clinician and the practice admin, by email, SMS and calendar feed - Scheduled rechecks against state board public lookups where a board publishes one, so a lapsed status shows up without anyone checking ## Telehealth made multi-state practice normal; the paperwork did not get simpler A counselor seeing clients in four states through the Counseling Compact holds one home license and three separate privileges, each with its own fee, renewal date and rules. A psychologist under PSYPACT tracks an E.Passport and an APIT on top of the home license. Multiply by twenty clinicians and the spreadsheet stops working. The cost of a miss is not a late fee. Practising on a lapsed privilege is practising without a license in that state, which can mean board discipline, payer clawbacks and malpractice coverage questions. Payer panels add their own cadence of re-attestation and recredentialing that nobody remembers until a claim is denied. Existing tools are built around continuing education and course sales, or around hospital-scale credentialing. License Ledger is the small, independent layer in between: who holds what, where, until when, and what they still need to do about it. - The Counseling Compact is issuing privileges in 9 states so far, with more joining; each privilege costs $55 and renews separately from the home license. (source: https://counselingcompact.gov/) - CE Broker, the main continuing-education tracking service, covers 350+ professions and sells paid tiers above its free offering. (source: https://cebroker.com/) ## How it works 1. **Request service.** Tell us the number of clinicians and the professions in your practice. We confirm by email and set up your account within 2 business days. 2. **Add clinicians and credentials.** Import a spreadsheet or add each clinician's home licenses, compact privileges, DEA registration, NPI and payer panels. License Ledger pre-fills the renewal cycle and CE requirements it knows for that board; you confirm. 3. **Upload the evidence.** Attach license certificates, privilege confirmations and CE certificates to each record. Clinicians can do this themselves from their own login. 4. **Let the reminders and checks run.** Escalating reminders go out before each deadline, public board lookups are rechecked on a schedule, and the admin dashboard shows anything red across the whole practice. ## Features - **Compact-aware credential records.** Record home licenses and the privileges that sit on top of them: NLC multistate licenses, PSYPACT E.Passport and APIT, Counseling Compact, PT Compact and PA Compact privileges, each with its own fee and renewal date. - **Escalating renewal reminders.** Email and SMS at 90, 60, 30 and 7 days before expiry, to the clinician and to the admin, plus an overdue notice every day until the item is marked renewed. - **CE requirement tracker.** Enter the hours and categories a board requires for the renewal cycle (ethics, suicide prevention and so on), log completed courses with certificates, and see the gap. Rules are pre-filled where we have them and editable everywhere. - **Public lookup verification.** For boards that publish a license-verification page, License Ledger rechecks status on a schedule and flags a change to expired, lapsed or disciplined. Where no lookup exists, the record relies on the dates you enter. - **Payer and CAQH re-attestation reminders.** Track each clinician's payer panels, CAQH attestation date and recredentialing cycle, and get reminded before they fall due. Reminders only; we never log into payer portals. - **Admin dashboard and exports.** Practice owners and credentialing staff see every clinician's status in one list, filter by state or profession, and export CSV for payer applications and malpractice renewals. - **Clinician self-service login.** Each clinician sees only their own records, uploads certificates and subscribes to a calendar feed of their deadlines. Admins see everyone. - **No patient data by design.** License Ledger stores credentials, dates and certificates only. There is no place to enter patient information, which keeps the service outside your clinical systems. ## Who it's for - **Group practice owners and practice managers.** Ten to a hundred clinicians across several states. You get a single list with red, yellow and green status and an export for payer applications. - **Telehealth clinicians with privileges in several states.** You hold a home license and two to six compact privileges with different renewal dates. You get one calendar and one set of reminders instead of six board emails. - **Credentialing and billing staff.** You spend hours each month confirming who is current where before submitting claims. License Ledger answers that in one view, with evidence attached. - **Associations and practice consultants.** You support members or client practices. Set up accounts for them and keep a read-only view; ask us about member-benefit pricing. ## Works with Google Calendar, Outlook and Apple Calendar (ICS deadline feed), Email and SMS reminders, State board public license-verification pages (scheduled rechecks where available), Nursys public lookup for nursing licenses, Compact public directories (PSYPACT, Counseling Compact, PT Compact), CSV import and export, CAQH ProView (reminder tracking only; no portal login), MCP connector for Claude, ChatGPT and other AI assistants ## Pricing Billed monthly, cancel any time. Founding customer pricing is held for 24 months. All plans include compact-aware records, escalating reminders, CE tracking, certificate storage and the calendar feed. We onboard new accounts within 2 business days. | Plan | Price | Includes | | --- | --- | --- | | Solo | $9 per month | 1 clinician; Unlimited licenses, privileges and CE records; Email, SMS and calendar reminders; Certificate storage; Public lookup rechecks where available; CSV export | | Practice | $5 per clinician per month | Minimum 5 clinicians, add or remove any time; Everything in Solo for every clinician; Admin dashboard across the practice; Clinician self-service logins; Payer and CAQH re-attestation reminders; Exports for payer applications and malpractice renewals; Email support within one business day | | Network | $199 per month | Up to 60 clinicians included, then $3 per clinician; Everything in Practice; Multiple locations or entities under one account; Read-only seats for consultants or association staff; Custom CE requirement rules for your boards; Quarterly status report by email | ## Compared with the alternatives - **Spreadsheets and board emails.** Free and fine for one clinician in one state. Boards email reminders to the address on file, often an old personal one, and nothing warns the practice owner. - **CE Broker.** The dominant CE tracking service, with a free tier and paid tiers, covering 350+ professions. It is built around continuing-education reporting and course sales; compact privileges and payer re-attestation are outside its focus. - **Enterprise credentialing platforms.** Platforms used by hospitals and large groups bundle primary-source verification, payer enrollment and expirables management, priced and implemented for that scale. More than a 15-clinician practice needs. - **Your EHR's provider module.** Some EHRs store license numbers and expiry dates on the provider profile. Useful for claims, rarely with escalating reminders, CE tracking or compact privileges. ## Security and data - Credential records and certificates are stored on servers in the United States, encrypted at rest and in transit. - No patient data is collected or stored; the data model has no fields for it. - Clinicians see only their own records and admins see their practice; logins use email verification with optional two-factor authentication. - Data is exported on request at any time and deleted within 30 days of a deletion request, or 90 days after cancellation. ## Your first week Most practices have every clinician's credentials entered and the first reminders scheduled within a week; collecting certificates is the longest step. - Day 1: Request service; we set up your account and admin login within 2 business days. - Day 2–3: Import your clinician list, enter home licenses and compact privileges, invite clinicians to upload certificates. - Day 4–5: Confirm CE requirements per board, add payer panels and CAQH dates, set reminder recipients. - Day 7: Review the practice dashboard; anything red or yellow is the renewal work for the month ahead. ## FAQ ### Is License Ledger a credentialing or legal service? No. It is tracking software. It does not verify credentials with primary sources on your behalf, submit renewals or tell you where you may practise. License Ledger is software, not legal or regulatory advice; confirm scope-of-practice and renewal rules with the relevant board or compact commission. ### Does it handle patient data or need a HIPAA business associate agreement? License Ledger has no fields for patient information and should never receive any. Because it stores only clinician credential data, it is designed to sit outside your HIPAA-covered systems. Confirm with your compliance officer; we will sign a BAA if your policy requires one. ### Which compacts are covered? The Nurse Licensure Compact, PSYPACT (E.Passport and APIT), the Counseling Compact, the PT Compact and the PA Compact at launch, plus single-state licenses for any profession. Compacts roll out state by state; we update member states and rules as they go live, and you can always enter a privilege manually. ### How reliable are the public lookup checks? Board websites change without notice, so an automated check can break. When a check fails, the record shows 'last verified' with the date rather than a false green, and we repair the lookup. Your entered dates and reminders keep working regardless. ### Isn't CE Broker's free tier enough? For a single-state clinician whose board uses CE Broker, often yes. It does not cover compact privileges, payer re-attestation or a practice-wide view across clinicians and states, which is where License Ledger is aimed. ### How is the Practice plan billed? On the number of active clinicians on the first of each month, at $5 each with a $25 minimum. Add a clinician mid-month and they are billed from the next cycle; mark one inactive and they drop off. ### What happens to the data if we cancel? Export everything as CSV plus a zip of certificates from your account. We keep the data for 90 days after cancellation so you can download it, then delete it. ### Does it work with Claude or ChatGPT? Yes. License Ledger includes an MCP connector, so Claude, ChatGPT and other MCP-compatible assistants can answer questions like "whose licenses expire in the next 60 days?" from your data. It is read-only by default and you can revoke access at any time. --- Rotomal · https://rotomal.com/license-tracker/ · hello@rotomal.com # Bates Bench: Bates numbering, exhibit stamps, audited redaction and binders for small law firms. > Bates Bench is a Windows desktop app for the PDF tasks litigation actually requires: Bates ranges, exhibit stickers, true redaction with a log, OCR and binder assembly with an index. Files never leave your computer, and you can buy it once instead of renting it. - Page: https://rotomal.com/litigation-pdf/ - Category: Legal practice tools - Language: en - Billing: subscription - From: $12 per user per month - Request (free, no card): https://rotomal.com/litigation-pdf/request/ - Bates-stamps thousands of pages in one batch with your prefix, start number and a production log - Redaction removes the underlying text and image data and writes an entry to an exportable log for your privilege log - Builds an exhibit binder with cover sheet, index, bookmarks and stickers from a folder of files in one pass ## Acrobat is priced for everyone and built for no one in litigation Every litigation matter ends up as PDF work: numbering a production, stamping deposition exhibits, redacting account numbers, making a scanned stack searchable, assembling a hearing binder. The tool most firms use is a general-purpose editor sold per seat per month, where Bates numbering is buried in a menu and exhibit stickers are a workaround. Lawyers say so, loudly and publicly. Solo practitioners ask for alternatives; paralegals build their own redaction tools because everything on the market feels overpriced for what they actually use. The litigation tasks are the narrow ones: a dozen operations, done hundreds of times. Bates Bench does those dozen operations well, on your own computer, for a monthly price under half of Acrobat's team seat, or as a one-time license for those who would rather own their tools. - A solo personal-injury lawyer's post on r/LawFirm asking for alternatives to Adobe Acrobat drew 78 comments. (source: https://www.reddit.com/r/LawFirm/comments/1uy9s4q/) - A paralegal on r/paralegal described building their own redaction tool because the available products felt overpriced. (source: https://www.reddit.com/r/paralegal/comments/1up6dl9/) - Adobe Acrobat Pro for teams is listed at $23.99 per month per license. (source: https://www.adobe.com/acrobat/pricing/business.html) ## How it works 1. **Request service.** Tell us how many seats you need and whether you want monthly billing or a one-time license. We send download links and license keys within 2 business days. 2. **Install on Windows.** Bates Bench installs on Windows 10 and 11 in a couple of minutes. There is no account to create inside the app and no upload step; it works on files in your folders. 3. **Drop in a folder of documents.** Point Bates Bench at a folder of PDFs, Word files and images. It converts, OCRs where needed, and shows the page count before you commit to anything. 4. **Stamp, redact, assemble, log.** Apply the Bates range or exhibit stickers, redact, build the binder and export the log. A 2,000-page production typically runs in minutes on an ordinary office PC. ## Features - **Bates numbering.** Prefix, suffix, zero-padding, start number and position, applied across a whole folder in document order. A CSV log records each document's first and last Bates number for your production letter. - **Exhibit stickers and stamps.** Plaintiff, defendant and deposition exhibit stickers in numeric or alphabetic sequences, with case caption, date and your own colour and layout. Place them on the first page only or on every page. - **True redaction with audit log.** Redactions remove the underlying text, image data and metadata rather than painting over them, and the file is flattened on save. Each redaction records page, area, reason code and user in a log you can export for a privilege log. - **Search-and-redact patterns.** Find Social Security numbers, account numbers, dates of birth, phone numbers or your own terms across a set, and review each hit before redacting. Nothing is redacted without a person confirming it. - **OCR for scanned documents.** Makes scanned PDFs and images searchable in English and Spanish, with a page-level confidence indicator so you know which pages to spot-check. - **Exhibit binder assembly.** Merge a folder into one PDF with a generated cover sheet, index of exhibits, bookmarks per exhibit and optional separator pages, ready for a hearing binder or an e-filing attachment. - **Templates per matter.** Save a stamping, redaction or binder configuration per matter and re-run it as new documents arrive, continuing the Bates sequence from the last number used. - **Ask your AI assistant.** Connect Bates Bench to Claude, ChatGPT or another assistant through MCP and ask in plain language, for example "which exhibits in this binder are not stamped yet?". Read-only by default; revoke access any time. ## Who it's for - **Solo litigators.** You do your own productions and exhibits between client calls. Bates Bench turns a two-hour Acrobat session into a few clicks, and you can own the license outright. - **Paralegals and legal assistants in small firms.** You handle the volume: productions, deposition exhibits, hearing binders. Templates per matter apply the firm's conventions the same way every time. - **Firms with 3–10 attorneys.** You pay for Acrobat seats that are mostly used for Bates numbering. Move the litigation work to Bates Bench at $9 per user and keep a single general editor for the rest. - **Litigation support freelancers and document preparers.** You bill by the project and need predictable costs. A one-time license with optional yearly upgrades fits that. ## Works with Windows 10 and 11, PDF, PDF/A, Word (.docx), TIFF, JPEG and PNG input, Court e-filing systems (PDF/A output, split by file-size limit), Document systems that sync to folders: Clio Drive, NetDocuments, OneDrive, Dropbox, SharePoint, Microsoft Word (converted to PDF on import), CSV export of Bates logs and redaction logs, Network shares and matter folders, MCP connector for Claude, ChatGPT and other AI assistants ## Pricing Monthly plans are billed per user and cancel any time; the one-time license is yours to keep. Founding customer pricing: monthly rates are locked while you subscribe, and the one-time license includes 12 months of updates with optional yearly upgrades after that. Every plan includes every feature. We send license keys within 2 business days. | Plan | Price | Includes | | --- | --- | --- | | Solo | $12 per user per month | 1 user; All features: Bates, exhibits, redaction, OCR, binders; Updates included while subscribed; Install on up to 2 of your own computers; Email support within one business day; Cancel any time | | Firm | $9 per user per month | 3 or more users on one account; All features for every user; Shared matter templates and sticker designs; Central license management by the office manager; Priority email support; Cancel any time | | One-time license | $249 per user, one-time | Perpetual license for one user on up to 2 computers; All features; 12 months of updates included; Optional upgrade to the next year's release at $49 per user; Keep using your version indefinitely if you do not upgrade; Email support for 12 months | ## Compared with the alternatives - **Adobe Acrobat Pro.** The default tool, listed at $23.99 per month per license on the teams plan, with far more features than litigation work needs. Bates numbering and redaction exist, but exhibit stickers, production logs and binder indexes are manual work. - **Foxit, Nitro and other general PDF editors.** Cheaper general-purpose editors with Bates and redaction features. Capable, but like Acrobat they are built around editing, not around a production workflow with logs and exhibit sequences. - **E-discovery platforms.** Everlaw, Relativity and similar platforms handle review and production for large matters, priced for large-volume review. Right for a 200,000-document case; heavy for a 300-page production. - **Word, free tools and a manual stamp.** Free, and how many small firms still do it. It breaks at the first re-production, when a redaction turns out to be a black box over live text, or when a 400-exhibit binder needs renumbering. ## Security and data - Documents are processed entirely on your computer and are never uploaded to our servers. - The application sends only license-validation and update-check requests, containing the license key, app version and a machine identifier. - Redaction removes content rather than masking it, strips metadata on export and flattens the page, so redacted text cannot be recovered from the file. - Account records (your name, firm, email and license keys) are stored encrypted and deleted on request within 30 days. ## Your first week Install and stamp your first production the same day. We check in by email at the end of the week. - Day 1: Request service; download links and license keys arrive within 2 business days. - Day 2: Install on Windows, set up your firm's exhibit sticker design and Bates prefix templates. - Day 3–4: Run a real production or exhibit set; export the Bates log and redaction log. - Day 7: Short email check-in: what worked, what is missing, what we should build next. ## FAQ ### If a redaction fails, who is responsible? Bates Bench removes the underlying content, flattens the page and offers a verification view that shows the extracted text after redaction so you can confirm nothing remains. Reviewing the output before it leaves the firm remains your responsibility. Bates Bench is software, not legal advice; your production and privilege obligations are governed by the rules of your court and bar. ### Does it run on a Mac? Not yet. Bates Bench is a Windows desktop application at launch; macOS is on the roadmap and founding customers will be told when a date is firm. It runs in a Windows virtual machine on a Mac in the meantime. ### Do my documents get uploaded anywhere? No. All processing happens on your computer; the app contacts our server only to validate the license and check for updates. That is why we can serve firms with confidentiality obligations without a data-processing agreement. ### Is the one-time license really perpetual? Yes. The version you buy keeps working with no further payment. Updates are included for 12 months; after that you can buy the next year's upgrade or keep using what you have. Licenses can be activated offline, so they do not depend on a server staying up. ### Can it handle large productions? Processing is local, so the limit is your computer. A few thousand pages run in minutes on a typical office PC; OCR is the slow step and runs in the background. ### Does it integrate with my practice management system? Through the file system. If your documents are in Clio Drive, NetDocuments, OneDrive, Dropbox or a network share, Bates Bench works on them in place. There is no direct API integration at launch. ### How does early access work? Bates Bench is sold on this page and used by founding customers now. Keys arrive within 2 business days, you have direct email access to the people building it, and founding customers' requests go to the top of the list. ### Does it work with Claude or ChatGPT? Yes. Bates Bench includes an MCP connector, so Claude, ChatGPT and other MCP-compatible assistants can answer questions like "which exhibits in this binder are not stamped yet?" from your data. It is read-only by default and you can revoke access at any time. --- Rotomal · https://rotomal.com/litigation-pdf/ · hello@rotomal.com # Price Witness: Competitor and reseller price tracking in Shopify, with timestamped screenshot proof. > Price Witness lives inside your Shopify admin, matches your products to competitor and reseller listings by barcode and image, and checks prices on a schedule. When a reseller advertises below your minimum, it saves a full-page, timestamped screenshot you can attach to the enforcement email. - Page: https://rotomal.com/map-monitor/ - Category: E-commerce tools - Language: en - Billing: subscription - From: $29 per month - Request (free, no card): https://rotomal.com/map-monitor/request/ - Automatic matching by GTIN/UPC barcode, then image and title similarity, with a review queue for anything uncertain - Each MAP violation is stored with URL, time, price seen and a full-page screenshot hashed at capture - Price history per product and competitor, with alerts to email or Slack when a tracked price moves ## One expensive leader, and almost nothing credible underneath it If you sell on Shopify, you want to know when a competitor undercuts you. If you are a brand selling through resellers, you want to know when one of them advertises below your minimum advertised price, with evidence good enough to act on, not a phone screenshot a reseller disputes a week later. The Shopify App Store has a clear leader at $129 per month with excellent reviews, and a thin field below it where most apps have barely been used. Smaller merchants and emerging brands are left choosing between enterprise money and checking by hand. Price Witness is the credible middle: Shopify-native, from $29 a month, with the two things that make monitoring useful rather than noisy: product matching that finds the right listing, and evidence capture built for enforcement. - Prisync, the leading competitor-price app for Shopify, starts at $129 per month. (source: https://www.delightchat.io/best-shopify-apps/competitor-price-tracking) - PriceMole is listed at $49 per month, and most other competitor-price apps in the category have around one review each. (source: https://www.delightchat.io/best-shopify-apps/competitor-price-tracking) ## How it works 1. **Request service.** Tell us your Shopify store URL, roughly how many products you want tracked and whether you have a MAP policy. We set up your account and send the install link within 2 business days. 2. **Install and pick products.** Install the embedded app from your Shopify admin and choose the products to track. Price Witness reads titles, barcodes and images from your catalogue. 3. **Add competitors and resellers.** Enter competitor store domains and reseller URLs. Price Witness finds matching listings by barcode first, then image and title, and queues anything it is not sure about for your review. 4. **Checks, alerts and evidence.** Prices are checked on your plan's schedule. Changes appear on the product's history chart; MAP violations create an evidence record with a screenshot and trigger an alert. ## Features - **Automatic product matching.** Matches your products to listings on competitor and reseller sites by GTIN, UPC or EAN first, then by image similarity and title tokens. Confidence is shown, and low-confidence matches wait in a review queue for your approval. - **Scheduled price checks.** Daily checks on Starter, every 6 hours on Growth and hourly on Brand, per tracked URL. A failed check is shown as failed, with the reason, never as a stale price. - **MAP rules per product and reseller.** Set a minimum advertised price per product or variant, with per-reseller exceptions and effective dates. A price below the minimum, including after visible coupons where detectable, creates a violation. - **Timestamped screenshot evidence.** Each violation stores the URL, UTC time, the price seen, a full-page screenshot and a SHA-256 hash of the image so you can show the capture is unaltered. Records cannot be edited after capture. - **Price history and alerts.** Charts per product and competitor, exportable as CSV. Alert on any change, on undercuts beyond a percentage, or on MAP violations only, by email or Slack, instantly or as a daily digest. - **Violation notices.** Generate a notice to a reseller from a template you control, with the evidence record attached as PDF. We provide a starting point, not legal wording; have your lawyer review the template. - **Shopify-native and read-only.** Installs as an embedded app in your admin and bills through your Shopify invoice. Price Witness reads product data and never changes your prices. - **Ask your AI assistant.** Connect Price Witness to Claude, ChatGPT or another assistant through MCP and ask in plain language, for example "which resellers are below our minimum price today?". Read-only by default; revoke access any time. ## Who it's for - **Shopify merchants watching competitors.** You compete on a few hundred SKUs with other stores. You get a daily picture of where you stand and an alert when someone moves. - **Brands selling through resellers.** You have a MAP policy and resellers who test it. You get violations documented with evidence that holds up in a conversation with the reseller or your distributor. - **Multi-channel brands on Amazon and Google Shopping.** You need marketplace listings alongside stores. Price Witness checks them, with the caveats about anti-bot measures explained in the FAQ. - **Agencies managing Shopify stores.** You run pricing for clients. Install per store, set alert recipients per client and export reports. ## Works with Shopify (embedded app, product catalogue, Shopify billing), Competitor Shopify, WooCommerce, BigCommerce and custom stores (public product pages), Amazon product listings, Google Shopping, eBay and Walmart Marketplace listings, Slack and email alerts, CSV export of price history and violations, PDF evidence packets, MCP connector for Claude, ChatGPT and other AI assistants ## Pricing Billed monthly through your Shopify invoice, cancel any time. Founding customer pricing stays fixed while the app remains installed. All plans include product matching, price history, alerts and MAP evidence capture. We onboard new accounts within 2 business days. | Plan | Price | Includes | | --- | --- | --- | | Starter | $29 per month | Up to 100 tracked products; Up to 3 competitors or resellers per product; Daily price checks; Barcode and image product matching; Email alerts and price history; MAP violation evidence with screenshots | | Growth | $59 per month | Up to 500 tracked products; Up to 10 competitors or resellers per product; Price checks every 6 hours; Slack alerts and daily digests; MAP rules with per-reseller exceptions and violation notices; CSV export; Email support within one business day | | Brand | $99 per month | Up to 2,000 tracked products; Unlimited competitors or resellers per product; Hourly price checks; Everything in Growth; Evidence retained 36 months, with PDF packets per reseller; Multiple staff logins; Onboarding call to review matching | ## Compared with the alternatives - **Prisync.** The established leader on the Shopify App Store, starting at $129 per month, with a broad feature set including repricing. The mature choice if you need dynamic repricing across channels today; Price Witness is for merchants and brands who need monitoring and evidence at a lower price. - **PriceMole and other smaller apps.** Cheaper options exist, around $49 per month in PriceMole's case, but most apps below the leader have very few users and reviews, which makes reliability hard to judge. - **Spreadsheets and manual checks.** Free, and realistic for ten SKUs and two competitors. Beyond that it is a part-time job, and a phone screenshot is weak evidence when a reseller disputes it. - **Enterprise price intelligence platforms.** Competera, Wiser and similar platforms serve retailers with thousands of SKUs and custom integrations, with pricing to match. Right for a retail chain, more than a Shopify store needs. ## Security and data - Store and price data are stored on cloud servers in the United States, encrypted at rest and in transit; we read product data from Shopify and never write to your store. - Screenshots are kept in private object storage, hashed at capture, and retained for 24 months (36 on the Brand plan) or until you delete them. - Access is per staff login, and the store owner can revoke the app's access at any time from Shopify. - Store data is erased on Shopify's post-uninstall request (48 hours after uninstall), and on request at any time within 30 days. ## Your first week Install, match, watch. Most stores have their main competitors matched and the first alerts set within a few days. - Day 1: Request service; we send your install link within 2 business days. - Day 2: Install from Shopify admin, select products, add competitor domains and reseller URLs. - Day 3–4: Clear the match review queue, set MAP minimums and alert rules. - Day 7: Review the first week of price history and the first evidence records; adjust thresholds. ## FAQ ### Is a MAP policy legal, and will Price Witness help me enforce it? Price Witness documents advertised prices; it does not advise on whether your policy is lawful or enforceable. MAP policies are treated differently in different countries, with US rules on unilateral policies differing from EU and UK rules on resale price maintenance. Price Witness is software, not legal advice; have your policy and notices reviewed by a lawyer. ### How accurate is the product matching? Barcode matches are near-certain when a listing exposes a GTIN. Image and title matches carry a confidence score and go to a review queue below your threshold; approve or reject once and the match sticks. Expect a short review session when you first add a competitor. ### What about Amazon and Google Shopping? Both use anti-bot measures that can block automated checks. Price Witness checks them less often than ordinary stores and shows a failed check as failed rather than displaying a stale price. Coverage there is best-effort, and we say so. ### Will the screenshots hold up as evidence? Each capture records the URL, UTC time, the price seen and a SHA-256 hash of the full-page image, and the record cannot be edited afterwards. That is strong documentation for a conversation with a reseller or distributor; whether it meets a formal evidentiary standard is a question for your lawyer. ### Does it change my Shopify prices? No. Price Witness reads your catalogue and never writes to it. Automatic repricing is not part of early access; if founding customers want it, it would be a separate, opt-in feature. ### How many products and competitors can I track? Starter covers 100 products with up to 3 competitors each, Growth 500 with up to 10, and Brand 2,000 with no per-product limit. Each product-competitor pair is one tracked URL. ### What happens if I uninstall? Tracking stops immediately and billing ends with Shopify's cycle. Export your price history and evidence as CSV and PDF beforehand: store data is erased when Shopify sends its post-uninstall erasure request, 48 hours after uninstall. ### Does it work with Claude or ChatGPT? Yes. Price Witness includes an MCP connector, so Claude, ChatGPT and other MCP-compatible assistants can answer questions like "which resellers are below our minimum price today?" from your data. It is read-only by default and you can revoke access at any time. --- Rotomal · https://rotomal.com/map-monitor/ · hello@rotomal.com # MCP Bridge: Your spreadsheet, database or internal tool connected to Claude and ChatGPT as a private MCP connector, set up once. > Both Claude and ChatGPT can now use custom connectors built on the Model Context Protocol (MCP). MCP Bridge builds one for you: we connect your Google Sheet, Airtable base, Postgres or MySQL database, or internal API, decide with you exactly which data and actions the AI may use, host it securely, and add it to your team's Claude or ChatGPT. Paid once for the build; hosting is included for a year. - Page: https://rotomal.com/mcp-connector/ - Category: AI integrations - Language: en - Billing: one-time payment - From: $99 one-time - Request (free, no card): https://rotomal.com/mcp-connector/request/ - A remote MCP server with sign-in, so only your team's accounts can use it, added as a custom connector in Claude and ChatGPT. - Read-only by default: you choose which tables, columns and actions are exposed, and every request is logged. - Tested with the questions your team actually asks, like 'which invoices are overdue?' or 'what did we quote this customer?'. ## AI assistants are useful until they need your data Claude and ChatGPT are good at answering questions, drafting and summarizing, but they don't know your stock levels, your customer list or what was quoted last month. Copying data into a chat each time is slow, risky and out of date the moment you paste it. The Model Context Protocol fixes this: a small server describes your data and actions, and the assistant calls it when it needs to. Claude supports custom remote connectors on paid plans, and ChatGPT supports custom MCP connectors through its developer mode. What's missing for most small teams is someone to build the server, secure it and keep it running. MCP Bridge does that as a one-time job: a connector scoped to exactly what you allow, hosted for you, and tested with real questions. - Claude lets users add a custom connector by pasting a remote MCP server URL under Settings, Connectors, on its paid plans. (source: https://lagrowthmachine.com/claude-desktop-mcp/) - ChatGPT supports custom MCP connectors through Developer Mode; the server must be publicly reachable, and business plans may need an admin to enable it. (source: https://zuplo.com/docs/mcp-gateway/connect-clients/chatgpt.md) ## How it works 1. **Pick the data.** On a 30-minute call we agree the source (Sheet, Airtable, database, API), which tables or endpoints, and the ten questions your team wants answered. 2. **We build the connector.** A remote MCP server with read-only tools by default, sign-in for your team, and rate limits, built in about 3 business days. 3. **Add it to your assistant.** We add the connector to your Claude workspace and ChatGPT, or walk your admin through it, and test the ten questions together. 4. **Hosted and monitored.** We host and monitor it for a year, with a log of every request. Changes to the data or tools are a small fixed fee. ## Features - **Your data sources.** Google Sheets, Airtable, Notion databases, Postgres, MySQL, SQL Server, or any internal REST API with a key. - **Read-only by default.** The assistant can look things up but not change them. Write actions, like adding a note or creating a draft order, are added only if you ask, with a confirmation step. - **Column-level control.** You choose which tables and columns are visible. Salaries, card numbers or personal notes can be left out entirely. - **Sign-in for your team.** OAuth sign-in so only your team's accounts can use the connector; links shared outside the team do nothing. - **Works in Claude and ChatGPT.** Built to the open MCP standard, so the same connector works in Claude, ChatGPT and other MCP clients your team adopts later. - **Request log.** Every call the assistant makes is logged with the user, the question's tool call and the rows returned, so you can audit what was read. - **A year of hosting included.** Hosting, monitoring and security updates for 12 months, then $9 a month if you want us to keep running it, or we hand over the code. ## Who it's for - **Small businesses on spreadsheets.** Stock, orders, customers or bookings in Google Sheets or Airtable, and a team that already uses ChatGPT or Claude. - **Teams with an internal database.** A Postgres or MySQL database behind an internal tool, and people who keep asking the one developer to run queries. - **Agencies and consultants.** Give each client an assistant that knows their data, without building MCP servers yourself. - **SaaS founders.** Offer your customers an MCP connector for your product without pulling your own team off the roadmap. ## Works with Claude custom connectors (remote MCP), ChatGPT custom connectors (Developer Mode), Google Sheets, Airtable and Notion databases, Postgres, MySQL and SQL Server, Internal REST APIs, OAuth sign-in, Request logs exported as CSV ## Pricing One-time build price, paid once after we agree the scope. Hosting and monitoring for the first 12 months are included; after that $9 a month to keep it running, or we hand over the code. Founding customer pricing applies to early-access orders. | Plan | Price | Includes | | --- | --- | --- | | Sheet | $99 one-time | 1 Google Sheet or Airtable base; Up to 5 read-only tools; Sign-in for up to 5 users; Added to Claude and ChatGPT; 12 months hosting | | Database | $249 one-time | 1 database or REST API; Up to 15 tools, read-only by default; Column-level access control; Sign-in for up to 25 users; Request log; 12 months hosting | | Multi-source | $590 one-time | Up to 3 sources; Write actions with confirmation; Unlimited users in your workspace; Everything in Database; Code handover on request; Priority support | ## Compared with the alternatives - **Official connectors.** Many SaaS tools now ship their own MCP connectors; if yours does, use it, and we'll tell you. MCP Bridge is for spreadsheets, databases and internal tools that don't have one. - **Building it yourself.** The MCP SDKs are open source and a developer can build a basic server in a day. Sign-in, scoping, hosting and logs are the parts that take longer and matter most. - **Copying data into chats.** Free and quick for one-off questions. It leaks data into chat histories, goes stale immediately and doesn't scale beyond one person. ## Security and data - Connectors are read-only by default, and every tool and column exposed is agreed with you in writing. - OAuth sign-in restricts use to your team's accounts; credentials to your data sources are encrypted and never shown to the assistant. - Every request is logged with the user and the tool called; logs are kept 90 days or turned off on request. - We access your data sources only through the scoped credentials you create for the connector, which you can revoke at any time. ## From call to connector We agree the scope within 2 business days of your request and deliver most connectors within a week. - Day 1: Request the service; we book a 30-minute scoping call. - Day 2: Scope agreed: sources, tools, columns and ten test questions. - Day 3–5: Connector built, secured and deployed. - Day 6–7: Added to Claude and ChatGPT and tested with your team. ## FAQ ### What is MCP? The Model Context Protocol is an open standard that lets AI assistants call tools and read data through a small server. Claude and ChatGPT both support custom MCP connectors, so one server works in both. ### Which Claude and ChatGPT plans support custom connectors? Claude supports custom connectors on its paid plans, and ChatGPT through Developer Mode on paid plans, with admin approval on business workspaces. We check your plan on the first call. ### Can the AI change or delete our data? Not unless you ask for write actions. Connectors are read-only by default; write actions are added one by one, with a confirmation step in the assistant. ### Where is our data stored? It stays in your sheet, database or API. The connector reads it on request and doesn't keep copies, apart from the request log you can turn off. ### What happens after the first year? You can keep hosting with us for $9 a month, or we hand over the code and deployment instructions so you can run it yourself. ### Can you build one for our product, for our customers? Yes. The Multi-source plan covers a customer-facing connector for a SaaS product; larger scopes are quoted after a call. --- Rotomal · https://rotomal.com/mcp-connector/ · hello@rotomal.com # Plain Filings: Bank CSV in, micro-company accounts and CT600 out, for tiny and dormant UK companies. > Plain Filings takes a bank statement CSV, produces micro-entity accounts and a CT600 with the iXBRL tagging HMRC and Companies House require, and shows you every figure before anything is filed. It is built for companies whose year fits on one page, and for the bookkeepers who look after dozens of them. - Page: https://rotomal.com/micro-filing/ - Category: Compliance deadlines - Language: en - Billing: subscription - From: £29 per company per year - Request (free, no card): https://rotomal.com/micro-filing/request/ - Handles the common adjustments and stops, with an explanation, when something is outside its scope - Produces FRS 105 micro-entity accounts and the tagged iXBRL files, with the computation shown line by line - Dormant companies get a dormant-accounts mode that takes about five minutes a year ## The free way to file closed, and the paid ways are built for accountants For years a tiny UK company could file its accounts and corporation tax return free through HMRC's own service, which closed on 31 March 2026. Companies House is going the same way: from April 2028, accounts must be filed through software, and micro companies will have to include a profit and loss account for the first time. That leaves very small companies, dormant, a contractor's limited company or a single buy-to-let, choosing between an accountant and desktop tax software built for practices. Accountants charge £150–400 a year even for a dormant filing; desktop suites cost £100–300 or more and assume you know what a tax computation is. Missing a deadline is expensive: Companies House late-filing penalties start at £150 and double for a second late year, and HMRC adds its own for a late CT600. For a company with nothing happening, that is a lot to pay for a form. - HMRC's free service for filing company accounts and the CT600 together closed on 31 March 2026. (source: https://www.gov.uk/guidance/closure-of-the-service-to-file-your-company-accounts-and-tax-return) - From 1 April 2028 all company accounts must be filed through software, and micro companies will have to file a profit and loss account; the government confirmed the reforms in June 2026. (source: https://www.icas.com/news-insights-events/news/practice/uk-government-confirms-companies-house-accounts-and-filing-reforms-will-go-ahead) - Accountants typically charge £150–400 a year for a dormant company's filings alone. (source: https://dormantfile.co.uk/guides/webfiling-closing-for-accounts-2028) ## How it works 1. **Tell us about the company.** Enter the company number; we pull the registered details and year end from Companies House. Say whether it traded, was dormant, or holds property. About five minutes. 2. **Upload the bank CSV.** Export the year's transactions from your business bank account as CSV and upload it. Rules sort transactions into a small chart of accounts; you confirm anything unmatched. Dormant companies skip this step. 3. **Review accounts and computation.** You see the balance sheet, profit and loss, notes and the corporation tax computation, with each adjustment explained. Anything outside scope (see FAQ) is flagged and the filing is paused until resolved. 4. **File.** Approve, and the iXBRL-tagged accounts go to Companies House and the CT600 goes to HMRC, with receipts stored against the year. See the FAQ for the current status of our HMRC and Companies House approvals. ## Features - **Bank CSV import.** Accepts CSV exports from any UK business bank. Transactions are categorised by rules you can edit, with a review list for anything unmatched. There is no bank login or open-banking connection, so we never hold your credentials. - **Micro-entity accounts (FRS 105).** Generates the balance sheet, profit and loss account, notes and directors' statements in the micro-entity format, with the filleted version for Companies House and the full version for HMRC. - **Corporation tax computation.** Adds back depreciation and disallowed items, applies annual investment allowance to equipment purchases, carries trading losses forward and applies the current rates. Each line of the computation links to the transactions behind it. - **CT600 with iXBRL tagging.** Produces the CT600 and tags the accounts and computation in iXBRL as HMRC requires. You can download the files to check or to hand to an accountant. - **Dormant mode.** For companies that have not traded, produces dormant company accounts for Companies House and, where HMRC still expects a return, a nil CT600, in a few minutes a year. - **Multi-client mode.** Bookkeepers manage all of their companies from one list, with status per filing and a review link to send each client before approval. - **Scope checks that stop the filing.** If the company has an overdrawn director's loan at year end, R&D claims, group relief, property disposals or anything else we do not compute in early access, the filing is paused and you are told exactly why. - **Ask your AI assistant.** Connect Plain Filings to Claude, ChatGPT or another assistant through MCP and ask in plain language, for example "when is my next filing due and what's missing?". Read-only by default; revoke access any time. ## Who it's for - **Dormant companies.** A company kept for a name or a future project. You get both annual filings done in minutes, for less than a tenth of a typical accountant's fee. - **Contractor and consultant companies.** One director, one bank account, a few dozen invoices a year. You get proper accounts and a computation you can read. - **Small property companies.** A single-let company with rent in, mortgage interest and repairs out. Rental income and finance costs are handled; property sales are flagged for an accountant. ## Works with Companies House company lookup (company number), Companies House software filing (approval in progress, see FAQ), HMRC Corporation Tax online filing (recognition in progress, see FAQ), Bank statement CSV from any UK bank, iXBRL (FRS 105 taxonomy) download, PDF accounts and computation download, MCP connector for Claude, ChatGPT and other AI assistants ## Pricing Billed per company per year, including VAT. Founding customer pricing is fixed for three filing years. All plans include deadline reminders, the review step and downloadable iXBRL and PDF files. Full refund if we cannot complete a filing the plan covers. | Plan | Price | Includes | | --- | --- | --- | | Dormant | £29 per company per year | Dormant company accounts for Companies House; Nil CT600 where HMRC requires one; Deadline reminders; Filing receipts stored; Email support | | Trading | £49 per company per year | Bank CSV import, up to 1,000 transactions; FRS 105 micro-entity accounts; Corporation tax computation and CT600; iXBRL tagging for both filings; Scope checks with plain-English explanations; Everything in Dormant | | Practice | £249 per year | 10 companies included, then £19 per company; Multi-client dashboard with filing status; Client review links before approval; Editable categorisation rules shared across clients; Priority support in January and before each deadline | ## Compared with the alternatives - **An accountant.** The right choice if the company has anything unusual: multiple directors with loans, R&D, property disposals, group structures. Expect £150–400 a year for a dormant company and more for a trading one. - **DormantFile and TinyTax.** DormantFile charges about £19 a year and TinyTax starts at about £20. Both are cheaper than us for a dormant company; we cover dormant and simple trading companies in one product, with a bookkeeper mode. - **Desktop tax suites.** Practice software costs roughly £100–300 or more a year and does far more, including complex computations. It assumes you are an accountant. Good if you are one with many complex clients. ## Security and data - Data is stored in a UK or EU data-centre region, encrypted at rest and in transit (TLS 1.2 or higher). - We never ask for bank logins; the only financial data we hold is the CSV you upload and the figures derived from it. - Only the company's users and anyone they invite can see its records. Support access is granted by you per session and logged. - Filed accounts, computations and receipts are kept while the account is open. Companies must keep records for six years, so export before closing an account. - You can export everything at any time and request deletion; we complete it within 30 days and confirm by email. ## Your first week We onboard new accounts within 2 business days. A dormant company can be filing-ready the same day; a trading company usually needs one review session to confirm categorisation rules. - Day 1: Request service with your company number and year end. We check the company is in scope and confirm which plan fits. - Day 2–3: Your account is live. Upload the bank CSV (or mark the company dormant) and review the categorised transactions. - Day 4–5: Check the draft accounts and computation. Any scope flags are explained and we help you resolve them. - Day 7: Accounts, CT600 and iXBRL files are ready for approval and filing, and reminders are set for next year's deadlines. ## FAQ ### Is Plain Filings approved by HMRC and Companies House? Not yet. We are working through HMRC's recognition process for Corporation Tax software and Companies House's software-filing approval. Until both are complete, the product produces the accounts, computation, CT600 and iXBRL files for you to check and file through an accountant or another recognised route. We will email every customer the day direct filing goes live; if we are not approved before your deadline you get a full refund. ### Which companies qualify as micro-entities? Broadly, companies meeting two of three tests: turnover up to £1 million, balance sheet total up to £500,000, and no more than 10 employees, under the thresholds that took effect in April 2025. Charities, some regulated firms and companies in groups are excluded. Check your own position on gov.uk if you are near a limit. ### What is outside the scope of early access? Overdrawn director's loan accounts at year end (which trigger a separate tax charge), R&D claims, group relief, capital gains on property or shares, foreign income and payroll beyond a single director. If we detect any of these the filing is paused and you are told why. ### Is this tax or accounting advice? No. Plain Filings is filing software. It applies standard rules to the transactions you give it and shows you the result. Whether an expense is allowable, or whether a company should be dormant, is a question for an accountant or HMRC. ### What happens if the computation is wrong? You review every figure before approving, and the directors remain responsible for what is filed, as with any software. If a defect in our computation causes an incorrect filing we will prepare the amendment at no charge and refund that year's fee. ### Do I need an accountant at all? Legally, a micro company does not need one to file. Practically, many directors want a professional to look over the first year. The Trading plan lets you download the full accounts and computation to share with them. ### Does it work with Claude or ChatGPT? Yes. Plain Filings includes an MCP connector, so Claude, ChatGPT and other MCP-compatible assistants can answer questions like "when is my next filing due and what's missing?" from your data. It is read-only by default and you can revoke access at any time. --- Rotomal · https://rotomal.com/micro-filing/ · hello@rotomal.com # Page Evidence: Scheduled, hashed, timestamped captures of web pages, with AI summaries of what changed. > Page Evidence captures the pages you care about on a schedule (full-page image, PDF, HTML and a WARC web-archive file), records a SHA-256 hash and timestamp for each capture in a tamper-evident log, and tells you in plain English what changed since last time. It's built for the moments when 'I think the page said that' isn't enough. - Page: https://rotomal.com/page-evidence/ - Category: Compliance and monitoring - Language: en - Billing: subscription - From: $29 per month - Request (free, no card): https://rotomal.com/page-evidence/request/ - Every capture is stored with its SHA-256 hash, UTC timestamp and final URL, and appended to a hash-chained log you can export. - Changes are detected on the rendered text and on elements you select, then summarised by an AI model with the exact before/after text alongside. - Monitor packs set up dozens of pages at once for a vertical: affiliate partner disclosures, competitor pricing pages, state insurance bulletins, app-store listings. ## Screenshots are one-offs; compliance needs a record Affiliate managers need to prove a partner showed the required disclosure last quarter. Compliance teams need to know the day a regulator's bulletin page changed. Brand teams need to show that a reseller advertised a price they weren't allowed to. In every case the evidence is a web page, and web pages change without notice. The usual approach is ad hoc: someone takes a screenshot, maybe prints to PDF, and files it somewhere. It has no timestamp anyone can trust, no hash, no record of what the page served to a clean browser at that moment, and nobody repeats it next week. Change-monitoring services exist, but they are built to alert, not to produce a record that will hold up in a dispute. Page Evidence is the recurring version of the job: captures on your schedule, kept in formats that archivists and lawyers recognise, with a change log a human can read. - A solo-run screenshot API reached about $32,000 in monthly revenue and 1,000+ paying customers, with roughly 9% monthly churn, mostly from customers whose one-off projects ended. (source: https://superframeworks.com/case-study/screenshotone) - A Show HN post for a page-element watcher with RSS output reached 320 points in March 2026, a sign of demand for monitoring specific parts of pages. (source: https://hn.algolia.com/api/v1/search?query=sitespy&tags=story) ## How it works 1. **Add pages or pick a pack.** Paste URLs, upload a CSV, or choose a monitor pack. Set the schedule (hourly to monthly), the device profile (desktop or mobile) and the region to capture from. Optionally select a page element to watch, such as a price or a disclosure block. 2. **We capture in a clean browser.** A real browser engine (Chromium via Playwright) loads the page with no cookies or prior state, waits for it to settle, and saves a full-page PNG, a PDF, the rendered HTML and a WARC file of every request and response. The hash and timestamp are recorded immediately. 3. **Changes are detected and summarised.** Rendered text is compared with the previous capture; if it differs beyond your threshold, an AI model writes a short summary ('Price changed from €49 to €59; refund policy section removed') next to the exact diff. 4. **Export when you need it.** Download a single capture, a date range, or a monitor's full history as a ZIP with a manifest of hashes. Share a read-only evidence page with a colleague or counsel. ## Features - **Evidence-grade captures.** Full-page PNG, PDF, HTML and WARC per capture, each with SHA-256 hash, UTC timestamp, requested and final URL, user agent and viewport recorded. Hashes are appended to a chained log so a later alteration would be detectable. - **Element watching.** Pick a CSS selector or click the element in the preview to track a price, a disclosure, a stock notice or a clause. Alerts fire on that element only, cutting noise from banners and rotating content. - **AI change summaries.** Each detected change gets a short, plain-English summary alongside the raw diff. The summary is a convenience; the diff and the captures are the record. - **Monitor packs.** Pre-built page lists for common jobs: affiliate partner disclosure pages, competitor pricing pages, US state insurance department bulletin pages, major app-store listing pages, SaaS terms-of-service pages. Edit them freely. - **Blocked-capture handling.** If a site blocks automated browsers or returns an error, the failure is logged with the response, retried from a different region, and reported. We don't silently show you the last good capture as if it were new. - **Exports and shareable evidence pages.** ZIP exports with a manifest, CSV of the change log, RSS per monitor, and read-only links to a capture that show hash, time and the images side by side. - **API and webhooks.** Create monitors, fetch captures and receive change events programmatically, so evidence can land in your own case or ticket system. - **Ask your AI assistant.** Connect Page Evidence to Claude, ChatGPT or another assistant through MCP and ask in plain language, for example "what changed on our competitors' pricing pages this week?". Read-only by default; revoke access any time. ## Who it's for - **Affiliate and partnership managers.** You must verify that partners display disclosures and use approved claims and prices. You get a weekly record per partner page and a summary of anything that changed. - **Compliance teams at small regulated firms.** Insurance agencies, lenders, advisers and others who need to know when a regulator's page, a rate sheet or a disclosure template changed, with a record of the previous version. - **Brand protection and pricing teams.** You watch resellers and competitors for pricing, MAP violations and misuse of your marks. You get dated, hashed captures you can send with a takedown or a letter. - **Procurement and legal.** You need the version of a vendor's terms, privacy policy or SLA page at a specific date. Capture the pages that matter to your contracts on a monthly schedule. ## Works with Email, Slack and webhook alerts, RSS feed per monitor, REST API, ZIP, PNG, PDF, HTML and WARC exports, CSV change log, S3-compatible bucket export (bring your own storage), Read-only evidence share links, CSV import of URL lists, MCP connector for Claude, ChatGPT and other AI assistants ## Pricing Prices in US dollars, billed monthly, cancel any time. Founding customer pricing: the prices below are locked for 12 months for accounts opened during early access. All plans include hashes and timestamps, WARC files, AI summaries, element watching and exports. A capture is one page loaded once; an hourly monitor uses about 720 captures a month. | Plan | Price | Includes | | --- | --- | --- | | Starter | $29 per month | 25 monitors; 1,500 captures per month; Daily or weekly schedules; 12-month retention; Email and RSS alerts; ZIP and CSV exports; Email support | | Team | $79 per month | 150 monitors; 10,000 captures per month; Hourly to monthly schedules; 3-year retention; Monitor packs and element watching; Slack, webhooks and API; 5 team members, shared evidence links | | Scale | $149 per month | 500 monitors; 40,000 captures per month; 7-year retention; S3-compatible export to your own bucket; 15 team members with roles; Capture from multiple regions; Priority support and onboarding call | ## Compared with the alternatives - **Screenshot APIs (ScreenshotOne and others).** Excellent for rendering a page on demand inside your own software, which is a different job. Building scheduling, storage, hashing, diffing and exports on top is weeks of work. - **Change-monitoring tools (Distill, Visualping).** From about $15 to $80+ a month, built to alert you when a page changes. Good for alerts; thinner on evidence formats, hashes and long retention. If alerts are all you need, they may be enough. - **The Wayback Machine.** Free and widely recognised, but it captures on its own schedule, honours blocks, and can't be pointed at an element or run hourly. Keep it as a complementary public record. ## Security and data - Captures and logs are stored encrypted at rest in object storage in the EU, separated per account; share links are unguessable and can be revoked. - Only members of your account can view captures; staff access is limited to support cases you open and is logged. - Page text sent to the AI model for summaries is processed under a data processing agreement and not used to train models; you can disable summaries per monitor. - Retention follows your plan; on cancellation an account's data is deleted within 30 days, and single captures can be deleted immediately. ## Your first week We onboard new accounts within 2 business days. Most teams have their first week of evidence and their first change report inside seven days. - Day 1: Add your first pages or a monitor pack; we check that each target captures cleanly and tune selectors for element watching. - Day 2–3: First scheduled captures land; review the evidence page format and set alert channels. - Day 5: First change summaries arrive; adjust thresholds to cut noise. - Day 7: Export a sample ZIP with manifest and share it with whoever will rely on it (legal, partners, compliance). ## FAQ ### Will the captures hold up as evidence? They are designed to be as strong as a third-party record can be: a hash and timestamp recorded at capture, a WARC of the actual responses, and a chained log. Whether a record is admissible or sufficient depends on jurisdiction and context; that is for your legal counsel. Page Evidence is record-keeping software, not legal advice. ### What if the site blocks bots? Some sites do. We use a full browser, rotate capture regions and retry; if a page still can't be captured, the failure is logged and you're told. We don't bypass CAPTCHAs or log in on your behalf. ### Can you capture pages behind a login? Not in early access. Login-protected captures raise terms-of-service and account-security questions we'd rather solve carefully. Tell us your case when you request service; it shapes the roadmap. ### How are timestamps trusted? Capture time comes from our servers' NTP-synchronised clocks and is included in the chained log with the hash. An optional independent timestamp from an RFC 3161 time-stamping authority is planned; ask if you need it. ### Is the AI summary reliable? It saves reading diffs, but it can misstate a change. The exact before/after text is always shown next to it, and the captures themselves are the record. ### Do I have the right to capture any page? You're responsible for ensuring your use complies with the site's terms and applicable law. We'll stop monitoring a page on a legitimate request from its owner. ### What happens to my data if I cancel? Export everything before you leave. We keep captures for 30 days after cancellation in case you need an export, then delete them. ### Does it work with Claude or ChatGPT? Yes. Page Evidence includes an MCP connector, so Claude, ChatGPT and other MCP-compatible assistants can answer questions like "what changed on our competitors' pricing pages this week?" from your data. It is read-only by default and you can revoke access at any time. --- Rotomal · https://rotomal.com/page-evidence/ · hello@rotomal.com # Bounce Desk: Booking, delivery-zone pricing, waivers and crew routing for small party-rental companies. > Bounce Desk is booking software built for inflatable and party-rental operators: customers see only the items that are actually free for their date and delivery window, pay a deposit, sign the waiver, and get a price that already includes your delivery zone. Your crew gets a routed day sheet. It is priced for a business with a trailer and twenty units, not a warehouse. - Page: https://rotomal.com/party-rental-booking/ - Category: Rental business software - Language: en - Billing: subscription - From: $29 per month - Request (free, no card): https://rotomal.com/party-rental-booking/request/ - Availability is per item per time slot, with your setup and cleaning buffers, so the same castle is never promised to two parties. - Delivery pricing by ZIP code or distance band, with surcharges for stairs, generators and late pickups, calculated before the customer books. - Weather policy built in: a rain-check rule you define, applied in one click, with the customer notified automatically. ## Party-rental software is priced for warehouses, so small operators run on texts and a spreadsheet A new inflatable business starts with two or three units, a trailer and a phone that never stops. Bookings arrive by text, Facebook message and phone call. The owner checks a calendar, quotes delivery from memory, texts a price and hopes the deposit comes. Twice a season the same unit gets booked twice, or a customer disputes a cancellation policy they never actually saw. The industry's main software does all of this well, but at $124–264 a month plus add-ons it costs more than a new operator clears on a slow weekend. General booking and rental tools are cheaper but do not understand delivery zones, blower counts, weather cancellations or crew routing, so the owner is back to doing those parts by hand. Bounce Desk takes the rental-specific features that matter to a small operation and delivers them at a flat price that still makes sense when the business has eight units. - InflatableOffice, the category incumbent, lists plans at $124–264 per month plus add-ons, and has run a free-for-three-years promotion on its starter tier. (source: https://www.inflatableoffice.com/pricing) - Check Cherry, a general event-business booking tool, lists plans at $29–139 per month. (source: https://www.checkcherry.com/pricing) ## How it works 1. **Load your inventory.** Add each unit with photos, dimensions, power needs, setup time, cleaning buffer and price. Group packages and add-ons such as tables, chairs, generators and concessions. About an hour for a typical fleet. 2. **Set zones, policies and waivers.** Define delivery zones by ZIP list or distance band with fees, set the deposit percentage, tax, your weather and cancellation rules, and paste your waiver text for e-signature. 3. **Customers book online.** A booking page on your domain shows only available items for the chosen date and window, calculates delivery and add-ons, collects the deposit by card and the signed waiver, and sends a confirmation. 4. **Run the weekend.** Each crew gets a day sheet ordered by stop with addresses, map links, setup specs and customer phone numbers; delivery and pickup are checked off on a phone, with photos. ## Features - **Per-item availability.** Each unit is tracked by date and time window, including setup, pickup and cleaning buffers. Multi-day events and overnight pickups are supported; a unit under repair can be blocked. - **Delivery-zone pricing.** Zones by ZIP list or distance band from your base, each with a fee and minimum order. Surcharges for stairs, long carries, generator rental and after-hours pickup are selectable by the customer. - **Deposits and payments.** Collect a deposit or full payment by card through Stripe or Square; the balance can be charged automatically before the event or collected on delivery and recorded. - **E-signed waivers and rental terms.** Your waiver and rental agreement are signed on screen during booking and stored as a PDF with timestamp and IP address, and re-sent if the renter changes. - **Weather and cancellation rules.** Define your rain-check policy: cutoff hours, reschedule credit or refund percentage. Apply it to one booking or a whole day; customers get the notice and credit automatically. - **Crew routing and day sheets.** Assign bookings to crews; stops are ordered by time window and distance with Google Maps links. Crews check off delivery, setup photos and pickup from a phone. - **Customer reminders.** Automated email and text confirmations, a reminder two days before with power and space requirements, and a post-event review request pointing to the link you choose. - **Accounting exports.** Bookings, payments, taxes collected and refunds exported as CSV for QuickBooks or your accountant. ## Who it's for - **First-season inflatable operators.** You bought two or three units and want to look professional from the first booking. Bounce Desk gives you online booking, a deposit and a signed waiver for $29 a month, and grows with you. - **Established small party-rental companies.** Fifteen to thirty-five items, a couple of part-time crews, and a spreadsheet that has reached its limit. You get availability you can trust and a day sheet your crew can follow. - **Tent, table-and-chair and photo-booth rentals.** The same model without blowers: per-item availability, delivery zones, waivers and crew routing work for any delivered rental. ## Works with Stripe and Square payments, Google Maps links for crew routing, Email and SMS notifications, iCal feed of bookings for Google Calendar or Outlook, Hosted booking page on your domain or embed on your site, QuickBooks-ready CSV export, Zapier webhook, MCP connector for Claude, ChatGPT and other AI assistants ## Pricing Flat monthly price, no per-booking fee, no setup fee, cancel any time. Card processing fees are charged by Stripe or Square at their rates. Founding customer pricing is locked for 24 months for accounts opened in early access. Every plan includes online booking, availability, deposits, waivers and reminders. | Plan | Price | Includes | | --- | --- | --- | | Starter | $29 per month | Up to 12 rental items; Online booking page and availability; Delivery zones and surcharges; Deposits via Stripe or Square; E-signed waiver; Email confirmations and reminders; 1 crew day sheet | | Growth | $49 per month | Up to 35 rental items; Everything in Starter; SMS reminders; Weather and cancellation rules with one-click apply; Up to 3 crews with routed day sheets and photos; Packages, add-ons and booking page on your own domain; CSV exports | | Pro | $79 per month | Unlimited items; Everything in Growth; Unlimited crews and staff logins; Multi-day and corporate event quotes; Maintenance log and unit blocking; Zapier webhook; Priority support | ## Compared with the alternatives - **InflatableOffice.** The incumbent, with years of features, listed at $124–264 per month plus add-ons. It suits larger operations with many units and marketing needs. With 80 items and two warehouses, it is probably the better fit. - **Goodshuffle Pro, Booqable and TapGoods.** Capable rental software built for event and equipment rental companies generally. They tend to cost more than Bounce Desk and do not specialize in inflatables, so weather rules, blower and power specs and crew photos are missing or generic. - **Check Cherry and general booking tools.** Check Cherry lists $29–139 per month and handles event bookings and contracts well, but is not built around per-item inventory, delivery zones and crew routing. - **Spreadsheet, Facebook messages and Square.** Free, and how most operators start. It works until the first double-booking or the first customer who says they never agreed to the cancellation policy. ## Security and data - Customer and booking data is stored on servers in the United States, encrypted in transit and at rest, with daily encrypted backups. - Card details are handled by Stripe or Square; we never see or store card numbers. - Signed waivers are stored as PDFs with timestamp and IP address and remain available for as long as your account is active. - Crew logins see only their day sheet, not payments or customer history; owners can revoke access instantly. - On cancellation you can export everything; data is deleted 90 days after the account closes, or sooner on request. ## Your first week We set up new accounts within 2 business days and bring your upcoming bookings into the system for you. - Day 1: Sign up, add your units with photos and specs, connect Stripe or Square. Send us your existing bookings. - Day 2–3: Your booking page is live with zones, waiver and policies configured; existing bookings are loaded and availability is correct. - Day 4–5: The first weekend's day sheets go to your crew; we review the routing with you. - Day 7: Check-in on anything customers found confusing on the booking page, pricing tweaks and reminder wording. ## FAQ ### Can customers book without talking to me first? Yes, that is the point. The booking page shows only items free for their date and window, prices delivery by zone, collects the deposit and waiver, and emails you. You can also require manual approval for certain items or dates. ### How do you handle rain? You define your policy once: cutoff hours, whether the customer gets a reschedule credit or a refund, and how much. On a rainy day you select the affected bookings and apply the policy; customers are notified and credits are tracked on their account. ### Can I pause in the off-season? Yes. Pause your subscription for up to 6 months at no charge; your booking page shows a reopening date, your data is kept, and you resume with one click. ### Is a waiver signed on a phone enforceable? Electronic signatures are widely recognized in the US, and we store the signed PDF with timestamp and IP address. Whether your waiver's wording protects you is a legal question: have a lawyer review it and check your insurer's requirements. Bounce Desk is booking software, not legal advice. ### Do you charge per booking or take a percentage? No. You pay the flat monthly price. Card processing fees go to Stripe or Square at their published rates; we add nothing on top. ### Can I import my existing bookings and customers? Yes. Send us a CSV or a screenshot of your calendar during onboarding and we load upcoming bookings and customers so your availability is correct from day one. ### How long does it take to get started? Loading a typical fleet takes about an hour. We onboard new accounts within 2 business days, including your booking page, zones, payment connection and the import of upcoming bookings. ### What should bounce house rental software do? At minimum: track each inflatable per date and time window so nothing is double-booked, price delivery by zone before checkout, take a deposit, get the waiver signed during booking, apply your weather policy, and give your crew a routed day sheet. Bounce Desk does all of these at a flat monthly price. ## Guides - [Bounce house rental software: a buyer's checklist](https://rotomal.com/party-rental-booking/bounce-house-rental-software-checklist/): What bounce house and inflatable rental software must handle: per-unit availability, delivery zones, waivers, weather and crew routes. What it costs and how to choose. --- Rotomal · https://rotomal.com/party-rental-booking/ · hello@rotomal.com # Bounce house rental software: a buyer's checklist By Rotomal team · Updated 2026-10-12 · Part of [Bounce Desk](https://rotomal.com/party-rental-booking/) **Short answer:** Good bounce house rental software stops double-bookings by tracking each inflatable per date and time window, including setup and cleaning buffers. It also prices delivery by zone before checkout, collects a deposit, gets the waiver e-signed during booking, applies your weather policy and gives crews a routed day sheet. Listed prices run from $29–139 a month for general booking tools such as Check Cherry to $124–264 a month plus add-ons for InflatableOffice, the category incumbent. Bounce Desk is built for operators with under 35 units at $29–79 a month. ## Must-have features - Per-unit availability with buffers: each castle, slide and combo tracked by date and time window, with setup, pickup and cleaning time blocked automatically. - Delivery-zone pricing: fees by ZIP code or distance band, minimum orders, and surcharges for stairs, long carries, generators and late pickups, all shown before the customer pays. - Deposits and balances: a card deposit at booking and the balance charged before the event or recorded on delivery. - E-signed waiver and rental terms: signed on screen during booking and stored as a PDF with timestamp, so no customer can say they never saw your policy. - Weather policy: your rain-check rules (cutoff hours, credit or refund) applied to one booking or a whole day in one step. - Crew day sheets: stops ordered by time window and distance, map links, and setup photos taken from a phone. ## Nice to have as you grow - Several crews and trailers on the same day - Add-on upsells: generators, concession machines, tables and chairs - Reminders with power and space requirements two days before - Post-event review requests - Accounting export for QuickBooks or your accountant - An iCal feed so bookings show in Google Calendar or Outlook ## What it costs | Option | Listed price | Best for | | --- | --- | --- | | InflatableOffice | $124–264 a month plus add-ons | Larger operations with many units and warehouses | | Goodshuffle Pro, Booqable, TapGoods | See each vendor's pricing page | General event and equipment rental companies | | Check Cherry | $29–139 a month | Event businesses that book services more than inventory | | Bounce Desk | $29–79 a month, flat | Operators with under 35 units who need rental-specific features | | Spreadsheet, texts and Square | Free | The first few units, until the first double-booking | ## Questions to ask before you sign up - Does availability work per unit and per time window, with buffers, or only per day? - Can delivery be priced by ZIP code or distance band, with surcharges? - Do you take a percentage of each booking, or charge a flat fee? - Is the waiver signed during booking and stored per renter? - Can I apply a rain policy to a whole day at once? - Can I pause or downgrade in the off-season? - Can I export my bookings and customers if I leave? ## Moving off texts and a spreadsheet Start with your inventory list: every unit with its footprint, blower count and power needs, and any unit currently out for repair. Add your delivery zones and your rain-check policy, then import upcoming bookings so availability is right from day one. Put the booking link on your website, Google Business Profile and Facebook page, and send new inquiries to it instead of quoting by text. ## FAQ ### Do I need rental software with only three or four units? Not strictly, but double-bookings and disputed cancellation policies happen at any size. A flat, low-cost tool usually pays for itself the first time it prevents one. ### Is a waiver signed on a phone enforceable? In the US, electronic signatures are generally valid under the federal ESIGN Act and state UETA laws, but whether a specific waiver holds up depends on its wording and your state. Have a local lawyer review the waiver text; the software only collects and stores the signature. ### Do bounce house booking tools charge per booking? Some take a percentage of each booking or add payment fees on top of the subscription. Compare the total cost at your expected volume. Bounce Desk charges a flat monthly price and no booking percentage; card processing fees go to Stripe or Square. ### Can customers book online without calling me? Yes, if the software shows only units that are actually free for their date and window and prices delivery before checkout. That is what makes self-service booking safe. ## Sources - InflatableOffice lists plans at $124–264 per month plus add-ons. https://www.inflatableoffice.com/pricing - Check Cherry lists plans at $29–139 per month. https://www.checkcherry.com/pricing [Bounce Desk](https://rotomal.com/party-rental-booking/) does this for you. Request it free, no card: https://rotomal.com/party-rental-booking/request/ --- Rotomal · https://rotomal.com/party-rental-booking/bounce-house-rental-software-checklist/ · hello@rotomal.com # Payout Ledger: Marketplace payouts, fees and VAT posted into lexoffice, sevDesk and DATEV, bank-exact. > Payout Ledger reads settlement reports from Amazon, Etsy, eBay and TikTok Shop and posts each payout into your accounting system as a single reconciled entry: sales by country and VAT rate, refunds, marketplace fees, advertising, reserves. It is native to the systems European sellers actually use, starting with lexoffice, sevDesk and DATEV. - Page: https://rotomal.com/payout-sync/ - Category: E-commerce and SaaS add-ons - Language: en - Billing: subscription - From: €19 per month - Request (free, no card): https://rotomal.com/payout-sync/request/ - Every posting equals the amount that landed in the bank, so bank matching is one click - Sales are split by destination country and VAT rate, with a quarterly summary ready for your OSS return - Marketplace fees are posted with the correct reverse-charge treatment where the marketplace invoices from another EU country ## The payout tools speak Xero and QuickBooks; your accountant speaks DATEV A marketplace payout is not revenue. It is two weeks of sales, minus refunds, minus a dozen fee types, minus advertising, minus a reserve, plus a release of last period's reserve, with VAT collected at different rates in different countries. The deposit in the bank is the only number that is simple. Booking it as revenue overstates sales and understates fees, and the VAT by country never gets done properly. There are good tools for this problem, but they were built for the English-speaking market. The two leaders post into Xero, QuickBooks, NetSuite and Sage, and nothing else. A German seller on lexoffice or sevDesk, whose Steuerberater wants DATEV, is told to switch accounting systems or do it in a spreadsheet. The result is month-end spreadsheets, bookkeeper hours billed to untangle settlements, OSS returns built from marketplace exports by hand, and a bank account that never reconciles. The pain is recurring, and it grows with every new marketplace. - A2X posts marketplace payouts only into Xero, QuickBooks, NetSuite and Sage; Link My Books supports only Xero and QuickBooks. (source: https://www.a2xaccounting.com/link-my-books-vs-a2x) - Payout reconciliation across Amazon, Shopify and TikTok Shop deposits is described by e-commerce accountants as a live, widespread bookkeeping problem in 2026. (source: https://ecomcpa.com/the-payout-reconciliation-gap-why-amazon-shopify-and-tiktok-shop-deposits-are-wrecking-ecommerce-books-in-2026/) ## How it works 1. **Connect marketplaces.** Authorise Payout Ledger in Seller Central, Etsy, eBay or TikTok Shop. We pull settlement reports going back up to 24 months, so you can catch up on past periods. 2. **Connect your accounting system.** Connect lexoffice or sevDesk, or set up the DATEV export for your Steuerberater. Choose SKR03 or SKR04 and review the default account mapping; most sellers change two or three lines. 3. **Review the first payouts.** Each payout is shown as a breakdown: sales by country and rate, refunds, fee types, advertising, reserves, and the bank total. You approve the first few; after that, posting can run automatically. 4. **Match the bank.** The posted amount equals the deposit, so your accounting system's bank matching finds it immediately. At quarter end, download the OSS summary by country. ## Features - **Payout breakdown.** Each settlement is broken into sales, refunds, shipping charged, promotions, marketplace fees by type, advertising, reserves held and released, and adjustments. Every line traces back to the settlement report rows it came from. - **VAT and OSS split.** Sales are grouped by destination country and VAT rate. Supplies where the marketplace collects VAT as deemed supplier are separated from your own. A quarterly OSS summary by country is one download. - **Native posting.** Posts into lexoffice and sevDesk as vouchers against your SKR03 or SKR04 accounts, or produces a DATEV booking batch (Buchungsstapel) your Steuerberater can import directly. - **Fee treatment.** Marketplace fees invoiced from another EU country are posted as reverse-charge services so they appear correctly in your advance VAT return. Fee invoices from the marketplace are matched to the deductions in the settlement. - **Bank-exact totals.** The posting total always equals the payout. Rounding and currency differences are posted to a dedicated account rather than hidden, so the books match the bank to the cent. - **Historical backfill.** Import up to 24 months of past settlements to fix prior periods, with a per-month summary so your bookkeeper can see the effect before anything is posted. - **Bookkeeper access.** Give your Steuerberater or bookkeeper read access to breakdowns and exports, or manage several clients from one login. - **Ask your AI assistant.** Connect Payout Ledger to Claude, ChatGPT or another assistant through MCP and ask in plain language, for example "what did marketplace fees come to last month?". Read-only by default; revoke access any time. ## Who it's for - **German sellers on lexoffice or sevDesk.** You sell on Amazon.de and perhaps Etsy or eBay, and your bookkeeping lives in lexoffice or sevDesk. You get payouts posted natively without changing systems. - **Sellers whose Steuerberater uses DATEV.** Your accountant wants a DATEV import, not a login to a Xero clone. You get a clean booking batch per month. - **Pan-EU sellers using OSS.** You ship to several EU countries and file an OSS return. You get sales by country and rate every quarter without rebuilding it from marketplace exports. - **E-commerce bookkeepers.** You look after several sellers. You get consistent postings across clients and a per-client view of what has been posted and what is waiting. ## Works with Amazon Seller Central (settlement reports via SP-API), Etsy, eBay, TikTok Shop, lexoffice, sevDesk, DATEV booking batch export (Buchungsstapel), SKR03 and SKR04 charts of accounts, CSV export of every breakdown, MCP connector for Claude, ChatGPT and other AI assistants ## Pricing Billed monthly, cancel any time. Founding customer pricing is fixed for 24 months. All plans include payout breakdowns, bank-exact posting, the OSS summary and CSV export. Prices exclude VAT. | Plan | Price | Includes | | --- | --- | --- | | Starter | €19 per month | 1 marketplace connection; lexoffice, sevDesk or DATEV export; Up to 10 payouts per month; VAT split by country and rate; 12 months of backfill; Email support | | Seller | €39 per month | Up to 4 marketplace connections; Unlimited payouts; Quarterly OSS summary by country; Reverse-charge fee handling; 24 months of backfill; Bookkeeper read access; Everything in Starter | | Bookkeeper | €89 per month | Up to 5 seller accounts included, then €15 each; Multi-client dashboard; Shared account mappings across clients; Monthly DATEV batch per client; Priority support | ## Compared with the alternatives - **A2X.** The category leader, from about $29 a month, with deep marketplace coverage. It posts only into Xero, QuickBooks, NetSuite and Sage, so it suits sellers already on one of those. - **Link My Books.** From about $21 a month and well regarded by UK sellers. Xero and QuickBooks only. - **Connectors in the lexoffice or sevDesk marketplaces.** Some single-marketplace connectors exist, mostly for Amazon. Compare on multi-marketplace support, OSS detail, reserve handling and whether the posting matches the bank deposit. - **Spreadsheets from settlement reports.** Free, and how most sellers start. Works for one marketplace and one country; falls apart with OSS, reserves and refunds across periods. ## Security and data - Marketplace and accounting connections use each platform's OAuth or app authorisation; we never hold your marketplace or accounting passwords, and you can revoke access from the platform at any time. - Data is stored in an EU data-centre region, encrypted at rest and in transit (TLS 1.2 or higher). - Only you and the bookkeepers you invite can see your breakdowns and postings; support access is granted by you per session and logged. - Settlement data is kept while your account is open so prior periods can be re-examined; German record-keeping rules expect ten years for accounting records, so export before deleting. - Full export at any time and deletion on request within 30 days, confirmed by email. ## Your first week We onboard new accounts within 2 business days. We review your first payouts with you and confirm the account mapping with your Steuerberater if you want us to. - Day 1: Request service and tell us your marketplaces, accounting system, chart of accounts and whether you file OSS. - Day 2–3: Your account is live. Connect marketplaces and your accounting system; we import recent settlements and propose the mapping. - Day 4–5: Review the first three payout breakdowns, adjust the mapping, and post them. Check that the bank matching works. - Day 7: Automatic posting is on. Backfill earlier months if you need to, and share read access with your bookkeeper. ## FAQ ### Which accounting systems work today? lexoffice and sevDesk connect directly, and DATEV is covered by a booking-batch export your Steuerberater imports. Pennylane (France), Moneybird (Netherlands) and Fortnox (Sweden) are planned; tell us which one you need when you request service and we will prioritise by demand. ### Is this tax advice? No. Payout Ledger is bookkeeping software. It applies the mapping and VAT treatment you and your accountant configure. Whether you must register for OSS, how to treat a particular supply, or which account a fee belongs in, are questions for your Steuerberater. ### Does it file my OSS or VAT return? No. It produces the sales-by-country summary and the postings your advance VAT return (UStVA) is built from. Registration and filing are done by you or your accountant through the tax authority's portal. ### How are Amazon reserves handled? Reserves held are posted to a receivable account and released reserves reverse it, so the payout total still matches the bank while sales are recognised in the period they happened. ### Is the interface in German? The interface is in English. Account names and voucher fields are shown exactly as your lexoffice, sevDesk or DATEV chart shows them. Support is in English today; German-language support is planned. ### What about Shopify Payments, Kaufland or Otto? Not yet. We started with the four marketplaces where settlement data is accessible and sellers asked for it most. Request service and tell us which channel you need; founding customers set the order. ### What if a payout does not balance? It is held for review and never posted automatically. You see which settlement rows could not be classified, assign them, and the posting then balances to the deposit. Unresolved differences go to a clearly named account, not into revenue. ### Does it work with Claude or ChatGPT? Yes. Payout Ledger includes an MCP connector, so Claude, ChatGPT and other MCP-compatible assistants can answer questions like "what did marketplace fees come to last month?" from your data. It is read-only by default and you can revoke access at any time. --- Rotomal · https://rotomal.com/payout-sync/ · hello@rotomal.com # Peppol Outbox: Send the invoices your WooCommerce or Shopify store already makes over the Peppol network. > Peppol Outbox takes the invoice your store already generates, converts it to a Peppol BIS Billing 3.0 UBL document and delivers it to the buyer's Peppol address through a certified access point. You keep your invoice plugin, numbering and PDF; buyers who aren't on Peppol still get the PDF by email. - Page: https://rotomal.com/peppol-plugin/ - Category: E-invoicing - Language: en - Billing: subscription - From: €0 per month - Request (free, no card): https://rotomal.com/peppol-plugin/request/ - Reads order and invoice data from your existing WooCommerce invoice plugin or Shopify order, so there is no second invoicing system to maintain. - Looks up the buyer's Peppol address from their VAT or enterprise number at checkout and tells you before sending if they can't receive. - Every delivery has a status (sent, received, rejected) and a stored copy of the exact XML, downloadable for your accountant. ## B2B e-invoicing is mandatory in Belgium, and the store plugins haven't caught up Since January 2026, a Belgian VAT-registered business that invoices another business must send a structured electronic invoice, in practice over the Peppol network, rather than a PDF by email. Other EU countries are following with their own timetables. A web shop that sells to companies is squarely in scope: the PDF invoice it has emailed for years no longer satisfies the rule. The usual answer is to send e-invoices from accounting software. That works if every store order is already booked there before invoicing. Many shops invoice from the store itself, through a PDF invoice plugin, and only pass totals to the accountant later. For them, the gap is in the store. The dedicated store plugins that exist are tiny projects with few users, while millions of businesses are now registered on Peppol. Peppol Outbox sits on top of the invoice plugin you already use and adds the one thing missing: delivery over Peppol. - Structured electronic invoices are mandatory for all Belgian VAT-registered businesses in B2B transactions from 1 January 2026. (source: https://einvoice.belgium.be/en) - Dedicated Peppol plugins on WordPress.org are small (SendPol 60+ active installs, POP 80+), while the generic PDF invoice plugin for WooCommerce has over 300,000. (source: https://wordpress.org/plugins/search/peppol/) - By mid-2026 the Peppol network had roughly 2.14 million registrations in Belgium and 890,000 in France. (source: https://e-invoice.be/blog/peppol-statistics) ## How it works 1. **Install next to your invoice plugin.** Install the WordPress plugin or the Shopify app. On WooCommerce it detects PDF Invoices & Packing Slips (and compatible plugins) and reads invoice numbers and line items from it; on Shopify it reads orders and your invoice app's numbering. About 15 minutes. 2. **Register your sender identity.** Enter your company's VAT and enterprise number. We set you up as a sender through our certified access point partner, or connect an access point you already use. Usually complete within one business day. 3. **Collect the buyer's identifier at checkout.** A checkout field asks business customers for their VAT or enterprise number. We check whether it is registered on Peppol; if so, the e-invoice goes over Peppol when the order is invoiced, otherwise the PDF goes by email and the order is flagged. 4. **Send, track, export.** Each invoice shows its Peppol status. Credit notes for refunds are sent too. Your accountant gets a monthly export of the UBL files and statuses. ## Features - **Works on top of your existing invoice plugin.** No duplicate numbering, no second invoice. We read what your invoice plugin generates and build the UBL from it; if a field needed for a valid e-invoice is missing, we tell you before sending. - **Peppol BIS Billing 3.0 output.** Invoices and credit notes are produced as UBL 2.1 following Peppol BIS Billing 3.0 (EN 16931) and validated against the official schematron rules before they leave. - **Belgium country pack.** Belgian enterprise number (0208 scheme) lookup, VAT rules and the invoice fields Belgian buyers' systems expect. Country packs for the countries that follow are added as their mandates approach. - **Buyer lookup before you ship.** At checkout and in the order screen you see whether the buyer can receive Peppol documents. Non-registered buyers still get the PDF, so B2C and non-Peppol orders behave exactly as before. - **Delivery status and stored copies.** Sent, delivered and rejected states per invoice, with the rejection reason from the receiving system. The exact XML sent is kept and downloadable. - **Credit notes and corrections.** Refunds in WooCommerce or Shopify produce Peppol credit notes referencing the original invoice. Partial refunds produce partial credit notes. - **Free under 20 invoices a month.** Small B2B volume shouldn't need a subscription. Up to 20 Peppol documents a month are free; above that, a monthly plan plus a small per-document fee. - **Ask your AI assistant.** Connect Peppol Outbox to Claude, ChatGPT or another assistant through MCP and ask in plain language, for example "which invoices failed to send over Peppol?". Read-only by default; revoke access any time. ## Who it's for - **Belgian WooCommerce and Shopify shops with business customers.** You already invoice from the store and your business buyers now expect Peppol invoices. You get compliance without changing how you invoice. - **Shops elsewhere in the EU preparing for their own mandate.** Your country's B2B e-invoicing mandate is scheduled; you want Peppol sending in place before it arrives, with a country pack added when the rules are final. - **WooCommerce agencies serving Belgian merchants.** You maintain many stores and need one plugin you can configure the same way each time, with logs you can read when the client's accountant calls. - **Accountants with e-commerce clients.** Your clients' store invoices arrive as UBL files you can import, with a status list showing what was delivered over Peppol. ## Works with WooCommerce (WordPress plugin), Shopify (app), PDF Invoices & Packing Slips for WooCommerce and compatible invoice plugins, Peppol BIS Billing 3.0 (UBL 2.1, EN 16931), Certified Peppol access point delivery (ours or your own), Belgian enterprise number (KBO/BCE) and EU VAT number lookup, Email PDF fallback for non-Peppol buyers, UBL and CSV exports for accounting packages, MCP connector for Claude, ChatGPT and other AI assistants ## Pricing Prices in euros, billed monthly, VAT added where applicable. Founding customer pricing is locked for 12 months for accounts opened during early access. All plans include Peppol delivery, validation, status tracking and stored copies; documents over your plan's allowance are €0.15 each. | Plan | Price | Includes | | --- | --- | --- | | Free | €0 per month | 1 store; Up to 20 Peppol documents per month; Belgium country pack; Buyer lookup at checkout; PDF email fallback; Email support | | Shop | €19 per month | 1 store; 200 Peppol documents per month included; Credit notes and corrections; Delivery status and rejection reasons; Monthly accountant export; Priority email support | | Multi-store | €39 per month | Up to 5 stores (more at €6 per store); 1,000 Peppol documents per month included; Accountant read-only logins; Connect your own access point; Webhooks on status changes; Onboarding call for your team | ## Compared with the alternatives - **Sending from your accounting software.** Exact Online, Yuki, Billit, Odoo and most Belgian accounting packages can send Peppol invoices. If every store order already lands there before invoicing, use that. Peppol Outbox is for shops where the invoice originates in the store. - **SendPol, POP and other dedicated plugins.** Small open-source or indie plugins with a few dozen active installs. Check who maintains them, how rejections are handled and whether credit notes are supported. - **Integrating an access point API yourself.** Access points sell per-document sending with an API. You still need to generate valid UBL from the store, look up buyers and handle statuses, which is the work this plugin does. ## Security and data - Invoice data and UBL copies are stored encrypted at rest on servers in the EU; transit to the access point and to your store uses TLS. - Only the certified access point and the buyer's receiving system see the invoice content, which is how Peppol delivery works; we don't share or sell data. - Sent documents are kept for the life of your account plus 12 months, exportable at any time, and deleted on written request; you remain responsible for your own legal archive. - Store API keys are scoped to orders and invoices only, stored encrypted, and revocable from your store at any time. - A GDPR data processing agreement is included with every plan, including the free one. ## Your first week We onboard new accounts within 2 business days. A single Belgian store is usually sending live Peppol invoices within the first week. - Day 1: Install the plugin or app, connect your invoice plugin, and enter your company identifiers; we set up your sender identity. - Day 2–3: Send a test invoice to our test receiver and to one real buyer who is on Peppol; check the status screen together. - Day 4–5: Turn on automatic sending for new B2B orders; enable credit notes. - Day 7: Review the first week's deliveries and rejections, and set up the accountant export. ## FAQ ### We already send e-invoices from our accounting package. Do we need this? Probably not, if every order becomes an invoice in that package before you send it. Peppol Outbox is for stores where the invoice is produced by the store plugin and only summarised to the accountant later. ### I'm already registered on Peppol through my accountant's software. Is that a conflict? No. Receiving registration is tied to one access point, but sending isn't. We send from our access point; your receiving registration stays where it is. ### What if the buyer isn't on Peppol? We check their number before sending. If they aren't registered, the PDF goes by email as before and the order is flagged so you can follow up. Whether a PDF is acceptable for that buyer is a question for your accountant. ### Which countries are supported? Belgium is live. Peppol BIS Billing 3.0 is accepted across the network, so sending to a buyer in another country works; country packs for national specifics are added as mandates approach. ### Does it handle credit notes and refunds? Yes. A refund in WooCommerce or Shopify produces a Peppol credit note referencing the original invoice. Partial refunds produce partial credit notes. ### Is this tax or legal advice? No. Peppol Outbox is software that produces and delivers invoices in a structured format. Which invoices you must send electronically, and what they must contain, is for your accountant or the Belgian tax administration to confirm. ### What does 'free under 20 invoices' really mean? Exactly that: up to 20 Peppol documents a month on one store, no card required. We'll ask you to upgrade only when you pass 20 in a month. ### Does it work with Claude or ChatGPT? Yes. Peppol Outbox includes an MCP connector, so Claude, ChatGPT and other MCP-compatible assistants can answer questions like "which invoices failed to send over Peppol?" from your data. It is read-only by default and you can revoke access at any time. --- Rotomal · https://rotomal.com/peppol-plugin/ · hello@rotomal.com # Permit Weekly: Weekly new-permit leads for your trade and metro, with addresses and contractor of record. > Permit Weekly reads the permit portals of the cities and counties in your metro, filters for the permit types that matter to your trade, and sends a clean list every week: property address, permit type and description, dates, valuation when listed, and the contractor of record. It covers jurisdictions with no open-data feed, the lists you cannot get elsewhere. - Page: https://rotomal.com/permit-leads/ - Category: Lead generation for trades - Language: en - Billing: subscription - From: $49 per month - Request (free, no card): https://rotomal.com/permit-leads/request/ - One trade and one metro per subscription, so the list is short enough to work through on a Monday morning. - Every row links back to the public permit record it came from; nothing is inferred or pulled from private sources. - Competitor view: which contractors pulled the most permits in your ZIP codes over the last 90 days. ## Permits are the earliest public signal of a job, and the data is sold to sales teams, not tradespeople A new pool permit means a homeowner who will need weekly service in three months. A roofing permit pulled by a competitor marks a street with aging roofs. A solar permit tells an electrician who is about to want a panel upgrade. All of it is public, and almost nobody in the trades uses it, because getting it means visiting a dozen clunky portals every week. Data companies solved this for enterprise sales teams. Their products cost several hundred to a thousand dollars a month and lean on the big cities that already publish open data. An owner-operator with one crew cannot justify that price, and often works in the suburbs the big vendors skip. Permit Weekly is built the other way around: one trade, one metro, one weekly list, at a price a single business can expense. We do the slow work of reading portals that have no API, and we only sell coverage we can keep current. - Shovels, a permit-data vendor, lists plans at $599–999 per month and names home-service providers among its target customers. (source: https://www.shovels.ai/pricing) - Construction Monitor reports tracking about 2.8 million permits a year and sells access by market and category. (source: https://www.constructionmonitor.com/) - Ready-made permit scrapers on Apify have only a handful of users and mostly cover cities that already publish open data. (source: https://apify.com/lowlanddata/building-permit-monitor) ## How it works 1. **Tell us your trade and metro.** Pick a trade (pool, roofing, solar, HVAC, landscaping, or ask for another) and a metro. Within 2 business days we confirm which jurisdictions we cover there and the typical weekly volume. 2. **We collect and filter.** Our servers read each jurisdiction's permit portal on a slow, polite schedule, normalize the records, tag the permit types relevant to your trade, and remove duplicates across portals. 3. **You get the list on Monday.** An email with the week's permits and a CSV attachment, plus a dashboard where you can search, map and mark leads as contacted. Pro plans also push leads to your CRM. 4. **Work the leads your way.** Mail the homeowner, call the contractor of record about subcontract work, or plan a route through the neighborhood. ## Features - **Trade-specific permit filters.** Permit types, descriptions and keywords mapped to each trade and tuned per jurisdiction, because every city names things differently. Add your own keywords on Pro. - **Coverage where there is no open data.** We prioritize cities and counties that have a portal but no API or open-data feed. Each metro's coverage list is published and updated as jurisdictions are added or drop out. - **Weekly email and CSV.** Monday delivery with address, permit number, type, description, status, application or issue date, valuation when listed, and contractor of record. - **Contractor of record.** The contractor's name and license number as shown on the permit. Useful for subcontracting, supplier sales, and knowing who you are up against. - **Competitor intelligence.** Permit counts by contractor over 30, 90 and 365 days within the ZIP codes you choose. See who is winning your kind of work and where. - **Map and lead tracking.** Permits plotted on a map by week; mark leads contacted, quoted or won so each Monday's list shows only what is new. - **CRM push.** Send each week's leads to your CRM through a webhook or Zapier, or to a Google Sheet, on Pro and above. - **Ask your AI assistant.** Connect Permit Weekly to Claude, ChatGPT or another assistant through MCP and ask in plain language, for example "which new pool permits came in for my ZIP codes this week?". Read-only by default; revoke access any time. ## Who it's for - **Pool service and pool builders.** New pool permits are future weekly service accounts and equipment sales. Reach the homeowner before construction wraps up. - **Roofing, solar and HVAC contractors.** Permit activity shows where competitors are busy and which neighborhoods are replacing roofs and systems now. Use it for mailers, door-knocking, or finding general contractors to sub for. - **Landscapers and hardscape, fence and deck pros.** New construction, pool and addition permits mean yards that will need finishing. Get the address months before the lawn goes in. - **Suppliers and distributors.** The contractor of record on hundreds of permits a month is your prospect list. See who is pulling volume and who is new to the market. ## Works with Email (weekly digest with CSV attached), CSV download with stable columns, Google Sheets sync, Webhook and Zapier (HubSpot, Pipedrive, Jobber and others), Map view with KML export for Google My Maps, Links to the source permit record in each jurisdiction's portal, MCP connector for Claude, ChatGPT and other AI assistants ## Pricing Prices are per trade and metro, billed monthly, cancel any time. Founding customer pricing is locked for 24 months for subscriptions opened during early access. All plans include the weekly email, CSV, source links and the dashboard. | Plan | Price | Includes | | --- | --- | --- | | Starter | $49 per month | 1 trade, 1 metro; Weekly email and CSV; Address, permit type, description, dates and valuation; Contractor of record; Dashboard search and map; Email support | | Pro | $99 per month | Everything in Starter; Competitor intelligence by ZIP and period; Lead tracking (contacted, quoted, won); CRM push via webhook, Zapier or Google Sheets; Custom keywords and permit types; Twice-weekly delivery option; 3 users | | Multi | $199 per month | Up to 3 trade-metro pairs (more at $49 each); Everything in Pro; Contractor roll-up across all pairs; Daily delivery option; Historical back-fill of up to 12 months where available; Priority support | ## Compared with the alternatives - **Shovels, Construction Monitor and similar vendors.** Shovels lists $599–999 per month; Construction Monitor sells by market and category. Both cover far more geography, with analytics for sales teams. If you have salespeople covering several states, they are the right tool. Permit Weekly covers one trade and metro at a price for one business. - **Checking the portals yourself.** Free, and the data is public. It takes a few hours a week across a metro's jurisdictions, each with its own search form, and it stops happening when you get busy. We do the same thing on a schedule. - **Lead marketplaces.** Services that sell homeowner inquiries charge per lead and often sell the same lead to several contractors. Permit leads come from public records at a fixed monthly fee; the advantage goes to whoever acts first. ## Security and data - Lead data lives on servers we operate in the United States, encrypted in transit and at rest. - We store only public-record fields; we do not buy or append personal data about homeowners. - Lead notes and CRM credentials for pushes are encrypted and visible only to your account's users. - On cancellation your account data is deleted within 90 days, or sooner on request; the CSVs you downloaded remain yours. ## Your first week We confirm coverage and deliver your first list within 2 business days of your request. - Day 1: Request your trade and metro. We send the coverage list and the typical weekly volume. - Day 2–3: Your first list arrives with the current week's permits; we review the filters with you and adjust keywords. - Day 4–5: Connect your CRM or Google Sheet (Pro); mark your first leads as contacted. - Day 7: Regular Monday delivery begins. We check whether the volume and permit types fit your business. ## FAQ ### Which metros and trades do you cover? Coverage is built per metro and the jurisdiction list for each is published. Ask for yours: within 2 business days we tell you whether we cover it now and, if not, how long adding it would take. We only sell a metro once coverage is live. ### Is this legal? Isn't it scraping? Permit records are public records published by governments. We read public portals on a slow, rate-limited schedule from our own servers, respect robots directives and portal terms, and skip jurisdictions whose terms prohibit automated access. We do not bypass logins or CAPTCHAs. ### Do you include homeowner names, phone numbers or emails? We provide what the public permit record shows, typically the property address, permit details and the contractor of record. We do not append homeowner phone numbers or emails. If you contact homeowners, you are responsible for complying with Do-Not-Call, TCPA, CAN-SPAM and local solicitation rules; Permit Weekly is a data service, not legal advice. ### How current is the data? Most jurisdictions are read daily and the list is compiled on Sunday night. The portals themselves lag issuance by anywhere from a day to a few weeks, and we show the date the jurisdiction posted each record. ### What happens if a portal changes or blocks access? It happens. We monitor every source and usually restore it within days. If a jurisdiction is down for more than two weeks or permanently blocks automated access, we tell you and credit the proportional share of your fee. ### Can I get more than one trade or metro, or historical permits? Yes. The Multi plan covers up to three trade-metro pairs, with more at $49 each, and includes a back-fill of up to 12 months where the portal allows it. Suppliers often take one metro across several trades. ### Isn't this easy to copy? The data is public, so yes, someone else can do it. What is hard is keeping dozens of fragile portals current, normalizing each city's categories to a trade, and doing it for a price one business can pay. That is the work we are committing to. ### What are construction permit leads? New building permits filed with a city or county, used as an early sign that a job is starting. Each record usually shows the property address, permit type and description, dates, often a valuation, and the contractor of record. Permit Weekly filters them to the permit types that matter to your trade, in your metro, every week. ## Guides - [Construction permit leads: how contractors find and work them](https://rotomal.com/permit-leads/construction-permit-leads/): How contractors find new construction and building permit leads, which permit types signal which jobs, what the data costs, and how to work the list. --- Rotomal · https://rotomal.com/permit-leads/ · hello@rotomal.com # Construction permit leads: how contractors find and work them By Rotomal team · Updated 2026-10-12 · Part of [Permit Weekly](https://rotomal.com/permit-leads/) **Short answer:** Construction permit leads are new building permits filed with a city or county, used as an early signal that a job is about to start. A permit record usually shows the property address, permit type and description, the filing or issue date, often a job valuation, and the contractor of record. You can pull them yourself from local permit portals for free, buy national permit data from vendors (Shovels lists $599–999 a month), or get a filtered weekly list for one trade and one metro, which is what Permit Weekly does from $49 a month. ## What a construction permit lead contains A permit is filed before most regulated work starts: new homes, additions, pools, re-roofs, solar, HVAC replacements, demolition. Because the filing is a public record, it tells you where work is happening weeks or months before the finished job is visible from the street. The fields vary by jurisdiction, but a usable lead normally has: - Property address (and often the parcel number) - Permit number, type and a free-text work description - Status and dates: applied, issued, finaled - Declared valuation of the work, where the jurisdiction records it - Contractor of record, usually with a license number - A link back to the record in the city or county portal ## Which permits signal which jobs The same permit is a different lead depending on your trade. A re-roof is competitor intelligence for a roofer and a prospect for a gutter installer. Useful pairings: | Permit type | Lead for | Why it matters | | --- | --- | --- | | New single-family home | Landscapers, pool builders, fencing, gutters, security and AV, cleaning | Finishing trades are hired in the months after framing; the owner has a budget and a move-in date | | Pool or spa | Pool service, fencing, landscaping, electricians | Every new pool needs ongoing service, safety fencing and often a new circuit | | Re-roof | Roofers, gutter installers, solar installers | Shows which neighborhoods are replacing roofs now and which competitors are winning them | | Solar PV | Electricians, roofers, battery installers | Solar jobs often trigger a panel upgrade and sit on roofs that may need work first | | HVAC replacement | HVAC contractors, insulation, duct cleaning | Competitor activity by ZIP code, and homes investing in comfort | | Addition or remodel | Flooring, cabinets, windows, painters, dumpster rental | Interior trades follow the structural permit | | Demolition | Excavation, dumpster rental, general contractors | A demolition usually precedes a new build on the same lot | ## Where permit data comes from Permits are issued by thousands of separate cities and counties, each with its own system. Large cities often publish permits on open-data portals with an API, which is why most national datasets lean on them. Suburbs and smaller counties usually run a permit portal with a search form and no feed, so their permits are only available to someone who visits the portal regularly. Portals also lag. A permit can appear anywhere from a day to a few weeks after it is filed or issued, so the date the jurisdiction posted it matters as much as the permit date itself. ## Three ways to get permit leads, and what each costs | Option | Cost | Fits | | --- | --- | --- | | Check the portals yourself | Free, plus a few hours a week per metro | One or two jurisdictions and a disciplined Monday routine | | National permit-data vendors | Shovels lists $599–999 a month; Construction Monitor sells by market and category | Sales teams covering several states that need analytics | | A weekly list for one trade and metro (Permit Weekly) | $49–199 a month | Owner-operators and suppliers who want a short list they can work every week | ## How to work a permit list - Act within days. The first contractor to reach a homeowner with a relevant offer has the advantage; permit leads are not exclusive. - Mail or door-knock around clusters. Several permits on one street are a better route than one permit across town. - Call the contractor of record about subcontract or supply work. A general contractor with ten permits this month needs trades. - Rank contractors by volume if you sell to them. Permit counts by contractor over 90 days show who is busy and who is new. - Track every lead as contacted, quoted or won, so next week's list only shows what is new. If you contact homeowners, follow Do-Not-Call, TCPA, CAN-SPAM and local solicitation rules. Permit records do not include phone numbers or emails, and buying appended contact data brings its own compliance questions. ## Common mistakes - Buying statewide data when you serve a handful of ZIP codes. - Treating the declared valuation as the job price; it is often an estimate for fee purposes. - Ignoring status. An applied permit may never be issued; an issued one means work is imminent. - Counting the same job twice when a city and county both list it. - Letting the routine lapse in busy months, which is exactly when competitors keep pulling permits. ## FAQ ### Are building permits public record? In the US, building permits are generally public records, but each jurisdiction decides how they are published. Some offer open data, some only a search portal, and some portal terms restrict automated access, which we respect. ### Are construction permit leads and building permit leads the same thing? Yes. Both terms describe new permits used as sales leads. 'Construction permit' is more common for new builds and commercial work; 'building permit' is the formal name in most codes. ### How current are permit leads? As current as the portal. Most jurisdictions post within a day to a few weeks of filing or issuance. A weekly list compiled from daily reads is usually within days of the portal. ### Do permit leads include homeowner phone numbers? No. Permits normally show the property address and the contractor of record. Permit Weekly does not append homeowner phone numbers or emails. ## Sources - Shovels, a permit-data vendor, lists plans at $599–999 per month. https://www.shovels.ai/pricing - Construction Monitor reports tracking about 2.8 million permits a year, sold by market and category. https://www.constructionmonitor.com/ - Ready-made permit scrapers mostly cover cities that already publish open data. https://apify.com/lowlanddata/building-permit-monitor [Permit Weekly](https://rotomal.com/permit-leads/) does this for you. Request it free, no card: https://rotomal.com/permit-leads/request/ --- Rotomal · https://rotomal.com/permit-leads/construction-permit-leads/ · hello@rotomal.com # Plain QR: Editable QR codes for menus and print, from $2 a month, with no setup and no jargon. > Plain QR makes editable QR codes for menus, signs and flyers at a fraction of the usual price. Paste a link or upload a menu, download the code, and update where it goes whenever you like. - Page: https://rotomal.com/plain-qr/ - Category: Marketing tools - Language: en - Billing: subscription - From: $2 per month, billed $24 yearly - Request (free, no card): https://rotomal.com/plain-qr/request/ - From $2 a month. The price is on the page and it does not change after a trial. - Nothing technical to set up: create a code, download it, print it - Every code also comes as a free static version that never depends on us, for print that must never change ## A printed menu is permanent. The link behind its QR code is not. An editable (dynamic) QR code does not contain your link. It contains a short link on the generator's website, which sends people on to your menu. That is what lets you change the destination later, and it is also why the code stops working when the generator stops redirecting it. The best-known generator has thousands of one-star reviews, mostly from people whose printed codes stopped working when a trial ended, and its own help pages say trial codes are deactivated. Owners ask each other online what to do when a laminated menu stops working. The usual answer is to reprint everything. Plain QR is built around two things: a low, flat price shown up front, and honesty about what happens to a code if you stop paying. You can read both before you sign up, and every code also comes as a free static version, so you are never forced to depend on us. - QR Code Generator (owned by Bitly) had a Trustpilot TrustScore of 1.3 from 9,319 reviews at the time of our research, with deactivated codes the most common complaint. (source: https://www.trustpilot.com/review/qr-code-generator.com) - QR Code Generator's own help page states that dynamic codes created during the 14-day trial are deactivated when the trial expires. (source: https://support.qr-code-generator.com/hc/en-us/articles/7665046137613-What-happens-to-my-account-and-QR-Codes-when-the-trial-expires) - A 2 April 2026 North Penn Now article is titled 'Your QR Code Stops Working the Moment You Stop Paying'. (source: https://northpennnow.com/news/2026/apr/02/your-qr-code-stops-working-the-moment-you-stop-paying/) - Restaurant owners on r/restaurateur ask what to do about printed menu QR codes when a platform's trial expires. (source: https://www.reddit.com/r/restaurateur/comments/1wjtcji/) ## How it works 1. **Request service.** Tell us roughly how many codes you need. We set up your account within 2 business days and email you a sign-in link. 2. **Make your codes.** Paste a link, upload a PDF menu, or build a simple mobile menu page. Pick colours, add a logo, and download a print-ready file. 3. **Test and print.** A built-in check warns you if a code is too small or too low-contrast to scan. Test it with two phones, then send it to your printer. 4. **Change it any time.** Update the destination or the menu whenever prices, hours or links change. The printed code stays exactly the same. ## Features - **Edit without reprinting.** Change where a code goes in two clicks. Swap a lunch menu for a dinner menu, point a sign at this week's offer, or fix a typo in the link. - **Hosted menu pages.** Upload a PDF or build a simple mobile menu with sections, prices and allergen notes. Update it any time; the code does not change. No app, no cookies. - **Free static codes.** Every code can be downloaded as a static version that contains your link directly. It works without us, but it cannot be edited. Use it for anything printed in volume that will never change. - **Print-ready files.** Download SVG, EPS, PDF or high-resolution PNG with your colours, a logo in the centre and a correct quiet zone. A size and contrast checker warns before you print something that will not scan. - **Scan counts.** See scans by day and code, with city and device type. No cookies, no tracking of individuals, no personal data stored. Export as CSV. - **Bulk creation.** Upload a spreadsheet of destinations and get a zip of numbered codes for tables, rooms, labels or badges. - **Schedule destinations.** Send a code to a different page by time of day, weekday or date range, with a default fallback. Breakfast, lunch and dinner on the same table tent. - **Renewal reminders.** We email you 14, 7 and 1 day before a plan ends, so a missed payment never turns into a surprise dead code. ## Who it's for - **Restaurants, cafés and bars.** You print menus, table tents and stickers. Update prices and specials at 4 pm without touching the print. - **Shops, salons and clinics.** Counter cards and window signs that point at bookings, reviews, a price list or this month's offer. - **Print shops and designers.** Clients ask for 'a QR code'. Give them one they can edit, at a price that does not eat your margin. - **Events and venues.** Badges, programmes and wayfinding signs printed once, with destinations that change through the day on a schedule you set in advance. ## Works with Any web link or PDF, Toast, Square and Shopify menu and ordering links, Google Business Profile review links, Canva, Adobe Illustrator and InDesign via SVG, EPS and PDF, Wi-Fi and contact-card (vCard) formats, CSV bulk import and analytics export, UTM parameters for Google Analytics, MCP connector for Claude, ChatGPT and other AI assistants ## Pricing Founding-customer prices are locked while your plan stays active. Solo is billed yearly at $24; the other plans bill monthly and cancel any time. Every plan includes hosted menu pages, print-ready files, scan counts and free static versions of your codes. We onboard new accounts within 2 business days. | Plan | Price | Includes | | --- | --- | --- | | Solo | $2 per month, billed $24 yearly | Up to 5 editable codes; Up to 5,000 scans a month; Hosted menu page or PDF; Print-ready SVG, PNG, EPS and PDF; Free static version of every code; Renewal reminders by email | | Shop | $5 per month | Up to 50 editable codes; Up to 50,000 scans a month; Scheduled destinations; Scan counts by day, city and device; Bulk creation from a spreadsheet; Email support within one business day | | Studio | $12 per month | Up to 500 editable codes; Up to 500,000 scans a month; Up to 5 team logins; Folders for clients and locations; CSV export of all codes and scan data; Priority email support | ## Compared with the alternatives - **QR Code Generator (Bitly) and similar subscription generators.** Polished tools with tiered subscriptions, typically priced several times higher. The widely reported problem is what happens when a trial ends or you stop paying: codes are deactivated and print has to be replaced. - **Free static QR generators.** Fine when the destination will never change. A static code contains the link itself, so it cannot be switched off, but it also cannot be edited, has no scan counts, and gets dense for long links. Plain QR gives you these too, free, alongside the editable version. - **A link shortener.** Short links can be put in any QR code and edited on paid plans. The link still lives on the shortener's domain and under its terms, so you have the same dependency with an extra step. ## Security and data - Codes, menu pages and scan counts are stored on cloud servers, encrypted at rest and in transit, with daily backups kept for 30 days. - Every redirect and menu page is served over HTTPS with certificates managed for you. - We store no personal data about people who scan: no cookies, no retained IP addresses, only aggregate counts. - Your account data is exported or deleted on request within 30 days. ## Your first week Request, create, test, print. Most customers have a printed, tested code within the week. - Day 1: Request service; your account is ready within 2 business days. - Day 2: Create your first codes, upload a menu or paste your links, and test with two different phones. - Day 3: Download the print files and the free static versions, and send them to your printer. - Day 7: Check your first scan counts and set the renewal reminders to the right email address. ## FAQ ### What happens to my codes if I stop paying? Your plan stays active until the end of the period you paid for. After that we keep your codes working for a further 30 days and email you before it ends. If you have not renewed by then, scanning a code shows a short page saying it is paused, with the business name, so customers are not left at an error. We do not promise to keep editable codes running indefinitely; that is part of how we keep the price at $2. ### How do I make sure a printed code never stops working? Use the free static version. It contains your link directly, so it works whether or not you pay us or we exist. The trade-off is that you cannot change where it goes. For menus that change often, use the editable code and keep the plan active; for a fixed flyer or a sticker on a product, a static code is the safer choice. ### Why is it so much cheaper than the others? Plain QR does one job: editable codes and simple menu pages. There is no sales team, no add-ons and no enterprise tier, and codes are served from a small, efficient system. We would rather have many small customers on a low flat price than a few on a high one. ### Do I need any technical knowledge? No. You paste a link or upload a menu, download the code, and print it. There is nothing to install and no domain or DNS setup. ### Will the price go up after a trial? There is no trial that changes the price. The price you see is the price you pay, and founding-customer prices are locked while your plan stays active. If prices ever change for new customers, existing ones are not affected. ### What if Plain QR shuts down? We would give at least six months' notice by email, and you could export all your destinations and download static versions of every code at any time before that. Static codes would keep working regardless. ### Are scan counts GDPR-friendly? Yes. We count scans by day, city and device type without cookies and without storing IP addresses or personal data about the people who scan. ### Does it work with Claude or ChatGPT? Yes. Plain QR includes an MCP connector, so Claude, ChatGPT and other MCP-compatible assistants can answer questions like "how many scans did the menu code get this week?" from your data. It is read-only by default and you can revoke access at any time. --- Rotomal · https://rotomal.com/plain-qr/ · hello@rotomal.com # Practice Plans: In-house membership plans for dental, vet and med-spa practices, at a flat monthly fee. > Practice Plans lets patients without insurance subscribe to a care plan you design: a monthly or yearly fee for cleanings, exams and a discount on treatment, billed automatically through your practice's own Stripe account. You pay one flat software fee whether you have 20 members or 2,000. - Page: https://rotomal.com/practice-plans/ - Category: Healthcare practice tools - Language: en - Billing: subscription - From: $49 per month - Request (free, no card): https://rotomal.com/practice-plans/request/ - Payments go straight to your Stripe account; we never hold your money and never take a cut per member. - Templates for adult, child, perio and family dental plans, wellness plans for dogs and cats, and med-spa memberships, each editable in minutes. - Members see benefits, renewal date and visit history on a simple portal; your front desk sees who is current before the appointment. ## A quarter of adults have no dental insurance, and the software to serve them is priced like a payer Patients without insurance skip cleanings and delay treatment, then arrive with bigger problems. A practice-run membership plan fixes the incentive: a predictable fee covers preventive care and discounts treatment, patients come in on schedule, and the practice earns recurring revenue it does not have to chase through an insurer. The hard part has never been plan design; it is operations. Enrolling people, charging cards every month, catching failed payments, knowing who is current, applying the right discount at the right visit, and renewing a year later. Done on paper or in the notes field of the practice software, it falls apart somewhere around member sixty. Existing membership software works, but its pricing grows with your success: a base fee near $200 a month plus a per-member charge means a 300-member plan costs more than $1,500 a month in software alone. Practice Plans charges one flat fee so a small practice can start a plan and keep the margin as it grows. - More than 25% of US adults have no dental insurance. (source: https://www.drbicuspid.com/dental-practice/office-management/insurance/article/15747443/over-25-of-us-adults-dont-have-dental-insurance) - BoomCloud, an incumbent in membership-plan software, lists $197 per month plus $4.50 per member per month, or $397 plus $3.50 per member. (source: https://boomcloudapps.com/pricing) ## How it works 1. **Design the plan.** Pick a template (adult, child, perio, family, pet wellness, med-spa) and set the price, billing cycle, included services and treatment discounts. Templates include suggested plain-English plan terms for you to edit with your advisors. 2. **Connect Stripe.** Connect your existing Stripe account or create one in a few minutes. Stripe charges the cards and pays out to your bank on its normal schedule; we never touch the funds. 3. **Enroll members.** The front desk enrolls a patient in about two minutes, or patients sign up from a link on your website. They accept your terms, enter a card and receive a welcome email with their benefits. 4. **Let it run.** Renewals, failed-payment retries, member status, benefit usage and reminders run on their own. Your team sees a member's status and remaining benefits before each visit. ## Features - **Plan templates.** Dental (adult, child, perio maintenance, family), veterinary wellness (dog, cat, senior pet) and med-spa memberships, each with suggested inclusions, discount tiers and terms. Edit anything; create unlimited plans. - **Flat-fee billing through your Stripe.** Monthly or annual billing, family and multi-pet bundles and prorated upgrades through Stripe Connect to your own account. Stripe's card fees apply; we add nothing on top. - **Failed-payment recovery.** Automatic retries over 14 days, texts and emails asking the member to update their card, and a front-desk flag so the team can collect at the next visit. - **Member portal.** Members see their plan, benefits used and remaining, next charge date, and can update a card or add a family member or pet. No app to install. - **Benefit tracking.** Record each covered visit (cleaning, exam, x-rays, wellness exam) against the plan. The system shows what is left and warns before a member exceeds included services. - **Front-desk check.** Search by name or phone and see status, plan, discount percentage and last payment on one screen, so the right discount is applied at checkout. - **Reports and exports.** Active members, monthly recurring revenue, churn, renewals due and payments by period. Export CSV for your accountant or your practice management software. - **Ask your AI assistant.** Connect Practice Plans to Claude, ChatGPT or another assistant through MCP and ask in plain language, for example "how many memberships renew this month?". Read-only by default; revoke access any time. ## Who it's for - **Independent dental practices.** One to three dentists, a steady share of uninsured patients and a front desk that cannot babysit a spreadsheet. You get a plan live within a week and a screen that answers 'is this patient current?' - **Veterinary clinics.** Wellness plans for dogs and cats spread the cost of annual exams, vaccines and dental cleanings across the year. Same enrollment, billing and benefit tracking, with pet-level records. - **Med-spas.** Monthly memberships for facials, treatment credits or laser packages. Practice Plans handles the recurring billing and credit tracking without a per-member fee. ## Works with Stripe Connect (payments land in your own Stripe account), CSV export of members and payments for your practice management software, Email and SMS reminders to members, Website sign-up link or embedded form, Signed plan terms stored as PDF, QuickBooks-ready CSV of payouts, Zapier webhook on new enrollments, MCP connector for Claude, ChatGPT and other AI assistants ## Pricing Flat monthly fee, no per-member charges, no setup fee, cancel any time. Stripe's card processing fees are paid to Stripe. Founding customer pricing is locked for 24 months for accounts opened in early access. Unlimited members on every plan. | Plan | Price | Includes | | --- | --- | --- | | Solo | $49 per month | 1 location; Unlimited members, no per-member fee; Dental plan templates; Stripe Connect billing and failed-payment recovery; Member portal; Front-desk status check; Email support | | Practice | $79 per month | Everything in Solo; Vet and med-spa templates; Family and multi-pet bundles; SMS and email renewal reminders; Benefit tracking and reports; CSV exports for your practice software and accountant; HIPAA Business Associate Agreement on request | | Group | $199 per month | Up to 5 locations (more on request); Everything in Practice; Consolidated and per-location reports; Consultant workspace for client practices; Custom plan terms per location; Priority support, 1-business-day response | ## Compared with the alternatives - **BoomCloud and similar membership platforms.** BoomCloud lists $197 per month plus $4.50 per member, or $397 plus $3.50. These products are mature and may include features we do not have yet, such as live practice-software integrations. If you need deep integration today, they may be worth it; for a new or mid-sized plan, the flat fee saves most of the cost. - **A spreadsheet and your card terminal.** Free and fine for the first 30 members. It breaks on failed payments, renewals and knowing who is current at the front desk, which is where members quietly lapse. - **Third-party discount plans.** Patients can buy a dental discount card from an outside company. You get none of the fee and do not control the terms. An in-house plan keeps the relationship and the recurring revenue with the practice. ## Security and data - Data is stored on servers in the United States, encrypted in transit and at rest. - Card numbers never touch our servers; Stripe stores and charges them. - Access is role-based: owners, office managers and front-desk staff see only what their role needs, and every change to a member record is logged. - We sign a HIPAA Business Associate Agreement on request and use patient data for nothing other than running your plan. - On cancellation you can export everything; we delete your data 90 days after the account closes, or sooner on request. ## Your first week We set up new accounts within 2 business days and stay with you until your first ten members are enrolled. - Day 1: Pick a template, set prices and inclusions, upload your logo, connect Stripe. - Day 2–3: We review your plan terms layout with you (you confirm compliance with your advisors), sign the BAA if requested, and switch on live enrollment. - Day 4–5: 30-minute front-desk training; enroll your first members in-office and post the sign-up link on your website. - Day 7: First report: members enrolled, revenue scheduled, any failed payments. We adjust reminder wording together. ## FAQ ### Are in-house membership plans legal in my state? In most states practices run them routinely, but some states regulate these plans, for example by treating them as discount medical plans that require registration, specific disclosures or a bond. Practice Plans is software, not legal advice. Before launching, confirm requirements with your state dental or veterinary board, your state insurance regulator and your attorney. Our templates include fields for the disclosures many states ask for. ### Does it integrate with my practice management software? Not with a live sync at launch. You can export members, status and payments as CSV for Dentrix, Eaglesoft, Open Dental or your veterinary software, and the front-desk check screen is designed to sit next to your practice system. Live integrations are on the roadmap, built in the order founding customers ask for them. ### Will you sign a HIPAA Business Associate Agreement? Yes, on request and at no charge for dental and med-spa practices. We store the minimum: name, contact details, plan, payments and the visit records you enter. Card data lives with Stripe, not with us. Veterinary records are not covered by HIPAA, but we handle them the same way. ### Where does the money go? Directly into your own Stripe account, which pays out to your bank on Stripe's schedule. We use Stripe Connect only to create and manage the subscriptions; we never hold or route your funds and add no fee on top of Stripe's. ### What happens when a member's card fails? Stripe retries over 14 days while we email and text the member to update their card. The front desk sees a payment-overdue flag so they can collect at the next visit. After the retry window the plan is suspended until payment resumes. ### Can patients cancel mid-year? That is your policy, not ours. Templates include common options: an annual commitment paid monthly, month-to-month with 30 days' notice, and refund rules. Whatever you set appears in the terms the member accepts at enrollment, and your team can cancel or refund from the dashboard. ### How fast can we launch? Most practices can be enrolling members within a week. We onboard new accounts within 2 business days, which covers reviewing your plan terms layout, connecting Stripe and a 30-minute front-desk training call. ### Does it work with Claude or ChatGPT? Yes. Practice Plans includes an MCP connector, so Claude, ChatGPT and other MCP-compatible assistants can answer questions like "how many memberships renew this month?" from your data. It is read-only by default and you can revoke access at any time. --- Rotomal · https://rotomal.com/practice-plans/ · hello@rotomal.com # קלסר פרטיות: אשף בעברית שמפיק את מסמכי החובה לפי תיקון 13 לחוק הגנת הפרטיות, במחיר קבוע ולפי תחום. > קלסר פרטיות הוא אשף בעברית שמתרגם את התשובות שלכם למסמכים שהחוק והתקנות דורשים: מסמך הגדרות מאגר, נוהל אבטחת מידע, תיעוד הרשאות, רישום אירועי אבטחה, מדיניות פרטיות ורשומות הסכמה. התבניות מותאמות לתחום העיסוק, הכול נשמר כקלסר ביקורת אחד, ובדיקת עורך דין שותף זמינה כתוספת. - Page: https://rotomal.com/privacy-kit-il/ - Category: ציות ורגולציה - Language: he - Billing: subscription - From: ₪1,490 לשנה - Request (free, no card): https://rotomal.com/privacy-kit-il/request/ - שאלון של כ-30 דקות; כל תשובה ממופה לסעיף במסמכים, כך שרואים מה נכתב ולמה - תבניות לפי תחום – בריאות וטיפול, חינוך, כושר ופנאי, מסחר מקוון ו-SaaS – עם סיווג רמת האבטחה לפי תקנות אבטחת המידע - קלסר ביקורת אחד: PDF עם חותמת זמן לכל גרסה, יומן שינויים ותזכורות לעדכון שנתי ## החוק בתוקף, הקנסות גדולים, והפתרונות הקיימים מתומחרים כמו משרד עורכי דין תיקון 13 לחוק הגנת הפרטיות בתוקף מאוגוסט 2025. הוא נותן לרשות להגנת הפרטיות סמכויות אכיפה רחבות, כולל עיצומים כספיים שמגיעים למיליוני שקלים, ומצפה מכל מי שמנהל מאגר מידע – גם קליניקה עם מזכירה אחת – להחזיק מסמך הגדרות מאגר, נוהל אבטחה ותיעוד שוטף של הרשאות ואירועים. הבעיה של העסק הקטן אינה חוסר רצון אלא חוסר תבנית. ההיצע כיום מגיע משני כיוונים: ייעוץ משפטי שמתומחר לפי שעות ומתאים לחברות, או תוספים טכניים לאתר שמטפלים בבאנר העוגיות ולא במסמכים. בין השניים נשארו עשרות אלפי עסקים שצריכים משהו מסודר, בעברית, במחיר שאפשר לתקצב מראש. הציות עצמו אינו מסובך לעסק קטן. הוא דורש לעבור על עשרות שאלות בסדר הנכון ולהפיק מהן מסמכים עקביים שמתעדכנים כשמשהו משתנה. זה בדיוק מה שאשף עושה טוב, וזה מה שבנינו. - העיצומים לפי החוק המעודכן מגיעים עד ₪3.2 מיליון להפרה; עלות ציות לסטארט-אפ של 20 עובדים נאמדת בעשרות עד מאות אלפי שקלים. (source: https://www.calcalist.co.il/calcalistech/article/rkzkhxvmge) - התיקון בתוקף מאוגוסט 2025; הוטל עיצום ראשון בסך ₪75 אלף, וביקורות רוחב בענפים שונים צפויות ב-2026. (source: https://www.ebnlaw.co.il/he/media-center/privacy-2025summary/) - תוספי עוגיות חדשים לוורדפרס שמשווקים לתיקון 13 כבר מותקנים במאות אתרים – סימן לביקוש, אבל הם מכסים רק את הבאנר באתר. (source: https://wordpress.org/plugins/search/israel/) ## איך זה עובד 1. **ממפים את המאגרים.** עונים על שאלון בעברית על סוגי המידע שאתם מחזיקים (לקוחות, מטופלים, תלמידים, עובדים), מי ניגש אליו, אילו מערכות וספקים מעורבים, ואם מידע עובר לחו״ל. כ-30 דקות, ואפשר לעצור ולהמשיך. 2. **המערכת מסווגת ומפיקה.** לפי התשובות נקבעת רמת האבטחה הרלוונטית לפי תקנות אבטחת המידע, נבדק אם נדרש רישום מאגר או מינוי ממונה הגנת פרטיות, ומופקים המסמכים מתבנית התחום שלכם – תוך דקות. 3. **עוברים, חותמים ומתייקים.** כל מסמך מוצג עם סימון של המקומות שדורשים את החלטתכם. מאשרים, חותמים דיגיטלית, והגרסה נשמרת בקלסר עם חותמת זמן. מכאן אפשר לבקש בדיקת עורך דין שותף. 4. **מתפעלים לאורך השנה.** יומן ההרשאות ורישום אירועי האבטחה חיים במערכת. כל שינוי מתועד, ותזכורות שנתיות מוודאות שהמסמכים לא מתיישנים. ## Features - **אשף בעברית לפי תחום.** שאלונים נפרדים לקליניקות ומטפלים, חינוך פרטי, כושר ופנאי, מסחר מקוון ו-SaaS קטן. השאלות משתמשות במונחים של התחום, לא במונחים משפטיים. - **מסמך הגדרות מאגר.** המסמך המרכזי שהתקנות דורשות: מטרות המאגר, סוגי המידע, בעל המאגר ומנהל המאגר, הרשאות, ספקים ושימושים. מופק אוטומטית מהתשובות ומתעדכן כשמשנים תשובה. - **נוהל אבטחת מידע לפי רמה.** נוהל כתוב, מותאם לרמת האבטחה שנקבעה (בסיסית, בינונית או גבוהה), כולל סיסמאות, גיבויים, התקנים ניידים, ניהול ספקים ותגובה לאירוע אבטחה. - **יומן הרשאות ורישום אירועים.** טבלת הרשאות גישה עם היסטוריית שינויים, ורישום אירועי אבטחה עם שדות החובה. ייצוא ל-PDF לביקורת בלחיצה. - **מדיניות פרטיות והודעות לנושאי מידע.** מדיניות פרטיות לאתר ולטפסים בעברית, נוסח הודעה בעת איסוף מידע, ותבניות למענה לבקשות עיון, תיקון ומחיקה. - **תוסף הסכמה לאתר.** באנר עוגיות וטפסי הסכמה לוורדפרס ולאתרים אחרים, עם רשומות הסכמה שנשמרות בקלסר. התוסף זמין גם בחינם, בלי הקלסר. - **קלסר ביקורת וגרסאות.** כל המסמכים במקום אחד, כל גרסה עם חותמת זמן וחתימה, ותזכורות עדכון שנתיות. אם מגיעה ביקורת, מורידים קובץ ZIP אחד. - **בדיקת עורך דין שותף (תוספת).** עורך דין שותף, שעיסוקו בהגנת הפרטיות, עובר על הקלסר ומחזיר הערות בתוך חמישה ימי עסקים. השירות ניתן על ידו ישירות ובאחריותו, בתשלום קבוע נפרד. ## Who it's for - **קליניקות ומטפלים.** מחזיקים מידע רפואי ורגיש, לרוב בכמה מערכות (יומן, תוכנת ניהול, וואטסאפ). מקבלים נוהל ברמת האבטחה הנכונה ומסמכים שמתייחסים לסודיות מטופלים. - **מוסדות חינוך פרטיים וחוגים.** מידע על קטינים ועל הורים, מדריכים מתחלפים והרשאות שמשתנות כל שנה. מקבלים יומן הרשאות שקל לעדכן ונוסח הודעה להורים. - **חדרי כושר, סטודיו וחנויות אונליין.** מאגרי לקוחות גדולים יחסית, אמצעי תשלום וקמפיינים בדיוור. מקבלים מדיניות פרטיות, ניהול הסכמות דיוור ונוהל לספקי סליקה ושיווק. - **סוכנויות אתרים ומשרדי דיגיטל.** מנהלים עשרות אתרים של לקוחות קטנים. מקבלים לוח ניהול מרוכז, תמחור לסוכנות והפקת קלסר ללקוח תחת המותג של הסוכנות. ## Works with וורדפרס (תוסף הסכמה ובאנר עוגיות), אתרים אחרים (קטע קוד להטמעה), Google Forms וטפסי אתר (נוסחי הודעה), PDF עם חתימה דיגיטלית, Word (DOCX) לעריכה, ייצוא ZIP של הקלסר, דוא״ל ווואטסאפ (תזכורות עדכון) ## Pricing מנוי שנתי, לעסק אחד (ח.פ. או עוסק אחד). תמחור לקוחות מייסדים – נעול לשלוש שנים. כל התוכניות כוללות את האשף, כל מסמכי החובה, הקלסר ותזכורות העדכון. התוסף לאתר זמין בחינם גם בלי מנוי. המחירים לפני מע״מ; בדיקת עורך דין שותף מתומחרת בנפרד. | Plan | Price | Includes | | --- | --- | --- | | בסיסי | ₪1,490 לשנה | אשף בעברית לתחום שלכם; מסמך הגדרות מאגר ונוהל אבטחה; מדיניות פרטיות ונוסח הודעה לאתר; יומן הרשאות ורישום אירועים; קלסר ביקורת עם גרסאות; משתמש אחד | | מורחב | ₪2,490 לשנה | כל מה שבבסיסי; עד שלושה מאגרים (למשל מטופלים, עובדים, דיוור); תבניות למענה לבקשות עיון, תיקון ומחיקה; בדיקת צורך בממונה וסיווג רמת האבטחה, עם הסבר; תוסף הסכמה עם רשומות הסכמה שמורות; עד שלושה משתמשים; תמיכה בוואטסאפ | | סוכנות | ₪3,490 לשנה | לוח ניהול לכל לקוחות הסוכנות; חמישה עסקים כלולים; עסק נוסף ₪490 לשנה; קלסר ללקוח תחת מותג הסוכנות; הדרכה לצוות הסוכנות; קדימות בתמיכה; הנחה על בדיקות עורך דין שותף | ## Compared with the alternatives - **משרד עורכי דין או יועץ פרטיות.** הדרך הנכונה לארגון עם מאגרים מורכבים, העברות מידע לחו״ל או חובת מינוי ממונה. העלות מתומחרת לפי שעות ומתחילה באלפי שקלים לפרויקט. קלסר פרטיות הוא שלב ראשון שמצמצם את העבודה המשפטית, לא תחליף לה כשהיא נדרשת. - **תוסף עוגיות לאתר.** פותר את הבאנר וההסכמות באתר, ולא יותר. אין בו מסמך הגדרות מאגר, נוהל אבטחה או יומן. התוסף שלנו עושה את אותו הדבר בחינם, והקלסר מוסיף את המסמכים. - **תבניות וורד חינמיות.** קיימות תבניות כלליות ברשת. הן דורשות הבנה מה למלא איפה, לא מסווגות את רמת האבטחה ולא מתעדכנות. האשף שואל את השאלות שהתבנית מניחה שאתם יודעים לענות עליהן. - **ממונה הגנת פרטיות כשירות.** מתאים לחברות שחייבות ממונה או שרוצות גורם חיצוני קבוע, במחיר של ייעוץ חודשי. לרוב העסקים הקטנים אין חובת מינוי, והקלסר מכסה את מסמכי החובה. ## Security and data - התשובות והמסמכים נשמרים בשרתים שבהפעלתנו, מוצפנים בתעבורה (TLS 1.2 ומעלה) ובמנוחה (AES-256). - אנחנו שומרים מידע על העסק ועל מבנה המאגרים שלו – לא את תוכן המאגרים עצמם. אין צורך להעלות רשימות לקוחות או מטופלים. - הגישה לחשבון מוגבלת למשתמשים שהגדרתם; גישת תמיכה מצידנו נרשמת ביומן ומתבצעת רק באישורכם. - המסמכים נשמרים כל עוד המנוי פעיל ושנה לאחר סיומו, כדי לשמור על רצף תיעוד; מחיקה מוקדמת לפי בקשה בכתב מתבצעת תוך 14 יום. - רשומות ההסכמה מהתוסף נשמרות עם חותמת זמן וגרסת הנוסח שאושר, וניתנות לייצוא או למחיקה לפי בקשת נושא המידע. ## השבוע הראשון ההקמה מתחילה בשיחה קצרה איתנו וממשיכה באשף בקצב שלכם. רוב העסקים מסיימים קלסר ראשון בתוך שבוע. - יום 1: שיחת הכוונה של 20 דקות – בוחרים תבנית תחום, מגדירים משתמשים ומסבירים מה האשף ישאל. - ימים 2–3: החשבון פעיל. עוברים על האשף (כ-30 דקות), מקבלים טיוטות של כל המסמכים ומסמנים מה דורש החלטה. - ימים 4–5: ממלאים את יומן ההרשאות הראשוני, מטמיעים את תוסף ההסכמה באתר ומחליטים אם לבקש בדיקת עורך דין שותף. - יום 7: חותמים על הגרסה הראשונה של הקלסר, מורידים עותק ZIP ומקבלים את לוח התזכורות השנתי. ## FAQ ### האם זה ייעוץ משפטי? לא. קלסר פרטיות הוא כלי תוכנה ואוסף תבניות שממפות את התשובות שלכם למסמכים. אנחנו לא עורכי דין ולא נותנים חוות דעת על המקרה שלכם. מי שרוצה ביקורת משפטית יכול להוסיף בדיקת עורך דין שותף בתשלום נפרד – היא ניתנת על ידו ישירות ובאחריותו, ואינה חלק מהתוכנה. ### מה כולל תיקון 13 שלא היה קודם? התיקון, שבתוקף מאוגוסט 2025, חיזק את סמכויות האכיפה של הרשות להגנת הפרטיות, כולל עיצומים כספיים גבוהים, עדכן את חובות ההודעה והגדיר מקרים שבהם נדרש ממונה הגנת פרטיות. חובות התיעוד – מסמך הגדרות מאגר ונוהל אבטחה – קיימות מתקנות אבטחת המידע משנת 2017, אבל עכשיו יש מי שבודק. ### האם המסמכים מתאימים לביקורת של הרשות? המסמכים בנויים לפי השדות שתקנות אבטחת המידע דורשות, ויוצאים כקלסר מסודר עם חותמות זמן. אנחנו לא יכולים להתחייב לתוצאת ביקורת – היא תלויה גם במה שקורה בפועל בעסק, לא רק במסמכים. לכן הקלסר כולל גם את היומן השוטף, לא רק מסמכים חד-פעמיים. ### לא בטוח שבעסק שלי בכלל יש ״מאגר מידע״. למה שאשלם? אם יש לכם רשימת לקוחות, מטופלים, תלמידים או עובדים במערכת ממוחשבת – כנראה שכן. האשף מתחיל בדיוק מהשאלה הזו ומסביר מה נובע ממנה. אם התשובה היא שאין חובה, נגיד זאת ולא נגבה תשלום. ### למה לא לחכות עד שתהיה אכיפה? שאלה לגיטימית, ואנחנו לא מוכרים פאניקה. הנתונים הציבוריים מצביעים על עיצום ראשון שהוטל ועל ביקורות רוחב מתוכננות ב-2026. המסמכים גם מגנים עליכם במקרה של תלונה של לקוח או אירוע אבטחה, בלי קשר לביקורת. ### האם המערכת מחליפה את הצורך בממונה הגנת פרטיות? לא, וגם לא כולם חייבים ממונה. האשף בודק את הקריטריונים ואומר אם נראה שאתם בקבוצה החייבת; במקרה כזה הוא מפנה להתייעצות משפטית. אם אתם ממנים ממונה, הקלסר הוא כלי העבודה שלו. ### מה אם המצב בעסק משתנה – מערכת חדשה, ספק חדש? משנים את התשובה הרלוונטית באשף, והמסמכים מתעדכנים לגרסה חדשה עם חותמת זמן. הגרסה הקודמת נשמרת. זה ההבדל בין קלסר חי לקובץ וורד שמישהו כתב פעם. ### האם המוצר פועל כבר? כן, ללקוחות מייסדים. אנחנו מקימים חשבונות חדשים בתוך שני ימי עסקים, כולל שיחת הכוונה קצרה. תמחור הלקוחות המייסדים נעול לשלוש שנים. --- Rotomal · https://rotomal.com/privacy-kit-il/ · hello@rotomal.com # Pub Rescue: Bulk-convert old Microsoft Publisher (.pub) files to PDF and editable Word, now that Publisher is retired. > Since October 2026, Microsoft 365 subscribers can no longer open or edit .pub files in Publisher. Send us the folder, however many files and however old, and we convert every one on licensed Publisher installations, so the layout, fonts and images come out the way you designed them. You get print-ready PDFs, editable Word versions and a report of anything that needs a second look. - Page: https://rotomal.com/pub-rescue/ - Category: File conversion and migration - Language: en - Billing: one-time payment - From: $9 one-time - Request (free, no card): https://rotomal.com/pub-rescue/request/ - Converted with Microsoft Publisher itself, not a reverse-engineered reader, so newsletters, bulletins and flyers keep their layout. - Every file gets a print-ready PDF with fonts embedded and an editable Word version; your folder structure and file names are kept. - Your first 3 files are converted free so you can check the quality. After that one price for the whole archive, paid once; files that fail are not charged. ## Publisher has been retired, and years of documents are stuck in a format nothing else reads well Microsoft Publisher was removed from Microsoft 365 on 1 October 2026. Subscribers can no longer install it, and they can no longer open or edit their .pub files with it. The perpetual version keeps working for people who own it, but its support ends with Office LTSC 2021. For many organizations the archive is the problem: ten or fifteen years of newsletters, bulletins, certificates, flyers and forms, often the only editable copy. Microsoft's advice is to convert the files to PDF or Word before you lose access, and it published a PowerShell script that does that in bulk. The catch is that the script needs Publisher installed on the machine that runs it. If you have already lost Publisher, that route is closed. The alternatives are imperfect. Free online converters handle one small file at a time. LibreOffice can import some .pub files, but its own bug tracker records text running off the page, missing images and lost table borders on real newsletters and brochures, because the format was never published. Pub Rescue runs the conversion on licensed Publisher installations and checks the output, so you do it once and do it right. - Microsoft says Publisher is no longer available to Microsoft 365 subscribers after October 2026 and recommends converting existing files to PDF or Word. (source: https://support.microsoft.com/en-us/publisher/microsoft-publisher-will-no-longer-be-supported-after-october-2026) - Zamzar's free online PUB converter has a 3 MB maximum file size. (source: https://www.zamzar.com/fileformats/pub) - LibreOffice bug reports describe imported Publisher files losing table borders and backgrounds, and text inside shapes being misplaced. (source: https://www.libreoffice.org/bugzilla/show_bug.cgi?id=160489) ## How it works 1. **Send the folder.** Upload a zip, share a OneDrive, SharePoint, Google Drive or Dropbox folder, or let us collect every .pub from a shared drive. We count the files and confirm the price before any work starts. 2. **We convert on real Publisher.** Each file is opened in licensed Microsoft Publisher and exported to a PDF with fonts embedded and to an editable Word document. Missing fonts are substituted with the closest match and noted. 3. **We check the output.** Every PDF is compared page by page with Publisher's own preview. Files that are password-protected, corrupt or from very old Publisher versions are listed with what we could recover. 4. **You get your archive back.** A download with the same folder structure and file names, plus a spreadsheet listing every file, its page count and any notes. Usually within 2 business days for up to 300 files. ## Features - **Print-ready PDF for every file.** Fonts embedded, images at original resolution, page size and bleed kept, so a print shop can use the PDF directly. Multi-page booklets stay in page order. - **Editable Word version.** Each publication exported to .docx so text can be changed without Publisher. Simple layouts edit cleanly in Word; complex multi-column pages are best kept as PDF, and the report says which is which. - **Any Publisher version, any language.** Files from Publisher 2000 onward, in any language and script, including right-to-left text. Older Publisher 95–98 files are attempted and flagged if they cannot be opened. - **Folder structure and names kept.** Output mirrors your folders exactly, with the original file name and modified date in the index, so the archive is still findable years from now. - **Conversion report.** A spreadsheet of every file: pages, fonts substituted, linked images that were missing on the original machine, and whether the Word version needs layout cleanup. - **Template rebuilds.** The few layouts you reuse every month, such as the weekly bulletin, the newsletter masthead or the certificate, rebuilt as proper Word or PowerPoint templates on the Organization plan. - **Searchable index.** An optional single PDF index of the archive, with the first page of each file and the extracted text, so you can search ten years of newsletters for a name or date. ## Who it's for - **Churches, schools and community groups.** Weekly bulletins, newsletters, programs and certificates built in Publisher for years, often by volunteers, with no budget for new design software. - **Small businesses and offices.** Flyers, menus, price lists, forms and letterheads that still need occasional edits, now that the Microsoft 365 subscription no longer includes Publisher. - **Print shops and IT providers.** Customers arriving with .pub files you can no longer open. Send them to us in bulk and hand back clean PDFs under your own name. - **Archivists and records managers.** Long-term retention of publications in a format that will still open in twenty years, with an index of what was converted. ## Works with Microsoft Publisher (licensed perpetual installations), PDF with embedded fonts (PDF/A on request for archiving), Microsoft Word (.docx), Microsoft PowerPoint templates for reused layouts, OneDrive and SharePoint shared folders, Google Drive and Dropbox, Zip upload over an encrypted link, CSV or Excel conversion report ## Pricing One-time prices per archive, paid once after we confirm the file count by email. Your first 3 files are converted free so you can judge the quality before paying anything. No subscription. Files we cannot convert are listed and not charged. Founding customer pricing applies to early-access orders. | Plan | Price | Includes | | --- | --- | --- | | Small batch | $9 one-time | Up to 25 .pub files; First 3 files free to check quality; PDF and Word for every file; Folder structure and names kept; Conversion report; Delivery within 2 business days | | Archive | $29 one-time | Up to 300 .pub files; PDF and Word for every file; PDF/A archive copies on request; Searchable PDF index of the archive; Conversion report with layout notes; Delivery within 2 business days | | Organization | $99 one-time | Up to 3,000 .pub files (more at $0.03 each); Everything in Archive; Collection from SharePoint, OneDrive or Google Drive; 5 reused layouts rebuilt as Word or PowerPoint templates; White-label delivery for print shops and IT providers; Priority delivery | ## Compared with the alternatives - **Microsoft's PowerShell script.** Free and official, and the best choice if you still have Publisher installed: it converts a folder to PDF or Word in bulk. It needs Publisher on the machine that runs it, so it does not help once Publisher is gone. - **Free online converters.** Zamzar, CloudConvert and similar sites convert one file at a time, and free tiers cap file size (Zamzar's is 3 MB). Fine for a handful of small flyers; slow and uncertain for an archive with images. - **LibreOffice Draw.** Free and opens many .pub files, but the format was never published and real newsletters can lose images, table borders or text positions. Good for a quick look, risky as your only archive copy. - **Buying a perpetual Office licence.** Keeps Publisher working on one PC, at the price of a licence for software whose support is ending. Worth it if you still design in Publisher every week; not if you only need the files out. ## Security and data - Uploads and downloads use expiring, encrypted links; shared folders are accessed with read-only permission that you can revoke at any time. - Files are processed on machines we operate, not sent to third-party online converters or AI services. - Originals and converted files are deleted 14 days after delivery, or immediately on request, and we confirm the deletion by email. - Only the people working on your order can access the files, and access is logged. ## From request to rescued archive We confirm the file count and price within one business day of your request and deliver most archives within 2 business days after that. - Day 1: Request the service and share the folder or upload a zip. We convert 3 files free and email them with the exact price for the rest. - Day 2: Conversion runs on licensed Publisher installations; every PDF is checked against Publisher's preview. - Day 3: You download the converted archive and the report, and tell us about any file that needs a re-run. - Day 14: Your files are deleted from our machines unless you asked us to delete them earlier. ## FAQ ### Can I still open .pub files after October 2026? Not with Microsoft 365: Publisher is no longer included or installable for subscribers. People who own a perpetual Office version with Publisher can still open files, and LibreOffice can open some of them with layout errors. Converting the archive to PDF and Word removes the dependency for good. ### Will the PDF look exactly like my original? For almost all files, yes, because we export with Publisher itself. Differences come from fonts or linked images that were on the original computer and not saved in the file; the report lists each case, and you can send the missing fonts or images for a free re-run. ### Is the Word version fully editable? The text and images are editable in Word. Single-column documents, letters and forms convert cleanly. Multi-column newsletters and brochures keep their positions as text boxes, which edit fine but feel different from Publisher; for layouts you reuse often, the Organization plan includes rebuilt templates. ### What about very old or damaged files? Files from Publisher 2000 onward convert normally. Older files and damaged files are attempted; anything we cannot open is listed by name, not charged, and returned untouched. ### How do you keep our files private? Files are transferred over encrypted links, processed on our own machines, never shared with third-party conversion services, and deleted 14 days after delivery unless you ask us to delete them sooner. We can sign your data processing terms. ### How much does it cost? The first 3 files are free. After that, up to 25 files are $9, up to 300 are $29 and up to 3,000 are $99, each paid once; above 3,000, each file is $0.03. We count the files and confirm the exact price by email before starting, and nothing is charged for files that fail. ### What should I use instead of Publisher from now on? Microsoft suggests Word and PowerPoint, which cover most Publisher layouts, and its Microsoft Create template library. Many groups also move to Canva or Affinity Publisher. The converted Word files and rebuilt templates are a starting point for whichever you choose. --- Rotomal · https://rotomal.com/pub-rescue/ · hello@rotomal.com # Roof Tally: Good-enough roof reports and retail estimates from aerial data, from $5 per report. > Roof Tally pulls roof geometry from Google's Solar API, works out area, pitch, facets and waste, and applies your price per square to produce a branded estimate PDF. It is built for retail quotes and pre-quotes, not insurance claims, at a fraction of the price of premium reports. - Page: https://rotomal.com/roof-report/ - Category: Roofing tools - Language: en - Billing: subscription - From: $8 per report - Request (free, no card): https://rotomal.com/roof-report/request/ - Reports return in under two minutes where Google has high-quality roof data; no charge when data is missing. - Your logo, per-square prices, shingle options and terms on every PDF; agencies run it under their own brand for each roofer. - Bulk mode: upload a list of addresses in a storm-hit neighborhood and get a pre-quote for every home, ready for door-knocking or mailers. ## Premium roof reports price out the retail quote A homeowner asks for a price on a new roof. To quote it well you need area, pitch and complexity, which today means climbing up or paying for a measurement report. Premium reports are accurate and accepted by insurers, but at $13 or more each they make sense for jobs you expect to win, not for the ten pre-quotes you want to leave on doorsteps after a hailstorm. Roofing marketing agencies feel this harder. They want an instant-estimate widget on every client's site, but the available widgets are priced per roofer per month, so an agency cannot bundle them into a modest retainer or offer them to a roofer who closes two jobs a month. Aerial roof geometry is now available programmatically, and it is good enough for a retail ballpark: area within a range, dominant pitch, number of facets. Roof Tally packages that into a report a roofer can hand a homeowner, at a price that works for volume. - Roofr's published pricing lists measurement reports at $13–19 each. (source: https://roofr.com/pricing) - Roofr's instant estimator widget is sold at $125–149 per month per roofing company. (source: https://roofr.com/pricing) - Google's Solar API returns building and roof-segment data per request, with a published quota of 600 queries per minute. (source: https://developers.google.com/maps/documentation/solar/usage-and-billing) ## How it works 1. **Enter an address or upload a list.** Type one address in the dashboard or widget, or upload a CSV of up to 500 addresses for a neighborhood. Agencies do this from a per-client workspace. 2. **We fetch roof geometry.** Roof Tally requests the building's roof segments from Google's Solar API: footprint, each segment's area, pitch and orientation, plus the imagery date and quality grade. Addresses without usable data are flagged and not billed. 3. **Your pricing is applied.** Area plus your waste factor, pitch multipliers, tear-off layers and per-square prices for up to three shingle options produce a low–high range. You set every number once per account or per client. 4. **Branded PDF and shareable link.** The homeowner gets a two-page PDF with a roof diagram, measurements, the options and your terms. You get a link, the raw numbers and a CSV row for your CRM. ## Features - **Roof measurements.** Total roof area, facet count, dominant and per-segment pitch and orientation, derived from Google's Solar API data for the address. Reported as a range with a stated confidence grade. - **Retail estimate engine.** Per-square pricing for up to three material options, waste factor by complexity, pitch surcharges, tear-off layers and flat add-ons. Produces a low–high range rather than a false single number. - **Branded PDF reports.** Your logo, colors, license number, terms and a cover note on a two-page PDF. Agencies set a brand per roofer client. - **Bulk pre-quotes.** Upload up to 500 addresses per batch. Each gets its own report and a one-line summary in a CSV, ready for a mailer or a door-knocking list. - **Instant-estimate widget.** A small embed for the roofer's website: the visitor enters an address and contact details, sees the range on screen, and the roofer gets the lead by email and webhook. - **White-label for agencies.** The Agency plan runs the dashboard and widgets under your domain and brand, with separate client workspaces, per-client pricing tables and usage reports for billing your clients. - **API access.** A simple REST endpoint: send an address, receive JSON measurements and the estimate. Same per-report price as the dashboard. - **Ask your AI assistant.** Connect Roof Tally to Claude, ChatGPT or another assistant through MCP and ask in plain language, for example "measure 12 Oak Street and give me the area range". Read-only by default; revoke access any time. ## Who it's for - **Small residential roofers.** You quote retail re-roofs and do not want to pay premium report prices for every lead. A $5–8 report lets you give a ballpark on the first call and climb only for the jobs that move forward. - **Roofing marketing agencies.** You run sites and ads for several roofers. White-label Roof Tally into their sites and your reports, bill it inside your retainer, and stop paying a per-roofer widget subscription. - **Storm-response teams.** After hail or wind, you want pre-quotes for every roof in a neighborhood before the competition knocks. Bulk mode produces them from a list of addresses. - **Real estate agents and home inspectors.** Add a roof area, pitch and facet count to a listing or inspection file from the address alone, with a PDF to attach and a CSV or JSON to paste into the record. Measurements are estimates for planning, not a survey. ## Works with Google Solar API (roof geometry source), PDF export with your branding, CSV import and export, REST API with JSON responses, Website embed for any HTML site, WordPress or Webflow, Lead webhook (Zapier-compatible) to your CRM, Email delivery of reports to homeowners from your address, MCP connector for Claude, ChatGPT and other AI assistants ## Pricing No contract. Reports count only when roof data is returned; failed lookups are free. Founding customer pricing applies to accounts opened during early access and is locked for 24 months. All plans include branded PDFs, the estimate engine and CSV export. | Plan | Price | Includes | | --- | --- | --- | | Pay as you go | $8 per report | No monthly fee; $8 per completed report; Branded PDF and shareable link; Single-address lookups; Your pricing table and three material options; Email support | | Roofer | $49 per month | 10 reports per month included; $5 per additional report; Bulk upload of up to 500 addresses per batch; Instant-estimate website widget with lead capture; Lead webhook to your CRM; 2 users; Email support | | Agency | $149 per month | 40 reports per month included, pooled across clients; $4 per additional report; White-label dashboard and widgets on your domain; Unlimited client workspaces, each with its own brand and prices; REST API access; Per-client usage report for your billing; Priority support | ## Compared with the alternatives - **Roofr, EagleView and Hover.** Premium measurement reports, at Roofr's published $13–19 per report and higher elsewhere. They are more precise, include edge-type lengths and are accepted for insurance work. Use them for claims and for the job you have won; use Roof Tally for the first ten conversations. - **Instant estimator subscriptions.** Roofr's instant estimator is $125–149 per month per roofer. Roof Tally's widget is included in the $49 plan, and the Agency plan covers many roofers under one subscription. - **Tracing the roof in Google Earth.** Free, and many roofers do it. It takes 15–30 minutes per roof, depends on who is drawing, and produces nothing you can hand the homeowner. Roof Tally does the same job in two minutes with a branded PDF. ## Security and data - Reports and homeowner addresses are stored on servers in the United States, encrypted in transit and at rest. - Homeowner contact details captured by the widget belong to the roofer or agency; we do not sell, share or use them for anything else. - Roof data is fetched per request from Google; we store the resulting report for you and do not resell aggregated roof data. - Reports are kept while your account is active and for 90 days after cancellation, then deleted; email us to delete sooner. ## Your first week We set up each account within 2 business days and run your first reports with you. - Day 1: Sign up, upload your logo, enter per-square prices and terms. Run test reports on homes you have already quoted. - Day 2–3: Account approved for live reports. Install the widget on your site; for agencies, we configure your subdomain and first client workspace. - Day 4–5: Run your first bulk batch for a neighborhood or an ad-campaign list; we review the CSV with you. - Day 7: Check-in: which reports turned into site visits, and any adjustments to your pricing table. ## FAQ ### How accurate are the measurements? They come from aerial imagery processed by Google and are good for a retail ballpark: pitch and facet count are reliable on simple to moderate roofs, and area is reported as a range. Complex roofs, tree cover and older imagery lower accuracy, and the report says so. Always measure on site before ordering materials. ### Can I use these reports for insurance claims? No. Insurance work generally requires Xactimate-grade reports with detailed edge measurements that adjusters accept. Roof Tally is for retail quotes, pre-quotes and lead qualification. For claims, order a premium report. ### What happens when Google has no data for an address? Google's roof data covers most US metro and suburban areas but not every rural address, and imagery quality varies. If the lookup returns no usable roof, we flag it, do not charge, and suggest a manual trace. ### Does this comply with Google's terms? We request data per report and present it in that report; we do not build a cached database of roofs for resale, and reports carry Google attribution where required. If Google's terms change in a way that affects the product, we will tell customers in advance. ### Can I set my own prices and materials? Yes. You enter per-square prices for up to three options, a waste factor, pitch surcharges and tear-off costs. Agencies set these per client. Estimates are shown as a range and labeled preliminary. ### How does white-label work for agencies? Your agency gets a dashboard on your subdomain with your logo. Each roofer client is a workspace with its own brand, pricing and widget key. Homeowners and your clients see your brand, not ours, and you bill them however you like. ### Is the estimate a binding quote? No, and the PDF says so. It is a preliminary range based on aerial measurements and your pricing; your actual proposal follows an on-site inspection. Roof Tally is estimating software, not a contract, and does not replace your own terms. ### How fast can we start? We onboard new accounts within 2 business days, after which pay-as-you-go accounts can run reports immediately. Agency white-label setup, including DNS for your subdomain, usually completes in the same window. ## Guides - [Roof measurement reports: what's inside, what they cost, how to use them](https://rotomal.com/roof-report/roof-measurement-report/): What a roof measurement report includes (area, squares, pitch, facets, waste), satellite vs drone vs tape, typical prices, and getting reports into job records. --- Rotomal · https://rotomal.com/roof-report/ · hello@rotomal.com # Roof measurement reports: what's inside, what they cost, how to use them By Rotomal team · Updated 2026-10-12 · Part of [Roof Tally](https://rotomal.com/roof-report/) **Short answer:** A roof report (roof measurement report) gives a roof's total area, the number of squares (one square is 100 sq ft), the pitch of each facet, the facet count and a suggested waste factor, measured from aerial imagery or a drone instead of a tape on the roof. Premium reports, the kind insurers expect for claims, list at $13–19 each on Roofr and more elsewhere. For retail quotes and pre-quotes, a cheaper aerial report that gives an area range is usually enough; Roof Tally produces one with a branded estimate for $5–8. ## What a roof report contains - Total roof area in square feet, and the same figure in roofing squares (area ÷ 100). - Pitch: rise in inches per 12 inches of run, per facet and the dominant pitch. - Facet count, the main indicator of complexity and labor. - Suggested waste factor, higher for cut-up roofs with many hips and valleys. - Premium reports add edge lengths (ridges, hips, valleys, eaves, rakes) for ordering trim and flashing, plus annotated imagery. - Budget reports usually state the area as a range with a confidence grade. ## From measurements to an estimate Most retail estimates follow one formula: squares × (1 + waste factor) × price per square, plus pitch surcharges, tear-off per layer and fixed add-ons such as permits or skylights. A 2,400 sq ft roof is 24 squares; with a 10% waste factor you order 26.4 squares. If you only know the footprint, pitch converts it to true roof area. Multiply the flat area by the pitch factor: | Pitch | Pitch factor | 1,000 sq ft footprint becomes | | --- | --- | --- | | 4/12 | 1.054 | 1,054 sq ft | | 6/12 | 1.118 | 1,118 sq ft | | 8/12 | 1.202 | 1,202 sq ft | | 10/12 | 1.302 | 1,302 sq ft | | 12/12 | 1.414 | 1,414 sq ft | ## Satellite, drone or tape: which to use when | Method | Best for | Watch out for | | --- | --- | --- | | Aerial or satellite data | Retail quotes, pre-quotes, bulk mailers, listing files | Tree cover, recent additions and low-quality imagery; check the confidence grade | | Premium aerial report (EagleView, Hover, Roofr) | Insurance claims and won jobs before ordering | Higher price per report and slower turnaround | | Drone capture | Complex or steep roofs you are about to build | Needs a site visit and a licensed pilot | | Tape measure on the roof | Final verification before ordering material | Time and fall risk on every roof | ## Getting emailed roof reports into job or listing records Most measurement reports still arrive as a PDF by email, which means someone retypes the numbers into the CRM job, the estimate or the listing file. To make the figures searchable and reusable, store them as fields rather than only attaching the PDF: - Total area and squares - Dominant pitch and facet count - Waste factor used - Report date, source and confidence grade - Link or attachment to the original PDF Roof Tally returns every report as a PDF plus structured data: a CSV export on every plan, a Zapier-compatible webhook on the Roofer plan, and JSON through the REST API on the Agency plan that can create or update a record in your CRM. Bulk mode takes a list of addresses and returns one CSV row per address, so a whole street or a set of listings can be filed in one go. ## Premium or budget report? Use a premium report when an insurer, adjuster or lender will rely on it, and before you order material for a job you have won. Use a budget report for everything earlier in the funnel: the homeowner who wants a ballpark, the ten pre-quotes after a hailstorm, or the listing that needs a roof area. Paying premium prices for leads that never convert is where most of the measurement budget goes. ## FAQ ### How much does a roof report cost? Premium measurement reports list at $13–19 each on Roofr and more from some other providers. Roof Tally reports cost $8 each pay-as-you-go, or the $49 monthly plan includes 10 reports and charges $5 for each one after that. Failed lookups are free. ### How accurate are satellite roof measurements? Accuracy depends on the imagery for that address. Roof Tally reports area as a range with a confidence grade and does not charge when high-quality data is missing. Verify on site before ordering material. ### Can I use a budget roof report for an insurance claim? No. Insurers and adjusters generally expect a premium report or their own inspection. Budget reports are for retail quotes, pre-quotes and planning. ### What is a roofing square? 100 square feet of roof surface. Shingles are priced and ordered by the square, so a 2,400 sq ft roof is 24 squares before waste. ## Sources - Roofr's published pricing lists measurement reports at $13–19 each. https://roofr.com/pricing - Google's Solar API returns building and roof-segment data (area, pitch, orientation) per address. https://developers.google.com/maps/documentation/solar/usage-and-billing [Roof Tally](https://rotomal.com/roof-report/) does this for you. Request it free, no card: https://rotomal.com/roof-report/request/ --- Rotomal · https://rotomal.com/roof-report/roof-measurement-report/ · hello@rotomal.com # Rightleaf: HTML-to-PDF API that gets Hebrew and Arabic right, with verifiable certificates. > Rightleaf converts HTML to PDF with proper bidirectional text, Arabic letter shaping, embedded Hebrew and Arabic fonts and mirrored layouts, from a REST API or a Zapier or Make step. It also ships certificate templates with a public verification page, so a course completion or membership certificate can be checked by anyone with the link. - Page: https://rotomal.com/rtl-pdf/ - Category: Developer tools - Language: en - Billing: subscription - From: $19 per month - Request (free, no card): https://rotomal.com/rtl-pdf/request/ - Hebrew, Arabic and mixed text with Latin numbers and English terms render in the correct visual order, including inside tables - Each certificate gets a unique ID, a QR code and a hosted verification page you can revoke - Headless-browser pool on servers we operate; a typical two-page document renders in under 3 seconds ## General PDF APIs treat right-to-left as an edge case Most HTML-to-PDF services are built and tested on English documents. Feed them Hebrew or Arabic and the familiar failures appear: numbers and Latin words flipped inside a sentence, Arabic letters rendered as disconnected glyphs because shaping was skipped, fallback fonts with missing characters, tables whose columns run the wrong way, and page numbers in the wrong corner. Each fix is a workaround you maintain. The category itself is healthy. Document and image generation APIs are a proven business: Bannerbear reached $1M in annual recurring revenue in September 2025, and PDF APIs sell from roughly $5–24 a month entry tiers upward. What is missing is a vendor that treats right-to-left rendering as the main feature rather than a bug report. Certificates make the problem recurring. Course platforms, professional associations and continuing-education providers in Israel and the Middle East issue them every week, in Hebrew or Arabic, and increasingly need a way for employers or regulators to verify them. Rightleaf bundles both. - Bannerbear, an image and PDF generation API, reached $1M ARR in September 2025. (source: https://arrfounder.com/news/bannerbear-reaches-1m-arr) - Established PDF generation APIs (DocRaptor, APITemplate, PDFMonkey, PDFShift) start at roughly $5–24 a month entry tiers. (source: https://orshot.com/blog/best-pdf-generation-apis) ## How it works 1. **Send HTML or pick a template.** POST your HTML and CSS, or choose a certificate template and send JSON fields (name, course, date, signer). Set direction, language and fonts per document, or let Rightleaf detect them from the content. 2. **We render it properly.** A headless browser with bidi-aware layout, Arabic shaping and embedded Noto Hebrew and Arabic fonts renders the page. Mixed-direction text, tables, headers, footers and page numbers follow the document direction. Typical render time is under three seconds. 3. **Get the PDF and a verification page.** The response includes the PDF URL and, for certificates, a unique ID, QR code and public verification URL. Webhooks notify your system; Zapier and Make steps pass the file to the next action. 4. **Manage and revoke.** A dashboard lists every document and certificate, searchable by recipient, template and date. Revoke a certificate and its verification page updates immediately. ## Features - **Correct bidirectional rendering.** The Unicode bidi algorithm is applied as browsers apply it, with explicit dir and lang attributes honored. Mixed Hebrew, English and number runs keep their logical order on the page. - **Arabic shaping and ligatures.** Contextual letter forms, lam-alef ligatures and diacritics render connected, not as isolated glyphs. Persian and Urdu text in Arabic script is supported with the appropriate fonts. - **Embedded fonts.** Noto Sans Hebrew, Noto Naskh Arabic, Noto Kufi Arabic and Noto Sans are included; upload your own licensed fonts (TTF, OTF, WOFF2) per account. Fonts are subset and embedded so the PDF looks the same everywhere. - **Mirrored layout controls.** Page margins, headers, footers, page numbers and table column order follow the document direction automatically; override any element with standard CSS. - **Certificate templates and verification pages.** Templates for course completion, continuing education, membership and attendance in Hebrew, Arabic and English. Each certificate gets an ID, a QR code and a hosted verification page showing issuer, recipient, date and status. - **Zapier and Make steps.** Trigger a PDF or certificate from Teachable, Thinkific, LearnWorlds, Google Sheets, Airtable or any app those platforms connect. No code needed. - **REST API and code samples.** JSON in, PDF out, with async mode and webhooks for batches. Code samples for Node, Python, PHP and C#. - **Batch generation.** Upload a CSV or send an array to issue hundreds of certificates at once, with a single ZIP download and per-row status. ## Who it's for - **Course platforms and online academies.** You issue completion certificates in Hebrew or Arabic and your current tool mangles the text. You get a template, a Zapier step and a verification page students can share with employers. - **Professional associations and continuing-education providers.** Members need certificates that regulators or employers can verify. You get unique IDs, QR codes and a revocation switch, with your branding. - **Israeli and Middle-East SaaS products.** Your app generates invoices, reports or contracts in Hebrew or Arabic and you have patched RTL bugs for years. You get an API that handles the layout so your team stops maintaining workarounds. - **Agencies and no-code builders.** You deliver client projects on Make or Zapier and need documents in Hebrew or Arabic. You get a step that works the first time, billed per account with sub-accounts for clients. ## Works with REST API (JSON), Zapier, Make, Webhooks, Teachable, Thinkific, LearnWorlds (via Zapier or Make), Google Sheets and Airtable (via Zapier or Make), Custom fonts (TTF, OTF, WOFF2), S3-compatible storage export, QR code verification pages, MCP connector for Claude, ChatGPT and other AI assistants ## Pricing Monthly plans in USD, cancel any time; usage above the included documents is billed per document at the plan rate. Founding-customer pricing is locked for 12 months. All plans include RTL rendering, embedded fonts, certificate templates, Zapier and Make steps and verification pages. | Plan | Price | Includes | | --- | --- | --- | | Starter | $19 per month | 300 PDFs or certificates a month; $0.08 per additional document; All RTL rendering features and included fonts; Certificate templates and verification pages; Zapier and Make steps; 30-day document storage | | Growth | $49 per month | 2,000 PDFs or certificates a month; $0.04 per additional document; Everything in Starter; Custom fonts and branded verification pages; Batch generation from CSV; Webhooks and async mode; 12-month document storage | | Scale | $99 per month | 6,000 PDFs or certificates a month; $0.02 per additional document; Everything in Growth; Sub-accounts for clients; Custom verification domain (verify.yourdomain); Priority rendering queue; Unlimited document storage while subscribed | ## Compared with the alternatives - **General PDF APIs (DocRaptor, PDFShift, APITemplate, PDFMonkey).** Mature, well documented and cheaper at entry level, starting around $5–24 a month. They can render Hebrew or Arabic if you supply fonts and handle the layout yourself; results vary with mixed text and tables. If your documents are mostly English, use them. - **Running Puppeteer or wkhtmltopdf yourself.** Free and fully under your control. You handle font installation, shaping bugs in older engines, a browser pool, scaling and the verification pages. Worthwhile for teams with ops capacity; Rightleaf is for teams who would rather not. - **Certificate services (Certifier, Accredible, Sertifier).** Strong on branding, LinkedIn sharing and badges, English-first, and typically priced per certificate or per seat. Rightleaf is a developer tool first, with Hebrew and Arabic as the point, and a general PDF API alongside. ## Security and data - Documents are rendered and stored on servers we operate, encrypted in transit (TLS 1.2+) and at rest (AES-256). - Source HTML and generated PDFs are retained for the storage period of your plan, then deleted; you can delete any document immediately from the dashboard or API. - Verification pages expose only the fields you select; recipient data is never indexed or listed publicly. - API keys are scoped per project and can be rotated at any time; access logs are available in the dashboard. - On account closure, all documents and templates are exported to you on request and deleted within 14 days. ## Your first week We onboard new accounts within 2 business days. Most teams have their first production certificate or PDF flowing by day three. - Day 1: Account created, API keys issued, 30-minute call to review your first document or certificate design. - Day 2–3: We adapt a template to your branding and languages, you run test renders from the API or a Zapier/Make step, and we fix any layout detail together. - Day 4–5: Go live. First real documents or certificates issued; verification pages checked on mobile. - Day 7: Short review of render logs, volumes and any edge cases; plan limits adjusted if needed. ## FAQ ### Isn't an HTML-to-PDF API a commodity? Why pay more? The conversion itself is, and we say so. What you pay for is that right-to-left output is correct on the first try and stays correct, plus certificate templates and verification pages. If your documents are left-to-right only, a cheaper general API is the right choice. ### Which languages and scripts are supported? Hebrew (including nikud), Arabic, and Persian and Urdu in Arabic script, mixed freely with Latin, Cyrillic and other left-to-right text in the same document. Other right-to-left scripts render through the browser engine but are not yet in our test suite. ### Can I use my own fonts and layouts? Yes. Upload licensed TTF, OTF or WOFF2 fonts to your account and reference them in CSS. Any HTML and CSS a modern browser renders works, including flexbox, grid and print CSS for page breaks. ### How does certificate verification work? Each certificate gets a unique ID and a QR code linking to a page on our domain (or yours on the Scale plan) showing the issuer, recipient, course, date and status. You can revoke or reissue, and the page updates immediately. The page shows only the fields you choose to publish. ### How fast is it, and what about volume? A typical two-page document renders in under three seconds; batches run asynchronously with webhooks. The rendering pool runs on servers we operate and scales horizontally. For sustained volumes above the Scale plan, ask us for a custom arrangement. ### Can I switch away later? Easily, and we do not lock you in. Templates are plain HTML and CSS you can export, PDFs are yours, and verification records can be exported as a list with IDs so you can host the pages elsewhere. ### Is the product live? Yes, for founding customers. We onboard new accounts within 2 business days, including API keys, a review of your first template and a Zapier or Make test run. Founding-customer pricing is locked for 12 months. ### Does it work with Claude or ChatGPT? Yes. Rightleaf includes an MCP connector, so Claude, ChatGPT and other MCP-compatible assistants can answer questions like "create a Hebrew PDF quote from this text" from your data. It is read-only by default and you can revoke access at any time. --- Rotomal · https://rotomal.com/rtl-pdf/ · hello@rotomal.com # Scam Second Opinion: Forward a suspicious text, email or call note and get a plain-English verdict in minutes, with the family told if it's risky. > Scam Second Opinion gives your parents one number to forward anything that feels off: a text about a parcel, an email from the 'bank', a voicemail from a 'grandson' in trouble. Within minutes they get a plain answer, safe, scam or careful, with the reason in simple words. If it's a scam aimed at money or passwords, the family members you choose get a heads-up too. - Page: https://rotomal.com/scam-check/ - Category: Family safety - Language: en - Billing: subscription - From: $0 per month - Request (free, no card): https://rotomal.com/scam-check/request/ - One number for text messages, WhatsApp and email forwarding; no app to install and nothing to learn. - Links and attachments checked against known scam databases, plus a person reviewing anything uncertain before the verdict goes out. - Answers in plain words with the one thing to do next, like 'delete it' or 'call the bank on the number on your card'. ## Scammers target the people least likely to ask for a second opinion Older adults report more losses to online fraud than any other age group. The scams are polished: a text from a delivery company, a security alert from the bank, a grandchild who needs bail money tonight. They work because they create urgency and arrive when nobody is around to ask. Most families' answer is 'call me before you click anything'. It helps until the call goes to voicemail, or until a parent feels embarrassed asking for the fifth time this week. Then the decision is made alone, in a hurry, which is exactly what the scam needs. Scam Second Opinion is the person to ask that is always available and never impatient. Forward the message, get an answer in minutes, and the family hears about real threats without having to be the help desk. - People aged 60 and over reported about $4.9 billion in losses to the FBI's Internet Crime Complaint Center in 2024, more than any other age group. (source: https://ic3.gov/AnnualReport/Reports/2024_IC3Report.pdf) - The same report counts 147,127 complaints from people aged 60 and over in 2024, a 46% increase on the year before. (source: https://www.aha.org/cybersecurity-government-intelligence-reports/2025-05-12-2024-fbi-internet-crime-report) ## How it works 1. **Save one number.** We add a contact called 'Scam check' to your parent's phone during a 10-minute setup call, plus an email address for forwarding. That's the only thing they need to remember. 2. **Forward anything suspicious.** Text, WhatsApp message, email, screenshot or a voice note describing a phone call. No need to explain; just forward it. 3. **Get a clear verdict.** Usually within 10 minutes, 8am to 10pm: safe, scam or be careful, why in one sentence, and the one thing to do next. Uncertain cases are checked by a person. 4. **Family kept in the loop.** If it's a scam asking for money, passwords or remote access, the family members you nominated get a short alert, so someone can call and check in. ## Features - **Link and attachment checks.** Every link is expanded and checked against public safe-browsing and phishing lists before anyone opens it; attachments are scanned without being opened on the parent's phone. - **Human review when unsure.** Automated checks handle the obvious cases. Anything ambiguous, like a real-looking bank text, is reviewed by a person before the answer goes back. - **Plain-language answers.** No jargon: 'This is a scam. The real post office doesn't ask for card details by text. Delete it.' In English, with Spanish and other languages on request. - **Family alerts.** Up to five family members get a heads-up for high-risk scams, with the original message attached, so a quick call can happen before money moves. - **Phone call help.** Got a call that felt wrong? Send a voice note describing it. We tell you whether it matches known scam scripts and what to do if details were shared. - **What-to-do-now guides.** If something was already clicked or paid, step-by-step guidance: call the bank on the number on the card, change the password, report it to the right agency. - **Monthly family summary.** A short note to the family: how many messages were checked, which scams are going around and one tip for the month. ## Who it's for - **Older adults living independently.** Comfortable with a phone, not with every new trick. One trusted number to ask, without feeling like a burden. - **Adult children who live far away.** You can't answer every 'is this real?' call, but you want to know when something serious arrives. - **Caregivers and assisted-living staff.** A simple routine for residents: when in doubt, forward it. Staff see alerts for the people they look after, with consent. ## Works with SMS and iMessage forwarding, WhatsApp, Email forwarding from Gmail, Outlook, Yahoo and others, Screenshots and photos of letters, Voice notes describing phone calls, Public safe-browsing and phishing lists ## Pricing Monthly, cancel any time. The Try plan is free and needs no card. Prices cover the whole family's alerts; the forwarding number is for the person being protected. Founding customer pricing is locked for 24 months. | Plan | Price | Includes | | --- | --- | --- | | Try | $0 per month | 3 checks per month; Verdict by text or email; Link and attachment checks; No family alerts | | Family | $4 per month | Unlimited checks for one person; Human review when unsure; Family alerts to up to 5 people; Phone call help by voice note; Setup call included; Monthly family summary | | Two parents | $9 per month | Unlimited checks for two people; Everything in Family; Priority answers; What-to-do-now help if money was sent; Quarterly 15-minute safety call | ## Compared with the alternatives - **'Call me before you click'.** Free and personal. Works until you're in a meeting, asleep in another time zone or the third call of the day lands. Scam Second Opinion covers the gaps, and you still hear about anything serious. - **Phone carrier spam filters.** Built in and worth turning on: they block many known scam numbers. They don't explain why a message is dangerous, and new numbers get through every day. - **Antivirus and identity-theft plans.** Useful for devices and credit monitoring, typically at a higher monthly price. They rarely give a quick human answer to 'is this text real?' ## Security and data - Forwarded messages are stored encrypted and personal details are deleted after 30 days; scam patterns we keep are stripped of names and numbers. - Links are opened only in isolated systems, never on your parent's device or with their accounts. - Family alerts go only to people the protected person agreed to, and they can change the list at any time. - We never ask for passwords, codes or payment details, and our team cannot see your parent's accounts. ## Your first week We set everything up on a 10-minute call with your parent, within 2 business days of your request. - Day 1: Request the service and choose who gets family alerts. - Day 2: 10-minute setup call: the 'Scam check' contact saved and a test message forwarded together. - Day 3–6: Forward anything that feels off; we answer and adjust the family alert settings if needed. - Day 7: First short summary to the family. ## FAQ ### What happens to the messages we forward? They are used only to check that message. Personal details are deleted after 30 days, and we never use the messages for advertising or sell them. Family alerts include only the message in question. ### How fast is the answer? Usually within 10 minutes between 8am and 10pm in your time zone. Messages sent overnight are answered first thing in the morning; if it's urgent, the reply tells you how to check directly with the bank or company. ### Do you ever ask for passwords or bank details? Never. If a message claiming to be us asks for a password, a code or a payment, that message is a scam. We say this in the setup call too. ### What if my parent already clicked or paid? Forward it anyway. We tell you exactly what to do next: call the bank on the number on the card, change passwords, and report it to the right agency. On the Two parents plan we stay with you through it. ### Does my parent need a smartphone? Any phone that can forward a text works. Email forwarding works from a computer or tablet. For phone calls, a short voice note or a family member's description is enough. ### Can you stop scams from arriving at all? No service blocks everything. Turn on your carrier's spam filter as well. Scam Second Opinion is for the messages that get through and look real. --- Rotomal · https://rotomal.com/scam-check/ · hello@rotomal.com # Backpack Brief: Every school email, app message and newsletter turned into one short weekly brief and dates on your family calendar. > Teachers, the office, the PTA, the coach and three different apps all send messages, and the one about picture day is buried under fundraising reminders. Backpack Brief collects them in one place, writes a short Sunday-evening brief of what actually needs you, and puts the dates on your family calendar. Both parents get the same brief, so nothing depends on who happened to read the email. - Page: https://rotomal.com/school-digest/ - Category: Family organization - Language: en - Billing: subscription - From: $3 per month - Request (free, no card): https://rotomal.com/school-digest/request/ - One forwarding address for school email and app notifications from ParentSquare, ClassDojo, Remind, Google Classroom and others. - A Sunday brief per child: what's due, what to bring, what to pay or sign, and what you can safely ignore. - Deadlines and events added to Google, Apple or Outlook calendars, with a reminder the evening before. ## Schools send more than ever, through more channels than ever A typical family now hears from school through several channels at once: district email, a class app, a teacher's newsletter, sports and club apps, and a parents' group chat. Each one is reasonable on its own. Together they produce dozens of messages a week, and the important ones, a form due Thursday or a field trip that needs a packed lunch, look exactly like the rest. Parents report school email as a genuine source of stress, and many say they have missed an important event or detail in the noise. The usual fix is one parent becoming the household's full-time message reader, which is invisible work and still fails when they're busy. Backpack Brief does the reading. You forward everything once, set up a few rules, and get one short brief a week plus the dates on the calendar you already use. - In a Yahoo and Censuswide survey of over 2,000 US parents, 56% said school email is too much and 29% found it more stressful than their work email. (source: https://www.mother.ly/news/parents-school-email-survey) - 62% of the parents and caregivers in the same survey said they had missed an important event or detail in their inbox. (source: https://www.mother.ly/news/parents-school-email-survey) - More than two-thirds of school districts rely on five to six channels to reach parents, according to a national survey cited by Romper. (source: https://www.romper.com/parenting/the-hidden-back-to-school-supply-parents-cant-buy-more-bandwidth-the-rise-of-administrative-parenting) ## How it works 1. **Forward once.** Set your school emails and app email notifications to forward to your private Backpack Brief address. We send step-by-step instructions for each app your school uses. 2. **Tell us about your kids.** Names, grades, teachers and activities, so messages are matched to the right child and the brief ignores other classes' news. 3. **Get the Sunday brief.** Every Sunday evening: per child, what's due, what to bring, what to pay or sign, upcoming dates, and a short 'safe to skip' list. 4. **Dates on your calendar.** Deadlines and events added to your shared family calendar as they arrive, with a reminder the evening before. Urgent changes, like a snow day, are sent the same day. ## Features - **One address for everything.** School email, app notification emails, newsletters and club emails all forwarded to one private address. Screenshots of paper flyers work too. - **Per-child brief.** Each child's section lists only what concerns them: their class, their teams, their deadlines. Siblings' briefs come in one email. - **Action list first.** Forms to sign, money to send, things to bring, with the due date and a link to the original message, before any general news. - **Calendar sync.** Events and deadlines added to Google Calendar, Apple Calendar or Outlook with location and what to bring in the notes. - **Same-day urgent alerts.** Closures, early dismissals, schedule changes and anything due tomorrow sent as a short text the same day, not saved for Sunday. - **Both parents, same picture.** The brief goes to every adult you add: co-parents, grandparents who do pickups, a nanny. Nobody has to forward anything. - **Ask about anything.** Reply to the brief with a question like 'when is the science project due?' and get the answer from the original messages. - **Ask your AI assistant.** Connect Backpack Brief to Claude, ChatGPT or another assistant through MCP and ask in plain language, for example "what's due this week for Maya?". Read-only by default; revoke access any time. ## Who it's for - **Busy working parents.** You read work email all day and don't want to read school email all evening too. - **Separated and co-parenting families.** Both homes get the same information at the same time, so nothing depends on passing messages along. - **Families with several kids or schools.** Elementary, middle school and a travel team means three systems; Backpack Brief makes it one. ## Works with School and district email, ParentSquare, ClassDojo, Remind and similar apps (email notifications), Google Classroom guardian summaries, Sports and club apps that send email, Google Calendar, Apple Calendar and Outlook, SMS for urgent alerts, Photos of paper flyers, MCP connector for Claude, ChatGPT and other AI assistants ## Pricing Monthly, cancel any time, with a free first month. Prices are per family, not per child. Founding customer pricing is locked for 24 months. | Plan | Price | Includes | | --- | --- | --- | | Brief | $3 per month | Up to 3 children; Sunday brief by email; Action list per child; Calendar sync for one calendar; Free first month | | Family | $6 per month | Up to 5 children; Brief to up to 6 adults; Same-day urgent text alerts; Calendar sync to several calendars; Ask-anything replies; Free first month | | Class or PTA | $29 per month | One brief for a whole class or team; Up to 40 families; Shared calendar feed; Room-parent edit before sending; Translation into families' home languages | ## Compared with the alternatives - **Reading everything yourself.** Free and thorough, and it takes several hours a week across inboxes and apps. Backpack Brief does that reading and hands you the result. - **Email filters and folders.** Good for keeping the inbox tidy. They don't tell you what's due, they don't put dates on the calendar, and important messages still end up in the folder unread. - **General AI email assistants.** Some summarize your inbox, but they don't know which class is your child's, they don't read app notifications and they don't share a brief with the other parent. ## Security and data - We never log in to your email or school apps; you choose what to forward. - Forwarded messages are encrypted at rest and deleted after 90 days, and briefs are sent only to adults you add. - Children's information is never used for advertising, sold or used to train public AI models. - You can export or delete everything at any time from your account page. ## Your first week We set up your forwarding address and family profile within 2 business days of your request. - Day 1: Request the service; we send your private forwarding address and app instructions. - Day 2: Add your children, schools and activities; connect your calendar. - Day 3–6: Forward school messages as they arrive; urgent items are sent the same day. - Day 7: Your first Sunday brief. ## FAQ ### Which school apps does it work with? Any that can send email notifications, which includes ParentSquare, ClassDojo, Remind, Google Classroom guardian summaries and most sports and club apps. We send instructions for turning those notifications on. ### Is my children's information safe? Forwarded messages are stored encrypted, used only to write your brief and calendar entries, and deleted after 90 days. We never sell data or use it for advertising. ### What if the brief misses something? Each item links to the original message, and you can reply with a question at any time. If something was missed, tell us and we adjust the rules for your family. ### Can grandparents or a nanny get it? Yes. On the Family plan the brief and urgent alerts go to up to six adults you add. ### What about paper flyers in the backpack? Take a photo and send it to the same address. The details are read and included in the brief and calendar. ### Do I need to give access to my email account? No. You set up forwarding rules; we never log in to your email or the school apps. ### Does it work with Claude or ChatGPT? Yes. Backpack Brief includes an MCP connector, so Claude, ChatGPT and other MCP-compatible assistants can answer questions like "what's due this week for Maya?" from your data. It is read-only by default and you can revoke access at any time. --- Rotomal · https://rotomal.com/school-digest/ · hello@rotomal.com # Sermon Pack: Sermon clips, captions and devotionals for Spanish, Portuguese and Korean churches. > Sermon Pack watches your YouTube channel, picks up the livestream when it ends, and produces short vertical clips with native-language captions, a daily devotional series drawn from the sermon, and a WhatsApp-ready pack of text and images. Everything lands in a review queue for the pastor or media volunteer before anything is shared. - Page: https://rotomal.com/sermon-clips/ - Category: Church media - Language: en - Billing: subscription - From: $19 per month - Request (free, no card): https://rotomal.com/sermon-clips/request/ - Transcription and captions in Spanish, Portuguese and Korean are produced natively, not translated from English - Nothing publishes automatically: every clip and devotional waits for a human approval, with the sermon timestamp shown next to it - Scripture references follow the Bible version your church uses, and quotes come from the transcript, not from the model's memory ## The sermon is the week's best content, and it disappears by Tuesday Churches that stream on Sunday know the pattern: the sermon reaches the people in the room and a few hundred on YouTube, then nothing happens with it. Cutting clips, writing captions and preparing a devotional takes a volunteer four to six hours, so most weeks it does not get done. English-speaking churches already pay for this: Pulpit AI, now owned by the church-software company Subsplash, charges $39–129 a month and reports thousands of churches as users. For Spanish-, Portuguese- and Korean-language congregations the same tools either do not support the language well, translate through English, or cost more than a small church's media budget. Sermon Pack is built for those congregations: native-language transcription and writing, automatic pickup from YouTube, a WhatsApp pack because that is where your members actually are, and a price between $19 and $39 a month. - Pulpit AI prices its sermon-content tiers at $39–129 a month. (source: https://www.pulpitai.com/pricing) - Pulpit AI says thousands of churches use it and is now owned by the church-software company Subsplash. (source: https://www.pulpitai.com/pricing) ## How it works 1. **Connect your YouTube channel.** Paste your channel link and tell us the service time. Sermon Pack detects when a livestream ends and pulls the recording; you can also upload an MP4 or audio file. 2. **Transcribe and mark the sermon.** Within about an hour, the recording is transcribed in Spanish, Portuguese or Korean, the sermon is separated from worship and announcements, and Scripture references are tagged in the format of the version you selected. 3. **Clips, devotional and pack are drafted.** The system proposes 5–8 clips of 30–90 seconds with burned-in captions, a five-day devotional series (reading, short reflection and prayer per day), and a WhatsApp pack: summary, quote card and the clips in a mobile-friendly size. 4. **Pastor reviews, team shares.** Everything appears in a review queue with the exact timestamp in the sermon. Approve, edit or discard each item; approved items download or go to a shared folder for whoever posts. ## Features - **Automatic YouTube pickup.** Monitors your channel and starts when the livestream ends. Works with unlisted streams and with services uploaded later. Manual upload is available for other platforms. - **Native-language transcription.** Spanish (Latin American and European), Brazilian and European Portuguese, and Korean, transcribed directly, with the preacher separated from other speakers. Accuracy depends on audio quality; you can fix names and terms in the review queue. - **Vertical clips with captions.** 30–90 second clips cropped to 9:16 for Reels, TikTok, YouTube Shorts and WhatsApp Status, with word-level captions in the sermon's language and your church's colors and logo. - **Five-day devotional series.** Monday to Friday devotionals based on the sermon: the passage reference, a short reflection built from what the preacher actually said, and a prayer. Delivered as text and as simple image cards. - **WhatsApp pack.** A ready-to-forward message set: sermon summary, key quote, the clips as compressed videos, and the devotional for each day. Sized for WhatsApp's limits and formatted for groups and broadcast lists. - **Bible version and naming.** Choose the version your church uses (for example Reina-Valera 1960 or NVI in Spanish, Almeida Revista e Atualizada in Portuguese, 개역개정 in Korean). Book names and reference formats follow it; verse text appears only as the preacher read it, so we do not reproduce copyrighted Bible text. - **Review queue with timestamps.** Every item links to the second in the recording it came from, so a pastor can check context in one click. Nothing is posted without approval. ## Who it's for - **Spanish-language churches.** Congregations in the US, Latin America and Spain that stream on YouTube and live on WhatsApp during the week. You get Monday-morning content in Spanish, in the preacher's words. - **Portuguese-language churches.** Brazilian and Portuguese congregations, including diaspora churches, with active WhatsApp groups and Instagram pages. You get Brazilian or European Portuguese captions and devotionals. - **Korean-language churches.** Korean congregations in Korea and the diaspora, often alongside an English-language ministry. You get Korean captions and devotionals that keep the honorific register, in clip sizes that also work for KakaoTalk. - **Media volunteers and small church staff.** One person who handles the stream, the Instagram page and the WhatsApp broadcast. You get a draft of everything by Monday morning and a queue to approve in 20 minutes. ## Works with YouTube (livestream pickup), WhatsApp (pack format for groups and broadcast lists), Instagram Reels, TikTok, YouTube Shorts (9:16 export), Google Drive and Dropbox (shared folder delivery), MP4 and MP3 upload, SRT and VTT caption files, Email delivery of the weekly pack ## Pricing Monthly plans in USD, cancel any time. Founding-customer pricing is locked for 12 months. All plans include automatic YouTube pickup, native-language transcription, the review queue and the WhatsApp pack. Prices are per church, not per user. | Plan | Price | Includes | | --- | --- | --- | | Small Church | $19 per month | One sermon a week (up to 90 minutes); 5 clips per sermon with captions; Five-day devotional series; WhatsApp pack; Review queue for up to 2 users; Church logo and colors | | Church | $29 per month | Up to two sermons a week; 8 clips per sermon with captions; Everything in Small Church; Two languages, or one plus translated captions; Google Drive or Dropbox delivery; Up to 5 users in the review queue; Email and WhatsApp support | | Multi-Campus | $39 per month | Up to four sermons a week; Unlimited clips per sermon; Everything in Church; Three languages; Custom caption and card templates; Unlimited review-queue users; Priority processing | ## Compared with the alternatives - **Pulpit AI (Subsplash).** The established English-first option at $39–129 a month, with a broad feature set and a large church-software company behind it. If your church works mainly in English or already uses Subsplash, it is a strong choice. Sermon Pack costs less and works natively in Spanish, Portuguese and Korean. - **A volunteer with CapCut and ChatGPT.** Free in software, four to six hours a week in time, and dependent on one person staying available. Sermon Pack gives that volunteer a Monday-morning draft instead of a blank timeline. - **A freelance video editor.** Better creative judgment than any software, usually priced per video or per month at several times our price. Good for a flagship piece; rarely sustainable for every week's sermon in a small church. ## Security and data - Recordings, transcripts and generated content are stored on servers we operate, encrypted in transit and at rest. - Transcription and drafting use AI models under business terms that do not permit training on your data. - Only users you invite can see the review queue; nothing is published by us anywhere. - Recordings are deleted 90 days after processing by default; transcripts and approved content stay while your account is active, are exportable, and are deleted 90 days after cancellation or within 14 days of a request. ## Your first week We onboard new churches within 2 business days. Your first pack is built from the most recent sermon on your channel so you can judge the quality before Sunday. - Day 1: Sign-up call (30 minutes): connect YouTube, choose language and Bible version, upload logo and colors. - Day 2: Account live. We process your latest sermon as a test and walk through the review queue with you. - Sunday: First live pickup. Clips, devotional and WhatsApp pack are in the queue about an hour after the stream ends. - Day 7: Review call: caption accuracy, clip selection, and any terms or names to add to your dictionary. ## FAQ ### How do you handle theological content? I don't want a machine preaching. Neither do we. Devotionals and summaries are drawn from the sermon transcript, quote the preacher's own words, and carry the timestamp they came from. The system does not add doctrine, and every item requires a human approval before it leaves the queue. Your pastor remains the author; Sermon Pack is the editor's first draft. ### Is the transcription really in my language, or translated from English? It is produced directly in Spanish, Portuguese or Korean. Accuracy depends on audio quality and the preacher's accent; the review queue shows the full transcript so you can correct names, places and church-specific terms, and corrections are remembered for next week. ### Our budget is small. What happens if we need to pause? Pause or cancel from the dashboard any time; there is no annual contract. Your clips, devotionals and transcripts stay downloadable for 90 days after cancelling, and founding-customer pricing is kept if you return within a year. ### Does it post to Instagram or WhatsApp for us? No. Approved items are delivered to a shared folder, by email or as a download, and your team posts them. This keeps a person between the sermon and the public, and avoids platform rules on automated posting. ### What if Subsplash or others add Spanish, Portuguese and Korean? They may. We are a small team focused on these three languages, the WhatsApp pack and a lower price, and language quality is our whole product, not a feature. If a bigger tool serves you better one day, your content exports in standard formats. ### Is the dashboard in my language? The content we produce is fully in your language. The dashboard itself is currently in English; Spanish, Portuguese and Korean interface versions are planned, and founding churches will see them first. Support is in English. ### Is the product live? Yes, for founding churches. We onboard new accounts within 2 business days, including connecting your YouTube channel and processing your most recent sermon as a test. Founding-customer pricing is locked for 12 months. --- Rotomal · https://rotomal.com/sermon-clips/ · hello@rotomal.com # Shelf Signal: Sehen Sie, wonach Kunden in Ihren Filialen gesucht und nicht gekauft haben – ausgelöst durch ein Etikett am Regal. > Shelf Signal platziert ein kleines QR- oder NFC-Etikett am Produkt. Kunden scannen es, um den Bestand hier, in einer anderen Filiale oder online zu prüfen, nach einer Größe zu fragen oder Hilfe zu erhalten. Jeder Scan wird erfasst – so bekommen Sie endlich einen Bericht über die Nachfrage, die in Ihren Filialen verloren geht. - Page: https://rotomal.com/de/shelf-signal/ - Category: Retail-Analytik - Language: de - Billing: subscription - From: $49 pro Monat - Request (free, no card): https://rotomal.com/de/shelf-signal/request/ - Kunden scannen ein Etikett und prüfen den Bestand, finden eine andere Filiale, bestellen online oder bitten im Mobilbrowser um Hilfe – ohne App-Installation - Jeder Scan wird als Absichtssignal erfasst: Produkt, Filiale, Wunsch (Bestand, Größe, Preis, Hilfe) und Zeitpunkt - Ein Wochenbericht reiht pro Filiale die Produkte, die Kunden gesucht und nicht gekauft haben, mit CSV-Export ## Ihre Website misst die Kaufabsicht. Ihre Verkaufsfläche nicht. Online wissen Sie, wonach Kunden gesucht haben, welche Produkte sie angesehen, in den Warenkorb gelegt und wieder liegen gelassen haben. In einer physischen Filiale ist fast nichts davon sichtbar. Ein Kunde nimmt ein Produkt in die Hand, findet seine Größe nicht, sucht nach einer Mitarbeiterin, gibt auf und geht – und nichts davon wird irgendwo festgehalten. Die Kosten dieses blinden Flecks sind gut belegt. Artikel sind weit häufiger nicht im Regal verfügbar, als die meisten Händler annehmen, und wenn das passiert, gehen viele Kunden einfach, statt ein Ersatzprodukt zu kaufen. Diese verlorene Nachfrage taucht in Ihren Verkaufsdaten nie auf, denn ein Verkauf, der nicht stattgefunden hat, hinterlässt keine Spur. Shelf Signal macht aus dem Moment des Interesses ein messbares Signal. Der Kunde erhält sofort etwas Nützliches – den Bestand in einer anderen Filiale, eine Online-Bestellung, eine Größenanfrage, einen Hilferuf – und Sie erhalten eine Aufzeichnung dessen, was er kaufen wollte. Es setzt auf Ihren bestehenden Filialen und Ihrem E-Commerce auf; es gibt keine neue Hardware und keine App, die Kunden herunterladen müssten. - Die weltweite durchschnittliche Out-of-Stock-Rate im Handel liegt bei etwa 8.3 % – rund jeder zwölfte vom Kunden gewünschte Artikel fehlt im Regal – laut der Studie von Gruen, Corsten und Bharadwaj mit über 71.000 Verbrauchern in 29 Ländern. (source: https://www.researchgate.net/publication/302501862_On_Shelf_Availability_An_Examination_of_the_Extent_the_Causes_and_the_Efforts_to_Address_Retail_Out-of-Stocks) - Ist ein Artikel nicht vorrätig, kaufen ihn etwa 31 % der Kunden in einer anderen Filiale und etwa 9 % kaufen ihn gar nicht, sodass der Händler bei rund vier von zehn Nichtverfügbarkeiten den Verkauf vollständig verliert. (source: https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Stockout) - Die 2024-Matrix der IHL Group schätzt, dass Nichtverfügbarkeiten Händler weltweit etwa 1,2 Billionen $ kosten, rund 4 % des Umsatzes für den durchschnittlichen Händler. (source: https://www.ihlservices.com/product/2024-out-of-stocks-and-overstocks-matrix/) - Google zeigt inzwischen in vielen Ländern die Produktverfügbarkeit auf Filialebene ("in der Nähe vorrätig") an, sodass die Daten, die nötig sind, um einen Kunden in die richtige Filiale zu schicken, zunehmend bereits in den Feeds der Händler vorliegen. (source: https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/3057972) ## So funktioniert es 1. **Pilotprojekt anfragen.** Sagen Sie uns, mit wie vielen Filialen und Produkten Sie starten möchten. Wir richten Ihr Konto ein und erstellen Ihren ersten Satz Etiketten innerhalb von 3 Werktagen. 2. **Wir erstellen die Etiketten.** Sie erhalten druckfertige QR-Etiketten und, wo gewünscht, NFC-Sticker für Regale, Displays, Umkleidekabinen oder Produktanhänger. Jedes ist mit einem Produkt oder einem Standort verknüpft. Ihre Mitarbeiter bringen sie an; es ist keine Hardware zu installieren. 3. **Kunden scannen und erhalten Hilfe.** Ein Scan öffnet eine mobile Seite: Bestand hier, in einer anderen Filiale oder online, eine Größen- oder Benachrichtigungsanfrage, Produktdetails oder ein Ruf nach einer Mitarbeiterin. Es läuft im Mobilbrowser, sodass Kunden nie etwas herunterladen müssen. 4. **Sie lesen die Kaufabsicht.** Jeder Scan wird mit Produkt, Filiale, Absicht und Zeitpunkt erfasst. Ein Wochenbericht und ein Live-Dashboard zeigen die Produkte, die Kunden gesucht und nicht gekauft haben, welche Filialen die meiste ungedeckte Nachfrage haben und wo Hilfe angefordert wurde. ## Features - **Bestandsprüfung über die gesamte Kette.** Ein Scan zeigt dem Kunden, ob das Produkt hier, in einer Filiale in der Nähe oder online verfügbar ist – anhand Ihres Bestands-Feeds. Solange das Pilotprojekt noch nicht an Ihre Systeme angebunden ist, laden wir eine einfache Tabelle, damit Sie das Erlebnis zuerst testen können. - **Erfassung verlorener Nachfrage.** Ist der Artikel oder die Größe nicht verfügbar, kann der Kunde benachrichtigt werden, sobald er wieder da ist, an eine andere Filiale verwiesen werden oder online bestellen. Jeder dieser Fälle wird als rückgewinnbarer Umsatzverlust mit Produkt und Filiale erfasst. - **Größen- und Variantenanfragen.** Kunden wählen die gewünschte Größe oder Farbe. Sie sehen genau, welche Varianten in welchen Filialen Nachfrage erzeugen – getrennt davon, was tatsächlich im Regal lag. - **Hilferuf, gemessen.** Ein Tippen auf "Hilfe anfordern" erfasst Produkt, Standort und Zeitpunkt. Der Bericht zeigt, wo und wann Kunden am häufigsten um Unterstützung bitten, damit Sie Umkleidekabinen und Abteilungen der echten Nachfrage entsprechend besetzen können. - **Protokoll der Kaufabsicht.** Jede Interaktion wird als Produkt, Filiale, Absichtstyp und Zeitstempel gespeichert. Kein Login, keine App, kein persönliches Profil – nur das Signal. Exportieren Sie das vollständige Protokoll jederzeit als CSV. - **Berichte pro Filiale und pro Produkt.** Eine Wochen-E-Mail und ein Live-Dashboard reihen Produkte nach ungedeckter Nachfrage und Filialen nach Umsatzverlust-Signalen, mit Mustern nach Wochentag und Tageszeit. - **QR und NFC, druckfertig.** Dasselbe Ziel funktioniert als gedrucktes QR-Etikett oder als NFC-Sticker. Sie erhalten Dateien, die so dimensioniert und getestet sind, dass sie im Filiallicht zuverlässig scannen – mit Ihren Farben und Ihrem Logo. - **Datenschutz von Grund auf.** Kunden werden nicht als Einzelpersonen verfolgt: keine App, kein Konto, keine Cookies erforderlich und keine personenbezogenen Daten darüber gespeichert, wer gescannt hat – nur die aggregierte Interaktion. ## Who it's for - **Mode- und Schuhketten.** Größen und Farben sind ständig ausverkauft und Kunden gehen, wenn ihre nicht da ist. Sehen Sie, welche Größenläufe Sie Umsatz kosten, Filiale für Filiale, und gewinnen Sie ihn über eine andere Filiale oder online zurück. - **Elektronik und Haushaltsgeräte.** Erklärungsbedürftige Produkte, bei denen Kunden vor der Entscheidung Spezifikationen, Vergleiche und Bestand wollen. Geben Sie ihnen die Antwort am Regal und erfahren Sie, welche Produkte Interesse wecken, aber nicht konvertieren. - **Wohnen, Möbel und Heimwerken.** Große Sortimente, häufige Nichtverfügbarkeiten und Kunden, die Maße, Varianten und Lieferoptionen brauchen. Verwandeln Sie einen fehlenden Artikel auf der Fläche in eine Online-Bestellung statt in einen verlorenen Besuch. - **Mehrfilialisten und Franchise-Betriebe.** 10 bis 500 Filialen mit E-Commerce-Betrieb und vielen SKUs. Ein Dashboard zeigt, welche Filialen und Produkte am meisten Nachfrage verlieren. ## Works with Shopify und Shopify POS, Square und Lightspeed POS, Google Merchant Center Filialbestands-Feeds, CSV- und Tabellen-Import von Produkten und Beständen, Webhooks und Zapier für Benachrichtigungs- und Lead-Ereignisse, E-Mail und SMS für Wieder-verfügbar-Benachrichtigungen, Jeder Weblink, PDF oder jede Produktseite für Produktdetails, MCP-Connector für Claude, ChatGPT und andere KI-Assistenten ## Pricing Gründungskunden-Preise, fixiert, solange Ihr Tarif aktiv bleibt. Die Tarife werden monatlich abgerechnet und sind jederzeit kündbar. Jeder Tarif umfasst QR- und NFC-Etikettendateien, das Kundenerlebnis, das Absichtsprotokoll und den CSV-Export sowie den Wochenbericht. Wir erstellen Ihre ersten Etiketten und richten Ihr Konto innerhalb von 3 Werktagen ein. Der Preis skaliert mit den Filialstandorten, nicht mit der Anzahl der Scans – eine erfolgreiche Kampagne kostet Sie durch mehr Traffic nie mehr. | Plan | Price | Includes | | --- | --- | --- | | Einzelgeschäft | $49 pro Monat | 1 Filialstandort; Bis zu 150 getaggte Produkte; Bestands-, Benachrichtigungs- und Hilfe-Interaktionen; Protokoll der Kaufabsicht mit CSV-Export; Wochenbericht für die Filiale; Druckfertige QR- und NFC-Etikettendateien; E-Mail-Support innerhalb eines Werktags | | Kette | $199 pro Monat | Bis zu 10 Filialstandorte; Bis zu 2.000 getaggte Produkte; Rückgewinnung über andere Filialen und Online-Bestellung; Erfassung der Größen- und Variantennachfrage; Dashboards pro Filiale und pro Produkt; Anbindung des Bestands-Feeds (Shopify, POS oder CSV); Bis zu 5 Team-Logins | | Netzwerk | $499 pro Monat | Bis zu 50 Filialstandorte; Unbegrenzt getaggte Produkte; Regions- und Franchise-Gruppierungen; Geplante Ziele und Promotions je Filiale; Vollständiger CSV- und Webhook-Export aller Signale; Priorisiertes Onboarding und Support; Mehr als 50 Filialen: sprechen Sie uns an | ## Compared with the alternatives - **QR- und Link-Plattformen (Bitly, Uniqode, Flowcode und ähnliche).** Diese erzeugen Codes und zählen Scans gut, und manche ergänzen Landingpages und Kampagnen-Reporting. Was sie berichten, ist, wie oft ein Code gescannt wurde – nicht, was der Kunde kaufen wollte oder ob das Produkt überhaupt verfügbar war. Shelf Signal ist um die Kaufabsicht im Handel und die Bestandsantwort herum gebaut, nicht um die Scan-Zahl. - **Apps für Filialnavigation und Personalruf.** Es gibt Punktlösungen für die Wegführung in der Filiale oder zum Rufen einer Mitarbeiterin aus der Umkleidekabine. Jede löst einen Teilaspekt. Shelf Signal verbindet die Teile – Bestand, Größe, Hilfe, Rückgewinnung – zu einer Aufzeichnung der ungedeckten Nachfrage pro Produkt und Filiale. - **Manuelle Audits und Mystery Shopping.** Regal-Audits und Mystery Shopper erfassen die Verfügbarkeit stichprobenartig an den Tagen ihres Besuchs. Sie sind periodisch und teuer und erfassen nicht, was ein einzelner Kunde wollte. Shelf Signal misst kontinuierlich, aus der eigenen Handlung des Kunden, ohne zusätzliche Kosten pro Besuch. - **Nichts tun.** Der heutige Standard: verlorene Verkäufe in der Filiale hinterlassen keine Aufzeichnung, sodass das Problem unsichtbar und unbudgetiert bleibt. Die ganze Aufgabe eines Pilotprojekts ist es, eine Zahl darauf zu setzen, bevor Sie entscheiden, ob es sich zu lösen lohnt. ## Security and data - Produkt-, Filial- und Interaktionsdaten werden auf Cloud-Servern gespeichert, bei der Übertragung und im Ruhezustand verschlüsselt, mit täglichen Backups, die 30 Tage aufbewahrt werden. - Jede Kundenseite und jede Weiterleitung wird über HTTPS ausgeliefert, mit für Sie verwalteten Zertifikaten. - Von Kunden werden keine App, kein Konto und kein Cookie verlangt, und es werden keine personenbezogenen Daten darüber gespeichert, wer gescannt hat – nur aggregierte Interaktionsdaten. - Jede E-Mail-Adresse oder Telefonnummer, die ein Kunde für eine Wieder-verfügbar-Benachrichtigung angibt, wird nur für diese Benachrichtigung verwendet und auf Anfrage gelöscht. - Ihre Kontodaten und das vollständige Signalprotokoll werden auf Anfrage innerhalb von 30 Tagen exportiert oder gelöscht. ## Ihre erste Woche Anfragen, taggen, scannen, lesen. Bei den meisten Pilotprojekten hängen die Etiketten am Regal und die ersten Signale treffen innerhalb der ersten Woche ein. - Tag 1: Fragen Sie ein Pilotprojekt an und nennen Sie uns Ihre ersten Filialen und Produkte; Ihr Konto wird innerhalb von 3 Werktagen eingerichtet. - Tag 2–3: Wir erstellen Ihre QR- und NFC-Etikettendateien, verknüpft mit Ihren Produkten und Standorten, und senden sie druckfertig. - Tag 4–5: Ihr Team bringt die Etiketten an Regalen und Displays an und testet sie mit zwei Telefonen; das Dashboard geht live. - Tag 7: Sie lesen den ersten Absichtsbericht – die Produkte, nach denen Kunden gesucht haben, die Größen, die sie wollten, und wo Hilfe angefordert wurde. ## FAQ ### Ist das nur ein QR-Code-Generator? Nein. Das QR- oder NFC-Etikett ist nur der Auslöser. Das Produkt ist das Kundenerlebnis, das es öffnet (Bestand, Größe, Hilfe, Rückgewinnung), und die Aufzeichnung dessen, was Kunden wollten, aber nicht kaufen konnten. Ein Generator hört beim Zählen der Scans auf; wir fangen dort an, wo er aufhört. ### Müssen Kunden eine App herunterladen? Nein. Alles läuft aus einem Scan oder einem NFC-Tippen heraus im Webbrowser des Mobiltelefons. Es gibt keine App, kein Konto und keine Anmeldung für den Kunden. ### Kann es unseren echten Bestand anzeigen? Ja, sobald es an Ihr Inventar angebunden ist. Wir können den Bestand aus Shopify, Ihrem POS oder einem Google Merchant Center Feed lesen oder aus einer CSV-Datei, die Sie hochladen. Für ein schnelles Pilotprojekt können Sie mit einer einfachen Tabelle starten und den Live-Feed anbinden, sobald Sie das Erlebnis haben funktionieren sehen. ### Die Idee "zum Anzeigen des Preises scannen" – beweist das Kaufabsicht? Es ist ein messbares Signal von Interesse, kein Beweis für eine Kaufabsicht. Wir berichten es ehrlich als Neugier oder Interesse an einem Produkt oder Angebot und stellen einen Scan nie so dar, als wäre er eine bestätigte Kaufentscheidung. ### Was, wenn wir keine E-Commerce-Website haben? Sie erhalten dennoch den Nutzen in der Filiale: Bestand über Filialen hinweg, Größen- und Variantennachfrage, Hilfeanfragen und den Bericht über ungedeckte Nachfrage. Der Rückgewinnungsschritt "online bestellen" wird einfach ausgeschaltet, bis es eine Website gibt, zu der sich Kunden schicken lassen. ### Ist der Umgang mit Kundendaten datenschutzfreundlich? Ja. Kunden werden nicht identifiziert. Wir verlangen keine App, kein Konto und keine Cookies und speichern keine personenbezogenen Daten darüber, wer gescannt hat – nur die aggregierte Interaktion (Produkt, Filiale, Absicht, Zeit). Ein Kunde, der für eine Wieder-verfügbar-Benachrichtigung eine E-Mail-Adresse angibt, willigt in diese eine Nachricht ein. ### Wie schnell können wir ein Pilotprojekt starten? Ein Pilotprojekt für eine einzelne Filiale kann innerhalb weniger Tage live sein: Wir erstellen und senden die Etikettendateien, Ihr Team bringt sie an, und das Dashboard beginnt sich zu füllen, sobald Kunden scannen. Die Anbindung eines Live-Bestands-Feeds dauert in der Regel etwas länger und kann auf die ersten Ergebnisse folgen. ### Was passiert nach dem Pilotprojekt? Am Ende haben Sie eine Zahl: wie viele Kunden nach Produkten gesucht haben, die sie nicht kaufen konnten, und die rückgewinnbare Nachfrage dahinter. Lohnt es sich, rollen Sie auf weitere Filialen in einem nach Standorten skalierten Tarif aus; lohnt es sich nicht, haben Sie das günstig gelernt. Wir binden Sie nicht in einen langen Vertrag, um das herauszufinden. --- Rotomal · https://rotomal.com/de/shelf-signal/ · hello@rotomal.com # Shelf Signal: See what shoppers looked for in your stores and couldn't buy, from a tag on the shelf. > Shelf Signal puts a small QR or NFC tag by the product. A shopper scans it to check stock here, at another store or online, ask for a size, or get help. Every scan is logged, so you finally get a report of the demand that disappears inside your stores. - Page: https://rotomal.com/shelf-signal/ - Category: Retail analytics - Language: en - Billing: subscription - From: $49 per month - Request (free, no card): https://rotomal.com/shelf-signal/request/ - A shopper scans a tag and checks stock, finds another store, orders online or asks for help in the phone browser — no app to install - Each scan is logged as an intent signal: product, store, what they wanted (stock, size, price, help) and time - A weekly report ranks the products shoppers looked for and couldn't buy, per store, with a CSV export ## Your website measures intent. Your shop floor doesn't. Online, you know what shoppers searched for, which products they viewed, what they added to the cart and what they abandoned. Inside a physical store, almost all of that is invisible. A shopper picks up a product, can't find their size, looks for a member of staff, gives up and leaves — and nothing about that is recorded anywhere. The cost of that blind spot is well documented. Items are out of stock on the shelf far more often than most retailers think, and when they are, a large share of shoppers simply leave rather than buy a substitute. That lost demand never shows up in your sales data, because a sale that didn't happen leaves no trace. Shelf Signal turns the moment of interest into a measurable signal. The shopper gets something useful immediately — stock at another branch, an online order, a size request, a call for help — and you get a record of what they were trying to buy. It sits on top of your existing stores and ecommerce; there is no new hardware and no app for shoppers to download. - The worldwide average retail out-of-stock rate is about 8.3% — roughly one in twelve items a shopper wants is missing from the shelf — per the Gruen, Corsten and Bharadwaj study of 71,000+ consumers across 29 countries. (source: https://www.researchgate.net/publication/302501862_On_Shelf_Availability_An_Examination_of_the_Extent_the_Causes_and_the_Efforts_to_Address_Retail_Out-of-Stocks) - When an item is out of stock, about 31% of shoppers buy it at another store and about 9% don't buy it at all, so the retailer loses the sale outright on roughly four in ten stock-out encounters. (source: https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Stockout) - IHL Group's 2024 matrix estimates out-of-stocks cost retailers about $1.2 trillion worldwide, roughly 4% of revenue for the average retailer. (source: https://www.ihlservices.com/product/2024-out-of-stocks-and-overstocks-matrix/) - Google now shows store-level product availability ("in stock nearby") in many countries, so the data needed to send a shopper to the right branch increasingly already exists in retailers' feeds. (source: https://support.google.com/merchants/answer/3057972) ## How it works 1. **Request a pilot.** Tell us how many stores and products you want to start with. We set up your account and build your first batch of tags within 3 business days. 2. **We make the tags.** You get print-ready QR labels and, where you want them, NFC stickers for shelves, displays, fitting rooms or product tags. Each one is linked to a product or a location. Staff stick them on; there is no hardware to install. 3. **Shoppers scan and get help.** A scan opens a mobile page: stock here, at another store or online, a size or notify-me request, product details, or a call for a staff member. It runs in the phone browser, so shoppers never download anything. 4. **You read the intent.** Each scan is logged with the product, store, intent and time. A weekly report and a live dashboard show the products shoppers looked for and couldn't buy, which stores have the most unmet demand, and where help was requested. ## Features - **Stock check across the chain.** A scan tells the shopper if the product is here, at a nearby store, or online, using your inventory feed. When the pilot isn't yet connected to your systems, we load a simple spreadsheet so you can test the experience first. - **Lost-demand capture.** If the item or size isn't available, the shopper can be notified when it returns, be pointed to another branch, or order online. Each of these is recorded as a recoverable lost sale with the product and store attached. - **Size and variant requests.** Shoppers pick the size or colour they wanted. You see exactly which variants generate demand in which stores, separately from what was actually on the shelf. - **Call for help, measured.** A "get help" tap logs the product, location and time. The report shows where and when shoppers ask for assistance most, so you can staff fitting rooms and departments to match real demand. - **Shopper intent log.** Every interaction is stored as product, store, intent type and timestamp. No login, no app, no personal profile — just the signal. Export the full log as CSV at any time. - **Per-store and per-product reports.** A weekly email and a live dashboard rank products by unmet demand and stores by lost-sale signals, with day-of-week and time-of-day patterns. - **QR and NFC, print-ready.** The same destination works as a printed QR label or an NFC sticker. You get files sized and tested to scan reliably in store lighting, with your colours and logo. - **Private by design.** Shoppers aren't tracked as individuals: no app, no account, no cookies required and no personal data stored about who scanned — only the aggregate interaction. ## Who it's for - **Fashion and footwear chains.** Sizes and colours sell out constantly and shoppers leave when theirs is gone. See which size runs are costing you sales, store by store, and recover them to another branch or online. - **Electronics and appliances.** High-consideration products where shoppers want specs, comparisons and stock before deciding. Give them the answer at the shelf and learn which products draw interest but don't convert. - **Home, furniture and DIY.** Big ranges, frequent out-of-stocks and shoppers who need dimensions, variants and delivery options. Turn a missing item on the floor into an online order instead of a lost trip. - **Multi-location retailers and franchises.** 10 to 500 stores with an ecommerce operation and a lot of SKUs. One dashboard shows which stores and products leak the most demand. ## Works with Shopify and Shopify POS, Square and Lightspeed POS, Google Merchant Center store inventory feeds, CSV and spreadsheet product and stock import, Webhooks and Zapier for notify-me and lead events, Email and SMS for back-in-stock alerts, Any web link, PDF or product page for product details, MCP connector for Claude, ChatGPT and other AI assistants ## Pricing Founding-customer pricing, locked while your plan stays active. Plans are billed monthly and cancel any time. Every plan includes QR and NFC tag files, the shopper experience, the intent log and CSV export, and the weekly report. We make your first tags and onboard your account within 3 business days. Pricing scales with store locations, not with the number of scans — a successful campaign never costs you more in traffic. | Plan | Price | Includes | | --- | --- | --- | | Single Store | $49 per month | 1 store location; Up to 150 tagged products; Stock, notify-me and get-help interactions; Shopper intent log with CSV export; Weekly report for the store; Print-ready QR and NFC tag files; Email support within one business day | | Chain | $199 per month | Up to 10 store locations; Up to 2,000 tagged products; Find-at-another-store and order-online recovery; Size and variant demand capture; Per-store and per-product dashboards; Inventory feed connection (Shopify, POS or CSV); Up to 5 team logins | | Network | $499 per month | Up to 50 store locations; Unlimited tagged products; Region and franchise groupings; Scheduled destinations and promotions by store; Full CSV and webhook export of all signals; Priority onboarding and support; More than 50 stores: talk to us | ## Compared with the alternatives - **QR and link platforms (Bitly, Uniqode, Flowcode and similar).** These generate codes and count scans well, and some add landing pages and campaign reporting. What they report is how many times a code was scanned, not what the shopper was trying to buy or whether the product was even available. Shelf Signal is built around the retail intent and the stock answer, not the scan count. - **Retail navigation and staff-call apps.** Point products exist for in-store wayfinding or for calling an associate from a fitting room. Each solves one slice. Shelf Signal connects the slices — stock, size, help, recovery — into one record of unmet demand per product and store. - **Manual audits and mystery shopping.** Shelf audits and mystery shoppers sample availability on the days they visit. They are periodic and expensive, and they don't capture what an individual shopper wanted. Shelf Signal measures continuously, from the shopper's own action, at no extra cost per visit. - **Doing nothing.** The default today: lost in-store sales leave no record, so the problem stays invisible and unbudgeted. A pilot's whole job is to put a number on it before you decide whether it's worth solving. ## Security and data - Product, store and interaction data are stored on cloud servers, encrypted in transit and at rest, with daily backups retained for 30 days. - Every shopper page and redirect is served over HTTPS with certificates managed for you. - No app, account or cookie is required of shoppers, and no personal data about who scanned is stored — only aggregate interaction records. - Any email or phone number a shopper gives for a back-in-stock alert is used only for that alert and deleted on request. - Your account data and the full signal log are exported or deleted on request within 30 days. ## Your first week Request, tag, scan, read. Most pilots have tags on the shelf and the first signals arriving within the first week. - Day 1: Request a pilot and tell us your first stores and products; your account is set up within 3 business days. - Day 2–3: We build your QR and NFC tag files linked to your products and locations, and send them print-ready. - Day 4–5: Your team puts the tags on shelves and displays and tests them with two phones; the dashboard goes live. - Day 7: You read the first intent report — the products shoppers looked for, the sizes they wanted, and where help was requested. ## FAQ ### Is this just a QR code generator? No. The QR or NFC tag is only the trigger. The product is the shopper experience it opens (stock, size, help, recovery) and the record of what shoppers wanted but couldn't buy. A generator stops at counting scans; we start where it stops. ### Do shoppers need to download an app? No. Everything runs in the phone's web browser from a scan or an NFC tap. There is no app, no account and no sign-up for the shopper. ### Can it show our real stock? Yes, when it's connected to your inventory. We can read stock from Shopify, your POS or a Google Merchant Center feed, or from a CSV you upload. For a quick pilot you can start with a simple spreadsheet and connect the live feed once you've seen the experience work. ### The "scan to reveal the price" idea — does that prove purchase intent? It is a measurable signal of interest, not proof of intent to buy. We report it honestly as curiosity or interest in a product or offer, and never present a scan as if it were a confirmed purchase decision. ### What if we don't have an ecommerce site? You still get the in-store value: stock across branches, size and variant demand, help requests and the unmet-demand report. The "order online" recovery step is simply switched off until there is a site to send shoppers to. ### Is the shopper data privacy-friendly? Yes. Shoppers aren't identified. We don't require an app, an account or cookies, and we don't store personal data about who scanned — only the aggregate interaction (product, store, intent, time). A shopper who gives an email for a back-in-stock alert is consenting to that one message. ### How fast can we run a pilot? A single-store pilot can be live within a few days: we build and send the tag files, your team puts them up, and the dashboard starts filling as shoppers scan. Connecting a live inventory feed usually takes a little longer and can follow the first results. ### What happens after the pilot? At the end you have a number: how many shoppers looked for products they couldn't buy, and the recoverable demand behind it. If it's worth it you roll out to more stores on a plan scaled by locations; if it isn't, you've learned that cheaply. We don't lock you into a long contract to find out. --- Rotomal · https://rotomal.com/shelf-signal/ · hello@rotomal.com # Member Radar: Churn alerts, win-back messages and a member CRM for paid Skool communities. > Member Radar is a Chrome extension and dashboard for paid Skool communities. It reads activity through your own browser session, flags members whose engagement is fading, drafts win-back messages you approve, keeps a CRM of notes and tags per member, and schedules posts. Results are reported as MRR saved, with the math shown. - Page: https://rotomal.com/skool-tools/ - Category: Community tools - Language: en - Billing: subscription - From: $29 per month - Request (free, no card): https://rotomal.com/skool-tools/request/ - Churn risk score per member from login recency, post and comment activity, course progress and event attendance - Win-back messages are drafted and sent at a human pace from your own account, with daily caps and approval by default - Works through a browser extension because Skool has no public API; we say so plainly and design for it ## Skool makes it easy to collect payments and hard to see who is drifting away Paid communities on Skool live and die by retention. A member who stops logging in rarely announces it; they just cancel at the next renewal. Skool's admin view shows activity, but not a sorted list of who went quiet this week, and its native automation is a single welcome DM. Owners fill the gap by hand. One vendor estimates 45–60 minutes a day of manual work: scrolling member lists, checking last-active dates, sending DMs one by one, keeping notes in a spreadsheet. That is time taken from the content and calls that keep people subscribed. There is no public Skool API in 2026, so any tool here works through the browser. Member Radar designs around that constraint: human-paced actions from your own session, daily caps, and a clear status when Skool changes its pages. The payoff: a sorted list every morning of who to reach, a message ready to send, and a monthly number you can check. - Skool has no public API as of 2026, and its native auto-DM is limited to a single welcome message. (source: https://tools4skool.com/integrations/skool-api) - A vendor in this space estimates owners spend 45–60 minutes a day on manual community admin; StickyHive prices its Skool automation at $29–99 a month. (source: https://stickyhive.ai/skool/automation-tools/) ## How it works 1. **Install the extension and connect.** Add the Chrome extension, open your Skool community, and Member Radar links it to your dashboard. No password is given to us; the extension works inside your logged-in session. About 10 minutes. 2. **Activity is synced.** On a schedule you set (default: twice a day, while your browser is open), the extension reads member lists, last-active dates, posts, comments, course progress and event RSVPs into your dashboard. 3. **Risk is scored and messages drafted.** Each member gets a churn risk score with the reasons shown. For members crossing your threshold, a win-back DM is drafted in your voice from templates you set and placed in an approval queue. 4. **You approve, the extension sends, we report.** Approve messages, or allow auto-send within your daily cap. The extension sends them from your account at a human pace. Thirty days later, the dashboard shows who stayed and the MRR retained, with the calculation visible. ## Features - **Churn risk scoring.** A score per member from login recency, posting and commenting frequency, course progress, event attendance and renewal date, with the contributing factors listed. Thresholds are yours to set. - **Win-back message queue.** Templates with member variables, drafted per member, approved by you or auto-sent within a daily cap you choose. Messages go out from your account at a human pace, not a bot's. - **Member CRM.** Tags, notes, lifecycle stage and a timeline of touches per member. Filter by plan, join date, risk or tag. Export CSV any time. - **Scheduled posts.** Write and schedule posts in the dashboard; the extension publishes them at the set time while your browser is open. Weekly calendar view for drafts. - **Onboarding sequences.** Multi-step welcome sequences over the first 14 days (DMs and optional post mentions), replacing the single native welcome message. Each step counts against your daily cap. - **MRR saved report.** Monthly report: members flagged at risk, messaged, and still paying 30 days later, multiplied by their plan price. We show the formula and note that it is an estimate of retention, not proof of causation. - **Breakage detection and status.** If Skool changes its page structure and the extension cannot read something, the dashboard shows exactly what stopped working and when; nothing fails silently. - **Ask your AI assistant.** Connect Member Radar to Claude, ChatGPT or another assistant through MCP and ask in plain language, for example "which members look likely to cancel this month?". Read-only by default; revoke access any time. ## Who it's for - **Owners of paid Skool communities with 100–2,000 members.** Enough members that you cannot know everyone, few enough that one message still matters. You get a daily list of who to reach and a monthly retention number. - **Coaches and course creators using Skool as their delivery platform.** Your community is tied to a course or cohort. You get course-progress signals in the risk score and onboarding sequences that nudge people to lesson one. - **Skool Games participants and growth-focused owners.** You are optimizing MRR and competing on retention. You get the MRR saved report and the CRM to run win-back campaigns deliberately. ## Works with Skool (via Chrome extension), Google Chrome and Chromium-based desktop browsers (Edge, Brave), CSV export and import, Zapier (webhook on risk flag and on message sent), Google Sheets (export), Slack or email digest, MCP connector for Claude, ChatGPT and other AI assistants ## Pricing Monthly plans in USD, cancel any time; full refund within 14 days if the extension cannot read your community. Founding-customer pricing is locked for 12 months. All plans include the extension, churn scoring, the member CRM and the MRR saved report, priced per owner account. | Plan | Price | Includes | | --- | --- | --- | | Solo | $29 per month | One community, up to 500 members; Churn risk scoring, synced twice a day; Win-back queue, 20 messages a day cap; Member CRM with tags and notes; Scheduled posts (up to 30 a month); MRR saved report | | Growth | $49 per month | Up to two communities, 2,000 members total; Everything in Solo; Sync up to four times a day; Win-back queue, 50 messages a day cap; 14-day onboarding sequences; Unlimited scheduled posts; Zapier webhooks and CSV import | | Pro | $79 per month | Up to five communities, 5,000 members total; Everything in Growth; Team seats for managers and assistants (up to 3); Custom risk model weights; Slack digest; Monthly report branded for the owner | ## Compared with the alternatives - **Doing it by hand.** Free, and what most owners do: scan the member list, check last-active dates, DM people, keep a spreadsheet. The 45–60 minutes a day estimate is plausible for a few hundred members. Member Radar turns that into a 10-minute approval session. - **StickyHive, tools4skool, Skooly.** Established tools for Skool owners, also working through the browser, priced around $29–99 a month at StickyHive. They cover automation and integrations broadly; Member Radar is narrower: churn prediction, win-back and the MRR saved report, with a CRM around them. - **Skool's native features.** Free with your subscription and risk-free under platform rules. Today that means activity views and a single welcome DM. If Skool ships churn alerts and sequences natively, that will be the right tool, and we will say so. ## Security and data - Synced community data, your CRM notes and message drafts are stored on servers we operate, encrypted in transit (TLS 1.2+) and at rest (AES-256). - We never receive or store your Skool password; the extension uses your existing browser session and can be removed at any time. - Only you and the team seats you invite can access your dashboard; our support access is logged and requires your approval. - Member data is deleted within 30 days of cancellation or within 14 days of a written request; individual members can be removed from your CRM immediately. ## Your first week We onboard new accounts within 2 business days; the first week is about a clean sync, a calibrated risk threshold and the first approved win-back messages. - Day 1: Setup call (30 minutes): install the extension, connect your community, enter plan prices, run the first sync together. - Day 2–3: Review the first risk list; adjust thresholds and write or adapt win-back templates in your voice. - Day 4–5: Approve the first batch of win-back messages within your daily cap; set up the onboarding sequence for new members. - Day 7: Check-in: sync reliability, any Skool page changes, first replies from members, and the 30-day MRR report scheduled. ## FAQ ### Does Skool have an API? How does this actually work? Skool has no public API as of 2026. Member Radar works through a Chrome extension that runs inside your own logged-in Skool session, reads your community's pages and performs actions the way you would. That has real consequences: syncing only happens while your browser is open with the extension active; if Skool changes its page structure, parts of the tool can stop working until we update it (usually within a day or two; the dashboard shows what is affected); and automated actions carry some risk under Skool's terms of service, which is why messages are capped, human-paced and approved by you by default. ### Could my Skool account get banned? We cannot rule it out and will not pretend otherwise; Skool's terms are Skool's to enforce. We reduce the risk by keeping actions slow and low-volume, never storing your password, and defaulting to approval before any message is sent. If you prefer no automated sending at all, use Member Radar for scoring, CRM and drafts, and send messages yourself. ### How is 'MRR saved' calculated, and can I trust it? Members flagged at risk who received a win-back message and were still paying 30 days later, multiplied by their plan price. It is an estimate of retained revenue, not proof the message caused them to stay; we show the formula and the member list behind every number. ### What data do you store? Member names, profile links, activity dates and counts, course progress, your tags and notes, and the messages you send through the tool. Not member payment details (Skool does not expose them) and not your password. Members can be deleted individually from your CRM. ### What if Skool builds this natively? Then the native version will probably be the better choice, and we will tell you. We charge monthly without a contract; if the platform solves retention tooling itself, cancel in one click and export your CRM as CSV. ### Is the product live? Yes, for founding customers. We onboard new accounts within 2 business days, including installing the extension with you on a call and running the first sync. Founding-customer pricing is locked for 12 months. ### Does it work with Claude or ChatGPT? Yes. Member Radar includes an MCP connector, so Claude, ChatGPT and other MCP-compatible assistants can answer questions like "which members look likely to cancel this month?" from your data. It is read-only by default and you can revoke access at any time. --- Rotomal · https://rotomal.com/skool-tools/ · hello@rotomal.com # SMTP Switch: Move scanners, copiers and old apps off Microsoft 365 Basic SMTP AUTH before it is switched off. > At the end of December 2026, Microsoft disables Basic authentication for SMTP AUTH by default in existing Exchange Online tenants. Copiers, scanners, line-of-business apps and scripts that send mail with a username and password will start failing with error 550 5.7.30. SMTP Switch finds every one of them in your tenant, chooses the right replacement for each device, makes the change and tests it, as a one-time job. - Page: https://rotomal.com/smtp-switch/ - Category: IT and Microsoft 365 - Language: en - Billing: one-time payment - From: $99 one-time - Request (free, no card): https://rotomal.com/smtp-switch/request/ - A free exposure check from Microsoft's own SMTP AUTH report: every device, app and mailbox still on Basic auth, with send volumes, before you pay anything. - One fix per sender, chosen on the facts: OAuth where the firmware supports it, a connector relay, High Volume Email for internal-only mail, or an SMTP service. - Tested before and after with a scan or message from each device, and a sign-off report you can hand to management or your client. ## Every scanner that emails a PDF is about to need a different way to send Most multifunction printers, and plenty of accounting systems, alarm panels and old scripts, send email through smtp.office365.com with a mailbox username and password. That is Basic authentication for SMTP AUTH, and Microsoft is retiring it. After several postponements, the current timeline is that Basic auth stays as it is until December 2026, is disabled by default for existing tenants at the end of that month, and is removed for good on a date Microsoft will announce in the second half of 2027. When it stops, nothing warns the person at the copier. The scan simply never arrives, or an app logs 550 5.7.30 and gives up. Invoices are not sent, scanned delivery notes go missing, and the office finds out a week later. The fix is not one setting. Some devices can be updated to OAuth; many older ones never will be. Some only send to colleagues, which suits Microsoft's paid High Volume Email; others send to customers, which HVE cannot do. Some sit behind a fixed IP and can use a connector relay. SMTP Switch works through the list device by device so each one ends up on the cheapest option that will keep working. - Microsoft's January 2026 update: Basic auth for SMTP AUTH is unchanged until December 2026, disabled by default for existing tenants at the end of December 2026, with final removal to be announced in the second half of 2027. (source: https://www.itelio.com/en/microsoft-message-center/MC786329) - Clients still using Basic auth are rejected with the error 550 5.7.30, Basic authentication is not supported for Client Submission. (source: https://www.captaindns.com/en/blog/microsoft-exchange-basic-auth-smtp-end) - High Volume Email for Microsoft 365 is billed at $42 per million recipients from June 2026 and only delivers to recipients inside the tenant. (source: https://office365itpros.com/2026/04/23/hve-ga-charging/) ## How it works 1. **Free exposure check.** You grant a temporary read-only admin consent, or run one script we send. We pull the SMTP AUTH Clients Submission report and sign-in data and list every sender still on Basic auth, with volumes and recipients. 2. **A plan per sender.** For each device or app we check the model and firmware, whether it mails people outside the company, and your network setup, then recommend OAuth, a connector relay, High Volume Email or an SMTP service. You approve the plan. 3. **We make the switch.** We set up the connector, HVE account or service and change each device's settings remotely where its web panel is reachable, or send your on-site person a one-page sheet per device with the exact values. 4. **Test and sign off.** A scan or test message from every device, confirmed in message trace, then Basic auth turned off for the tenant ahead of Microsoft's date so nothing surprises you in January. You get the report and the configuration record. ## Features - **Complete sender inventory.** Every mailbox, device and application that authenticated with Basic SMTP AUTH in the reporting window, with message counts, so nothing is found by accident in January. - **Device-by-device recommendation.** Firmware and model checked against the vendor's OAuth support. Where a firmware update adds OAuth, we say which version and whether it is safe to apply. - **Connector relay setup.** An Exchange Online inbound connector restricted to your office's fixed IP or certificate, for devices that cannot do OAuth and need to mail external recipients. - **High Volume Email setup.** HVE accounts for devices that only send to colleagues, such as scan-to-self, with the pay-as-you-go billing explained before it is switched on. - **Per-device instruction sheets.** One page per device with the server, port, encryption and account values, written for the person standing at the copier, in English or in the language your office uses. - **Cutover and rollback plan.** Basic auth disabled for the tenant only after every sender is tested, with a documented way back for any device that misbehaves. - **Sign-off report.** What was found, what was changed, how each sender now authenticates and what to do when a new device is installed. MSPs get it under their own brand. ## Who it's for - **Small and mid-size businesses on Microsoft 365.** A few copiers and an accounting system that email PDFs, and no one in-house who wants to learn connectors and OAuth before Christmas. - **Schools, clinics and municipalities.** Many sites, many scanners of different ages, and a hard requirement that scanned documents keep arriving. - **Managed service providers.** Dozens of client tenants with the same problem. Hand us the inventory and the device changes, keep the client relationship and the report under your brand. ## Works with Exchange Online and Microsoft 365 admin center, SMTP AUTH Clients Submission report and message trace, Exchange Online inbound connectors (IP or certificate), High Volume Email for Microsoft 365, OAuth 2.0 SMTP on supported devices, Canon, HP, Konica Minolta, Kyocera, Ricoh, Sharp, Xerox and Brother web panels, Third-party SMTP services for external mail, Microsoft Graph sendMail for scripts and apps ## Pricing The exposure check is free: we tell you how many senders will break and what each needs before you decide. Fixes are one-time prices per Microsoft 365 tenant, paid once. No subscription. Third-party costs, such as High Volume Email usage or an SMTP service, are billed to you directly by those providers at their published rates. Founding customer pricing applies to early-access orders. | Plan | Price | Includes | | --- | --- | --- | | Small office | $99 one-time | Up to 3 Basic-auth senders; Free exposure check first; Per-sender plan and remote configuration; Per-device instruction sheets; Test and sign-off report | | Business | $249 one-time | Up to 15 Basic-auth senders; Everything in Small office; Connector relay or HVE setup; Script and app changes to OAuth or Graph; Tenant cutover with rollback plan; 30 days of follow-up for missed devices | | MSP pack | $590 one-time | 5 tenants, up to 15 senders each; Everything in Business; Reports under your brand; Shared runbook your team can reuse; Priority scheduling before the December cutoff; Extra tenants at $99 each | ## Compared with the alternatives - **Doing it yourself.** Free if you have the time and the admin skills: Microsoft documents the report, connectors, OAuth and HVE. The work is in matching each device to the right option and visiting each one, which is where most small offices stall. - **Waiting for the copier vendor.** Some vendors are adding OAuth in new firmware, and many models never will get it. Worth checking first; risky to rely on for every device in the building. - **Re-enabling Basic auth after the cutoff.** Admins of existing tenants can switch Basic auth back on after December 2026, which buys time until the final removal date Microsoft will announce in 2027. It postpones the work rather than doing it. - **Hosted relay subscriptions.** SMTP relay services charge monthly and work well for external mail. SMTP Switch is a one-time job that often ends with no new subscription at all, and uses a relay service only where it is the right answer. ## Security and data - Inventory access is read-only and time-limited; you can revoke the consent at any time and we confirm when we have finished. - Configuration changes use an account you create for the job and delete afterwards; we never ask for a Global Administrator password by email. - Device passwords and connector details are stored only in your sign-off report and our encrypted job record, which is deleted 30 days after the job. - Every change is logged with the time and the person who made it, and included in the report. ## From request to switched off, safely We start the inventory within 2 business days of your request; most small offices are finished within a week. - Day 1: Request the service; we send the read-only consent link or inventory script. - Day 2–3: Free exposure check and per-sender plan delivered; you decide and confirm the price. - Day 4–6: Connectors, HVE or OAuth set up; devices reconfigured remotely or with your on-site person. - Day 7: Every sender tested, Basic auth disabled for the tenant, sign-off report delivered. ## FAQ ### When exactly will scan-to-email stop working? Under Microsoft's current timeline, Basic auth for SMTP AUTH is disabled by default for existing tenants at the end of December 2026. Admins can re-enable it for a while, and Microsoft will announce the final removal date in the second half of 2027. Check Message Center post MC786329 in your tenant for the latest dates. ### How do I know if we are affected? If any device or app sends through smtp.office365.com on port 587 with a mailbox username and password, it is affected. The SMTP AUTH Clients Submission report in the Exchange admin center shows which senders still use Basic auth; our inventory starts there. ### Do you need full admin access to our tenant? No. The inventory needs read-only reporting access, granted temporarily and revocable. For the changes we either work with a time-limited admin account you create and remove afterwards, or guide your admin through each step. ### Can High Volume Email send scans to customers? No. High Volume Email only delivers to recipients inside your own tenant. Devices that email customers or suppliers need OAuth, a connector relay or an SMTP service instead, and the plan says which per device. ### What if a copier can't be reached remotely? We send a one-page sheet for that device with the exact settings, and stay on a call with whoever is on site while they enter them. Most changes take a few minutes per device. ### Is there any ongoing cost after the job? Often none. A connector relay costs nothing extra. High Volume Email is pay-as-you-go at Microsoft's published rate, and an SMTP service, if needed, is billed by that provider. We never resell those services with a markup. ### Is this an official Microsoft service? No. SMTP Switch is an independent IT service. We use Microsoft's documented features and your tenant stays under your control throughout. --- Rotomal · https://rotomal.com/smtp-switch/ · hello@rotomal.com # Invoice Bridge: Compliant German and Polish e-invoices generated from your Stripe Billing invoices. > Invoice Bridge listens to your Stripe account and, the moment an invoice is finalised, produces the structured e-invoice your country requires: XRechnung or ZUGFeRD for Germany, a KSeF submission for Poland, and Peppol delivery where the buyer accepts it. Your Stripe billing flow, numbering and customer portal stay exactly as they are. - Page: https://rotomal.com/stripe-einvoice/ - Category: E-invoicing - Language: en - Billing: subscription - From: €19 per month - Request (free, no card): https://rotomal.com/stripe-einvoice/request/ - Generates an EN 16931-conformant XML (XRechnung) or hybrid PDF (ZUGFeRD) for every finalised Stripe invoice and credit note, validated before delivery. - Submits Polish invoices to KSeF and stores the KSeF reference number against the Stripe invoice. - Delivers by Peppol, email or download link, and writes the result back to the Stripe invoice as metadata so your team sees it in the Stripe dashboard. ## Stripe's PDF is not an e-invoice, and the mandates are arriving Germany and Poland are moving B2B invoicing to structured, machine-readable formats. In Germany, businesses have had to accept e-invoices since 2025 and the obligation to issue them phases in from 2027. In Poland the national KSeF system is live and the smallest businesses join in 2027. An e-invoice in this sense is an XML document following a defined standard; a PDF, however neat, does not count. Stripe Billing is excellent at charging customers and producing a PDF, but it does not produce XRechnung, ZUGFeRD or KSeF documents. The common advice is to adopt an accounting suite and re-create every invoice there: a second system of record, double maintenance and a monthly reconciliation nobody enjoys. Developers asked how they were preparing mostly answered that they weren't sure where to start. Invoice Bridge is the narrow fix: keep Stripe as your billing system and add the compliant document and its delivery on top. It is a Stripe App plus an API, not a replacement for anything. - Germany: issuing e-invoices becomes mandatory on 1 January 2027 for businesses above €800,000 turnover and for all B2B transactions on 1 January 2028. (source: https://e-rechnungs-studio.de/de/e-rechnung-uebergangsregeln-2027-800000-2028) - Poland: the KSeF national e-invoicing system went live in 2026; the smallest sellers join from 1 January 2027. (source: https://www.vatupdate.com/2026/07/21/ksef-exemption-in-2026-for-sales-below-pln-10000-monthly/) - An Ask HN thread, 'How are you preparing for PEPPOL?', drew 67 points and 76 comments, most of them about confusion over cost and approach. (source: https://news.ycombinator.com/item?id=42777669) ## How it works 1. **Connect Stripe.** Install the Stripe App or, during early access while our marketplace listing is under review, connect with a restricted API key. It reads customers, invoices and credit notes; it cannot charge cards or change prices. Ten minutes. 2. **Set your seller profile and mapping.** Enter your legal entity and VAT ID, add KSeF credentials if you invoice in Poland, and map Stripe tax rates and product metadata to the fields the standards require. We run a test batch against the official validators before anything goes live. 3. **Invoices flow automatically.** When Stripe finalises an invoice we build the e-invoice; credit notes become the corresponding corrective document. Delivery follows the channel set per customer: Peppol, email with the XML or hybrid PDF attached, or a download link. 4. **Reconcile and archive.** Every e-invoice, validation report, KSeF reference and delivery receipt is stored and visible per Stripe invoice. Monthly exports go to your accountant or tax adviser. ## Features - **XRechnung and ZUGFeRD for Germany.** Choose XRechnung (UBL or CII XML) or ZUGFeRD 2.x hybrid PDF per customer. Documents are checked against the official KoSIT validator rules before delivery, and failures show the exact field at fault. - **KSeF for Poland.** Polish invoices are converted to the KSeF structured invoice schema and submitted with your KSeF token; the returned reference number is stored on the Stripe invoice. Rejections are retried or surfaced with the error. - **Peppol delivery.** Where the buyer has a Peppol ID we deliver through a certified access point and record the receipt. Buyers without Peppol get the e-invoice by email, which the German rules allow. - **Credit notes and corrections.** Stripe credit notes become corrective invoices in the right format, referencing the original. Voided invoices are handled according to each country's rules. - **Per-customer format and channel.** Set format, language and delivery channel per Stripe customer, or let them follow the customer's country and tax ID. Consumers with no tax ID are skipped unless you say otherwise. - **Writes back to Stripe.** Status, document links and the KSeF reference are written as metadata on the Stripe invoice, so support staff see them without leaving Stripe. Webhooks notify your own systems. - **Backfill.** Already have months of Stripe invoices that should have been e-invoices? Run a backfill for a date range; each is generated, validated and delivered or stored for your records. - **Ask your AI assistant.** Connect Invoice Bridge to Claude, ChatGPT or another assistant through MCP and ask in plain language, for example "which e-invoices were rejected this month?". Read-only by default; revoke access any time. ## Who it's for - **German SaaS companies billing B2B through Stripe.** Your customers are businesses, some already ask for XRechnung, and the 2027/2028 obligation applies to you. You keep Stripe and add compliant documents. - **Polish SaaS and B2B companies on Stripe.** KSeF is live and your Stripe invoices must be submitted. You get automated submission with reference numbers stored where your team looks. - **Agencies and marketplaces invoicing EU businesses from Stripe.** You bill across countries and need format and channel to follow the buyer's country, with Peppol where possible. - **Finance teams who already export Stripe to an accounting tool.** You keep your export; Invoice Bridge adds the compliant document and delivery that the export does not produce. ## Works with Stripe Billing and Stripe Invoicing (Stripe App or restricted API key), XRechnung (UBL and CII syntaxes), ZUGFeRD 2.x / Factur-X hybrid PDF, KSeF (Poland) submission API, Peppol BIS Billing 3.0 via certified access point, KoSIT XRechnung validator rules, Webhooks and REST API, Monthly ZIP and CSV exports for tax advisers, MCP connector for Claude, ChatGPT and other AI assistants ## Pricing Prices in euros, billed monthly, VAT added where applicable. Founding customer pricing is locked for 12 months for accounts opened during early access. All plans include validation, archive, backfill and email delivery; Peppol documents beyond the plan allowance are €0.20 each. | Plan | Price | Includes | | --- | --- | --- | | Starter | €19 per month | 1 Stripe account; Up to 100 e-invoices per month; XRechnung and ZUGFeRD; Email delivery and download links; Credit notes and corrections; Write-back to Stripe metadata; Email support | | Growth | €49 per month | 1 Stripe account; Up to 1,000 e-invoices per month; KSeF submission (Poland); Peppol delivery, 100 documents included; Webhooks and API; Backfill of past invoices; Priority support (same business day) | | Scale | €99 per month | Up to 5 Stripe accounts; Up to 5,000 e-invoices per month; Peppol delivery, 500 documents included; Per-customer rules via API; Dedicated onboarding and validator review; Audit exports per entity; Phone and chat support | ## Compared with the alternatives - **sevDesk, Lexware Office (lexoffice), DATEV.** Full accounting suites that produce e-invoices if you create or import invoices there. The right choice if you want to move invoicing out of Stripe; the wrong one if Stripe must remain the system of record for subscriptions. - **bizzey and similar standalone e-invoicing tools.** Around €24.99 a month for a separate e-invoicing workflow alongside your billing system. Reasonable for businesses that invoice by hand; less so when hundreds of invoices are generated automatically by Stripe. - **Building it yourself.** Open-source libraries exist for ZUGFeRD and XRechnung, and KSeF has a public API. Budget several weeks for mapping, validation, delivery and error handling, then keep up with schema versions. - **Waiting for Stripe.** Stripe may add native e-invoicing at some point; the mandates don't wait. Invoice Bridge is month-to-month, so switching later costs nothing. ## Security and data - Stripe access is through a Stripe App with read-only invoice scopes or a restricted API key you create; we cannot charge, refund or change prices. - Invoice data, generated documents and KSeF tokens are stored encrypted at rest on servers in the EU; TLS in transit everywhere. - Documents are retained while your account is open plus 12 months; export is one click, and deletion on written request is completed within 30 days. Your own legal archive duty stays with you. - A GDPR data processing agreement is included; sub-processors (hosting, access point) are listed in it. ## Your first week We onboard new accounts within 2 business days. Most founding customers generate validated e-invoices in test mode on day one and go live within the week. - Day 1: Connect Stripe, enter your seller profile, and generate test documents from recent invoices; we review validator results with you. - Day 2–3: Fix any missing Stripe customer or product fields, set per-customer formats and channels, connect KSeF if you bill in Poland. - Day 4–5: Go live for new invoices; optionally backfill the current quarter. - Day 7: Review deliveries and rejections together and send the first export to your tax adviser. ## FAQ ### Does Stripe produce XRechnung or ZUGFeRD itself? Not today. Stripe generates a PDF and exposes invoice data via its API; Invoice Bridge turns that data into the structured document. If Stripe adds this natively, you can cancel any time. ### Which German rules apply to me and when? In broad terms: issuing e-invoices to German business customers becomes mandatory from 2027 above €800,000 turnover and from 2028 for everyone. Invoice Bridge is software, not tax advice; confirm your timeline with your Steuerberater. ### How does the KSeF integration authenticate? You generate a KSeF token for your company in the Polish tax portal and store it in Invoice Bridge. We use it only to submit invoices and fetch their status, and you can revoke it at any time. ### What about invoices to consumers or to non-EU customers? By default, customers with no business tax ID and customers outside the mandate countries are skipped, and Stripe's normal PDF continues. You can override this per customer. ### Do I need to change my Stripe invoice numbering or templates? No. We use Stripe's invoice numbers and dates. Your Stripe data does need the fields the standards require (seller VAT ID, buyer address, tax breakdown); the test run points out anything missing. ### What happens if a document fails validation? It isn't delivered. You get an alert with the failing field and a one-click re-run once the Stripe customer or product data is fixed. Nothing invalid leaves the system silently. ### Can my tax adviser get the documents? Yes. Monthly ZIP exports with the XML or hybrid PDF files, validation reports and delivery receipts, or a read-only login. ### Does it work with Claude or ChatGPT? Yes. Invoice Bridge includes an MCP connector, so Claude, ChatGPT and other MCP-compatible assistants can answer questions like "which e-invoices were rejected this month?" from your data. It is read-only by default and you can revoke access at any time. --- Rotomal · https://rotomal.com/stripe-einvoice/ · hello@rotomal.com # Bill Sweep: We find every forgotten subscription and recurring charge on a parent's statements, and help cancel the ones nobody uses. > Old streaming trials, magazine renewals, 'protection plans', two phone insurances, an app subscription from a game the grandchildren played once. Send us three months of statements and Bill Sweep lists every recurring charge in plain English, marks what looks unused, duplicated or recently increased, and gives you the exact steps or a ready letter to cancel each one. One price, paid once. We never log in to the bank. - Page: https://rotomal.com/subscription-cleanup/ - Category: Family finances - Language: en - Billing: one-time payment - From: $19 one-time - Request (free, no card): https://rotomal.com/subscription-cleanup/request/ - Works from PDF statements or a photo of a paper statement; no bank login, no app, no access to the account. - Each charge explained: who the company is, what it probably is, how much it costs per year and whether it looks unused. - Cancellation steps, phone numbers and pre-written letters for every charge you decide to stop. ## Small charges add up quietly, and the statements are hard to read Recurring charges are designed to be forgotten: a free trial turns into a monthly payment, an annual renewal arrives once a year with a cryptic name, a price rises by a dollar at a time. On a parent's statement the merchant names are often abbreviations nobody recognizes. Families usually discover the problem by accident, when helping with something else, and then face an afternoon of decoding names, searching for phone numbers and sitting in cancellation queues. Apps that track subscriptions exist, but they need a bank login and a monthly fee, which is a lot to ask of a parent who just wants the list cleaned up once. Bill Sweep does it from the statements you already have, for one price. - Rocket Money, a popular subscription-tracking app, puts its cancellation service in a Premium tier reported at about $6–12 a month, connected to the user's bank accounts. (source: https://www.whistleout.com/CellPhones/Guides/rocket-money-cancels-forgotten-subscriptions) - Its separate bill-negotiation service is reported to charge a one-time fee of roughly 35–60% of the first year's savings. (source: https://partners.time.com/personal-finance/article/rocket-money-review) ## How it works 1. **Send the statements.** Upload three months of bank and card statements as PDFs, or photos of paper statements. Account numbers can be blacked out; we only need the transactions. 2. **We find every recurring charge.** Each repeating payment is identified, the merchant name decoded, the yearly cost worked out, and duplicates or recent price rises marked. 3. **You decide what to keep.** A one-page list in large print, sorted by yearly cost, with a keep or cancel box next to each line. Tick what to stop. 4. **Cancel with ready steps.** For each charge to stop: the direct cancellation link, the phone number and what to say, or a pre-written letter. On the Done-with-you plan we make the calls with you. ## Features - **Merchant names decoded.** 'PP*APPLE.COM/BILL' and 'SQ *MAGAZINE SVC' turned into the actual company and product, so nobody has to guess what a charge is. - **Yearly cost view.** Every recurring charge shown as a yearly total, which makes the $7.99 that nobody notices look like the $96 it really is. - **Duplicates and price rises.** Two services doing the same job, the same subscription billed on two cards, and charges that went up in the last three months, all flagged. - **Large-print summary.** A one-page list designed to be read at the kitchen table, printed or on a tablet, with a simple keep or cancel box. - **Cancellation kit.** Direct links, phone numbers, what to say, and ready letters for companies that only accept written cancellation. - **Done with you.** On the higher plan, we join the cancellation calls on speaker, handle the chat cancellations together and confirm each one is stopped. - **Re-check in 90 days.** Send the next three months of statements and we confirm the cancelled charges really stopped, at no extra cost. ## Who it's for - **Adult children helping a parent.** You want the statements cleaned up once without asking a parent to install an app or share a bank login. - **Older adults managing their own bills.** A clear list and simple instructions, so you can cancel what you don't use without an afternoon on hold. - **Executors and family members after a death.** Find every subscription still charging an account that needs closing, with the letters to stop them. ## Works with PDF bank and card statements from any bank, Photos of paper statements, CSV exports from online banking, Printable large-print summary, Pre-written cancellation letters (Word and PDF) ## Pricing One-time prices, paid once after we confirm by email. No subscription, no bank login and no percentage of savings. The 90-day re-check is included. | Plan | Price | Includes | | --- | --- | --- | | Sweep | $19 one-time | Up to 3 accounts or cards, 3 months each; Every recurring charge decoded; Large-print keep or cancel list; Cancellation kit for each charge; 90-day re-check | | Done with you | $49 one-time | Everything in Sweep; Up to 6 accounts or cards; Cancellation calls and chats done together; Each cancellation confirmed in writing; Pre-written letters sent for you; 90-day re-check | | Estate | $99 one-time | Up to 10 accounts or cards, 6 months each; Everything in Done with you; Letters with the right wording for a death; List of companies notified and their responses; Follow-up until every charge stops | ## Compared with the alternatives - **Subscription-tracking apps.** Rocket Money and similar apps track charges continuously and can cancel for you, from a monthly fee and with a bank connection. Great for people who want ongoing tracking; more than needed for a one-time clean-up. - **Reading the statements yourself.** Free, and the only cost is an afternoon: decoding merchant names, finding phone numbers and waiting on hold. Bill Sweep hands you the decoded list and the steps. - **Asking the bank to block a merchant.** Banks can sometimes stop a recurring card payment. It's a useful last resort, but it doesn't cancel the contract, and the company may chase the debt. ## Security and data - We never ask for or use bank logins; we work only from the statements you send. - Statements are stored encrypted and deleted 30 days after the 90-day re-check, or sooner on request. - Account numbers can be blacked out before upload, and we ignore any that are not. - Only the person handling your sweep can see the documents, and every access is logged. ## From statements to a clean list We confirm your request within one business day and return the decoded list within 2 business days of receiving the statements. - Day 1: Request the service and upload or photograph the statements. - Day 2–3: Decoded list with yearly costs and keep or cancel boxes delivered. - Day 3–5: Cancellations done with the kit, or with us on the Done-with-you plan. - Day 90: Send the latest statements; we confirm the charges stopped. ## FAQ ### Do you need the bank login? No, never. We work only from statements you send, and account numbers can be blacked out. We cannot see or touch the account. ### How long does it take? The decoded list arrives within 2 business days of receiving the statements. Cancellations take as long as each company takes; most are done the same day. ### What if we can't tell what a charge is? That's most of what we do. If a merchant can't be identified with certainty, we say so and suggest how to ask the bank for the merchant's details. ### Can you get money back for charges nobody used? Sometimes. Where a company has a refund policy or the charge was a forgotten trial, the kit includes how to ask. We don't promise refunds and don't take a share of them. ### Is my parent's information safe? Statements are stored encrypted and deleted 30 days after the re-check. Only the person working on your sweep sees them. ### Is this financial advice? No. Bill Sweep identifies and explains recurring charges; you decide what to keep. For decisions about insurance or investments, talk to a qualified adviser. --- Rotomal · https://rotomal.com/subscription-cleanup/ · hello@rotomal.com # Expected Docs: Last year's return becomes this year's document checklist; you chase only what's missing. > Expected Docs reads a client's prior-year return and builds the list of documents you should receive this year: each W-2 employer, each 1099 payer, each 1098 lender, the K-1s, the Schedule C records. Clients upload through a simple link, uploads are identified and matched to the list, and reminders go out only for what has not arrived. - Page: https://rotomal.com/tax-intake/ - Category: Finance and back office - Language: en - Billing: subscription - From: $99 per season - Request (free, no card): https://rotomal.com/tax-intake/request/ - Expected-document lists generated from the prior-year 1040 PDF, with no manual checklist building - Uploads are classified by form type and issuer and matched to the list; anything new is flagged, not lost - One bookmarked PDF per client, in the order your software's input screens follow ## Document chasing is the season's biggest cost, and the fixes assume you'll change everything A tax return is mostly waiting. The client sends two W-2s and forgets the brokerage 1099. The 1098 arrives as a phone photo. The K-1 comes in April. Every preparer keeps a mental list of what each client should have, re-creates it every year, and spends February sending 'still missing' emails one at a time. The actual preparation takes an hour; the collection takes weeks. The tools built to fix this are good and well funded, but they are sold as platforms: a CRM, a workflow engine, billing, e-signature and a client portal that replaces how your office works. Firms on Drake or ProSeries, often with a handful of preparers, look at the price, the migration and the training, and go back to email and a shared drive. The cost is paid in capacity. Every hour of chasing is an hour not preparing, and in a season that lasts ten weeks that is the difference between taking on new clients and turning them away. - Soraban, a Y Combinator-backed AI intake tool, reports use by more than 350 firms. (source: https://soraban.com/) - Content Snare, a general document-collection tool, reports more than 1,900 customers and markets tax document collection as a lead use case. (source: https://contentsnare.com/tax-return-automation/) - Preparers on r/Accounting describe the routine of keying in client documents as a reason to look for better intake tools. (source: https://www.reddit.com/r/Accounting/comments/1wjtgvm/) ## How it works 1. **Upload prior-year returns.** Drop in last year's client copies as PDFs, individually or as a batch from Drake, ProSeries, Lacerte or UltraTax. We read the forms and schedules present and build an expected-document list per client in a few minutes. 2. **Send the client link.** Each client gets a personal upload link by email or text, secured with a one-time code. No app, no password. They see their list in plain language: 'W-2 from Acme Corp', '1099-INT from Chase'. 3. **Uploads are matched.** Each file is identified by type and issuer and ticked off the list. Documents that were not expected are flagged for you. Unreadable files are flagged for the client to re-send. 4. **Chase, then export.** Reminders go out on your schedule listing only what is missing, and stop when the list is complete. When you are ready, download one bookmarked PDF per client, ordered to match your software's input flow. ## Features - **Expected-document lists.** Built from the prior-year 1040: W-2s by employer, 1099-INT/DIV/B by payer, 1099-R, 1098 by lender, SSA-1099, K-1s by entity, Schedule C and E records, estimated payments. You can add or remove items per client. - **Client upload link.** A personal link with a one-time code, usable on a phone. Clients can photograph documents; blurry images are rejected with a request to retake. - **Auto-classification.** Uploads are identified by form type and issuer name and matched to the expected list. Multi-page PDFs from a bank or broker are split into their component forms. - **Missing-only reminders.** Email and text reminders on the cadence you set, listing only outstanding items, with automatic stop when complete. You can pause a client, or send a one-off nudge. - **Bookmarked PDF export.** One PDF per client with a cover index and bookmarks by form type, ordered to match Drake or ProSeries input screens, or a custom order. Also available as a zip of individual files. - **Organizer questions.** Add a short set of yes/no and free-text questions (address change, new dependents, digital assets, foreign accounts) that clients answer alongside their uploads. Answers appear on the cover page. - **Preparer dashboard.** Every client's status: list complete, waiting on N items, last activity, stuck for 14 days. Filter by preparer, by deadline or by extension status. - **New-client mode.** No prior-year return? Pick from a few templates (W-2 employee, self-employed, rental owner, retiree) and edit. ## Who it's for - **Small tax firms on Drake or ProSeries.** Two to ten preparers, several hundred returns, no appetite for a platform migration. You get organized intake without changing your tax software or your office. - **Enrolled agents and solo preparers.** You do everything yourself. You get the chasing done for you, and a clean PDF to work from instead of forty emails. - **Firms with seasonal staff.** Temporary preparers do not know each client's history. The expected list gives them the context in one glance. - **Bookkeeping firms adding tax.** You already hold clients' books and want a tidy way to collect the personal documents too. ## Works with Prior-year 1040 PDFs from Drake, ProSeries, Lacerte, UltraTax or any software, Bookmarked PDF export, Zip export of individual documents, Email and SMS reminders, Phone camera uploads with image clean-up, CSV export of client status, MCP connector for Claude, ChatGPT and other AI assistants ## Pricing Billed per season: activation through October 15 of the following year, covering one filing season including extensions. Founding customer pricing is fixed for two seasons. All plans include expected lists, client links, classification, reminders and bookmarked PDF export. | Plan | Price | Includes | | --- | --- | --- | | Solo | $99 per season | 1 preparer login; Up to 40 client returns; Expected lists from prior-year PDFs; Client upload links with one-time codes; Missing-only reminders by email; Bookmarked PDF export | | Office | $199 per season | Up to 5 preparer logins; Up to 100 client returns, then $2 each; Text message reminders; Organizer questions; Firm dashboard with per-preparer filters; Everything in Solo | | Firm | $449 per season | Up to 10 preparer logins; Up to 300 client returns, then $2 each; Custom PDF ordering per preparer; Batch import of prior-year returns; Priority support January through April | ## Compared with the alternatives - **Soraban.** An AI-driven intake product used by hundreds of firms, with a broader feature set including e-signature and payments. A strong choice if you want a full client-facing platform; it is more than most small Drake or ProSeries shops are looking for. - **Content Snare.** A general document-collection tool with tax templates. Flexible and well made, but you build and maintain each client's checklist yourself; the list does not come from the return. - **TaxDome, Canopy and other practice suites.** Full practice management: CRM, workflow, billing, portal and e-signature. Excellent if you want to run the whole firm on one system, and a real migration if you do not. - **Email and a shared drive.** Free and how most small firms work today. It costs you February. ## Security and data - Documents are stored in a US data-centre region, encrypted at rest and in transit (TLS 1.2 or higher). - Preparer logins require multi-factor authentication; client links use one-time codes and expire when the season ends. - Access to each client's documents is limited to the preparers you assign, and every document view and download is logged. - Client documents are never used to train models. Classification runs on our systems and the output is a label, not a copy. - Documents are deleted 90 days after a plan lapses, or at any time on request; deletion is confirmed by email. ## Your first week We onboard new accounts within 2 business days. We import your prior-year returns in a batch, check the expected lists with you, and help you word the first client email. - Day 1: Request service and tell us your tax software, number of returns and preparers. - Day 2–3: Your account is live. Upload prior-year PDFs; expected lists are generated and we review a sample with you. - Day 4–5: Set reminder cadence, add organizer questions and send links to a test group of clients. - Day 7: Roll out to all clients. The dashboard shows what has arrived and what is outstanding from day one. ## FAQ ### Does it integrate with Drake or ProSeries directly? Not through an API; neither offers one for this. Expected Docs works from the PDF client copy you already produce, and gives you back a bookmarked PDF ordered the way those programs' input screens go. No import into the software, no change to your workflow. ### How accurate is the classification? Typed forms from employers, banks and brokers are identified reliably. Handwritten notes, receipts and unusual statements are flagged for you rather than guessed. You can re-label anything in one click, and corrections improve matching for that client. ### Is this tax advice? No. Expected Docs is document-collection software. It tells you which documents appeared on last year's return; it does not decide what belongs on this year's, or how to treat anything. That remains the preparer's professional judgement. ### How does this fit the FTC Safeguards Rule? Tax preparers must have a written information security plan covering the systems that hold client data. Expected Docs encrypts documents at rest and in transit, requires multi-factor authentication for preparers, logs access, and does not use client documents to train any model. We provide a security summary you can attach to your plan. ### Does it handle business returns? Early access is built around the 1040 and its schedules. Expected lists for 1120-S and 1065 returns are planned; tell us when you request service if you need them and we will prioritise accordingly. ### What happens to client documents after the season? They stay available until you delete them or your plan lapses, after which they are deleted 90 days later. Many firms download the bookmarked PDFs into their own document system and clear the portal each year. ### When should we start? December. Upload prior-year returns and send client links in the first week of January, so documents arrive as they are issued rather than in a March pile. ### Does it work with Claude or ChatGPT? Yes. Expected Docs includes an MCP connector, so Claude, ChatGPT and other MCP-compatible assistants can answer questions like "which clients are still missing documents?" from your data. It is read-only by default and you can revoke access at any time. --- Rotomal · https://rotomal.com/tax-intake/ · hello@rotomal.com # Mark Lookout: Alerts when a new trademark filing or marketplace listing looks confusingly like yours. > Mark Lookout reads the daily trademark filings published by the USPTO, EUIPO and WIPO, compares them to your marks by spelling, sound and logo similarity, and sends a weekly digest of the ones worth a look. It also checks major marketplaces for listings that use your name. Monitoring, not legal advice, priced per mark instead of per lawyer-hour. - Page: https://rotomal.com/trademark-watch/ - Category: Brand protection - Language: en - Billing: subscription - From: $12 per mark per month - Request (free, no card): https://rotomal.com/trademark-watch/request/ - Sound-alike and look-alike matching, not just exact text: 'Kwik Klean' is caught for 'Quick Clean', filtered by the Nice classes you choose - Logo similarity on filed image marks, with the candidate image shown beside yours - White-label PDF reports for firms watching marks on behalf of clients ## Watch services charge law-firm prices for data that is published free every day Every business day the USPTO publishes new applications, and the EUIPO and WIPO do the same. If someone files a name confusingly close to yours, the window to object is short: in the US an opposition is due within 30 days of publication unless extended, and in the EU within three months. Miss it and you are into cancellation proceedings or a coexistence you did not choose. Traditional watch providers charge hundreds of dollars per mark per year. That is sensible for a multinational's 400 marks and out of reach for a Shopify brand with two, which is also why many small IP firms resell watches at a loss or not at all. The more immediate problem is often in the marketplace: listings on Amazon, eBay or Etsy using your name to sell something else. Mark Lookout uses the same public bulk data as the expensive services, adds phonetic and image matching, and prices it so a brand can watch two marks and a firm can watch seventy-five. - Traditional watch services such as Corsearch cost about $375 per mark per year. (source: https://www.altlegal.com/blog/monetizing-%C2%A72d-watch/) - Alt Legal prices its trademark watch at $185 per month for up to 200 marks. (source: https://www.altlegal.com/blog/monetizing-%C2%A72d-watch/) - Law firms commonly resell trademark watches to clients at about $50 per mark per year. (source: https://www.altlegal.com/blog/monetizing-%C2%A72d-watch/) ## How it works 1. **Request service.** List the marks you want watched, word marks or logos, with the countries and classes. We set up the account within 2 business days. 2. **We calibrate the matching.** You tell us how wide to cast the net: exact and near-exact only, or phonetic and visual matches too. For each mark you set the Nice classes and the registers (US, EU, international) to watch. 3. **Weekly digest.** Every week you receive the new filings and listings scored as similar, each with applicant, filing date, classes, the mark image if any, a link to the official record and the publication or opposition date where known. 4. **You decide what to do.** Dismiss, flag to watch, or export to a report for your attorney. Mark Lookout tracks flagged filings through publication and registration. ## Features - **Daily filing ingestion from three registers.** New applications from the USPTO daily trademark XML (Open Data Portal), the EUIPO Trademark Search API and the WIPO Global Brand Database are loaded each day and compared against your watched marks. - **Phonetic and visual text matching.** Candidates are scored for spelling distance, sound-alike spelling, word order, common misspellings and translations of common terms. Scores and the reasons for a match are shown with each hit. - **Logo similarity.** Filed image marks are compared with your logo using image embeddings; matches above your threshold appear in the digest with both images side by side. - **Class and territory filters.** Restrict each watch to the Nice classes and registers that matter, or widen it to related classes to catch adjacent filings. - **Marketplace listing checks.** Scheduled searches of Amazon, eBay, Etsy and Walmart Marketplace for listings using your mark in the title or brand field, with the listing URL, seller name and a screenshot. Frequency is limited to respect each marketplace's terms. - **Opposition window tracking.** For flagged US filings, the digest shows the publication date and the opposition deadline from the official record; for EU filings, the publication date and the three-month window. - **White-label reports and client folders.** Firms group marks by client, add their own logo and footer, and export a PDF report per client per month. Clients never see Mark Lookout's name unless you want them to. - **Ask your AI assistant.** Connect Mark Lookout to Claude, ChatGPT or another assistant through MCP and ask in plain language, for example "any new filings similar to our marks since Monday?". Read-only by default; revoke access any time. ## Who it's for - **Amazon and Shopify brand owners.** You have one to five registered marks and a brand that competitors imitate. You get a weekly email about similar filings and marketplace misuse, at $12 per mark per month. - **Small IP and trademark law firms.** You want to offer watches to every client, but the wholesale price made it a loss leader. Watch 25 or 75 marks at a flat bundle price and resell under your own name. - **Brand-registry and Amazon agencies.** You run brand protection for sellers. Add filing and marketplace monitoring to your retainer, with per-client reports. - **In-house marketing and legal at small companies.** You would be blamed for missing a conflicting filing. The digest and opposition dates give you a routine instead of a worry. ## Works with USPTO daily trademark application XML via the Open Data Portal, EUIPO Trademark Search API, WIPO Global Brand Database, Amazon, eBay, Etsy and Walmart Marketplace listing searches, Email weekly digest and instant alerts for high-score hits, White-label PDF reports, CSV export, Links to official USPTO TSDR, EUIPO and WIPO records, MCP connector for Claude, ChatGPT and other AI assistants ## Pricing Billed monthly, cancel any time. Founding customer pricing is fixed while you stay subscribed. All plans include the three registers, phonetic and logo matching, marketplace checks, the weekly digest and opposition-date tracking. We onboard new accounts within 2 business days. | Plan | Price | Includes | | --- | --- | --- | | Brand | $12 per mark per month | Priced per mark, 1 to 5 marks; US, EU and international filings; Phonetic, spelling and logo matching; Marketplace checks on Amazon, eBay, Etsy and Walmart; Weekly digest and instant alerts; Official record links and opposition dates | | Firm | $149 per month | Up to 25 marks; Everything in Brand; Client folders and white-label PDF reports; Adjustable match thresholds per mark; CSV export; Email support within one business day | | Firm Plus | $299 per month | Up to 75 marks, then $3 per mark per month; Everything in Firm; Up to 10 staff logins; Monthly report run for every client automatically; Custom class groupings and dictionaries of client terms; Onboarding call and matching calibration with our team | ## Compared with the alternatives - **Corsearch and other traditional watch services.** Comprehensive, analyst-reviewed watches at roughly $375 per mark per year. The right choice for large portfolios that need human review of every hit; out of reach for a brand with two marks. - **Alt Legal.** A docketing platform with a watch feature at $185 per month for up to 200 marks. Well suited to firms that already docket there; Mark Lookout adds logo matching and marketplace checks and starts at a single mark. - **Searching the registers yourself.** USPTO, EUIPO and WIPO searches are free. Doing them weekly for every mark, including sound-alikes and logos, is hours of work that does not get done, and marketplaces are not covered. - **Marketplace brand-protection programs.** Amazon Brand Registry and similar programs help remove infringing listings once you know about them. They do not watch the trademark registers or other marketplaces. ## Security and data - Your marks, logos and watch history are stored on cloud servers, encrypted at rest and in transit; the register data we process is public. - Client folders are isolated per account, and staff logins can be limited to specific clients. - We do not sell or share watch lists, and your watched marks are never visible to other customers. - Data is exported on request and deleted within 30 days of a deletion request, or 90 days after cancellation. ## Your first week Set up the marks, calibrate the net, read the first digest. - Day 1: Request service with your list of marks; account set up within 2 business days. - Day 2–3: Enter or import marks with classes and registers, upload logo images, set thresholds. - Day 4–5: Receive a back-dated test digest covering the last 30 days of filings so you can tune the matching. - Day 7: First live weekly digest arrives; flag, dismiss or export to a report. ## FAQ ### Is this legal advice? Will you file oppositions? No on both. Mark Lookout is monitoring software: it surfaces filings and listings that score as similar to your marks, with the official dates. Whether something is actually confusingly similar, and what to do about it, is a judgement for a trademark attorney. Confirm deadlines against the official record before relying on them. ### How do you handle false positives? Every hit shows its score and the reasons it matched, and you set a threshold per mark. Dismissed hits tune the per-mark filter, and we start conservative so the first digests are short. If you would rather see everything, widen the threshold. ### Where does the data come from, and how fresh is it? The USPTO's daily trademark XML through its Open Data Portal, the EUIPO Trademark Search API and the WIPO Global Brand Database, all official sources, loaded daily. A new filing appears in your next weekly digest, or the same day as an instant alert if it scores high enough. Marketplace checks use public search pages and official APIs where offered. ### Which marketplaces, and what are the limits? Amazon, eBay, Etsy and Walmart Marketplace at launch, on a limited schedule that respects each site's terms. We cannot guarantee every listing is found, and coverage may change if a marketplace changes its access rules; we will tell you if it does. ### Can my firm resell this to clients? Yes, that is what the Firm plans are for. Group marks by client, brand the PDF reports and bill as you see fit. We never contact your clients. ### What about unregistered uses, domains and social media? Mark Lookout watches registers and marketplaces. It does not crawl the open web, social media or domain registrations at launch; those are on the list if founding customers ask for them. ### What happens if I cancel? Export your watch history, flagged hits and reports as CSV and PDF at any time. Data is deleted 90 days after cancellation. ### Does it work with Claude or ChatGPT? Yes. Mark Lookout includes an MCP connector, so Claude, ChatGPT and other MCP-compatible assistants can answer questions like "any new filings similar to our marks since Monday?" from your data. It is read-only by default and you can revoke access at any time. --- Rotomal · https://rotomal.com/trademark-watch/ · hello@rotomal.com # Trust Reconciler: Three-way trust account reconciliation from the QuickBooks or Xero books you keep today. > Trust Reconciler connects to your firm's QuickBooks Online or Xero, reads the trust bank account and the individual client ledgers you already maintain, and performs the three-way reconciliation your bar expects every month: bank balance, book balance and the sum of client ledgers, with every difference listed. You stay on the accounting system you have. - Page: https://rotomal.com/trust-reconcile/ - Category: Finance and back office - Language: en - Billing: subscription - From: $39 per month - Request (free, no card): https://rotomal.com/trust-reconcile/request/ - Read-only connection; it reconciles your books, it never changes them - Flags the things that get lawyers in trouble: negative client balances, disbursements before deposits clear, fees sitting in trust, stale checks - A monthly pack with the reconciliation, ledgers, outstanding items and a signature line for the responsible attorney ## The bar wants a three-way reconciliation every month; the tools want you to switch systems Every state bar requires lawyers who hold client funds to keep individual client ledgers and reconcile them regularly against the bank and the general ledger. Most require the three-way version monthly, signed by a responsible attorney, and kept for years. Trust-account errors are among the most common reasons for discipline, and the mistakes are usually bookkeeping: a disbursement from the wrong client's funds, a deposit recorded twice, a fee left in trust. Small firms generally keep their books in QuickBooks Online or Xero, with a bookkeeper or the office manager. The trust-accounting products on the market either run their own ledger at $59–79 a month, so you keep two systems, or come bundled inside practice-management suites that expect the whole firm to move onto them. So the reconciliation gets done in a spreadsheet, late, by someone who is not sure what 'three-way' means, and signed by an attorney who has not checked it. The cost is not the hour a month; it is the exposure if the bar asks for twelve months of packs and there are nine. - TrustBooks, a dedicated trust-accounting product, sells automatic three-way reconciliation at $59–79 a month. (source: https://www.trustbooks.com/pricing) - TrustBooks also offers a done-for-you tier at $249 a month, a sign of how many firms would rather not do this themselves. (source: https://www.trustbooks.com/pricing) - Legal staff on r/paralegal ask how to track trust funding after a signing, a sign of day-to-day confusion around client ledgers. (source: https://www.reddit.com/r/paralegal/comments/1va4oxn/) ## How it works 1. **Connect the books.** Authorise Trust Reconciler in QuickBooks Online or Xero with read-only access. Point it at your trust bank account(s) and tell it how client ledgers are kept: sub-customers, classes or tracking categories. 2. **Map client ledgers.** We import your clients and matters and build a ledger per client from the transactions already in the books. Unassigned trust transactions are listed for you to allocate. 3. **Reconcile monthly.** On the day you choose, the three balances are compared: bank statement, trust ledger in the books, and the sum of client ledgers. Differences are itemised: uncleared checks, deposits in transit, unallocated items, bank fees. 4. **Review, sign, file.** The responsible attorney reviews the pack, signs electronically, and it is locked and archived. Reminders go out until it is signed. ## Features - **Three-way reconciliation.** Compares the bank statement balance, the trust account balance in the books and the total of all client ledgers for the period, and lists every item that explains a difference. Runs monthly or on demand. - **Client ledgers from existing books.** Builds a per-client ledger from QuickBooks sub-customers or classes, or Xero tracking categories or contacts, so there is no second system to key into. - **Exception alerts.** Daily checks for client balances below zero, disbursements that exceed a client's cleared funds, merchant or bank fees charged to the trust account, and earned fees held in trust longer than the number of days you set. - **Outstanding items.** Tracks uncleared checks and deposits in transit by age, and flags checks outstanding more than 180 days so they can be followed up before they become unclaimed property. - **Monthly pack by state.** The reconciliation, bank statement, client ledger listing with balances, outstanding items and the attorney signature page, laid out to match your state's record-keeping rule. We confirm the format for your state at onboarding. - **Locked archive.** Signed packs are locked and kept for the retention period you set (default seven years), with a log of who signed and when. Download any month as PDF in one click. - **Multiple trust accounts.** An IOLTA account plus separate interest-bearing accounts for individual clients, each reconciled on its own, with a firm-wide summary. - **Bookkeeper and advisor access.** Give your bookkeeper or outside accountant access to run and review reconciliations, with the attorney keeping the signing step. Advisors can manage several firms from one login. ## Who it's for - **Solo practitioners holding retainers.** You are the responsible attorney and the back office. You get the reconciliation done and in front of you to sign, every month, without learning a new system. - **Small firms with an office manager or bookkeeper.** Someone else keeps the books in QuickBooks or Xero. They run the reconciliation; the partner reviews and signs; the pack is archived. - **Real estate and family law practices.** Many small client balances moving quickly. You get daily exception alerts when a disbursement would overdraw a client's funds. - **Accountants and ProAdvisors serving law firms.** You look after several firms' books. You get a consistent monthly process across clients and a pack you can stand behind. ## Works with QuickBooks Online (read-only), Xero (read-only), Bank statement PDF or CSV upload for the statement balance, Electronic attorney signature on the monthly pack, PDF export of monthly packs and ledgers, Email and text reminders, MCP connector for Claude, ChatGPT and other AI assistants ## Pricing Billed monthly per firm, cancel any time. Founding customer pricing is fixed for 24 months. All plans include three-way reconciliation, client ledgers, exception alerts and the archived monthly pack. | Plan | Price | Includes | | --- | --- | --- | | Solo | $39 per month | 1 trust account; Up to 50 active client ledgers; Monthly three-way reconciliation; Exception alerts; Monthly pack with signature page; Seven-year archive | | Firm | $59 per month | Up to 3 trust accounts; Unlimited client ledgers; Bookkeeper and attorney roles; On-demand reconciliation any day; State-specific pack format; Everything in Solo | | Advisor | $129 per month | Up to 5 firms included, then $25 each; Multi-firm dashboard with reconciliation status; Shared ledger-mapping rules; Monthly status report across firms; Priority support | ## Compared with the alternatives - **TrustBooks.** A dedicated trust-accounting system at $59–79 a month, with a $249 a month done-for-you tier. Well established. It keeps its own trust ledger; Trust Reconciler instead reads the books you already keep in QuickBooks or Xero. - **Clio, CosmoLex and other practice-management suites.** Trust accounting comes bundled with matter management, billing and time tracking. The right choice if you want the whole firm on one platform; a large change if you only want the reconciliation handled. - **A spreadsheet and the bar's template.** Most state bars publish a three-way reconciliation template. Free, and sufficient if someone careful does it every month. It does not alert you to a negative client balance on the day it happens. - **Your bookkeeper, by hand.** Works if the bookkeeper understands trust rules and the attorney actually reviews. Trust Reconciler makes the same process faster, consistent and signed. ## Security and data - Data is stored in a US data-centre region, encrypted at rest and in transit (TLS 1.2 or higher). - QuickBooks Online and Xero connections use OAuth 2.0 with read-only scopes; we never hold your accounting or bank passwords, and you can revoke access from the platform. - Access is per firm and per role: bookkeepers run reconciliations, attorneys sign, advisors see only the firms assigned to them. Every signature and download is logged. - Signed packs are immutable once locked and retained for the period you set (default seven years); cancelled accounts can export everything before deletion 30 days later. - Full deletion on request at any time, confirmed by email. ## Your first week We onboard new accounts within 2 business days. We map your client ledgers with you, run the first reconciliation on last month's statement, and set the pack format for your state. - Day 1: Request service and tell us your state, accounting system, number of trust accounts and how client ledgers are kept today. - Day 2–3: Your account is live. Connect the books read-only; we build client ledgers and list any unallocated trust transactions. - Day 4–5: Upload last month's bank statement and run the first reconciliation together. Resolve differences in the books and re-run. - Day 7: The responsible attorney reviews and signs the first pack. Monthly reminders and daily exception alerts are on. ## FAQ ### Is this legal or compliance advice? No. Trust Reconciler is record-keeping software. It performs the arithmetic of a three-way reconciliation and flags common exceptions. Your state's trust-account rules, what counts as earned, and how to fix a shortfall are matters for your bar's guidance and your own professional judgement. ### Which states do you support? The three-way reconciliation itself is the same everywhere. The monthly pack format and retention default are set per state; we confirm your state's requirements with you at onboarding and adjust the pack to its rule. ### Does it write to QuickBooks or Xero? Never. The connection is read-only. When the reconciliation finds a problem, you fix it in the books and the next run shows it resolved. ### How do you get the bank balance? Upload the monthly statement as PDF or CSV, or enter the closing balance. If the books have a bank feed we also show its balance, but the statement remains the authority. ### What if a client ledger goes negative? You get an alert the day it appears, with the transactions involved, because paying one client's costs from another's funds is the classic trust violation. We flag it; correcting it, and any reporting duty, is yours. ### Can it handle credit-card payments into trust? Yes. Processor fees that hit the trust account are flagged, since in most states fees must come from the operating account, and the gross deposit is matched to the client ledger. ### How long are records kept? Signed packs and ledgers are kept for the retention period you set, defaulting to seven years, which meets or exceeds most states' trust record rules. You can export everything at any time. ### Does it work for real estate closing (escrow) trust accounts? Yes. Each closing file is treated as a client ledger, so the three-way reconciliation lists every open file balance. The daily checks flag a disbursement that exceeds a file's cleared funds and small leftover balances that never got refunded, which are the usual closing-account problems. ## Guides - [Trust account reconciliation for real estate attorneys](https://rotomal.com/trust-reconcile/real-estate-attorney-trust-reconciliation/): How real estate and closing attorneys run a three-way trust (escrow) account reconciliation: the three balances, closing-specific traps and a monthly checklist. --- Rotomal · https://rotomal.com/trust-reconcile/ · hello@rotomal.com # Trust account reconciliation for real estate attorneys By Rotomal team · Updated 2026-10-12 · Part of [Trust Reconciler](https://rotomal.com/trust-reconcile/) **Short answer:** A real estate attorney's trust account reconciliation is a three-way match: the adjusted bank balance of the trust (escrow) account, the trust balance in the firm's books, and the total of every client or closing-file ledger must all agree, and every difference must be explained by a specific item. The ABA's model rules treat monthly reconciliation as the preferred practice, and many states require it. Closings make it harder than most practices because large sums move in and out within days, so most errors are timing errors: disbursing before a deposit has cleared, or a file left with a small leftover balance. ## The three balances, in plain terms - Adjusted bank balance: the statement's ending balance, plus deposits in transit, minus checks and wires that have not cleared. - Book balance: the trust bank account as recorded in the firm's general ledger (QuickBooks, Xero or trust software). - Client ledger total: the sum of every open client or closing-file balance. No individual ledger may be negative. When all three agree, the account reconciles. When they do not, the reconciliation must list the items that explain the gap, such as a deposit recorded twice or a fee posted to the wrong file, and they get corrected before the next period. ## Why closings make trust reconciliation harder A litigation retainer might see a few entries a month. A single residential closing can see earnest money, a lender wire, seller payoffs, recording and transfer fees, commissions and refunds, all within a week, across dozens of files at once. That volume creates predictable traps: - Disbursing against funds that have not cleared. Many states have good-funds rules for closings; the ledger can show money that the bank has not yet collected. - Lender funds arriving after the closing day, so one file is briefly negative. - Small leftover balances, typically when estimated recording fees exceed the actual fees, that sit for months. - Payoff and refund checks that are never cashed, which become stale outstanding items. - Bank or wire fees charged directly to the trust account instead of the operating account. - Earned legal fees left in trust after the closing, which mixes firm money with client money. ## If you also act as settlement or title agent: ALTA Pillar 2 Attorneys who close as title or settlement agents are usually held to the American Land Title Association's Best Practices by their underwriters and lenders. Pillar 2 covers escrow trust accounts. It calls for receipts and disbursements to be reconciled at least daily, and for a monthly three-way reconciliation with a trial balance listing every open escrow balance, in a form that can be verified electronically. ALTA's Best Practices are not law, but underwriters and lenders expect them, so in practice the bar's monthly reconciliation and ALTA's daily and monthly steps end up as one routine. ## A monthly checklist - Download the trust bank statement as soon as the period closes. - List deposits in transit and outstanding checks and wires, with their age. - Compute the adjusted bank balance and compare it to the book balance. - Run a trial balance of every open file and compare its total to both. - Investigate every difference until it is explained; never plug it. - Review negative, aged and small leftover file balances, and refund or disburse what is due. - Follow up checks outstanding more than 180 days before they become unclaimed property. - Have the responsible attorney review and sign, and keep the pack for the retention period your state sets. ## Doing it from QuickBooks or Xero without a second system Many small real estate firms keep their books in QuickBooks Online or Xero and track each closing as a sub-customer, class or tracking category. That is enough to build per-file ledgers; the missing piece is the monthly three-way comparison and the daily exception checks. | Approach | Cost | Trade-off | | --- | --- | --- | | Spreadsheet and your bar's template | Free | Works if someone careful does it every month; no alert on the day a file goes negative | | Dedicated trust-accounting software (for example TrustBooks) | $59–79 a month; $249 done-for-you | Its own trust ledger alongside your accounting system | | Practice-management suite (Clio, CosmoLex) | Bundled with the suite | Right if the whole firm moves onto it; a big change for reconciliation alone | | Trust Reconciler | $39–129 a month | Reads your existing QuickBooks or Xero books read-only and produces the signed monthly pack | ## FAQ ### How often does a real estate attorney have to reconcile the trust account? It depends on your state. The ABA's model rules describe monthly reconciliation as the preferred practice and quarterly as a minimum, and many states require monthly three-way reconciliations. If you also act as a title or settlement agent, ALTA's Best Practices add daily reconciliation of receipts and disbursements. ### Is a closing escrow account the same as an IOLTA account? Not always. IOLTA accounts hold client funds that are nominal or short-term, with interest going to the state's IOLTA program. Closing funds often pass through an attorney trust or escrow account; large sums held for longer may belong in a separate interest-bearing account for that client. Your state's rules decide which applies. ### What should I do with a small leftover balance on a closed file? Find out why it is there, refund it to the party entitled to it, and document the disbursement. If the owner cannot be found, follow your state's unclaimed property rules rather than moving it to operating. ### Is this legal or compliance advice? No. This guide and Trust Reconciler are record-keeping tools, not legal or ethics advice. Confirm your obligations with your state bar's trust-account rules or your own counsel. ## Sources - ABA Model Rules on Client Trust Account Records, commentary: monthly reconciliation is the preferred practice; quarterly is a minimum. https://www.americanbar.org/groups/professional_responsibility/resources/client_protection/aba-model-rules-on-client-trust-account-records---rule-1/aba-model-rules-on-client-trust-account-records---rule-1-comment/ - ALTA Best Practices (2019 update, effective 2020): daily reconciliation of escrow receipts and disbursements and a monthly three-way reconciliation with trial balance. https://www.alta.org/news-and-publications/news/20191121-Updates-to-ALTA-Best-Practices-Go-Into-Effect-in-January - TrustBooks lists trust accounting at $59–79 a month and a done-for-you tier at $249 a month. https://www.trustbooks.com/pricing [Trust Reconciler](https://rotomal.com/trust-reconcile/) does this for you. Request it free, no card: https://rotomal.com/trust-reconcile/request/ --- Rotomal · https://rotomal.com/trust-reconcile/real-estate-attorney-trust-reconciliation/ · hello@rotomal.com # Meter Snap: Snap the meter; get commission statements, routes and prize inventory for 1–30 machines. > Meter Snap is a phone app for small operators: photograph the coin or credit meter at each stop, the app reads the digits and you confirm, record the cash counted, and produce a commission statement the location owner can trust. It plans your route by when machines are due and tracks the prizes and products you stock. In English and Spanish. - Page: https://rotomal.com/vending-route/ - Category: Vending and amusement route tools - Language: en - Billing: subscription - From: $9 per month - Request (free, no card): https://rotomal.com/vending-route/request/ - Meter reading from a photo in about two seconds, always shown for your confirmation before saving; manual entry is one tap away. - Commission statements as PDF with the meter photos attached, showing gross, your split and the location's share, sent by email or text from the parking lot. - Works offline in basements and back rooms; syncs when you are back in signal. ## Small operators run routes on notebooks because route software assumes telemetry and a fleet A claw machine in a pizza place, a few candy machines, two arcade cabinets in a laundromat. The operator drives the route every week or two, opens each machine, counts cash, writes the meter number in a notebook, and later tries to work out what the location is owed. Statements go out late, meter photos live in the camera roll, and a location owner who does not trust the numbers finds another operator. Vending route software exists and operators pay for it, but it is designed around telemetry devices and routes with hundreds of machines. For a claw or mechanical vending machine with a simple counter and no network connection, the software is overkill, and the cheap tier still assumes you will key everything in by hand. Meter Snap starts from the phone the operator already carries. A photo of the meter is the data entry. Everything else, statements, routes and prize inventory, follows from that. - VendSoft, an established route-management product, lists plans from $19 to $199 per month and includes commission features. (source: https://www.vendsoft.com/pricing) - VendSoft states that it serves more than 2,000 operators and 48,000 machines, which shows operators already pay for software in this category. (source: https://www.vendsoft.com/pricing) ## How it works 1. **Add machines and locations.** Create each location with its commission split and contact, and each machine with its type, meter type (coin counter, credit counter or none) and service cadence. About ten minutes for a small route. 2. **Collect with your camera.** At each stop, open the machine and photograph the meter. The app reads the digits and shows them next to the photo; you confirm or correct, enter the cash counted and any restocked prizes, and move on. 3. **Send the statement.** The app computes the period's gross from the meter difference and cash, applies the split, and produces a PDF statement with photos. Email or text it to the location owner before you leave. 4. **Plan the next trip.** Machines come due based on cadence and recent takings; the app orders the day's stops and opens Google Maps for navigation. Low-stock prizes appear on your pick list. ## Features - **Meter photo reading.** Point the camera at a mechanical or digital counter; the app proposes the reading and highlights it on the photo. You confirm every reading before it saves, and the photo is kept as evidence. - **Collection log.** Cash counted, meter delta, the variance between them, restocks and notes for every visit. Variance alerts flag a machine that is being shorted or malfunctioning. - **Commission statements.** Per-location PDF statements with gross, split percentage, location share, period and meter photos. Send by email or text from the app; the owner gets a link to past statements. - **Route planning.** Due dates from each machine's cadence and takings; a day plan orders stops and estimates time. Skip, reschedule or add stops from the app. - **Prize and product inventory.** Track plush, capsules, candy and snacks by SKU: stock in your vehicle and storage, what went into each machine, and low-stock alerts with a reorder list. - **Machine profitability.** Takings per week, commission paid and prize cost per machine and per location, so you know which spots to grow and which to pull. - **Spanish interface.** The whole app, statements and notifications in English or Spanish, switchable per user; each location can receive statements in the language its owner prefers. - **Offline mode and exports.** Collect without signal and sync later. Export visits, statements and inventory as CSV for your accountant. ## Who it's for - **Claw and crane machine operators.** Prize cost makes or breaks a claw route. Meter Snap tracks the plush going into each machine against takings, and statements with photos keep location owners confident. - **Bulk candy and snack vending operators.** Dozens of mechanical machines with simple counters and no telemetry. Photo readings replace the notebook and the Sunday-night spreadsheet. - **Small arcade and amusement routes.** Cabinets in laundromats, bars and restaurants on commission deals. Statements, route planning and per-machine earnings in one place. - **Machine distributors.** You sell machines to new operators who then need to run a route. Point them to an app priced for a first route, or ask us about bundling. ## Works with iPhone and Android via a browser-installed app (PWA), Google Maps and Apple Maps navigation links, Email and SMS delivery of statements, PDF statements with embedded photos, CSV export for QuickBooks and spreadsheets, Shareable statement links for location owners, MCP connector for Claude, ChatGPT and other AI assistants ## Pricing Per operator, billed monthly, cancel any time. Founding customer pricing is locked for 24 months for accounts opened in early access. All plans include meter photo reading, collection logs, statements and the English and Spanish interface. | Plan | Price | Includes | | --- | --- | --- | | Solo | $9 per month | Up to 10 machines; Meter photo reading and collection log; Commission statements by email; Route list by due date; Photo evidence kept for 12 months; 1 user; Email support | | Route | $19 per month | Up to 30 machines; Everything in Solo; Statements by text and shareable link; Route planning with map ordering; Prize and product inventory with low-stock alerts; Machine profitability reports; 2 users and CSV exports | | Fleet | $29 per month | Up to 75 machines (more on request); Everything in Route; Up to 5 users with per-route assignment; Variance alerts and shortage reports; Location owner portal for past statements; Photo evidence kept for 3 years; Priority support | ## Compared with the alternatives - **VendSoft and full route-management suites.** VendSoft lists $19–199 per month and is built for larger routes, with telemetry integrations, warehouse pick lists and planograms. Running a hundred snack machines with card readers, that depth matters. Meter Snap is for the operator whose machines have a counter and a coin box. - **Telemetry devices.** Cellular monitors report sales in real time, but they cost hardware plus a monthly fee per machine and do not fit many claw and mechanical machines. A meter photo costs nothing per machine. - **Notebook and spreadsheet.** Free, and how everyone starts. It fails on the statement a location owner questions, the prize stock you forgot, and the Sunday evening of data entry. ## Security and data - Visit data, photos and statements are stored on servers in the United States, encrypted in transit and at rest. - Location owner contact details are used only to deliver the statements you send; we do not share or sell them. - Only you and the users you add can see your route; location owners see only their own statements through their link. - Photos are kept for the period stated in your plan; other data for the life of the account and 90 days after, then deleted, or sooner on request. ## Your first week Set up from your phone in minutes; we load your existing records within 2 business days. - Day 1: Install the app, add locations with their splits, add machines. Send us your spreadsheet if you have one. - Day 2–3: Your records are loaded with starting meter readings; run your first collection with photos. - Day 4–5: Send your first statements with photos attached; we review one with you. - Day 7: Route due dates and the prize pick list are populated for your next trip. ## FAQ ### How accurate is the meter reading? Clear photos of standard counters read reliably; glare, dirty lenses and worn digits cause misreads, which is why the app shows the reading next to the photo and never saves without your confirmation. The photo stays attached to the visit so any dispute can be checked. ### I only have three machines. Is it worth $9? Only if your time or your location relationships are worth more than the notebook. The Solo plan exists for first routes. There is no contract; if the route does not work out, cancel and export your records. ### Will location owners accept the statements? That is the goal: each statement shows the meter photos, the readings, the cash counted and the split, with a link to past statements. We cannot promise how an owner reacts, but disputes get much shorter when the photo is attached. ### Does it work without signal? Yes. Photos, readings and cash entries are stored on the phone and sync when you have a connection. Statements are generated once synced. ### Is it available in Spanish? Yes. The whole app, statements and notifications are available in Spanish and English, switchable per user, and each location can receive statements in the language its owner prefers. ### Does it handle taxes or accounting? It records takings, commissions paid and inventory costs and exports them as CSV. It is record-keeping software, not tax or accounting advice; confirm the sales-tax treatment of vending revenue and commission payments with your accountant. ### Can I bring in my existing records? Yes. Send a spreadsheet of locations, machines and last meter readings during onboarding and we load them, so your first statements start from the right numbers. ### How soon can I start? Sign up from your phone and add machines right away. We onboard new accounts within 2 business days, including loading your existing records and reviewing your first statement with you. --- Rotomal · https://rotomal.com/vending-route/ · hello@rotomal.com # Payee Ledger: W-9s collected early, vendor totals watched against $2,000, 1099s ready for IRIS. > Payee Ledger connects to each client's QuickBooks Online or Xero, tracks what every vendor has been paid against the $2,000 reporting threshold, collects and stores W-9s before they are urgent, and produces 1099-NEC and 1099-MISC forms formatted for the IRS's IRIS system. It is about year-round readiness, not just the filing. - Page: https://rotomal.com/vendor-1099/ - Category: Finance and back office - Language: en - Billing: subscription - From: $99 per season - Request (free, no card): https://rotomal.com/vendor-1099/request/ - One dashboard: every client, every vendor approaching the threshold, every missing W-9 - Electronic W-9 requests with e-signature, reminders that stop when the form arrives, and TIN formatting checks - Payments by card or payment app are excluded automatically, so you do not report what the processor reports ## Two rule changes, one January, and the W-9s are still missing Every January, bookkeepers discover which vendors never returned a W-9. The forms are due at the end of the month, the vendor does not answer email in the holidays, and the client cannot remember whether that $3,400 to a contractor was paid by check or by card. The filing itself is cheap; the chasing is what eats the season. For payments made in 2026 the rules change twice. The reporting threshold for 1099-NEC and 1099-MISC rises from $600 to $2,000, which means fewer forms but a new question to track for every vendor all year. And the IRS is retiring its old FIRE e-filing system, so all 2026 forms go through the newer IRIS platform, which many small practices have never used. The cost of getting it wrong falls on the client: penalties per late or incorrect form, and the obligation to withhold 24% from a vendor who never supplied a TIN. The cost of doing it by hand falls on you: spreadsheets per client, December evenings, and a January that starts with apologies. - For payments made in 2026, the 1099-NEC and 1099-MISC reporting threshold, and the backup withholding threshold, rises from $600 to $2,000. (source: https://blog.taxbandits.com/the-2000-backup-withholding-threshold-what-changed-for-w-9-collection-in-2026/) - The IRS is retiring its FIRE e-filing system; all tax-year 2026 information returns are to be filed through IRIS. (source: https://www.irs.gov/newsroom/irs-reminder-information-return-e-file-system-transitioning-to-a-new-platform) ## How it works 1. **Connect client books.** Authorize Payee Ledger in each client's QuickBooks Online or Xero. Vendors and payments are imported, and payment methods are read so card and payment-app transactions are set aside. 2. **Classify vendors.** Each vendor is marked reportable, exempt (for example most corporations) or unknown. Unknown vendors get a W-9 request link; the answer sets the classification. 3. **Watch the year.** Running totals update as payments post. When a vendor without a W-9 crosses $1,500 you are alerted, before the $2,000 threshold makes it a withholding problem. 4. **Produce the forms.** In January, review the 1099-NEC and 1099-MISC data per client, generate recipient copies, and export the IRIS-formatted file. See the FAQ for how e-filing works in early access. ## Features - **Electronic W-9 collection.** Send a vendor a link; they complete and e-sign a W-9 on their phone. The form, signature and timestamp are stored against the vendor, and the TIN is checked for format before it is accepted. - **Running totals from the books.** Payments are pulled from QuickBooks Online or Xero daily and totalled per vendor per calendar year, with the payment method shown, so card and third-party network payments are excluded from the reportable total. - **Threshold and withholding alerts.** Alerts at $1,500 and $2,000 for any vendor without a valid W-9 on file, with a note explaining that backup withholding at 24% applies to further payments until the TIN is provided. - **Multi-client dashboard.** Readiness per client: vendors over threshold, W-9s missing, requests outstanding, forms ready. Sort by what needs chasing this week. - **TIN Matching file.** Produces the bulk file for the IRS TIN Matching program in e-Services so you can verify names and TINs before filing, and imports the results to flag mismatches. - **1099-NEC and 1099-MISC generation.** Builds the forms from the year's totals, lets you adjust any box, and produces recipient copies as PDF for print or, with the recipient's consent, electronic delivery. - **IRIS-ready export.** Exports the forms in the CSV layout the IRIS Taxpayer Portal accepts, per client, so filing is an upload rather than data entry. - **Automated reminders.** W-9 requests are re-sent on a schedule you set and stop the moment the form arrives. ## Who it's for - **Bookkeepers with 20–300 clients.** You file 1099s for most of your clients and the chasing is the worst part of your year. You get one list of what is missing across all of them, all year. - **CPA firms with a 1099 service line.** You charge for 1099 preparation and want it to be a review step, not a scramble. You get clean data and IRIS files per client. - **Small businesses with many contractors.** Trades, agencies, clinics. You get W-9s before the first payment and know your exposure at any time. - **Clients moving from FIRE to IRIS.** You used FIRE for years and need a straightforward path to the new system for 2026 forms. ## Works with QuickBooks Online, Xero, IRS IRIS Taxpayer Portal CSV format, IRS TIN Matching bulk file (e-Services), Electronic Form W-9 with e-signature, PDF recipient copies (1099-NEC, 1099-MISC), Email and SMS vendor reminders, MCP connector for Claude, ChatGPT and other AI assistants ## Pricing Billed per season: twelve months from activation, covering one tax year's payments and the following January filing. Founding customer pricing is fixed for two seasons. All plans include W-9 collection, running totals, alerts and IRIS-ready exports. | Plan | Price | Includes | | --- | --- | --- | | Solo | $99 per season | 1 company; Up to 50 vendors; QuickBooks Online or Xero connection; Electronic W-9 requests and reminders; 1099-NEC and 1099-MISC generation; IRIS CSV export | | Bookkeeper | $199 per season | Up to 10 companies, 500 vendors; Multi-client dashboard; TIN Matching file and results import; Recipient copies with electronic delivery consent; Client read-only logins; Everything in Solo | | Firm | $299 per season | Up to 50 companies, then $4 each; 2,000 vendors included; Staff logins with per-client access; Bulk W-9 campaigns across clients; Priority support in December and January | ## Compared with the alternatives - **E-file services such as TaxBandits.** Filing is cheap and commoditized: roughly $0.80–2.75 per form and about $0.35 per W-9 request. They are excellent for the January step. Payee Ledger is the March-to-December part: knowing what you will need to file and having the W-9s already. - **QuickBooks' built-in 1099 wizard.** Included with QuickBooks Online for one company, with per-form filing fees. Fine for a single business. It does not give a bookkeeper a view across clients or chase W-9s on a schedule. - **Accounts-payable suites.** Products like Bill.com include W-9 collection and 1099s as part of a full payables workflow, priced per user per month. Right if the client wants the whole AP process; heavy if you only need the 1099 side. - **Spreadsheets.** Free, familiar, and the reason January is hard. One sheet per client, no payment-method data, no reminders. ## Security and data - Data is stored in a US data-centre region, encrypted at rest and in transit (TLS 1.2 or higher); TINs and SSNs are additionally encrypted with a separate key and displayed masked. - Only your firm's users, and client users you invite, can see a client's vendors; access is per client and every view of an unmasked TIN is logged. - QuickBooks Online and Xero connections use OAuth 2.0 with read scopes; we never hold accounting passwords and you can revoke access from the platform. - W-9s, totals and generated forms are kept for four years after the season ends, in line with IRS record-retention guidance for information returns, unless you delete them sooner. - Full export at any time and deletion on request within 30 days, confirmed by email. ## Your first week We onboard new accounts within 2 business days. For firms we connect clients in a batch and run the first W-9 campaign with you. - Day 1: Request service and tell us how many clients and vendors you handle and which accounting systems they use. - Day 2–3: Your account is live. Connect client books; vendors and year-to-date payments are imported and classified. - Day 4–5: Review the vendors flagged as unknown or missing a W-9 and send the first round of requests. - Day 7: The dashboard shows readiness per client. From here, alerts tell you when a vendor approaches the threshold without a W-9. ## FAQ ### Does Payee Ledger e-file to the IRS directly? Not yet. In early access we produce the CSV file the IRIS Taxpayer Portal accepts, and you upload it under your own IRIS account, which gives you the IRS receipt directly. Our application to transmit through IRIS on your behalf is in progress, and founding customers will be told when it is approved. ### Is this tax advice? No. Payee Ledger is record-keeping and form-preparation software. It applies the classification you set and the thresholds published by the IRS. Whether a particular payment is reportable, whether a vendor is exempt, and when backup withholding applies are questions for a tax professional. ### Does the higher threshold mean I need fewer forms? Yes, for most clients. Vendors paid less than $2,000 in 2026 no longer need a 1099-NEC or 1099-MISC. You still want a W-9 for anyone who might cross the line, because the backup withholding obligation starts at the same threshold. ### What about 1099-K, and payments by card? Payments by credit card, debit card or payment app are reported by the processor on a 1099-K, not by you. Payee Ledger excludes them from vendor totals using the payment method recorded in the books, and flags vendors where the method is missing. ### Do you handle state filings? Not in early access. We export a per-state list of recipients so you can meet state requirements through your usual route. Combined Federal/State filing support is on the roadmap. ### How is the W-9 data protected? TINs are encrypted with a separate key, shown masked, and revealed only to users with permission. See the security section for retention and deletion. ### What if a client is on desktop QuickBooks or another system? Upload a vendor payment CSV instead. Totals, W-9 collection and form generation work the same way; only the daily sync is missing. ### Does it work with Claude or ChatGPT? Yes. Payee Ledger includes an MCP connector, so Claude, ChatGPT and other MCP-compatible assistants can answer questions like "which vendors are over $2,000 without a W-9?" from your data. It is read-only by default and you can revoke access at any time. --- Rotomal · https://rotomal.com/vendor-1099/ · hello@rotomal.com # Verifactu Kit: Verifactu-compliant invoices and receipts for Spanish online shops and Stripe billing. > Verifactu Kit adds the hash chain, QR code and real-time AEAT submission that Spain's Verifactu regulation requires, inside Shopify, WooCommerce, PrestaShop or Stripe. It covers B2C simplified invoices (tickets) as well as full invoices. - Page: https://rotomal.com/verifactu-ready/ - Category: Tax compliance - Language: en - Billing: subscription - From: €9 per month - Request (free, no card): https://rotomal.com/verifactu-ready/request/ - Each billing record is SHA-256 chained to the previous one and submitted to the AEAT web service within seconds of the order being invoiced. - The QR code and 'VERI*FACTU' legend are printed on every PDF invoice and receipt your shop already sends. - Rejections from the AEAT are retried automatically and shown in a Spanish-language dashboard your gestoría can log into. ## Spain's Verifactu deadline is fixed, and most shops aren't ready From 2027, invoicing software used in Spain must generate a tamper-evident record for every invoice, chain it to the previous record with a hash, print a QR code on the document and, in Verifactu mode, send the record to the AEAT as it is created. Shop platforms, Stripe and the usual PDF invoice plugins don't do this. The deadline has already moved twice, which is why so many sellers have put it off. But the new dates are in the official calendar: companies first, self-employed sellers six months later. Once they arrive, non-compliant software exposes both the seller and the software vendor to fines, invoice by invoice. Replacing your shop's invoicing with an accounting suite is the expensive route. Most sellers only need the invoices their shop already generates to carry the right records and reach the tax agency. That is the only job Verifactu Kit does. - Verifactu becomes mandatory on 1 January 2027 for companies and on 1 July 2027 for self-employed sellers, after two postponements. (source: https://kpmg.com/us/en/taxnewsflash/news/2025/12/tnf-spain-verifactu-invoicing-system-delayed-to-2027.html) - Only around 8% of self-employed people and SMEs had implemented Verifactu; penalties can reach €50,000 per year for non-compliant software and €150 per invoice. (source: https://beel.es/blog/verifactu-aplazado-2027-nuevas-fechas) - The WordPress plugin directory lists about 20 Verifactu plugins; the most popular has roughly 900 active installs and most have fewer than 10. (source: https://wordpress.org/plugins/search/verifactu/) ## How it works 1. **Connect your shop or Stripe.** Install the app from the Shopify App Store, the WordPress plugin directory or PrestaShop Addons, or add the Stripe App to your account. About 10 minutes; nothing changes in your checkout. 2. **Upload your certificate and choose a mode.** You or your gestoría upload the company's digital certificate and pick Verifactu mode (real-time submission) or non-Verifactu mode (local records). We verify the connection against the AEAT test environment first. 3. **Invoice as usual.** When an order is invoiced or a Stripe invoice is finalised, we build the billing record, chain it, submit it, and stamp the QR code and legend onto the PDF the customer receives. Refunds and cancellations create the matching rectification or cancellation records. 4. **Hand your gestoría the ledger.** Your gestoría gets a read-only login and a monthly export of all records and AEAT responses. ## Features - **Hash chain and AEAT submission.** Every record carries a SHA-256 hash linked to the previous record and is sent to the AEAT's Verifactu web service with your certificate. If the AEAT is unavailable we queue and retry. - **QR code and legend on your existing PDFs.** We stamp the official QR code (with the AEAT verification URL) and the 'VERI*FACTU' text on the PDFs produced by your existing invoice plugin or by Stripe, so customers see the same layout as before. - **B2C simplified invoices covered.** Receipts to consumers (facturas simplificadas) are recorded and submitted just like full invoices, which is where most online shops have the highest volume. - **Refunds, credit notes and corrections.** Refunds create rectifying invoice records; cancelled orders create the required cancellation record. Edits to a submitted invoice are never silent: each one is a new, chained record. - **Verifactu or non-Verifactu mode.** Choose real-time submission to the AEAT or local record-keeping with records available on request. Most customers choose Verifactu mode, which carries fewer signing and event-log obligations. - **Gestoría workspace.** A gestoría manages many client shops from one login, sees rejections, downloads monthly ledgers (CSV and AEAT XML) and gets certificate-expiry alerts. - **Spanish-language support and documents.** Dashboard, emails and support are in Spanish, with English available. The software's compliance declaration (declaración responsable) is published and downloadable for your records. - **Ask your AI assistant.** Connect Verifactu Kit to Claude, ChatGPT or another assistant through MCP and ask in plain language, for example "were all of yesterday's invoices registered?". Read-only by default; revoke access any time. ## Who it's for - **Shopify, WooCommerce and PrestaShop shops based in Spain.** Invoices are generated by the shop and you don't want an accounting suite. You get compliant records on the invoices you already send. - **SaaS and subscription businesses billing through Stripe.** Stripe produces your invoices and you have no other invoicing system. The Stripe App adds the records and QR codes without changing your billing flow. - **Gestorías and accounting offices.** Dozens of your clients run online shops and will all ask about Verifactu at once. You get one workspace, client-level exports and a partner rate. - **Agencies that build and maintain shops.** You need a module you can install, configure and leave running on client shops, with clear logs for when the client's accountant calls. ## Works with Shopify (App Store), WooCommerce / WordPress, PrestaShop 1.7 and 8, Stripe Billing and Stripe Invoicing (Stripe App), AEAT Verifactu web service (production and test environments), FNMT and other recognised digital certificates, WooCommerce PDF Invoices & Packing Slips and other PDF invoice plugins, CSV and XML exports for accounting software, MCP connector for Claude, ChatGPT and other AI assistants ## Pricing Billed monthly in euros, VAT added where applicable, cancel any time. Founding customer pricing: the prices below are locked for 12 months for accounts opened during early access. All plans include AEAT submission, QR codes, Spanish-language support and the gestoría export. | Plan | Price | Includes | | --- | --- | --- | | Tienda | €9 per month | 1 shop or Stripe account; Up to 300 records per month; Verifactu mode (real-time AEAT submission); QR code and legend on PDFs; Refund and rectification records; Monthly CSV/XML export; Email support in Spanish | | Negocio | €19 per month | Up to 3 shops or Stripe accounts of the same company; Up to 3,000 records per month; Verifactu and non-Verifactu modes; Gestoría read-only login; Certificate expiry alerts; Priority support (same business day); Webhook on each AEAT acceptance or rejection | | Gestoría | €49 per month | Up to 10 client shops (more at €4 per shop); Up to 10,000 records per month across clients; Partner workspace with per-client exports; Rejection alerts to the gestoría; Co-branded client invitations; Onboarding call for your team; Phone and WhatsApp support in Spanish | ## Compared with the alternatives - **Free WordPress plugins.** About 20 exist; most have fewer than 10 installs and no stated support. Fine for a test, but your business is liable for the records. - **BeeL, Quaderno, B2Brouter.** BeeL offers Verifactu with a Stripe plan at about €15 a month; Quaderno and B2Brouter sell paid Verifactu plugins. Credible options; compare how each handles simplified B2C receipts and your platform. - **A full invoicing or accounting suite.** Spanish accounting suites are adding Verifactu. If you want to move all invoicing out of your shop, that is a valid route; it costs more per month and means re-keying or syncing every order. - **Doing it in-house.** The AEAT publishes the specification. Building the SOAP client, hash chain, QR and error handling is weeks of developer time plus maintenance. ## Security and data - Billing records and certificates are stored encrypted at rest on servers in the EU; your certificate's private key is encrypted with a key held separately from the database. - Only the AEAT web service receives your records; we don't share invoice data with third parties or use it for anything other than the service. - Records are kept for at least four years, exportable at any time, and deleted on written request after you leave; your own legal duty to keep copies stays with you. - A GDPR data processing agreement is included; we are the processor and you remain the controller of your customers' data. ## Your first week We onboard new accounts within 2 business days. Most shops submit test records to the AEAT sandbox on day one and real records within the week. - Day 1: Install the app or module, upload your certificate, and submit a test record to the AEAT test environment with us on a call. - Day 2–3: Switch to production; we watch the first 50 live records with you and fix any tax-rate mapping issue. - Day 5: Invite your gestoría and send them the first ledger export. - Day 7: Review the dashboard together and confirm refund and rectification flows match your return policy. ## FAQ ### Which businesses does Verifactu apply to? Businesses and self-employed people in Spain who issue invoices using software, from 1 January 2027 for companies and 1 July 2027 for the self-employed. Businesses reporting under SII are generally outside the regulation, and the Basque Country and Navarra run their own systems. Verifactu Kit is software, not tax advice; confirm your case with your gestoría. ### Does it cover receipts to consumers, not only invoices? Yes. Simplified invoices (tickets) are billing records under the regulation and are chained and submitted the same way. For a B2C shop this is most of the volume. ### What if the deadline is postponed a third time? Possible; it has happened twice. The records you generate meanwhile are still valid, and a working, tested setup costs €9 a month. You can cancel at any time if the rules change. ### Who is liable if something is wrong, you or me? The taxpayer is responsible for issuing compliant invoices; the software maker must sign a compliance declaration for its product, and we publish ours. We log every record and AEAT response so both of us can show what was sent and when. ### Can my gestoría manage this for me? Yes. Invite them with a read-only or admin role. Many gestorías set up the certificate and monitor rejections themselves; the Gestoría plan is for offices doing this for several clients. ### Is the service in Spanish? Yes. The dashboard, customer emails, documentation and support are in Spanish. English is available for international teams running Spanish entities. ### Will you support TicketBAI for the Basque Country? It is on the roadmap but not available today. If your business is in the Basque Country, tell us when you request service and we'll contact you when it ships; don't buy on the expectation. ### Does it work with Claude or ChatGPT? Yes. Verifactu Kit includes an MCP connector, so Claude, ChatGPT and other MCP-compatible assistants can answer questions like "were all of yesterday's invoices registered?" from your data. It is read-only by default and you can revoke access at any time. --- Rotomal · https://rotomal.com/verifactu-ready/ · hello@rotomal.com # Ledger Snapshot: Daily backups of Xero organisations with change history and restore, for accountants. > Ledger Snapshot takes a daily copy of each Xero organisation you connect, shows you exactly what changed between any two days and who changed it, and recreates deleted or altered records when you ask. It is built for practices managing many client files, with one dashboard across all of them. - Page: https://rotomal.com/xero-backup/ - Category: E-commerce and SaaS add-ons - Language: en - Billing: subscription - From: $9 per month - Request (free, no card): https://rotomal.com/xero-backup/request/ - Daily snapshots of invoices, bills, credit notes, contacts, items, journals, bank transactions, chart of accounts and attachments - Line-by-line comparison between any two snapshots, with Xero's own history showing which user made the change - Restore is explicit and logged: nothing is written back to Xero until you confirm each record ## Xero is the system of record, and there is no undo A client deletes forty bills while 'tidying up'. A staff member edits last year's invoices after the accounts were signed. A contact merge goes wrong. Xero keeps a history on individual records, but there is no point-in-time copy of the organisation, no way to see everything that changed last Tuesday, and no undo for a deletion. Businesses already pay for exactly this on their other systems. Backup services for Shopify, QuickBooks Online, Jira and Confluence charge from about $16 to $150 a month per connection. The largest of them does not list Xero at all, which leaves Xero's accountants exporting CSVs by hand or hoping. For a practice the cost is time and liability: hours reconstructing records from emails and bank statements, awkward conversations about who changed what, and in the worst case a re-done year end. For a business owner it is the uneasy feeling that one wrong click in the books can't be taken back. - Rewind charges $19 a month for Shopify backups and $16 a month per QuickBooks Online file, rising to $150 a month for Confluence. (source: https://rewind.com/pricing/) - Rewind's pricing page lists no Xero product. (source: https://rewind.com/pricing/) - Bookkeepers on r/Bookkeeping ask how to answer 'who changed this?' questions about Xero records. (source: https://www.reddit.com/r/Bookkeeping/comments/1uva98b/) ## How it works 1. **Connect organisations.** Authorise Ledger Snapshot from each Xero organisation, or from your practice login for several at once. The first full snapshot runs within the hour. 2. **Daily snapshots.** Every night we read each organisation through Xero's API and store a complete copy, plus a snapshot of key reports (profit and loss, balance sheet, aged receivables and payables) as of that day. 3. **Compare and investigate.** Pick two dates and see every record added, changed or deleted, with the before and after values and the Xero user from the record's history where Xero provides it. 4. **Restore when needed.** Select the records to bring back, review what will be created, and confirm. Each restored record gets a note referencing the original, and the restore is logged. ## Features - **Daily snapshots.** Invoices, bills, credit notes, contacts, items, manual journals, bank transactions, chart of accounts, tracking categories and attachments are copied nightly. On-demand snapshots before a big change take one click. - **Change history.** Compare any two snapshots. Changes are grouped by record type and by Xero user, so 'what did the client do over the weekend' is one filter. - **Compare and restore.** Recreate deleted invoices, bills, credit notes, contacts, items and manual journals from a snapshot through Xero's API. Edited records can be reverted field by field. See the FAQ for what Xero's API does not allow. - **Report archive.** A dated copy of the profit and loss, balance sheet and aged reports is kept with each snapshot, so you can show what the numbers were on a given day even if the ledger has since changed. - **Multi-organisation dashboard.** For practices: every connected client, last successful backup, failed connections, and a count of changes and deletions in the last seven days. - **Deletion alerts.** An email when an organisation shows an unusual number of deleted or voided records in a day (you set the threshold), so you hear about the clean-up before the client calls. - **Export.** Download any snapshot as CSV and JSON, with attachments, for your own archive or for handover when a client leaves. - **Ask your AI assistant.** Connect Ledger Snapshot to Claude, ChatGPT or another assistant through MCP and ask in plain language, for example "what changed on this invoice since last Tuesday?". Read-only by default; revoke access any time. ## Who it's for - **Accounting and bookkeeping practices.** Dozens of client organisations, each of which the client can edit. You get one view of backup status and changes, and a way to fix mistakes without re-keying. - **Businesses with several people in Xero.** Staff, a bookkeeper and an owner all have access. You get a record of who did what and a way back if something goes wrong. - **Businesses switching bookkeepers or accountants.** A full export of the books as they stood on handover day, independent of who holds the Xero subscription. - **Anyone facing an audit or a dispute.** Dated copies of records and reports as they were, not as they are now. ## Works with Xero accounting API (OAuth 2.0), Xero history and notes per record, Xero attachments (invoice and bill files), Xero reports (profit and loss, balance sheet, aged receivables and payables), CSV and JSON export, Email alerts, MCP connector for Claude, ChatGPT and other AI assistants ## Pricing Billed monthly, cancel any time. Founding customer pricing is fixed for 24 months. All plans include daily snapshots, change history, restore and export. Snapshots are kept for seven years on every plan. | Plan | Price | Includes | | --- | --- | --- | | Single | $9 per month | 1 organisation; Daily and on-demand snapshots; Change history and compare; Restore deleted and changed records; Report archive; Email support | | Firm | $49 per month | Up to 5 organisations, then $8 each; Multi-organisation dashboard; Deletion alerts; Staff logins with per-client access; Everything in Single | | Practice | $149 per month | Up to 25 organisations, then $5 each; Bulk connect from your practice login; Monthly backup status report for partners; Priority support; Everything in Firm | ## Compared with the alternatives - **Xero's own history and notes.** Free and useful for one record at a time: open an invoice and see its history. There is no organisation-wide view of changes, no point-in-time copy and no undo for deletions. - **Manual CSV exports.** Free. Export invoices, contacts and the general ledger each month and file them. Honest work, but attachments and relationships are lost, nobody remembers to do it, and restoring means re-keying. - **Rewind and similar backup services.** Well established for Shopify, QuickBooks Online and Atlassian products at $16–150 a month per connection. As of their pricing page they do not cover Xero. - **Doing nothing.** Most Xero organisations have no backup. It works until the day it doesn't, and the cost that day is measured in hours of reconstruction. ## Security and data - Xero access uses OAuth 2.0; write permission is only requested when you enable restore for an organisation, and you can revoke access from Xero at any time. - Snapshots are encrypted at rest and in transit and stored in a US or EU data-centre region of your choice, with a second encrypted copy in a separate location. - Only users you invite can see an organisation; practice staff see only the clients assigned to them, and every restore is logged with the user, time and records affected. - Snapshots are retained for seven years or until you delete them; cancelled accounts are deleted 30 days after cancellation. - Full deletion on request at any time, confirmed by email. ## Your first week We onboard new accounts within 2 business days. For practices we connect your clients in a batch and walk through the dashboard with you. - Day 1: Request service and tell us how many organisations you manage and whether you want restore enabled. - Day 2–3: Your account is live. Connect organisations; the first full snapshot of each runs within the hour. - Day 4–5: Review the first change report, set deletion-alert thresholds and invite staff. - Day 7: A week of history is in place. Try a test restore on a draft invoice to see how it works. ## FAQ ### Can you restore everything? No, and no app can. Restores work through Xero's API, which lets us recreate invoices, bills, credit notes, contacts, items and manual journals, and update edited ones. A voided invoice cannot be un-voided; we create a new one that references the original. Payments applied to invoices, reconciled bank transactions, fixed assets and payroll are outside what the API allows, though they are included in the backup for reference. ### Does Ledger Snapshot change my Xero data? Only when you perform a restore, and only the records you confirm. Daily backups are read-only. Restore is disabled by default and turned on per organisation. ### How often does it back up? Once a night, plus on-demand snapshots whenever you want one, for example before a bulk import or a contact merge. ### Does 'who changed this?' always have an answer? Usually. Xero records a history entry with the user for most changes to invoices, bills and contacts, and we show it next to the diff. For record types where Xero does not keep a user history, we show what changed and when, but not who. ### Does it cover payroll and bank feeds? Bank transactions as they appear in Xero are backed up. Bank feed connections and Xero Payroll data are not available through the API and are not included. ### Is this an audit or assurance service? No. Ledger Snapshot is backup and record-keeping software. It does not review the accuracy of your books, and your record-keeping obligations remain yours; confirm retention periods with your accountant or regulator. ### What happens if I cancel? You can export every snapshot before you leave. Data is deleted 30 days after cancellation unless you ask us to delete it sooner. ### Does it work with Claude or ChatGPT? Yes. Ledger Snapshot includes an MCP connector, so Claude, ChatGPT and other MCP-compatible assistants can answer questions like "what changed on this invoice since last Tuesday?" from your data. It is read-only by default and you can revoke access at any time. --- Rotomal · https://rotomal.com/xero-backup/ · hello@rotomal.com # Invoice Tailor: Design Xero invoices, quotes and statements visually, with the fields Xero left out. > Invoice Tailor is a drag-and-drop designer that produces PDF invoices, quotes, credit notes and customer statements from your Xero organisation. It adds the things Xero users have asked for and been told are not planned: ageing columns on statements, your own PDF file names, and more than one brand per organisation. - Page: https://rotomal.com/xero-invoice-designer/ - Category: E-commerce and SaaS add-ons - Language: en - Billing: subscription - From: $9 per month - Request (free, no card): https://rotomal.com/xero-invoice-designer/request/ - Live preview using your real Xero invoices while you design, so what you see is what your customer gets - Read-only connection to Xero; your accounting data is never modified unless you choose to attach a PDF - Send from your own email domain or download in bulk, one organisation or fifty ## Xero's templates are a Word document, and the fixes people want are 'not in pipeline' Xero's standard invoice branding covers a logo and a colour. For anything more you download a .docx template, edit it in Word with merge fields, and upload it back, hoping the table doesn't break. Statements can't show how many days each invoice is overdue. Every PDF is called 'Invoice INV-0042.pdf' whether your customer's filing system likes it or not. And a business trading under two names needs two Xero subscriptions or a workaround. These are not niche complaints. On Xero's own ideas forum, the requests for proper template support, branding changes, days-overdue columns and custom file names each have around a hundred votes or more, and several are marked by Xero as not in its pipeline. The cost is small each time and constant: a bookkeeper re-doing a Word template for every new client, a customer paying late because the statement didn't make the overdue amount obvious, an accounts-payable team bouncing a PDF because the file name didn't match their rules. - On Xero's product ideas forum, 'full .docx template support' has 121 votes and 'branding changes' 95 votes; both are marked 'Not in pipeline'. (source: https://productideas.xero.com/forums/967115-invoices-quotes?sort=votes) - A days-overdue column on customer statements has 124 votes and custom PDF file names 107 votes on the same forum. (source: https://productideas.xero.com/forums/967115-invoices-quotes?sort=votes) ## How it works 1. **Connect Xero.** Authorise Invoice Tailor from your Xero organisation using Xero's standard app connection. It takes a minute, and you can disconnect from Xero at any time. 2. **Design the template.** Start from one of our layouts or a blank page. Drag blocks for logo, addresses, line items, totals, payment details and footers, then set fonts, colours and column rules. Your most recent invoices appear in the preview as you work. 3. **Set rules.** Choose which template applies to which Xero branding theme or contact group, set the PDF file-name pattern, and configure statements: ageing buckets, minimum balance and schedule. 4. **Send or download.** Generate PDFs on demand, email them from your own domain, download a month's worth as a zip, or attach them to the invoice in Xero. Statements can go out automatically on the schedule you set. ## Features - **Visual designer.** Drag-and-drop blocks with a live preview from your Xero data. Any standard Xero invoice, contact and organisation field is available, including tracking categories and contact account numbers. - **Statements with ageing.** Customer statements with a days-overdue column and current/30/60/90-day buckets, built from the invoices and payments in Xero. Choose activity or outstanding-only statements. - **Custom PDF file names.** Name files with a pattern such as {InvoiceNumber}-{ContactName}-{Date}.pdf or whatever your customers' payable teams require. Applies to downloads, emails and attachments. - **Multiple brands.** Several brands in one Xero organisation, each with its own logo, colours, address block and template. Assign a brand per contact, per branding theme or per tracking category. - **Email from your domain.** Send invoices and statements from your own address with your own wording, with open and bounce tracking. We help you set up SPF and DKIM during onboarding so mail is delivered. - **Bulk generate.** Pick a date range or a contact group and download every invoice or statement as a zip, named by your pattern. Useful for month-end sends and audits. - **Attach to Xero.** Optionally upload the generated PDF as an attachment on the invoice in Xero, so anyone opening the invoice there sees the version your customer received. - **Practice mode.** Bookkeepers manage several organisations from one login, copy a template between clients, and switch client in one click. ## Who it's for - **Small businesses on Xero.** You want invoices that match your website and a statement that makes the overdue amount impossible to miss. Design once, then forget about it. - **Businesses with more than one trading name.** A builder with a maintenance brand, an agency with a product line. One Xero organisation, several brands, each with its own look. - **Bookkeepers and accountants.** You set up invoicing for many clients. One template library, applied across organisations, instead of a Word document per client. - **Businesses billing larger companies.** Your customers' accounts-payable teams need PO numbers in a set place and file names in a set format. You can give them exactly that. ## Works with Xero (invoices, quotes, credit notes, contacts, payments and attachments via Xero's API), Xero branding themes and tracking categories, PDF output (print-ready), Email from your own domain (SPF and DKIM), Zip download for bulk sends, Xero App Store listing (in progress, see FAQ) ## Pricing Billed monthly per Xero organisation, cancel any time. Founding customer pricing is fixed for 24 months. All plans include the designer, live preview, custom file names and PDF download. | Plan | Price | Includes | | --- | --- | --- | | Solo | $9 per month | 1 Xero organisation; Up to 3 templates; Invoices, quotes and credit notes; Custom PDF file names; Download and attach to Xero; Email support | | Studio | $19 per month | Unlimited templates and brands; Statements with days-overdue and ageing buckets; Scheduled statement runs; Email from your own domain; Bulk zip downloads; Everything in Solo | | Practice | $49 per month | Up to 10 organisations included, then $5 each; Shared template library across clients; One login, one-click client switching; Everything in Studio for every client; Priority support | ## Compared with the alternatives - **Xero's built-in templates.** Free and fine for a logo and a colour. The advanced .docx templates can do more if you are comfortable in Word, but they cannot add ageing to statements, rename PDFs or run more than one brand without workarounds. - **Other document apps in the Xero App Store.** Several apps cover parts of this, such as custom documents or statement runs. Compare on the specifics that matter to you: a visual editor, days-overdue on statements, file-name patterns, and per-organisation price. - **Hiring a designer to build a .docx template.** A one-off cost and a good result until a field changes or you need a second brand. Then you are back to Word. - **Leaving Xero for an invoicing tool.** Some invoicing tools have better design options, but then you are syncing two systems. Invoice Tailor keeps Xero as the single source of truth. ## Security and data - Xero access uses OAuth 2.0 with read scopes plus the attachments scope only if you enable attaching; you can revoke it from Xero at any time. - Invoice and contact data is cached for rendering and previews, encrypted at rest and in transit, and refreshed from Xero on each run. - Data is stored in a US or EU data-centre region; we can confirm the region for your account on request. - Only users you invite can see an organisation's documents; practice users see only the clients they are assigned. - Disconnecting an organisation deletes its cached data within 30 days; full account deletion on request, confirmed by email. ## Your first week We onboard new accounts within 2 business days. We import your current branding, build a first template with you, and set up email sending from your domain. - Day 1: Request service and tell us about your organisation, brands and what you want to fix first. - Day 2–3: Your account is live. Connect Xero and we build a first template from your existing branding for you to adjust. - Day 4–5: Set file-name patterns, statement rules and (on Studio) your email domain. Send yourself a test invoice and statement. - Day 7: Go live. From here, every new Xero invoice can be rendered, sent or attached with your template. ## FAQ ### Does Invoice Tailor change anything in my Xero organisation? No. The connection is read-only for invoices, contacts and payments. The only write is optional: attaching the generated PDF to an invoice, which you turn on per organisation. ### If I press Send in Xero, does my customer get your template? No. Xero's own Send button always uses Xero's template. To send your design, send from Invoice Tailor (from your own email domain) or download the PDF. Many customers attach our PDF to the Xero invoice so both copies match. ### Is it in the Xero App Store? The listing is in progress. In the meantime you connect through Xero's standard app authorisation, which works the same way; we will tell founding customers when the listing is live. ### Does it work in my country? Yes, anywhere Xero operates. Tax labels, currency symbols and date formats follow your Xero organisation's settings. Most of our early customers are in the UK, Australia and New Zealand. ### What documents are covered? Invoices, quotes, credit notes and customer statements in early access. Purchase orders and remittance advices are next; founding customers can vote on the order. ### Does this give accounting or tax advice? No. Invoice Tailor changes how documents look and how they are named and sent. It does not alter amounts, tax rates or what must legally appear on an invoice in your country; check that with your accountant. ### What if Xero adds these features? Then you may not need us, and you can cancel in a click; plans are monthly. We expect to stay ahead on design flexibility, bulk operations and multi-brand work, which is where most of our roadmap is. ### Is there a free trial? There is no free tier, but your first month on any plan is refundable in full if it does not do what you need. --- Rotomal · https://rotomal.com/xero-invoice-designer/ · hello@rotomal.com # All products · Rotomal 55 small, single-purpose tools. Search them by API: https://rotomal.com/api/products?q= | Product | Category | Language | From | Page | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | Allocation Link | Billing and tax compliance | en | $29 per month | https://rotomal.com/allocation-connector/ | | Backpack Brief | Family organization | en | $3 per month | https://rotomal.com/school-digest/ | | Bates Bench | Legal practice tools | en | $12 per user per month | https://rotomal.com/litigation-pdf/ | | Bill Sweep | Family finances | en | $19 one-time | https://rotomal.com/subscription-cleanup/ | | Bounce Desk | Rental business software | en | $29 per month | https://rotomal.com/party-rental-booking/ | | Camp Alarm | Family organization | en | $9 per season | https://rotomal.com/camp-registration-alerts/ | | Carrier Lens | Freight and logistics | en | $39 per month | https://rotomal.com/carrier-check/ | | Driver Binder | Trucking compliance | en | $49 per month | https://rotomal.com/fleet-driver-files/ | | E-Rechnung Startklar | E-Rechnung und Steuern | de | 29 € einmalig | https://rotomal.com/e-rechnung-2027/ | | E-Rechnung Startklar | E-invoicing compliance (Germany) | en | €29 one-time | https://rotomal.com/en/e-rechnung-2027/ | | Estimate Chaser | Field service tools | en | $29 per month | https://rotomal.com/estimate-chaser/ | | Expected Docs | Finance and back office | en | $99 per season | https://rotomal.com/tax-intake/ | | Facture Prête | Conformité facturation | fr | 19 € paiement unique | https://rotomal.com/facture-electronique/ | | Facture Prête | Invoicing compliance (France) | en | €19 one-time | https://rotomal.com/en/facture-electronique/ | | Form Relay | Developer tools | en | $5 per month | https://rotomal.com/form-endpoint/ | | Gotowi na KSeF | Faktury i KSeF | pl | 79 zł jednorazowo | https://rotomal.com/ksef-certyfikat/ | | Gotowi na KSeF | E-invoicing compliance (Poland) | en | 79 zł one-time | https://rotomal.com/en/ksef-certyfikat/ | | Invoice Bridge | E-invoicing | en | €19 per month | https://rotomal.com/stripe-einvoice/ | | Invoice Tailor | E-commerce and SaaS add-ons | en | $9 per month | https://rotomal.com/xero-invoice-designer/ | | Just-in-Case Binder | Family safety | en | $29 one-time | https://rotomal.com/family-tech-binder/ | | Launch Lock | Developer tools | en | $29 one-time | https://rotomal.com/ai-app-security-audit/ | | Ledger Snapshot | E-commerce and SaaS add-ons | en | $9 per month | https://rotomal.com/xero-backup/ | | Lesson Lane | Driving school software | en | $39 per month | https://rotomal.com/driving-school-scheduler/ | | Letting Ledger | Compliance deadlines | en | £6 per month | https://rotomal.com/landlord-mtd/ | | License Ledger | Healthcare practice administration | en | $9 per month | https://rotomal.com/license-tracker/ | | Mark Lookout | Brand protection | en | $12 per mark per month | https://rotomal.com/trademark-watch/ | | MCP Bridge | AI integrations | en | $99 one-time | https://rotomal.com/mcp-connector/ | | Member Radar | Community tools | en | $29 per month | https://rotomal.com/skool-tools/ | | Meter Snap | Vending and amusement route tools | en | $9 per month | https://rotomal.com/vending-route/ | | Page Evidence | Compliance and monitoring | en | $29 per month | https://rotomal.com/page-evidence/ | | Payee Ledger | Finance and back office | en | $99 per season | https://rotomal.com/vendor-1099/ | | Payout Ledger | E-commerce and SaaS add-ons | en | €19 per month | https://rotomal.com/payout-sync/ | | Peppol Outbox | E-invoicing | en | €0 per month | https://rotomal.com/peppol-plugin/ | | Permit Weekly | Lead generation for trades | en | $49 per month | https://rotomal.com/permit-leads/ | | Plain Filings | Compliance deadlines | en | £29 per company per year | https://rotomal.com/micro-filing/ | | Plain QR | Marketing tools | en | $2 per month, billed $24 yearly | https://rotomal.com/plain-qr/ | | Practice Plans | Healthcare practice tools | en | $49 per month | https://rotomal.com/practice-plans/ | | Price Witness | E-commerce tools | en | $29 per month | https://rotomal.com/map-monitor/ | | Pub Rescue | File conversion and migration | en | $9 one-time | https://rotomal.com/pub-rescue/ | | Reject Ready | Email security | en | $450 one-time per domain | https://rotomal.com/dmarc-enforce/ | | Rightleaf | Developer tools | en | $19 per month | https://rotomal.com/rtl-pdf/ | | Roof Tally | Roofing tools | en | $8 per report | https://rotomal.com/roof-report/ | | Scam Second Opinion | Family safety | en | $0 per month | https://rotomal.com/scam-check/ | | Sermon Pack | Church media | en | $19 per month | https://rotomal.com/sermon-clips/ | | Shelf Signal | Retail analytics | en | $49 per month | https://rotomal.com/shelf-signal/ | | Shelf Signal | Retail-Analytik | de | $49 pro Monat | https://rotomal.com/de/shelf-signal/ | | SMTP Switch | IT and Microsoft 365 | en | $99 one-time | https://rotomal.com/smtp-switch/ | | Storefront Rules | E-commerce compliance | en | €5 per month | https://rotomal.com/eu-storefront-pack/ | | Trust Reconciler | Finance and back office | en | $39 per month | https://rotomal.com/trust-reconcile/ | | Verifactu Kit | Tax compliance | en | €9 per month | https://rotomal.com/verifactu-ready/ | | Τιμολόγια σε Τάξη | Ηλεκτρονική τιμολόγηση | el | 29 € εφάπαξ | https://rotomal.com/ilektroniki-timologisi/ | | Τιμολόγια σε Τάξη | E-invoicing compliance (Greece) | en | €29 one-time | https://rotomal.com/en/ilektroniki-timologisi/ | | בקרת הקצאה | כלים לחשבות ומיסוי | he | ₪290 לחודש | https://rotomal.com/allocation-check/ | | יומן נגישות | נגישות ואתרים | he | ₪99 לחודש לאתר | https://rotomal.com/accessibility-il/ | | קלסר פרטיות | ציות ורגולציה | he | ₪1,490 לשנה | https://rotomal.com/privacy-kit-il/ | --- Rotomal · https://rotomal.com/landings/ · hello@rotomal.com # Guides and answers from Rotomal ## [Bounce Desk](https://rotomal.com/party-rental-booking/) - [Bounce house rental software: a buyer's checklist](https://rotomal.com/party-rental-booking/bounce-house-rental-software-checklist/) (updated 2026-10-12): What bounce house and inflatable rental software must handle: per-unit availability, delivery zones, waivers, weather and crew routes. What it costs and how to choose. ## [Permit Weekly](https://rotomal.com/permit-leads/) - [Construction permit leads: how contractors find and work them](https://rotomal.com/permit-leads/construction-permit-leads/) (updated 2026-10-12): How contractors find new construction and building permit leads, which permit types signal which jobs, what the data costs, and how to work the list. ## [Roof Tally](https://rotomal.com/roof-report/) - [Roof measurement reports: what's inside, what they cost, how to use them](https://rotomal.com/roof-report/roof-measurement-report/) (updated 2026-10-12): What a roof measurement report includes (area, squares, pitch, facets, waste), satellite vs drone vs tape, typical prices, and getting reports into job records. ## [Trust Reconciler](https://rotomal.com/trust-reconcile/) - [Trust account reconciliation for real estate attorneys](https://rotomal.com/trust-reconcile/real-estate-attorney-trust-reconciliation/) (updated 2026-10-12): How real estate and closing attorneys run a three-way trust (escrow) account reconciliation: the three balances, closing-specific traps and a monthly checklist. --- Rotomal · https://rotomal.com/guides/ · hello@rotomal.com # About Rotomal By Rotomal team · Updated 2026-10-12 Rotomal is a small AI automation studio based in Israel. We build automations, integrations and AI assistants for growing companies, and we run a portfolio of single-purpose software products, each aimed at one job that people still do by hand. This page explains who we are, how we work, and how we decide which products to build. ## What we do - Workflow automation that connects the tools a team already uses. - AI assistants and agents trained on a company's own content and rules, with a human in the loop where it matters. - Integrations, APIs and MCP connectors that let Claude or ChatGPT read business systems safely. - Document, invoice and reporting pipelines. - Small internal tools that replace fragile spreadsheets. ## How we choose products Each product starts from a concrete change people have to deal with: a deadline in a regulation, a retired feature, a manual task that keeps coming back. We publish a page for the product, describe exactly what it does and what it costs, and build the products people actually request. Products in early access are offered at founding-customer prices, locked for 12 months from the start date. ## How we work - Discover: a short call to map the manual work that costs the most time and money. - Design: a fixed, concrete pilot with clear success criteria and a price agreed before work starts. - Build: on the client's own stack, with data kept in the client's accounts. - Operate: we run and maintain it, measure the time saved, and hand over full documentation. ## Principles - No invented proof. We do not publish testimonials, ratings, customer counts or logos we cannot back up. - Sources for facts. Every statistic on a product page links to the source it came from. - You own what we build. Full handover, documentation and no lock-in. - Plain prices. Every product page lists its plans and prices. ## For AI agents and developers Our catalog is open to AI agents: a read-only MCP server at https://rotomal.com/mcp, a JSON API described in https://rotomal.com/openapi.json, a guide for agents at https://rotomal.com/agents.md, and a site summary at https://rotomal.com/llms.txt. Every page also has a Markdown version. ## Company details - Operated by Rotomal, Israel. - Email: hello@rotomal.com - Policies: privacy, terms, refunds and cancellation, delivery, payments and cookies — linked at the bottom of every page. --- Rotomal · https://rotomal.com/about/ · hello@rotomal.com # Frequently asked questions about Rotomal By Rotomal team · Updated 2026-10-12 These are the questions people ask us most often about Rotomal: what we build, what it costs, where data lives, how requests, payment and refunds work, and how AI agents can read our catalog. Each product page has its own detailed FAQ as well. If your question is not answered here, email hello@rotomal.com. ## What does Rotomal do? Rotomal is an AI automation studio. We build and run automations for repetitive work: workflow bots, AI assistants, integrations and MCP connectors, document and invoice automation, and reporting pipelines. We also run a set of small single-purpose products, each with its own page, pricing and FAQ on this site. ## How much does an automation project cost? Every project starts as a fixed-scope pilot. After a short discovery call we send a written scope with clear success criteria and a fixed price before any work starts. There are no open-ended retainers. Prices for our products are listed on each product page. ## Where does my data live? In your own accounts and systems. We build on your stack, hand over documentation, and nothing locks you in. The privacy policy explains how this website handles the details you type into a form. ## Is requesting a product free? Yes. Requesting a product takes no card. We confirm your request by email within one business day, and if you go ahead we email you a secure payment link from a payment provider. No card details are collected on this site. ## Can AI assistants read your product catalog? Yes. The catalog is open to AI agents through a read-only MCP server at https://rotomal.com/mcp, a JSON API described in https://rotomal.com/openapi.json, and a plain-text summary in https://rotomal.com/llms.txt. Every page also has a Markdown version. ## What is your refund policy? Monthly plans can be cancelled at any time and run to the end of the paid period. One-time services are paid after we confirm the scope by email, and are refunded in full if we cannot deliver what was agreed. ## How fast is a product set up? Accounts are set up within 2 business days of the confirmation email, and one-time services start within 2 business days. If we cannot deliver the service you requested, we tell you and nothing is owed. ## Which languages are the products available in? Product pages are published in English, German, French, Polish, Greek and Hebrew, depending on the market each product serves. Products for a specific country are written in that country's language first, with an English version alongside. ## Is anything on this site legal, tax or accounting advice? No. Our products are software and record-keeping tools. Decisions that depend on legal, tax, accounting, insurance or medical advice should be confirmed with a qualified professional. ## How do I contact you? Email hello@rotomal.com. We answer within one business day. --- Rotomal · https://rotomal.com/faq/ · hello@rotomal.com # Refund and cancellation policy By Rotomal team · Updated 2026-10-12 This refund and cancellation policy explains how you can cancel a Rotomal plan and when you get your money back. In short: monthly plans can be cancelled at any time, one-time services are paid only after we confirm the scope, and you are refunded in full if we cannot deliver what was agreed. ## Requests are free Submitting a request on this site creates no subscription and no charge. A plan starts only when we confirm your order by email and payment has been agreed. ## Monthly and yearly plans You can cancel at any time by emailing us. Service continues to the end of the period you have paid for, and you are not charged again. Founding-customer prices are locked for 12 months from your start date. ## One-time services One-time services are paid once, after we confirm the scope by email. If we cannot deliver what was agreed, you are refunded in full. ## If we cannot deliver We set up accounts within 2 business days of the confirmation email. If we cannot deliver the service you requested, we tell you, and nothing is owed; anything already paid for that service is refunded in full. ## How to ask for a refund or cancel Email hello@rotomal.com from the address you ordered with, and name the product. We reply within one business day. Refunds are made through the payment provider that took the payment. ## Your legal rights This policy does not limit any right you have under consumer protection law where you live. --- Rotomal · https://rotomal.com/refund-policy/ · hello@rotomal.com # Delivery policy By Rotomal team · Updated 2026-10-12 Rotomal sells online software and services only, so nothing physical is shipped. This delivery policy explains what delivery means for our products: when your account is set up, when one-time work starts, how you receive it, and what happens if we cannot deliver within the time stated on the product page. ## What is delivered Access to an online service, or the result of a one-time service such as converted files, a configuration or a report. Everything is delivered digitally, by email or through the service itself, worldwide, at no delivery cost. ## Delivery times - Subscriptions: your account is set up within 2 business days of the confirmation email. - One-time services: work starts within 2 business days of the confirmation email, and the expected turnaround is stated on each product page. ## If something is late or cannot be delivered We tell you by email as soon as we know. If we cannot deliver the service you requested, nothing is owed, and anything you paid for that service is refunded in full under our refund policy. ## Contact Questions about a delivery: hello@rotomal.com. --- Rotomal · https://rotomal.com/delivery-policy/ · hello@rotomal.com # Payment policy By Rotomal team · Updated 2026-10-12 This payment policy explains how you pay for a Rotomal product. No payment is taken on this website and no card details are collected here. After we confirm your order by email, we send a secure payment link from a payment provider, which handles the payment on its own pages. ## When you pay - Requesting a product is free and takes no card. - We confirm your order by email within one business day. - Subscriptions are billed per the period shown on the plan; one-time services are paid once, after the scope is confirmed. ## Prices and currency Prices are shown on each product page in the currency of the market it serves: US dollars, euros, British pounds, Polish złoty or Israeli shekels. Founding-customer prices are locked for 12 months from your start date. Taxes are added where the law requires. ## Security Card numbers never reach our servers. Payment is processed by the payment provider named in the payment link, on its own secure pages. ## Invoices We issue an invoice or receipt for every payment. If you need company details on it, include them when you request the product or email hello@rotomal.com. --- Rotomal · https://rotomal.com/payment-policy/ · hello@rotomal.com # Cookie policy By Rotomal team · Updated 2026-10-12 This cookie policy lists the cookies and browser storage that Rotomal uses and why. We use analytics cookies only to understand which pages help people, never for advertising. In the EU, UK and other regions where consent is required, analytics stays off until you accept it in the banner. ## Analytics cookies (optional) Google Analytics 4 sets the _ga and _ga_ cookies to count visits and see which pages and forms are used. In regions where consent is required they are set only after you click Accept. Advertising storage is always denied. ## Browser storage (necessary) - localStorage key "consent": remembers your answer to the cookie banner. - sessionStorage: remembers the page you arrived on, the referring page, campaign parameters, the email you typed and your request number while you complete a request, so the form works across pages. It is cleared when you close the tab. ## Security cookies Our hosting and network provider may set strictly necessary cookies to protect the site from abuse. They contain no advertising data. ## Changing your choice Clear this site's data in your browser to see the banner again, or block cookies in your browser settings. The site keeps working without analytics. ## Contact Questions: hello@rotomal.com. See also the privacy policy. --- Rotomal · https://rotomal.com/cookie-policy/ · hello@rotomal.com # Privacy policy Last updated: 2026-10-12 ## Who we are Rotomal is operated by Rotomal, Israel. Contact: [hello@rotomal.com](mailto:hello@rotomal.com). ## What we collect - **Request forms.** When you request a service we store the email address, company or website, plan, and notes you enter, plus the time, the page you came from and campaign parameters in the URL. We use this to confirm your order, set up your account and answer your questions. - **Checkout.** We do not collect card numbers on this site. Payment, when it is taken, is handled by a payment provider on its own pages. - **Analytics.** With your consent where required, we use Google Analytics 4 to understand which pages are visited and which forms are completed. Google may set cookies; see Google's privacy policy. You can decline analytics in the banner on each page. - **Server logs.** Our servers record page requests (path, time, a hashed IP address and browser type) for security and to count visits. ## Legal basis and retention We process form data to take the steps you asked for before a contract (and with your consent to be contacted). We keep request data for up to 24 months unless you ask us to delete it sooner. Analytics data is retained according to our Google Analytics settings (14 months). ## Sharing We do not sell your data. We share it only with the service providers needed to run this site (hosting, email, analytics) and when the law requires it. ## Your rights You can ask to see, correct or delete your data at any time by emailing [hello@rotomal.com](mailto:hello@rotomal.com). If you are in the EU/EEA, UK or Israel you also have the rights given by the GDPR, the UK GDPR or the Israeli Protection of Privacy Law, including the right to complain to your supervisory authority. # Terms of service Last updated: 2026-10-12 ## Early access The products on this site are offered by Rotomal ("we") as early-access services. Submitting a request does not create a subscription. A subscription starts only when we confirm your order by email and payment has been agreed. No charge is made on this site. ## Pricing Prices shown are founding-customer prices and are locked for 12 months from your start date. Taxes are added where the law requires. You can cancel a monthly plan at any time; service continues to the end of the paid period. One-time services are paid once, after we confirm the scope by email; if we cannot deliver what was agreed, you are refunded in full. ## Service We set up accounts within the number of business days stated on each product page, counted from the confirmation email. If we cannot deliver the service you requested, we will tell you and nothing is owed. ## Your data Data you upload stays yours. We process it only to provide the service, as described in the [privacy policy](/privacy/), and delete it on request when the service ends. ## No professional advice Our products are software and record-keeping tools. They are not legal, tax, accounting, insurance or medical advice. Decisions that depend on such advice should be confirmed with a qualified professional. ## Liability To the extent permitted by law, our liability for any claim related to a service is limited to the fees you paid for that service in the 12 months before the claim. ## Contact [hello@rotomal.com](mailto:hello@rotomal.com)